171 Courses by jizhen1947

VIEWS: 41 PAGES: 101

									13
                                  Courses



   All of the courses herein are offered by Murray State University for undergraduate and/or graduate credit. The university reserves the
right to make any adjustments in the Bulletin which are deemed necessary. Students desiring graduate credit for a 500-level course
must be admitted to graduate status before enrolling in the course. The subject-matter areas and course prefixes are shown below
and appear in prefix order on the following pages.
   NOTE: Repeated 099 (Transitions) courses (regardless of course prefixes or departmental requirements) will be treated as duplicate
courses, with only one course allowed to count toward graduation requirements.


Accounting (ACC) ................................................................172        Interdisciplinary Courses (IDC) ............................................227
Adult Education (ADE) ........................................................173           International Studies (INT) ...................................................228
Agricultural Education (AED) ..............................................173              Japanese (JPN) ......................................................................232
Agriculture (AGR) ................................................................173       Journalism and Mass Communications (JMC) .....................230
Anthropology (ANT) ............................................................179          Legal Studies (LST) ..............................................................233
Archaeology (ARC) ..............................................................180         Liberal Arts (LBA)................................................................233
Art and Design (ART) ...........................................................181         Library Orientation (LOR)....................................................233
Astronomy (AST) .................................................................184        Management (MGT) .............................................................237
Bachelor of Integrated Studies (BIS) ....................................188                Marketing (MKT) .................................................................239
Biology (BIO) .......................................................................185    Mathematics (MAT) ..............................................................234
Business and Marketing Education (BED) ...........................185                       Middle School Education (MID) ..........................................238
Business and Public Affairs (BPA) .......................................189                Military Science (MIL) .........................................................238
Career and Technical Education (CTE) ................................200                    Modern Languages (MLA) ...................................................240
Chemistry (CHE) ..................................................................192       Multicultural, Class and Gender Studies (MCG)..................236
Civil/Construction Engineering Technology (CET) .............190                            Music (MUS) ........................................................................241
Civilizations (CIV)................................................................195      National Student Exchange (NSE)........................................245
Communication Disorders (CDI)..........................................189                  Nursing (NUR)......................................................................246
Computer Information Systems (CIS) ..................................194                    Nutrition (NTN) ....................................................................245
Computer Science (CSC) ......................................................198            Occupational Safety and Health (OSH) ................................248
Criminal Justice (CRJ) ..........................................................197        Office Systems (OSY)...........................................................249
Economics (ECO) .................................................................201        Organizational Communication (COM) ...............................195
Education (EDU) ..................................................................202       Philosophy (PHI) ..................................................................251
Educational Psychology (EDP).............................................202                Physical Education (PHE).....................................................250
Electromechanical Engineering Technology (EMT) ............205                              Physics and Engineering (PHY) ...........................................252
Elementary Education (ELE) ................................................204              Planning, Urban and Regional (PLN) ...................................253
Engineering (EGR) ...............................................................203        Political Science (POL).........................................................254
Engineering Technology (ENT) ............................................219                Psychology (PSY) .................................................................255
English (ENG) ......................................................................205     Reading (REA)......................................................................257
Exercise Science (EXS) ........................................................215          Real Estate (RES) .................................................................259
Family and Consumer Studies (FCS) ...................................211                    Recreation (REC) ..................................................................260
Finance (FIN) ........................................................................212   Religious Studies (RGS) .......................................................260
French (FRE) ........................................................................213    Science (SCI) .......................................................................264
Freshman Year Experience (FYE) ........................................214                  Secondary Education (SEC) .................................................261
Geosciences (GSC) ...............................................................218        Social Work (SWK) ..............................................................263
German (GER) ......................................................................216      Sociology (SOC) ...................................................................260
Gerontology (GTY) ..............................................................220         Spanish (SPA) .......................................................................263
Graphic Communications Management (GCM)...................215                               Special Education (SED) ......................................................260
Guidance (GUI) ....................................................................221      Teaching English to Speakers of Other Languages (TSL)....268
Health (HEA) ........................................................................221    Technology Teacher Education (TTE) ..................................270
Health and Physical Education (HPE) ..................................226                   Telecommunications Systems Management (TSM) .............268
Health Care Administration (HCA) ......................................221                  Theatre (THD) ......................................................................267
History (HIS) ........................................................................222   Youth and Nonprofit Leadership (YNL) ...............................270
Honors Courses (HON).........................................................225
Humanities (HUM) ..............................................................227
Industrial and Engineering Technology (IET) ......................227
Industrial Technology and Design (ITD) ..............................228
                                                                                                                                                                                       171
      Accounting                                               credits; inclusions in and exclusions from gross       estates and trusts, and consignment and installment
      (Acc)                                                    income; recognition of and basis for gain or loss;     sales. Prerequisite: ACC 301.
      ACC 200 Principles of Financial Accounting               capital gains and losses; dividends; deductions;
      (3). An introduction to the basic concepts and           with emphasis on individual income tax returns.        ACC 501 Accounting for Governmental and
      techniques of financial accounting, including            Prerequisite: junior standing; ACC 200 and 201         Nonprofit Entities (3). Accounting and reporting
      the accounting cycle and the communication               with a minimum grade of B in each.                     principles, standards and procedures applicable
      of financial information to external users. The                                                                 to (1) state and local governments, including
      course focuses on the nature and measurement             ACC 303 Cost Accounting (3). The study of              counties, cities, townships and villages; (2) the
      of assets, liabilities, equities, dividends, revenues,   financial and nonfinancial accounting information      federal government; and (3) other not-for-profit
      and expenses. Emphasis is placed on the proper           for strategic and operational decision making.         institutions such as universities and hospitals.
      preparation and understanding of the financial           Topics include traditional and contemporary            Prerequisite: ACC 300.
      statements. Prerequisite: sophomore standing.            product/service costing; planning; control;
                                                               performance measurement; and nonroutine                ACC 502 Advanced Income Tax (3). Continued
      ACC 201 Principles of Managerial Accounting              managerial decisions. Prerequisite: junior             study of the Internal Revenue Code and
      (3). The application of accounting to business           standing; ACC 200, ACC 201, and ACC 202                Regulations with emphasis on the advanced
      management with emphasis on planning, control            with a minimum grade of B in each.                     aspects of income; deductions, exclusions and
      of operations, and decision-making, including                                                                   credits, especially as they are related to the
      study of cost behavior; the use of cost data in          ACC 308 Accounting Information Systems (3).            tax issues of individuals, corporations, and
      job order, process and standard cost systems; the        Course emphasizes the principles of accounting         partnerships. Prerequisite: ACC 302.
      application of differential analysis to decision         systems design, development, implementation,
      making; the use of overhead allocation methods;          and maintenance. Topics include: types of              ACC 503 Cost Management in the Global
      the preparation and interpretation of budgets;           computerized accounting systems and transaction        Economy (3). A decision-based approach to the
      and the study of pricing methods. The course             processes, fundamental networking and                  study of selected cost management topics that
      also introduces topics such as the statement of          telecommunications approaches, security and            enable managers to compete globally. Topics
      cash flows and financial statement analysis.             internal control concepts, data modeling and           include strategic cost management, activity-based
      Prerequisite: ACC 200. Co-requisite: ACC 202             normalization theory, and CAATTs (Computer             management, the balance scorecard, quality cost
      (Students enrolled in accounting programs.)              Assisted Audit Tools and Techniques). Students         management, capital investment decisions, and
                                                               use a database management system to create             inventory management. A business simulation
      ACC 202 Accounting Applications Laboratory               database objects for the assignments required in       requires the application of cost management
      (1). A study of basic accounting applications with       this class. A student may receive credit for one       information in product costing, planning, control,
      emphasis on the use of spreadsheets in analyzing         of the following courses: ACC 308, BPA 355 or          performance evaluation, and decision making.
      and solving accounting problems and making               CIS 307. Prerequisites: junior standing; ACC 200,      Prerequisites: ACC 303.
      business decisions. The course focuses on the            ACC 201 and ACC 202 with a minimum grade
      process of building models for generating and            of B in each; and CSC 199.                             ACC 506 Principles of Auditing and Assurance
      evaluating accounting information. Specific ac-                                                                 Services (3). An introduction to internal and
      counting applications include depreciation sched-        ACC 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-           external auditing and audit-related services. The
      ules, revenue and expense distribution analysis,         supervised thesis and/or project which allows          nature and purposes of audit, attestation, assurance
      inventory management and profit maximization.            Honors Program students with a senior standing         and compilation services are studied. Other topics
      Prerequisite: ACC 200 and CSC 199. Co-requi-             to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper         include: reporting, professional ethics, sampling,
      site: ACC 201.                                           and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-        auditing for fraud, audit evidence, engagement
                                                               mance is required.                                     planning, materiality and risk assessment, internal
      ACC 300 Intermediate Accounting I (3).                                                                          control, and operational audits. Prerequisites:
      A review of the fundamental processes of ac-             ACC 488 Cooperative Education/Internship               ACC 301 and 308.
      counting; the measurement of financial position          (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
      and periodic revenues and expenses; and an               experience related to the career and educational       ACC 507 Professional Issues (1). Study of
      introduction to selected, more advanced account-         objectives of the student for which he/she may         contemporary issues in accounting. Topics include
      ing issues. Some of the topics studied include           receive academic credit and possible financial         professional certifications, emerging practices,
      standard setting processes; the accounting cycle;        remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum            career preparation, and professional development.
      the income statement and balance sheet; cash             of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded          Restricted to accounting area students. Graded
      and receivables; inventories; acquisition and            pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.          pass/fail. Prerequisite: ACC 301.
      disposition of property, plant and equipment;
      depreciation and depletion; intangible assets; and       ACC 489 Cooperative Education/Internship               ACC 509 Accounting Theory (3). Designed as a
      liabilities and contingencies. Prerequisites: junior     (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work       critical examination of relevant AICPA literature,
      standing; ACC 200, ACC 201 and ACC 202 with              experience related to the career and educational       especially Accounting Research Bulletins, Ac-
      a minimum grade of B in each.                            objectives of the student for which he/she may         counting Principles Board’s Opinions and State-
                                                               receive academic credit and possible financial         ments, and the Financial Accounting Standards
      ACC 301 Intermediate Accounting II (3).                  remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of         Board’s Statements. Contemporary developments
      Intensive study of the theory and methods                six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:      are examined in the accounting literature and
      of financial accounting with a focus on the              permission of chair.                                   through reports. Prerequisite: ACC 301.
      impact of business transactions on financial
      reporting. Some of the course topics include             ACC 490 Survey of Accounting (3). Designed for         ACC 586 International Experience in Ac-
      liabilities, stockholders equity, dilutive securities,   graduate students who have an inadequate back-         counting (3). A short-term study abroad program
      investments, revenue recognition, income tax             ground in accounting. Covers the same material         highlighting selected historical and modern contri-
      allocation, pensions and post-retirement benefits,       covered in ACC 200 and 201 or the equivalent.          butions to accounting and business from another
      leases, accounting changes and error analysis, and       Not open to students who have credit for ACC           country and culture. Course will also meet weekly
      cash flows. Prerequisite: junior standing; ACC           200 and 201 or the equivalent.                         during the semester. Graded pass/fail. Prerequisite:
      300 with a minimum grade of C.                                                                                  consent of instructor.
                                                               ACC 500 Advanced Accounting (3). A compre-
      ACC 302 Federal Income Tax (3). Federal                  hensive examination of some of the most complex        ACC 595 Special Problems (3). Research by
172   income tax fundamentals under the latest amend-
      ments to the Internal Revenue Code; rates,
                                                               accounting problems including consolidated finan-
                                                               cial statements, partnerships, foreign subsidiaries,
                                                                                                                      students in fields of special interests. Includes
                                                                                                                      project research studies and intensive reading
programs, accompanied by conferences with pro-         Education (8). The student teaches in a center         AGR 102 Beginning Hunt Seat Equitation (1).
fessors in fields involved. Prerequisite: consent      selected by the university agricultural education      Designed for beginner riders in their first year
of instructor.                                         staff and approved by the Kentucky Department          and for riders that are considered safe to ride an
                                                       of Education. Graded pass/fail. (Spring)               unfamiliar horse in a group at a canter. Heavy
                                                                                                              emphasis is placed on developing a competent rider
Adult EducAtion                                        AED 580 Methods in Teaching Agricultural               with proper hunt seat equitation skills. Weekend
(AdE)                                                  Education (3-6). Philosophy and objectives of          participation in Intercollegiate Horse Show As-
ADE 199 Workshop in Adult Education (1-3).             teaching agricultural education in a comprehensive     sociation horse shows is mandatory. Participation
This course covers workshops conducted for             program. Course concepts include preparing and         in weekend riding clinics is required. Prerequisite:
paraprofessionals, persons employed by local           delivering lesson plans that involve problem-          AGR 101 and approval of instructor.
school districts to visit home-bound adult students.   solving method, lecturing, and laboratory based
Accumulated workshop credits are not allowed           modules. Additional methods include instruction        AGR 103 Intermediate Hunt Seat Equitation
to exceed six credit hours.                            in supervising occupational experience programs        (1). Designed for intermediate riders in their first
                                                       and coordinating FFA programs. Learning theory,        or second year of riding and for riders that are
                                                       multicultural education and education of the           considered safe to ride an unfamiliar horse in a
ADE 550 Adult-Community Education in a
                                                       exceptional child are also included. Field and         group at a canter. A higher degree of proficiency
Changing Society (3). Study of the concept of
                                                       clinical experiences are also employed. May            at the walk, sitting trot, posting trot, two point,
community education and the fast-developing and
                                                       be repeated for a maximum of six hours credit.         and canter is required more than in AGR 102.
emergent field of adult education as they relate to
                                                       Prerequisite: AED 380.                                 Emphasis is placed on learning suppling exercises
designing and implementing a program of total
and lifelong education for the community.                                                                     for horse and rider in addition to developing a
                                                       AED 581 Instructing Out-of-School Groups               competent rider with proper hunt seat equitation
                                                       (3). Philosophy of vocational education for            skills. Weekend participation in Intercollegiate
ADE 551 Creative Adult Learning (3). An
                                                       out-of-school youth and adults in agricultural         Horse Show Association horse shows is manda-
analysis of the adult as a learner. The process of     occupations. Application of principles and tech-
aging, its implications for learning occupations,                                                             tory. Participation in weekend riding clinics is
                                                       niques for organizing, conducting and evaluating       required. Prerequisite: AGR 102 and approval
effect on families, and social views are considered.   instructional programs. Field-clinical experiences.
Actualizing conditions for relationships between                                                              of instructor.
                                                       (Spring)
personal developments and a free society.
                                                                                                              AGR 104 Advanced Hunt Seat Equitation (1).
                                                       AED 582 Supervision in Agricultural Education          Designed for advanced riders that are considered
ADE 555 Foundations of Adult and Community             (3). Application of principles and techniques of       safe to ride an unfamiliar horse in a group at a
Education (3). Provides a historical understand-       supervising individuals and groups in the field of     canter and gallop. A higher degree of proficiency
ing of adult and community education and how           agricultural education. (With sufficient demand)       at the walk, sitting trot, posting trot, two point,
these two concepts evolved in modern twentieth
                                                                                                              center and gallop is required more than in AGR
century education theory, with particular emphasis     AED 583 Practicum in Agricultural Education,           103. Emphasis is placed on the correct application
on related aspects of progressive education as         Extension, and Public Service Leadership               of riders natural aids, suppling of the horse, collec-
first envisioned and as revised and refined in         (3). Comprehensive course including topics of          tion and riding on the bit. To develop competent
recent years.                                          instructional and operational methods for the          riders with professional equitation skills. Weekend
                                                       discipline, extension field tours and mentoring        participation in Intercollegiate Horse Show As-
ADE 599 Workshop in Adult Education (1-3).             experiences, supervised visits in an educational       sociation horse shows is mandatory. Participation
This course covers workshops conducted for             or public service setting or agency, and comple-       in weekend riding clinics is required. Prerequisite:
certified teachers who additionally work with          tion of practicum/professional clinical hours.         AGR 103 and approval of instructor.
adults in evening adult education classes. Ac-         Prerequisites: AED 380 or six hours of discipline
cumulated credits are not allowed to exceed six        specific courses within agriculture.
                                                                                                              AGR 105 Introduction to Rodeo (2). An in-
credit hours.
                                                                                                              troduction to rodeo designed to develop a better
                                                                                                              understanding of the events and rules of the sport
                                                       AgriculturE                                            through lectures, demonstrations, rodeo films,
AgriculturAl EducAtion                                 (Agr)                                                  and hands-on practice. The course will include
(AEd)                                                  AGR 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed to         instructions in equipment care and preparation
AED 104 Ag Education, Leadership and Life              assist students in their transition to Murray State    and mental and physical training using weights,
Knowledge (3). An elective course for high             University. Content includes orientation to the        calisthenics, etc. May be repeated once for ad-
school students interested in pursuing a career        specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within the      ditional credit.
in agriculture education which will serve as a         academic program; university procedures, poli-
bridge class between high school and collegiate        cies, and resources; strategies for personal and       AGR 106 Beginning Stock Seat Equitation (1).
level teacher education courses. The course will       academic success, and extracurricular opportuni-       Designed for beginner riders in their first or second
include an exploration of the professional qualities   ties. Only one transitions course will count toward    year of riding and for riders that are considered
and expectations of the teacher/educator. Roles,       graduation. Course is required of all entering         safe to ride an unfamiliar horse in a group at a lope.
responsibilities, and challenges in the field of       freshmen. Graded pass/fail. (Fall)                     Emphasis is placed on developing a competent
education, leadership, and Life Knowledge will be
                                                                                                              well-rounded stock seat rider with proper stock
examined. Course will include a minimum of four        AGR 100 Animal Science (3). This is a basic            seat equitation skills. Weekend participation in
full classroom observations for field experience.      course in animal science including the importance      Intercollegiate Horse Show Association horse
Prerequisite: consent of instructor.                   and place of livestock in agriculture; types, market   shows is mandatory. Participation in weekend
                                                       classes and grades of beef, sheep, poultry and         riding clinics is expected. Prerequisite: AGR 101
AED 380 Agricultural Education, Extension              swine; origin and characteristics of breeds; and       and approval of instructor.
and Leadership (3). Essential aspects and fun-         the judging of beef, sheep and swine.
damentals of career preparation, entry, adjustment
                                                                                                              AGR 107 Intermediate Stock Seat Equitation
and advancement in agricultural education, exten-      AGR 101 Basic Horsemanship (3). Designed               (1). Designed for the intermediate rider in their
sion, and youth leadership careers. Prerequisite:      for students with no previous experience in the        first or second year of riding and for riders that
Six prior credit hours in agriculture or consent       handling of horses. It includes instruction in         are considered safe to ride an unfamiliar horse in
of instructor.                                         grooming, saddling, bridling and mounting, and         a group at a canter. A higher degree of proficiency
AED 421 Student Teaching in Agricultural
                                                       the development of basic riding skills at the walk,
                                                       trot and canter.
                                                                                                              at the walk, jog or lope is required more than in
                                                                                                              AGR 106. Emphasis is placed on learning sup-
                                                                                                                                                                       173
      pling exercises for horse and rider in addition to       dents can demonstrate the competencies and skill       Students will be introduced to the practical
      developing a competent rider with proper stock           necessary for occupations in production agricul-       aspects of tobacco production in the Kentucky
      seat equitation skills. Weekend participation in         ture. Emphasis will be placed on the development       tobacco types.
      Intercollegiate Horse Show Association horse             of scientific knowledge and skills pertaining to
      shows is mandatory. Participation in weekend             management of the land and its effect on food and      AGR 261 General Pomology (3). General prin-
      riding clinics is required. Prerequisite: AGR 106        fiber production. Also included will be knowledge      ciples and practices involved in handling home
      and approval of instructor.                              and skills pertaining to livestock identification,     and commercial planting of the major fruit crops.
                                                               selection, nutrition, reproduction and genetics,       (Spring, even years)
      AGR 108 Advanced Stock Seat Equitation (1).              health management, and marketing of one or
      Designed for the advanced rider that is considered       more species of farm animals. Credit will be by        AGR 262 Vegetable Crop Production (3). A
      safe to ride an unfamiliar horse in a group at a lope.   challenge exam only according to university policy     study of the fundamental principles underlying
      A higher degree of proficiency at the walk, jog, and     and will be granted upon successful completion         commercial and home garden production of
      lope is required more than in AGR 107. Emphasis          of the state production agriculture skills standards   vegetables. (Spring, odd years)
      is placed on the correct application of the riders       test and completion of a career major in agriculture
      natural aids, suppling of the horse, collection,         at the secondary school level.                         AGR 263 Woody Plant Materials I (2). The
      and riding on the bit. In addition to developing a                                                              identification and use of woody deciduous plant
      competent stock seat equitation rider. Prerequisite:     AGR 190 Conversational Spanish for the                 materials in the landscape.
      AGR 107 and approval of instructor.                      Agricultural Industry (3). Introductory Spanish
                                                               course with an emphasis on agricultural terminol-      AGR 269 Introduction to Forestry (3). A gen-
      AGR 130 Agricultural Economics (3). A study              ogy designed for basic communication in Spanish        eral introduction to the many aspects of forestry
      of fundamental principles of economics as ap-            between agricultural employers and their Span-         including dendrology, silvics, silviculture, and
      plied to agriculture. Attention is given to resource     ish-speaking employees. It includes a study of         wood utilization. Some emphasis will be placed
      use, economic growth, production fundamentals,           Hispanic culture and the contribution of migrant       on the management of forest lands for recreation
      economic institutions and agriculture in relation        workers to the U.S. agricultural industry. Students    and wildlife purposes. (Fall, odd years)
      to national and world economics.                         may not receive credit for both this course and
                                                               SPA 105 or 106. (Same as SPA 106.)                     AGR 300 Principles of Animal Nutrition (3). A
      AGR 133 Field Applications for Agriculture                                                                      study of digestion, absorption and utilization of
      (2). Course will teach students methods of               AGR 199 Contemporary Issues in Agriculture             nutrients, characteristics of feedstuffs, nutritional
      solving many application problems that will be           (3). A course designed to increase the understand-     disorders and nutrient requirements of animals.
      encountered in the field of agriculture using ap-        ing, awareness, and critical analysis of contempo-     Prerequisite: AGR 100.
      plied mathematical and logic skills. The emphasis        rary agricultural issues and their effect upon the
      will be to use practical mathematical skills already     social, political, economic and cultural aspects       AGR 301 Livestock Judging and Evaluation
      acquired from secondary education to address             of society. Topics will include environmental,         (3). A study of types of purebred and commercial
      agricultural situations involving computations that      bio-technology, animal, crop, career, economy          beef cattle, sheep and swine, both market and
      are necessary for upper level courses in agriculture.    and trade, agricultural policy, food quality/safety    breeding classes. Special emphasis is placed
      Some knowledge of agricultural situations may be         and international agriculture issues.                  on writing and giving oral reports. Prerequisite:
      required. Possible field trips to the university farms                                                          AGR 100. (Fall)
      during class time. Prerequisite: Declared area or        AGR 200 International Agriculture Experi-
      major in agriculture or consent of instructor.           ence (3). A course designed to enhance students’       AGR 302 Horse Science (3). Involves a study of
                                                               understanding of international agriculture and         the role of the light horse and the development of
      AGR 140 Plant Science (3). A study of general            how it relates to the overall impact on world food     an equine vocabulary. Topics covered include the
      plant science principles including basic plant           processing and production through travel/study         basic nutritional, housing and health requirements
      anatomy, physiology and interactions with the            abroad. An emphasis is placed on experiences           of the light horse. (Fall)
      surrounding environment.                                 which have the potential to impact and add value
                                                               to American/Kentucky agriculture, as well as           AGR 303 Advanced Horse Science (3). Deals
      AGR 160 Horticultural Science (3). A study               those which hold key relationships to U.S. based
                                                                                                                      with various topics of interest to the horseman
      of the practical principles and practices used in        agricultural trade and food development. Prereq-
                                                                                                                      including psychology, evaluation, anatomy and
      horticulture.                                            uisites: AGR 130 and at least one subject specific
                                                                                                                      health care. Prerequisite: AGR 302. (Spring)
                                                               agriculture technical course.
      AGR 170 Introduction to Agricultural Systems
                                                                                                                      AGR 304 Advanced Stock Seat (3). This course
      Technology (3). An introduction to agricul-              AGR 201 Intermediate Horsemanship (3).
                                                                                                                      is concerned with basic training techniques and
      tural systems including: power and machinery,            Designed for students with previous experience
                                                                                                                      the development of equitation skills using the
      electricity, precision agriculture, soil and water       in the handling of horses. Deals with instruction
                                                                                                                      western seat. Prerequisites: AGR 201 and approval
      engineering, metallurgy and fabrication, and             in hunt seat and stock seat with emphasis placed
      safety. Emphasis is placed on understanding the          on equitation skills. Prerequisites: AGR 101 and       of instructor. (Fall)
      technology involved in operating, maintaining,           approval of instructor.
      and managing these systems.                                                                                     AGR 306 Advanced Forward Seat (3). This
                                                               AGR 223 Introduction to Artificial Insemina-           course presents equitation skills and techniques
      AGR 180 Skill Development in Horticulture                tion for Cattle (3). The primary objective of this     utilizing the forward seat. Included in the course
      (3). Course will document that students can dem-         course is to instruct students in artificial insemi-   are hunt seat, show seat, and other methods of
      onstrate the competencies and skill necessary for        nation in cattle. Topics will include reproductive     English style equitation. Principles of schooling
      occupations in the landscaping industry, turf and        system, herd health and nutrition, semen handling,     the jumping horses are emphasized. Prerequisites:
      lawn management, nursery management, and/or              and estrus detection and synchronization.              AGR 201 and approval of instructor. (Spring)
      vegetable and flower production areas. Credit will
      be by challenge exam only according to university        AGR 240 Crop Science (3). A study of the fun-          AGR 308 Equine Practicum (3). Practical ap-
      policy and will be granted upon successful comple-       damental principles underlying the production of       plication of management principles involving
      tion of the state horticulture skills standards test     agricultural crops. Lecture, two hours; laboratory,    health, nutrition, grooming, and training of horses.
      and completion of a career major in horticulture         two hours per week.                                    Prerequisite: AGR 302.
      at the secondary school level.
                                                               AGR 247 Tobacco Production (3). An agricul-            AGR 309 Equine Facility Management (3). A
174   AGR 181 Skill Development in Agriculture
      Production (3). Course will document that stu-
                                                               ture course designed for students who desire to
                                                               expand their knowledge of tobacco production.
                                                                                                                      course designed for the equine student to study the
                                                                                                                      economics and business related aspects of facility
management. Students will be taught the value         AGR 324 Veterinary Diagnostic Imaging (3).              AGR 334 Entrepreneurship in Agribusiness
of short and long term planning and the decision      Students will be exposed to learning appropri-          (3). A study of fundamental principles of entre-
making process that is involved in the operation      ate diagnostic imaging skills needed in the field       preneurship as applied to agribusinesses. Atten-
of a commercial equine facility. Some weekend         of veterinary technology. Students will learn           tion is given to entrepreneurial creativity, busi-
attendance will be required.                          handling and restraint techniques of small and          ness plans, marketing, accounting and finance,
                                                      large animals, as it relates to diagnostic imag-        and management practices and strategies in
AGR 310 Applications in Animal Technology             ing in areas of radiology, ultrasongraphy, and          small businesses. Prerequisite: AGR 130.
(3). The study of animal technology involving         endoscopy. Students will also learn utilization of
management, nutrition and health of small and         radiographic equipment, safety measures, equip-         AGR 335 Farm Systems Management (3). This
large animal species. Lecture, two hours; labora-     ment maintenance, along with proper positioning         course focuses on the business aspects of produc-
tory, two hours. Prerequisite: AGR 100. (Fall)        and exposures with small and large animals. Each        tion agriculture. Emphasis is on balance sheet and
                                                      week there will be two 1-hour lectures and one          income statement analysis, capital and credit use,
AGR 311 Beef Science (3). A study of the his-         2-hour lab. Prerequisite: AGR 310.                      enterprise, partial and whole farm budgeting, and
tory and importance of the beef cattle industry;                                                              investment analysis. Economic principles and
phases of beef production, selection, breeding,       AGR 325 Small Animal Science (3). A study               cost concepts as they relate to agriculture are also
feeding, and management of beef cattle. Lecture,      of the history and importance of the small and          discussed. The student will learn to apply these
two hours; laboratory, two hours. Prerequisites:      exotic animal industry; breeds, selection and           tools to develop a farm management plan.
AGR 100. (Spring)                                     management are topics which will be covered;
                                                      Prerequisite: AGR 310.                                  AGR 336 Agricultural Marketing and Price
AGR 312 Dairy Science (3). A study of dairy                                                                   Analysis (3). A study of the nature of food and
                                                      AGR 326 Swine Science (3). Basic principles and         fiber consumption and demand, production and
breeds, calf raising, herd replacements, milk pro-
                                                      their application in pork production — breeding,        supply of farm products, marketing margins and
duction, nutrition and management of dairy herds.
                                                      selection, nutrition, housing, equipment and eco-       price determination for specific agricultural com-
Prerequisites: AGR 100 and 300. (Spring)
                                                      nomic management. Lecture, two hours; labora-           modities. (Fall, odd years)
                                                      tory, two hours. Prerequisite: AGR 100. (Fall)
AGR 313 Livestock Production Management
Systems (3). Study of production management,                                                                  AGR 337 Agricultural Sales and Merchandis-
                                                      AGR 328 (233) Statistics for Food and Agricul-          ing (3). A course designed to enhance the students’
nutrition, and breeding of farm animals. Will
                                                      ture (3). A course designed to enhance the quan-        abilities to sell agriculturally related products.
include on-the-farm training with livestock.
                                                      titative skills of agriculture students. Techniques     An emphasis is placed on agricultural customer
Prerequisite: AGR 100.                                include descriptive statistics, probability, analysis   and market knowledge and the skills required
                                                      of variance, and regression analysis. Discussion,       satisfying customer needs. Students are required
AGR 315 Alternative Equine Care (3). Deals            examination and use of these techniques will cover
with investigation and introduction into alterna-                                                             to contact and spend time with agricultural sales
                                                      and be limited to agriculturally related topics.        professionals.
tive careers within the equine industry. Overview
and discussion as how they relate to the equine       AGR 329 Veterinary Hematology and Microbi-
athlete involving massage therapy, acupressure,                                                               AGR 338 Rural Economic Development (3).
                                                      ology (4). This course is designed to introduce the     An examination of the basic principles underly-
chiropractic, dentistry, horseshoeing, holistic       animal health technology student to basic concepts,
veterinary care, equine assisted therapy and sports                                                           ing the economic development of rural areas.
                                                      theories and techniques of veterinary hematology        The impact and role of agricultural and com-
medicine. Prerequisite: AGR 302 and/or permis-        and microbiology. Basic normal values of various
sion of instructor.                                                                                           munity organizations and their influence on the
                                                      species of animals will be covered with common
                                                                                                              rural economy will be studied. Each student will
                                                      microorganisms of animal diseases. Prerequisites:
                                                                                                              make a special socioeconomic study of his/her
AGR 316 Dairy Cattle Selection and Evalua-            AGR 310 and 322. (Fall)
                                                                                                              community including a resource inventory and
tion (3). Origin, characteristics and developments
                                                                                                              plan for economic development. (Summer, with
of major breeds of dairy cattle. Improvement          AGR 330 Principles of Agribusiness (3). The
                                                                                                              sufficient demand)
programs. Apply the principles involved in herd       organization of agribusiness, its development in
improvement to the selection of breeding animals      local communities, and the roles played by farmers,
                                                                                                              AGR 339 Computer Applications for Agri-
for dairy herds. Fundamental aspects of evaluation    farm suppliers, processors, wholesalers, retailers,
                                                                                                              culture (3). A course designed to develop an
of dairy cattle. Comparative terminology, decision-   consumers and government. Analysis of the job
                                                                                                              understanding and practical knowledge of the
making and presentation of oral reasons. Lecture,     opportunities in agribusiness. (Spring)
                                                                                                              use of computers with respect to their application
two hours; laboratory, two hours. Prerequisite:
                                                                                                              to problem-solving within agriculture. Students
AGR 100. (Fall)                                       AGR 331 Small Animal Diseases (3). A study
                                                                                                              will receive hands-on experience in applying a
                                                      of the more common and important diseases of
                                                                                                              variety of agriculture specific software to prob-
AGR 318 Equine Forage Management (3). A               dogs and cats. The clinical signs, life cycles of
                                                                                                              lems in agriculture and agricultural business
study of forage systems designed specifically         pathogenic organisms, progression of symptoms
                                                                                                              management.
for equine.                                           and control of the diseases will be discussed.
                                                      Prerequisite: AGR 310. (Fall)
                                                                                                              AGR 340 Veterinary Laboratory Sciences
AGR 321 Poultry Science (3). An introductory
                                                      AGR 332 Animal Nursing and Radiography                  (3). This course is divided into four sections:
study of the various phases of poultry production,
                                                      (4). Skill development in (1) handling, restraint       veterinary science, toxicology, necropsy and
diagnosis and treatment of diseases, nutrition,                                                               laboratory animal science. Course is designed
processing and management practices for com-          and nursing techniques of small and large animals;
                                                      (2) utilization of radiographic equipment and po-       to acquaint the student with basic pharmacology
mercial poultry operations. Prerequisite: AGR                                                                 and toxicology, submission of tissue samples to
100. (Spring)                                         sitioning exposures. Two lectures weekly and two
                                                      hour laboratories twice per week. Prerequisites:        diagnostic laboratories, necropsy techniques and
                                                      AGR 310, 322, and 329. (Spring)                         common practices associated with laboratory
AGR 322 Veterinary Laboratory Principles (3).                                                                 animals. Prerequisites: AGR 310; CHE 105 and
An introductory course to the veterinary laboratory                                                           106 or CHE 201 and 202. (Fall)
for the animal health technologist. Laboratory        AGR 333 Agribusiness Records and Analysis
safety, microscopy, blood collection and analysis     (3). Fundamental principles necessary to keep farm
                                                      and agribusiness firm accounts and to analyze these     AGR 341 Seed Production and Technology
from various species along with familiarization                                                               (3). Special emphasis is given to the production
with other laboratory equipment and techniques        accounts for profitability. Budgeting, amortization,
                                                      depreciation and the application of microcomputer       and processing of seed, evaluation and testing
are taught for development of proficient laboratory
skills. Prerequisite: AGR 310. (Spring)
                                                      technology to the management and financial con-
                                                      trol of the agribusiness firm. (Fall)
                                                                                                              for quality, and the study of viability during
                                                                                                              storage. (Spring)
                                                                                                                                                                     175
      AGR 342 Seed, Crop and Grain Analysis (3).              and retail nursery business practices, and employee   foundation of knowledge that can be used to make
      Skills related to the evaluation of crops for quality   management practices. Prerequisite: AGR 160.          efficient field equipment technology management
      relative to certification, viability, and marketing                                                           decisions and to help keep a farm enterprise
      will be taught. The subjects that will be taught        AGR 365 Herbaceous Plant Materials (2).               competitive.
      include seed analysis, plant and seed identification    A study of characteristics, requirements, and
      and grain grading. Prerequisite: AGR 240.               potential uses of herbaceous ornamental plants        AGR 380 Veterinary Laboratory Rotation (1).
                                                              in the landscape.                                     The student will observe and participate in the daily
      AGR 345 (250) Soil Science (3). A general study                                                               routing of each laboratory department at Breathitt
      of soil properties including classification develop-    AGR 367 Residential Landscape Design (3).             Veterinary Center including histology, serology,
      ment, use of fertilizers, and conservation.             The application of principles of design to land-      virology, bacteriology, necropsy, toxicology and
                                                              scaping the home grounds. The identification, use     clinical pathology. Practical experience will be
      AGR 346 (251) Soil Science Laboratory (1).              and maintenance of ornamental plants and lawn         gained and laboratory skills will be applied in a
      Consists of a number of lab exercises that support      grasses. Special attention will be given to the use   clinical setting. Graded pass/fail.
      the course material in AGR 250. Co-requisite:           of native plants for home beautification. Lecture,
      AGR 250.                                                two hours; laboratory, two hours; field trips. Pre-   AGR 399 Professional Development Seminar I
                                                              requisites: AGR 263 and 363. (Spring)                 (1). Seminar for agriculture students focusing on
      AGR 350 Soil Survey (3). Principles of soils                                                                  the job search process, employment opportunities,
      origin and classification including field map-          AGR 368 Landscape Construction (3). Under-            and related problems. Recommended for students
      ping. Lecture, two hours; laboratory, two hours.        standing the process of landscape construction        in the sophomore or junior year. Graded course.
      Prerequisite: AGR 250. (Spring)                         from initial planning stages to the actual instal-
                                                              lation of structures utilized within a landscape      AGR 400 Veterinary Microbiology (5). Ori-
                                                              design. Prerequisite: AGR 160                         entation to the veterinary diagnostic laboratory
      AGR 353 World Food, Agriculture, and So-
                                                                                                                    environment, including familiarization with basic
      ciety (3). Course will provide students with a
                                                              AGR 371 Agricultural Buildings and Con-               techniques in veterinary bacteriology and mycol-
      basic understanding of various world agriculture
                                                              struction (3). Introduction to technical design,      ogy, veterinary virology, and clinical serology and
      systems that provide food. Analysis of the role of
                                                              selection of materials, and modern construction       immunology. Lecture two hours; laboratory, six
      society, historical, environmental, technological,
                                                              techniques used in the agriculture industry. Em-      hours. Prerequisites: AGR 329, BIO 101 or 221,
      socio-economic, and political factors that affect
                                                              phasis on concrete and erection of pole frame and     CHE 105 and 106 or 201 and 202.
      world food will be addressed. The course will
                                                              steel buildings.
      also include topics on the evolution of agriculture,
                                                                                                                    AGR 401 Equine Breeding and Management
      technology and food trends over the world as it         AGR 372 Agricultural Metal Processes (3).             (3). A comprehensive study of the reproductive
      has been shaped by society, culture, and world          Basic theories involving metallurgy and the metal     anatomy and physiology of the stallion and brood
      population growth. Specific issues on food pov-         working processes. Includes SMAW, GMAW,               mare, as well as the care of the foal from birth to
      erty and malnutrition in developing countries,          brazing, OA welding and cutting, and plasma arc       weaning. Special attention is given to current man-
      culture and food habits, climate changes impact-        process. Skill development emphasized.                agement concepts prevalent in the equine industry
      ing agriculture productions, and other constrains                                                             today. Prerequisite: AGR 302. (Spring)
      to world food production will be covered.               AGR 373 Animals in Disaster (2). This course is
                                                              two fold. Module A is intended to increase aware-     AGR 402 Advanced Livestock Judging (3).
      AGR 355 Soil Judging (2). Emphasis on recogni-          ness and preparedness among animal owners and         Provides the student with guidelines for evaluation
      tion, description and classification of soil horizons   care providers. Module B is intended to guide         and selection procedures as applied to breeding
      in a soil profile and then placing this soil in the     emergency management officials and animal             and market swine, beef cattle and sheep. Spe-
      U.S. Classification System. This course is designed     owners, care providers, and industries in prepar-     cial emphasis is placed on training students for
      for those interested in conservation and teaching       ing community disaster plans. (Fall and Spring)       livestock judging team. May be repeated for a
      careers. May be repeated for a maximum of four                                                                maximum of six credits.
      credits. (Fall)                                         AGR 374 Livestock in Disaster (2). Course
                                                              is designed to increase your awareness of what        AGR 403 Equine Reproduction (3). A compre-
      AGR 360 Greenhouse Production and Man-                  livestock producers, emergency managers, vet-         hensive study of the reproductive anatomy and
      agement (3). A study of producing plants under          erinarians, extension agents, and others can do to    physiology of the stallion and brood mare, as
      transparency. Includes greenhouse management            prevent and reduce the consequences of disasters.     well as the care of the foal from birth to weaning.
      problems; heating, cooling, and humidity control;       (Fall and Spring)                                     Special attention is given to current management
      also cultural practices of several different crops.                                                           concepts prevalent in the equine industry today.
      Lecture, two hours; laboratory, two hours. (Fall,       AGR 376 Agricultural Chemicals (3). This              Prerequisite: AGR 302- Horse Science.
      odd years)                                              course deals with the major weeds and insects,
                                                              which attack field crops and stored grain and         AGR 404 Selective Equine Breeding (3). Study
      AGR 361 Horticulture and Greenhouse                     the associated herbicides and insecticides. An        of the hereditary traits in horses, breeding design,
      Management Practicum (3). A hands-on work               understanding is developed of how and why             performance and progeny testing, marketing, and
      study course that allows for the management and         herbicides function.                                  herd analysis.
      maintenance of all university greenhouse and
      horticultural components. Prerequisite: AGR 360         AGR 377 Agriculture Safety (3). Study of the          AGR 405 Breaking and Training (3). Fun-
      and permission of instructor.                           hazards, methods of injury prevention, safety         damental methods of breaking and training the
                                                              education, regulations and advancing safety and       young horse. All students are assigned a horse for
      AGR 362 Floral Design (3). Operation and                health in the agriculture industry.                   application of techniques. Prerequisites: AGR 304
      management of a retail florist establishment with                                                             or 306, and approval of instructor. (Spring)
      emphasis on floral design. (Fall, even years)           AGR 378 Agricultural Environmental Man-
                                                              agement Systems (3). Study of animal waste,           AGR 407 Equine Selection and Evaluation (3).
      AGR 363 Woody Plant Materials II (2). The               pesticide, and nutrient management practices in       Basic study of selection and evaluation of horses
      identification and use of woody evergreen plant         agriculture to reduce and control soil and water      for various uses, including halter and performance.
      materials in the landscape.                             pollution and comply with Federal and state           Prerequisite: AGR 302. (Fall)
                                                              regulations.
                                                                                                                    AGR 410 Advanced Veterinary Hematology
176   AGR 364 Nursery Management (3). A study
      of establishing and managing a nursery practice
                                                              AGR 379 Field Equipment Technology Man-
                                                              agement (3). Course designed to develop a solid
                                                                                                                    (4). Concepts of hematopoiesis and the effect
                                                                                                                    of disease on blood cells will be covered. Cell
      including field grown container stock, wholesale
counting, identifications of normal and abnormal       AGR 444 Purebred Livestock Management                   AGR 477 Agricultural Power Units (3). A study
blood cells, bone marrow examination, cytology,        & Marketing (3). A study of the management              of small power units relative to agriculture. In-
coagulation, and special hematology skills will be     techniques unique to the purebred livestock             cludes servicing, maintenance, repair, use, types
taught. Lecture, two hours; laboratory, four hours.    industry including, but not limited to, animal          and applications of electrical motors, pumps,
Prerequisites: AGR 322 and 329.                        selection and development, records, measures            and small internal combustion engines. (Fall,
                                                       of performance and preparation for marketing.           even years)
AGR 420 Veterinary Clinical Chemistry (2).             In addition, the course will include an in-depth
Basic concept of clinical chemistry in animals as      look at advertising and marketing techniques            AGR 488 Cooperative Education/Internship
it related to organ systems and specific diseases      common to the livestock industry. Field hours           (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
will be covered in lecture. The laboratory will        required. Field trips outside of class time required.   experience related to the career and educational
emphasize clinical chemistry assays utilizing          Prerequisites: AGR 100.                                 objectives of the student for which he/she may
automated and manual techniques as well as                                                                     receive academic credit and possible financial
urinalysis and use of laboratory equipment.            AGR 451 Veterinary Technology Review (1). A             remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum
Prerequisites: AGR 300 and 322; CHE 105 and            review course and study guide for credentialing         of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded
106 or 201 and 202.                                    in the area of veterinary technology. Prerequi-         pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.
                                                       sites: AGR 331, 332, 340, 380, 400, 410, 420,
AGR 430 Veterinary Parasitology (2). Basic             and 430.                                                AGR 489 Cooperative Education/Internship
concepts of parasitology including life cycles                                                                 (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
and mechanisms of pathogenicity will be cov-           AGR 455 Soil Management (3). The control of             experience related to the career and educational
ered during lecture. The laboratory portion will       erosion, organic matter maintenance, effects of         objectives of the student for which he/she may
emphasize methods of identification of parasites       fertilizer on the environment, evaluating fertility     receive academic credit and possible financial
in fecal, blood, and skin specimens. Lecture, two      and fertilization of major crops are emphasized.        remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of
hours; laboratory, four hours for half a semester.     (Spring)                                                six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:
Prerequisite: AGR 322.                                                                                         permission of chair.
                                                       AGR 460 Professional Experience in Horticul-
AGR 433 Farm Management (3). A study is                ture (3). Designed to provide on-the-job training       AGR 499 Leadership/Professional Develop-
made of the management functions and econom-           in various horticultural enterprises such as golf       ment Seminar II (1). Seminar for agriculture
ics of farm organization and operation, including      courses, florist shops, greenhouse operations and       students focusing on the leadership development
input-output relationships, enterprise combina-        garden centers under supervision of a horticulture      and the transition to the world of work and related
tion, and budget analysis. Assignments are given       professor. May be repeated once if approved by          problems. Recommended for students in the junior
which assist the student in applying economics         faculty advisor. (Fall, Spring or Summer)               or senior year. Graded course. May be repeated
and management principles to an individual case                                                                up to 3 hours.
farm operation.                                        AGR 461 Plant Propagation (3). A study of
                                                       the methods of propagating horticultural plants.        AGR 501 Diseases of Livestock (3). Distribution,
AGR 435 Interpretation of Agricultural Re-             Includes cutting, grafting, budding, layerage and       general nature, methods of dissemination, sanita-
search (2). Students will access, analyze, evaluate    seed propagation. Lecture, two hours; laboratory,       tion, prevention and eradication of common infec-
and interpret agricultural research for occupational   two hours. (Spring, even years)                         tious and parasitic diseases of domestic animals;
work. The course is oriented towards all fields                                                                hygiene and preventive medicine, with emphasis
within the agricultural sector.                        AGR 462 Fine Turf Management (3). A detailed            on the transmissible diseases. (Fall)
                                                       study of varieties of fine turf grasses and estab-
AGR 436 Undergraduate Research in Agricul-             lishment and maintenance of fine turf, including        AGR 502 Advanced Nutrition (3). A study
ture (3-6). Agricultural research projects arranged    soil and turf relationship, fertilizing and liming,     of physical and chemical properties of feeds.
individually with faculty members who agree to
                                                       and drainage and irrigation. Lecture two hours;         Digestion, absorption and metabolism of nu-
direct the research. A written plan of research must
                                                       laboratory, two hours. (Spring, even years)             trients and factors affecting these functions are
be filed with the school within two weeks of the
                                                                                                               emphasized. The nutrient requirements of farm
beginning of the semester. May be repeated once
                                                       AGR 463 Horticultural Therapy (3). Exploring            animals and effects of nutrient deficiencies are
for a maximum of six hours.
                                                       the therapeutic modality that focuses on improving      also studied. (Fall)
                                                       human health and functioning though the use of
AGR 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-
                                                       horticultural programs. The profession of horti-        AGR 503 Animal Breeding (3). Study of heredi-
supervised thesis and/or project which allows
                                                       cultural therapy is based on medical model and          tary traits in livestock, breeding designs, progeny
Honors Program students with a senior standing
                                                       is used both nationally and internationally. This       testing and herd analysis. (Spring)
to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper
                                                       course studies the different client populations that
and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-
                                                       benefit from the therapy and how to set treatment       AGR 506 Reproductive Physiology (3). A study
mance is required.
                                                       goals based on a client’s need.                         of the reproductive processes in mammals with
                                                                                                               primary emphasis on domestic farm animals. Will
AGR 439 Software Applications for Agriculture
                                                       AGR 470 Soil and Water Engineering (3).                 include the anatomy, endocrinology, behavior
(3). A course designed to develop an enhanced un-
                                                       Surveying, mapping, and determining areas of            and general physiology of the reproductive pro-
derstanding of software programs and techniques
in a hands-on environment. Software studied            farm land; designing farm drainage systems; farm        cesses. Artificial insemination, estrous control,
will enhance student skills in farm, nutrient and      ponds; controlling water erosion with terraces and      ova transplants and other practical production
livestock management as well as customer profil-       other mechanical structures. Lecture, one hour;         practices will be covered. Lecture, two hours;
ing, billing for custom application and technical      laboratory, four hours. (Fall)                          laboratory, two hours.
communication. Prerequisite: AGR 399.
                                                       AGR 471 Applications in Precision Agriculture           AGR 510 Animal Anatomy and Physiology (3).
AGR 440 Behavior Modification Techniques               (3). Designed to understand the acquisition and         Deals with the anatomy of body systems, how these
for Domestic Animals (3). Course is designed           analysis of geographically referenced data for the      systems interrelate, and the physiology of body
to introduce students to techniques of behavior        management of crop production systems, data             organs. Species covered include porcine, bovine,
modification and the importance of behavior            formats, geographic information systems, grid           equine, canine and feline. Three one-hour lectures
problem prevention in domestic animals. Basic          sampling, soil fertility and physical properties,       per week. Prerequisite: AGR 310. (Spring)
understanding of normal behavior, principles of        herbicide management, combine yield monitor-
                                                       ing, variable-rate application, crop modeling and       AGR 511 Animal Anatomy and Physiology
learning, and application of various behavior
modification techniques will be explored. Pre-         economics. Prerequisite: AGR 339.                       Laboratory (2). Deals with the anatomy of body
                                                                                                               systems, how these systems interrelate, and the
                                                                                                                                                                     177
requisite: AGR 310.
      physiology of body organs. Species covered              analysis of U.S. agriculture with attention to major    AGR 546 Integrated Pest Management (3).
      include porcine, bovine, equine, canine and             agricultural regions of the nation and types of         Principles of plant pest control as related to de-
      feline. Two hour laboratories twice per week.           farming areas of Kentucky. Special emphasis is          velopmental stages of crop plants. Evaluation of
      Prerequisite: AGR 310. (Spring)                         given to the organization of West Kentucky and          pest problems, alternative control methods and
                                                              regional farms and agribusinesses. Field trips,         effects on the ecosystem. Emphasis on economic
      AGR 512 Beef Cattle Management Systems                  interviews and financial analysis of successful         control of insect and disease vectors that affect
      (3). A study of beef production, forage manage-         firms. (Summer, with sufficient demand)                 agricultural crops. (Spring, even years)
      ment and marketing systems. Lecture, one hour;
      laboratory, four hours. Prerequisites: AGR 100          AGR 535 Agricultural Policy (3). The history,           AGR 547 Crop Management (3). Study of the
      and 311. (Fall)                                         principles, setting objectives and means of policy      distribution, economic importance and manage-
                                                              as applied to agriculture in our society. Prerequi-     ment of forage, grain crops and tobacco. (Fall)
      AGR 514 Teaching Students Horsemanship                  site: AGR 336. (Spring)
      (3). Designed for students interested in teaching                                                               AGR 548 Crop Physiology (3). Basic principles
      techniques of teaching horsemanship. Course             AGR 536 Quantitative Methods for Agribusi-              of crop physiology; the effect of environment and
      includes preparation and application of lesson          ness (3). A study of the use and theory of math-        management practice on physiological processes,
      plans. Prerequisite: AGR 304 or 306. (Fall)             ematics as it applies to the fields of agriculture,     growth and development of crops. (Spring, odd
                                                              finance and economics. Attention is given to            years)
      AGR 523 Artificial Insemination Techniques              the elementary uses of algebra, matrix algebra
      for Cattle (3). Designed to train students to           and the calculus as they apply to optimization          AGR 549 Weeds and Their Control (3). A study
      become competent A.I. technicians. Topics               problems in resource use efficiency. The same           of the introduction, methods of dissemination,
      discussed will include reproductive processes,          mathematics will be applied to time value of            reproduction and control of weeds by the most
      health, nutrition, facilities and management of         money topics. Prerequisites: ECO 230, 231 and           reliable methods and techniques. Prerequisite:
      breeding herd. Techniques concerning semen              MAT 140. (Spring, odd years) Must be admitted           AGR 160 or 240. (Fall)
      handling, heat synchronization and heat detection       to graduate studies prior to registering for this
      will be taught. Laboratories will be designed to        course to receive graduate credit.                      AGR 550 Applied Pharmacology (3). Advanced
      give students actual experience in inseminating                                                                 clinical principles, practices and procedures in the
      cattle. Prerequisites: AGR 100 and AGR 311 or           AGR 537 Seminar in Agricultural Business                field of veterinary medicine. Prerequisites: CHE
      consent of instructor. (Summer, with sufficient         Systems (2). Course designed to enhance student’s       105 and 106, or CHE 201 and 202.
      demand)                                                 understanding of, and experience in, agricultural
                                                              business systems. Emphasis will be placed on            AGR 551 Selected Studies in Agriculture (1-3).
      AGR 529 International Trade and Agricul-                strategies of managing a successful agribusiness        An intensive study of an agriculture topic that will
      ture (3). Changing role of U.S. agriculture in a        operation and /or farmer-owned cooperatives.            vary from semester to semester. May be repeated
      dynamic world economy; national and interna-            Prerequisite: AGR 130. Must be admitted to              to a maximum of six hours. (As demanded)
      tional policies and institutions affecting agricul-     graduate studies prior to registering for this course
      ture; exchange rates, tariffs, and non-tariff bar-      to receive graduate credit.                             AGR 554 Soil and Plant Analysis (3). A study
      riers. Prerequisites: junior, senior, or graduate                                                               of the chemical and analytical procedures used
      student classification. AGR 130 or equivalent.          AGR 538 Seminar in Production Agricultural              on soils and plants along with instruction and
                                                              Systems (2). Designed to enhance student’s un-          theory of the use of common analytical equip-
      AGR 530 Advanced Agricultural Prices (3).               derstanding of, and experience in, production           ment. Lecture, one hour; laboratory, four hours.
      Methods of price analysis and forecasting. Index        agriculture systems and how they relate to a suc-       Prerequisite: AGR 250. (Fall)
      numbers, time series data commodity flows and           cessful farming operation. An emphasis is placed
      statistical techniques as applied to price analysis.    on systems, which have the potential to impact          AGR 555 Advanced Soil Fertility (3). The
      Special emphasis will be placed upon the use of         and add-value to the local, regional and national       chemistry of the essential elements in soils and
      commodity futures markets in estimating cash            agriculture economy, through classroom as well          the use and the manufacturing processes of various
      prices and in protecting producers from cash price      as laboratory experiences. Must be admitted to          fertilizer materials are considered. Prerequisite:
      fluctuations. (Fall, even years)                        graduate studies prior to registering for this course   AGR 250. (Spring)
                                                              to receive graduate credit.
      AGR 531 Agricultural Finance (3). A study of                                                                    AGR 563 Arboriculture (3). Classification,
      the needs and problems of financing farm and farm       AGR 539 Advanced Computer Applications                  identification and care of ornamental trees, shrubs
      service businesses, including a study of credit         for Agriculture (3). An intensive course designed       and vines, including pruning, bracing, surgery,
      institutions serving American agriculture. (Fall)       to enhance the computer skills of agriculture           transplanting, insect and disease control, and
                                                              students and to give them the skills necessary to       fertilization, as related to large areas of organized
      AGR 532 Farm and Land Appraisal (3). A                  generate useful information and solve a variety of      plantings. Lecture, two hours; laboratory, two
      study of the methods and procedures of land and         agriculturally specific problems. Students receive      hours. (Spring, odd years)
      farm property valuation with attention to appraisal     instruction on advanced word processing concepts,
      programs of the credit and farm service institutions.   budget generation, statistical analysis, agribusi-      AGR 564 Public Horticulture (3). An overview
      Prerequisite: AGR 130. (Fall)                           ness related software and global positioning            of the principles involved with public garden
                                                              systems in agriculture. Prerequisite: AGR 339.          management, plant curatorship, collection care,
      AGR 533 Seminar in International Agricul-                                                                       public education, facility design and long-range
      ture Systems (3). A course designed to enhance          AGR 540 Veterinary Surgery and Anesthesia               planning. Prerequisite: AGR 263, AGR 363, or
      student’s understanding of international agricul-       (4). Clinical principles, practices and procedures      permission from instructor.
      ture systems and how they relate to the overall         involved in the field of veterinary medicine. For
      impact on world food processing and production.         animal health technology students with senior           AGR 566 Advanced Greenhouse Management
      An emphasis is placed on systems which have the         standing. Prerequisites: AGR 310, 322, 329              and Production (3). A study of the principles
      potential to impact and add-value to American           and 332.                                                and practices used in the production of specific
      agriculture, as well as those which hold key                                                                    important greenhouse crops. Considerable em-
      relationships to U.S. based agricultural trade and      AGR 542 Plant Breeding I (3). Basic principles          phasis will be placed on the manipulation of
      food development.                                       and methods used in the improvement of impor-           environmental conditions during production.
                                                              tant agronomic and horticultural crops. (Fall,          (Fall, even years)
178   AGR 534 Types and Systems of Farming and
      Agribusiness (3). Includes a general statistical
                                                              even years)
AGR 567 Advanced Landscape Design (3).                including compression, ignition and carburetion.      their cultures meet the common and distinctive
The application of design theories, principles        Mechanical principles of tractors and preventive      needs of these societies, with emphasis placed
and elements to solve landscape design objec-         maintenance included. (Fall, odd years)               upon non-literate peoples.
tives and concerns for residential properties.
Attention will be given to site analyses, client      AGR 578 Research and Development of Ag-               ANT 145 Introduction to Museum Work (3).
concerns, client relationships and contractual        riculture Tractors and Equipment (3). Tours           Course designed to be an introduction to various
agreements while completing the design pro-           of the major agriculture tractor and equipment        facets of museum work, including museum ad-
cess. Prerequisites: Grade of C or better in AGR      industries. The tours include: research and           ministration, public relations work, fund raising,
263, 363, 365, 367 or permission of instructor.       development, engineering, foundries, and the          collection registration, exhibit production, deed
                                                      assembly of engines, transmissions, final drives,     of gifts, security, curation, and cataloguing and
AGR 569 Plants for Interior Design (2). A study       combines, cotton pickers, and planting equip-         accessioning systems.
of the basic plants used for interior design and      ment. (Summer)
decoration. This study includes identification,                                                             ANT 311 Anthropology of Complex Societies
nomenclature, growing requirements, insect and        AGR 580 Veterinary Products (3). This course          (3). An analysis of a range of societal types from
disease problems and proper use of these plants       deals with old and new products currently available   sedentary tribes to chiefdoms to states. Primary
in interiors.                                         in the veterinary market. Market will include the     emphasis will be placed on the processes that
                                                      ordering and purchasing of wholesale products,        lead to the emergence of complex societies, the
AGR 570 AG Systems Technology Lab                     selling, inventory control, computer programming,     development of urbanism, and the comparative
Management (3). This course is a study of             marketing, and pricing of products utilized in a      and cross-cultural perspective. Prerequisite: ANT
theories involving agricultural mechanization         veterinary practice. (Fall)                           140 or consent of instructor.
and systems technology. Emphasis is placed
on understanding the technology involved in           AGR 582 Veterinary Practice and Operations            ANT 315 Special Topics in Anthropology (3).
operating, maintaining and managing power             (3). Course will deal with the day to day events      This seminar will cover an important topic or re-
and machinery, electricity, precision agriculture,    centered around the operation of a veterinary         lated topics. Both student and faculty interest will
soil and water engineering, metallurgy and            practice. Supervisory skills, communication           determine the topic. Students will both contribute
fabrication, and safety systems. Skill development    skills, inventory, bookkeeping, planning, and         and lead discussions of the readings. Research
emphasized. Prerequisite: AGR 170. (Fall)             advertising are the main areas stressed in this       paper is required. May be repeated.
                                                      course.
AGR 571 Advanced Precision Agriculture (3).                                                                 ANT 325 Biological Anthropology (3). The bio-
Designed for students who desire to apply and         AGR 585 Specialized Journalism/RTV (1-3).             logical nature of man. A survey of man’s physical
expand knowledge of the acquisition and analysis      Directed individual study. Can be a journalistic      origin, his primate background, and his evolution.
of geographically referenced data for the manage-     effort in areas such as science, sports, govern-      Cultural association with fossil evidence and
ment of crop production systems, data formats,        ment, religion, graphics, etc., or a project in       concepts of race. (Same as BIO 325.)
geographic information systems, grid sampling,        radio or television such as a major production or
soil fertility and physical properties, herbicide     series, an extensive research project and paper, or   ANT 329 North American Indians (3). Intro-
management, yield monitoring, variable-rate ap-       other approved project. Prerequisites: consent of     duction to Native American cultures north of
plication, crop modeling and economics.               instructor and written approved proposal required     Mexico. This course entails a survey of the cultural
                                                      prior to registration.                                traditions of the indigenous populations of North
AGR 573 Agricultural Processing Systems                                                                     America. Emphasis will be placed on traditional
                                                      AGR 590 Internship in Animal Technology               lifeways and the consequences of interactions
(3). An analysis of systems and methods for
                                                      (3-6). Practical full-time work experience to be      between Native Americans and Euro-American
harvesting, processing and storing agricultural
                                                      arranged through an animal-related facility during    populations.
products. Includes drying and curing principles,
                                                      the fall, spring or summer session. Site to be ar-
grinding, mixing, cleaning, sorting, material
                                                      ranged by the student and approved by the course      ANT 343 Minorities in the United States (3).
handling and structural environmental design.
                                                      coordinator. May be repeated for a total of six       Identity, goals and organization of minority
(Fall, even years)
                                                      credit hours. Prerequisites: AGR 100, 300, 331,       groups; dynamics of prejudice; processes of com-
                                                      332, 340, 351 and 400. Enrollment only by consent     munication, conflict and accommodation. Prereq-
AGR 574 Agricultural Irrigation and Water
                                                      of instructor. (Fall, Spring or Summer)               uisite: six hours of sociology or anthropology, or
Systems (3). Includes determining water needs,
water sources, pumps, fundamental pipeline hy-                                                              consent of instructor. (Same as SOC 343.)
                                                      AGR 599 Agriculture Senior Capstone (1).
draulics and designing a complete irrigation and/or   This is a senior capstone course culminating in
water system for the farm. (Spring, even years)                                                             ANT 344 The Black Experience (3). An analysis
                                                      students demonstrating general knowledge in the       of the African American way of life utilizing
                                                      agriculture core curricula, demonstrating com-        anthropological and historical approaches. Major
AGR 575 Combine and Grain Handling Sys-
                                                      pleted knowledge in the student’s chosen option       themes in black culture will include religion,
tems (3). Developing a complete grain harvesting,
                                                      within agriculture science, and a lecture series      family relations and political empowerment.
handling, drying and storage operation. A study of
                                                      from influential agriculture leaders. Students will   Biographical, autobiographical and ethnographic
combine operation and the materials flow concept,
                                                      also have an opportunity to share insight into the    materials will be utilized. (Same as SOC 344.)
closed loop handling, psychrometrics, grain dry-
                                                      direction and future of the School of Agriculture
ing, drying methods, facility layout and facility
                                                      by sharing comments on educational effectiveness.     ANT 356 The Art of Non-Western Cultures
management. Combine comparison, selection
                                                      Prerequisites: All agriculture science core classes   (3). Study of the arts of Asia, Oceania, Africa
and utilization.
                                                      and option classes must be completed with pass-       and the Pre-Western Americas. (Same as ART,
                                                      ing grades in the School of Agriculture. Refer to     MCG, RGS 356.)
AGR 576 Agricultural Electrification Systems
                                                      the Undergraduate Bulletin for a complete list of
(3). Study of the basic principles of electricity,
                                                      core and respective options courses within the        ANT 390 Applied Anthropology (3). A study of
the fundamentals of wiring and selection, the
                                                      Department of Agriculture Science.                    how anthropologists use their knowledge to solve
operation and economics of agricultural electricity
equipment. (Spring)                                                                                         special social and technical problems. Topics to be
                                                                                                            covered include the history of applied anthropol-
AGR 577 Tractor Power Principles (3). Study of        Anthropology                                          ogy, the ethics of significantly altering the culture
the principles governing the selection and applica-   (Ant)                                                 of the group, and the explanation of how and why
tion of tractors and power driven machines. Em-
phasis is placed on operating systems of engines,
                                                      ANT 140 Introduction to Cultural Anthropol-
                                                      ogy (3). A survey of the diverse ways human
                                                                                                            behavioral systems change. Prerequisite: six hours
                                                                                                            of anthropology or consent of instructor.               179
                                                      societies are organized with an analysis of how
      ANT 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-          from archaeological field work. Repeatable for a        ARC 357 Lithic Analysis (4). This course will in-
      supervised thesis and/or project which allows         maximum of three credits. Prerequisite: ARC 150         troduce students to the technology and principles
      Honors Program students with a senior standing        and 302 or permission of the instructor.                of stone tool manufacture, the identification and
      to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper                                                                classification of stone tools and debitage, and the
      and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-       ARC 314 Sediments, Soils, and Stratigraphy              primary methods of lithic analysis employed in
      mance is required.                                    (4). An in depth study of sediments, soils, and         archaeological research. The course will consist
                                                            stratigraphy. Emphasis will be on the geologic          of three hours of lecture and two hours of labora-
      ANT 488 Cooperative Education/Internship              formation and interpretation of sediments and           tory per week. Prerequisites: ARC 150 or consent
      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work      soils in a variety of environmental contexts. Three     of instructor.
      experience related to the career and educational      hours lecture and two hours laboratory per week
      objectives of the student for which he/she may        plus required Saturday field trips. Prerequisites:      ARC 360 Historical Archaeology (3). A meth-
      receive academic credit and possible financial        GSC 102 or permission of the instructor. (Same          odological survey of the archaeology of histori-
      remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum           as GSC 314.)                                            cal societies, with geographic concentration on
      of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded                                                                 North America. Emphasis on research strategies
      pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.         ARC 315 Special Topics in Archaeology (1-3).            and special problems in the archaeological study
                                                            Seminar will cover an important topic or related        of literate societies. Prerequisite: ARC 150 or
      ANT 489 Cooperative Education/Internship              topics. Both student and faculty interest will          consent of instructor.
      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work      determine the topic. Students will contribute to
      experience related to the career and educational      class through discussions of assigned readings          ARC 370 Archaeology of the Eastern Wood-
      objectives of the student for which he/she may        and research. The course has variable credit and        lands (3). An intensive examination of eastern
      receive academic credit and possible financial        may be repeated three times for a total of nine         U.S. prehistory from 12,000 B.C. through A.D.
      remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of        credit hours. Prerequisite: ANT 140 or ARC 150,         1700, covering major cultural traditions, e.g.
      six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:     or permission of instructor.                            Paleo, Archaic, Woodland (Adena and Hopewell),
      permission of chair.                                                                                          and post-Woodland Indian groups (Ft. Ancient
                                                            ARC 321 Ancient Civilizations (3). An in-depth          and Mississippian). Course includes the study
      ANT 500 Directed Studies (1-3). Selected topics       anthropological, archeological and historical ex-       of general Midwestern U.S. and southeastern
      in anthropology as arranged by the student and a      amination of the origins of seven of the world’s        prehistory. Prerequisite: ARC 150.
      professor. May be repeated up to nine hours credit.   earliest civilizations (Southwest Asia, Egypt,
      Prerequisites: at least 12 hours of anthropology      India, China, Mesoamerica, Andean and North             ARC 385 Archaeology of Eastern Asia (3). A
      and permission of department chair.                   American).                                              survey of the archaeology of Eastern Asia, from
                                                                                                                    human origins to the historic period. Emphasis is
      ANT 596 The Minority Elderly (3). This course         ARC 325 Hunter-Gatherer Ethnoarchaeol-                  placed on the archaeological evidence from the
      focuses on the minority elderly including racial,     ogy (3). Hunting and gathering constituted the          emergence of East Asian complex societies and
      ethnic and lower income groups. Applicable            way of life for all humans during the majority of       culture history before the advent of European
      concepts and theories in social gerontology will      human evolution. This course is an examination          contact. Prerequisites: ARC 150 or permission
      also be covered. Prerequisite: nine hours of an-      of variability in adaptations of modern hunter-         of instructor.
      thropology, gerontology or sociology or consent       gatherer societies on a global scale, emphasizing
      of instructor. (Same as GTY 596.)                     subsistence, mobility, and social organization.         ARC 390 Geoarchaeology (3). Survey of geo-
                                                            The study of modern societies serves as the basis       logical methods and techniques used to answer
                                                            for understanding the adaptations of prehistoric        archaeological research questions. Topics covered
                                                                                                                    include sedimentary and geomorphic processes,
      ArchAEology                                           hunter-gatherers. Prerequisites: ANT 140 and
                                                                                                                    depositional environments, site formation process-
      (Arc)                                                 ARC 150 or consent of instructor.
                                                                                                                    es, environmental reconstruction, and radiometric
      ARC 150 Introduction to Archaeology (3). Sur-                                                                 dating techniques. One Saturday field trip will be
      vey of archaeology’s contribution to humankind’s      ARC 330 North American Archaeology (3).
                                                                                                                    required. Prerequisites: ARC 150 and GSC 101.
      knowledge of prehistoric and historic development     A survey of prehistoric North American Indian
                                                                                                                    (Same as GSC 390.)
      on a worldwide basis with emphasis placed upon        cultures from 15,000 B.C. through historic contact.
      discoveries rather than methods of archaeology.       Emphasis placed on archaeological cultural histo-
                                                                                                                    ARC 395 Archaeology of Religion (3). A sur-
                                                            ries of North America. Prerequisite: ARC 150.
                                                                                                                    vey of the archaeological evidence for religions
      ARC 300 Archaeological Method and Theory                                                                      throughout the world, from the earliest expressions
      (3). History theory, and methods of archaeology;      ARC 335 Forensic Archaeology (3). An
                                                                                                                    of spirituality to the modern world religions. Em-
      introduction to problems and techniques of field      examination of the methods used by forensic
                                                                                                                    phasis is placed on the archaeological evidence
      and laboratory research (mapping, recording,          anthropologists to determine the identity, age, sex
                                                                                                                    for recognizing religious expressions in general,
      artifact classification, reporting). Lectures and     and race of an individual from skeletal remains
                                                                                                                    and for the emergence of modern world religions.
      laboratory sessions. Prerequisite: ARC 150 or         using archaeological and anthropological field
                                                                                                                    Archaeological interpretations of New World,
      consent of instructor.                                and laboratory methods.
                                                                                                                    African, and Australian religions will be consid-
                                                                                                                    ered in comparative perspective. Fieldwork to a
      ARC 302 Archaeological Field Work I (1-5).            ARC 340 Archaeology of Africa (3). A survey             house of worship or cemetery will be required.
      Field training in the strategy and tactics of ar-     of the archaeology of Africa, from human origins        Prerequisite: ARC 150 or permission of instructor.
      chaeological survey and excavation; intensive         to the historic period. Emphasis placed on the          (Same as RGS 395.)
      instruction in the recovery and documentation         archaeological evidence of African culture history
      of cultural remains and data from archaeological      before the advent of European colonization.             ARC 402 Archeological Field Work II (1-
      sites. Six weeks continuous field work. Usually                                                               5). Advanced field training in the methods of
      offered only during summer session. May not           ARC 350 Public Archaeology (3). Introduction to         archeological survey and excavation; intensive
      be repeated. Prerequisites: ARC 150 and 300, or       the philosophy and mechanics of modern Cultural         instruction in the recovery and documentation
      consent of instructor.                                Resource Management (CRM), primarily from               of cultural remains and data from archeological
                                                            an archaeological perspective. Emphasis will be         sites, emphasizing individual initiative. One or
      ARC 304 Archaeological Laboratory Methods             placed on gaining a practical working knowledge         more weeks of continuous field work (gener-
      (1). Practical training in the organization and       of CRM legislation, regulation, and process, as         ally equivalent to one credit hour per every 37.5
      methods of archaeological laboratory procedures.      well as balancing business, research, ethics, and       hour week in the field.) Usually offered during
                                                            public interest issues. Two Saturday field trips will
180   Instruction in processing, cataloguing, preliminary
      analysis, and preparation for curation/archival       be required. Prerequisite: ARC 150 or permission
                                                            of instructor.
                                                                                                                    summer session or during breaks. May not be
                                                                                                                    repeated. Prerequisites: ARC 302, or consent
      storage of cultural remains and records resulting                                                             of instructor.
ARC 425 Advanced Archaeological Laboratory               ARC 556 Remote Sensing Applications in                  ART 290 Special Problems in Studio Art (1-
Methods (3). Advanced training in the analysis of        Archaeology (3). Course provides an overview            3). An independent problems course in studio
archaeological materials and writing of an archaeo-      of aerial and terrestrial remote sensing techniques     art for undergraduates majoring in art under the
logical study for professional presentation and          including applications of these methods to ar-          direction of a faculty member. The student must
publication. Prerequisites: ARC 300 and 304.             chaeological research. Emphasis will be placed          submit and receive approval of a detailed study
                                                         on terrestrial geophysical survey methods with          plan prior to registration. Prerequisites: consent
ARC 488 Cooperative Education/Internship                 hands on training in the use of instruments such        of supervising faculty member and permission of
(1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work         as ground penetrating radar and magnetic gradi-         department chair. Repeatable.
experience related to the career and educational         ometer. Weekend field trip to local archaeological
objectives of each student, for which he/she may         sites are required. Prerequisites: ARC 300; GSC         ART 298 Mid-Degree Review (1). Assessment
receive both academic credit and financial remu-         202, 512, or permission of instructor. (Same as         and enhancement of students’ progress through
neration. May be repeated for a maximum of six           GSC 556.)                                               weekly readings and discussions of issues in art
hours for any 488/489 course. Graded pass/fail.                                                                  and design, student writings about their own
Prerequisite: permission of instructor.                                                                          work, and a critique of their art by a jury of Art
                                                         Art And dEsign                                          and Design faculty. Undergraduate and transfer
ARC 489 Cooperative Education/Internship                 (Art)                                                   students pursuing a baccalaureate degree in art
(1-3). Continuation of ARC 488. A meaningful,            Note: All prerequisite courses apply to students        must register for ART 298 immediately following
planned, and evaluated work experience related                                                                   the completion of 30 credit hours in art. This is
                                                         in art programs. Students not majoring or minor-
to the career and educational objectives of each                                                                 a graded course.
                                                         ing in art may take any of the art courses listed
student, for which he/she may receive both aca-
                                                         if approved by the instructor and the Department
demic credit and financial remuneration. May be                                                                  ART 300 Drawing III (3). A conceptual study of
                                                         of Art and Design.
repeated for a maximum of six hours for any                                                                      both figurative and abstract approaches to drawing.
488/489 course. Prerequisite: At least three hours                                                               Six hours per week. Prerequisites: ART 101 and
                                                         ART 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed
of ARC 488 and permission of instructor.                                                                         201 or permission of instructor.
                                                         to assist students in their transition to Murray
                                                         State University. Content includes orientation to
ARC 498 (598) Museum Studies (3). This course                                                                    ART 303 Drawing IV (3). Exploration of drawing
                                                         the specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within
will provide a broad introduction to the field of                                                                ideas with emphasis on the development of per-
                                                         the academic program; university procedures,
museum work. Topics included will be the history                                                                 sonal expression. Six hours per week. Prerequisite:
                                                         policies, and resources; strategies for personal
and philosophy of museums; the social, economic                                                                  ART 300 or permission of instructor.
                                                         and academic success, and extracurricular op-
and political trends that shape museums; the staff-
                                                         portunities. Only one transitions course will
ing, management and financing of museums; and                                                                    ART 304 Drawing V (3). Continuation of ART
                                                         count toward graduation. Introductory seminar
the multiple functions of museums — collection                                                                   303. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 303
                                                         for all first-semester art majors, including transfer
and care of objects, exhibition design and interpre-                                                             or permission of instructor.
tation, educational programs, research activities        students. Graded pass/fail.
and public relations. (Same as HIS 498.)                                                                         ART 309 Introduction to Metalsmithing I
                                                         ART 101 Drawing I: Introduction to Drawing              (3). Metals in jewelry-making, holloware, small
ARC 500 Directed Studies (1-3). Selected topics          (3). Drawing with an emphasis on the development        sculpture, and object-making with an emphasis
in archaeology as arranged by the student and a          of visual perception. Six hours per week.               on design and craftsmanship. Six hours per week.
professor. May be repeated for up to nine hours.                                                                 Prerequisites: ART 101 and 112 or permission
Prerequisites: At least 12 hours of archaeology          ART 105 Studio Art for Non-Majors (3). A                of instructor.
and permission of department chair.                      studio course designed to introduce non-art ma-
                                                         jors to the processes of visual language and basic      ART 310 Introduction to Furniture Design I
ARC 501 History of Archaeological Thought                studio techniques that are fundamental to creating      (3). Three-dimensional design as it relates to ideas,
(3). A historical overview of the history and de-        images. Six hours per week.                             tools, materials and processes. The student designs
velopment of archeological thought from ancient                                                                  projects which integrate aesthetics and function
times to the modern world. Prerequisites: ARC            ART 111 Two-dimensional Design (3). Fun-                using a variety of materials and processes. Six
300 or permission of the instructor.                     damental elements and concepts of design. Six           hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 112 or permis-
                                                         hours per week.                                         sion of instructor.
ARC 505 Environmental Archaeology (4). The
study of past human interactions with the natural        ART 112 Three-dimensional Design (3). Fun-              ART 311 Metalsmithing II (3). Introduction to
world, including plants, animals, climate, and           damental elements and concepts of three-dimen-          several casting techniques as well as a continua-
landscapes. Three hours lecture and two hours            sional design. Six hours per week.                      tion of skills learned in ART 309. Six hours per
laboratory per week. Prerequisites: ARC/GSC                                                                      week. Prerequisite: ART 309 or permission of
390, or permission of the instructor.                    ART 121 Art Appreciation (3). Surveys the               instructor.
                                                         various aspects of the visual and functional arts
ARC 510 Advanced Archaeological Field                    and their relationship to human life and society.       ART 312 Metalsmithing III (3). Advanced
Work (1-5). Advanced field training in the               A variety of art forms from different cultures and      problems in metalsmithing with an emphasis in
strategy and tactics of archaeological survey and        historical periods will be studied. Does not count      ideation and conceptualization of content. Six
excavation. Intensive instruction in recovery and        toward art history minor. A student cannot have         hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 311 or permis-
documentation of cultural remains and data from          credit for both ART 121 and HON 161.                    sion of instructor.
archaeological sites, the organization and logistics
of archaeological field projects, and supervision        ART 201 Drawing II: Life Drawing (3). Figure            ART 313 Furniture Design II (3). Exploration of
of field crews. One or more weeks of continuous          drawing in varied media. Six hours per week. Pre-       functional design with an emphasis on develop-
field work (generally equivalent to one credit hour                                                              ment of personal direction in design. Advanced
                                                         requisites: ART 101 or permission of instructor.
per every 37.5 hour week in the field). Usually                                                                  methods of construction and techniques will be
offered only during the summer session. May be                                                                   taught. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 310
                                                         ART 211 Introduction to the History of Art I
repeated for up to five hours of credit. Prerequisite:                                                           or permission of instructor.
                                                         (3). A survey of the history of art from Prehistory
ARC 402 or permission of instructor.
                                                         through the Middle-Ages.
                                                                                                                 ART 314 Furniture Design III (3). Advanced
ARC 555 Archaeology of the Mid-South Region                                                                      problems in functional design. Chair and table
                                                         ART 212 Introduction to the History of Art
(3). An in depth study of prehistoric cultures of
the Mid-South Region. Prerequisites: ARC 300,            II (3). A survey of the history of art from the
                                                         Renaissance to the present.
                                                                                                                 construction will be emphasized in this class.
                                                                                                                 Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 313 or            181
330, 370, or permission of the instructor.                                                                       permission of instructor.
      ART 330 Introduction to Painting I (3). This            for publication. Six hours per week. Prerequisite:    ART 381 Printmaking III (3). Introduction to the
      course covers basics of color theory and materi-        ART 350 (ART 351 is also recommended) or              techniques and material of silkscreen, including
      als and techniques of painting in oil. Problems         permission of instructor.                             photo silkscreen. Composition, craftsmanship,
      stress the mastery of the medium first, and then                                                              technique and individual investigation are em-
      using it to render from observation. Six hours per      ART 356 The Art of Non-Western Cultures               phasized. Criticism and discussion. Six hours
      week. Required course for teacher certification.        (3). Study of the arts of Asia, Oceania, Africa       per week. Prerequisite: ART 380 or permission
      Prerequisites: ART 101, 111, and 201 or permis-         and the Pre-Western Americas. (Same as ANT,           of instructor.
      sion of instructor.                                     MCG, RGS 356.)
                                                                                                                    ART 382 Introduction to Photography I (3).
      ART 333 Painting II (3). Continuation of ART            ART 360 Introduction to Sculpture I (3). A            Includes various photographic processes, cameras
      330. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 330          study of form, space and surface through the          (structures, use, operation), films (types, use and
      or permission of instructor.                            development of 3-D sculptural assignments.            development) and print development (darkroom
                                                              Basic sculpture techniques involving additive         techniques). Both technical and compositional
      ART 334 Painting III (3). Continuation of ART           and subtractive methods. Studio and lecture. Six      aspects are stressed. Criticism and discussion.
      333. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 333          hours per week. Prerequisites: ART 111 and 112        Cameras are not supplied. Six hours per week.
      or permission of instructor.                            or permission of instructor.
                                                                                                                    ART 383 Photography II (3). Continuation
      ART 341 Fundamentals of Elementary School               ART 361 Sculpture II (3). Further exploration         and refinement of technical aspects presented in
      Art (3). Survey of the profession of art education      of form, space, and surface and an introduction       ART 382 with expanded emphasis on individual
      at the elementary school level. Provides students       to more advanced techniques and permanent             investigation. Discussion and criticism. Six hours
      with a combination of clinical and field experi-        materials. Studio and lecture. Six hours per          per week. Prerequisite: ART 382 or permission
      ences. Includes laboratory and lecture experiences      week. Prerequisite: ART 360 or permission of          of instructor.
      in elementary school art materials and teaching         instructor.
      methods. This course is designed for the art major                                                            ART 384 Photography III (3). Exploration of
      pursuing teacher certification in ART P-12. Six         ART 362 Sculpture III (3). A continuation             personal style and various photographic processes.
      hours per week. Prerequisite: EDU 103 or permis-        of ART 361. Studio and lecture. Six hours per         Discussion and investigation of historical and cur-
      sion of the instructor.                                 week. Prerequisite: ART 361 or permission of          rent photographic concerns and trends. Six hours
                                                              instructor.                                           per week. Prerequisite: ART 383 or permission
      ART 342 Fundamentals of Secondary School                                                                      of instructor.
      Art (3). Survey of the profession of art education      ART 370 Introduction to Ceramics I (3). Be-
      at the junior and senior high school levels. Provides   ginning ceramics introduces students to a broad       ART 385 Introduction to Cinematography
      students with a combination of clinical and field       spectrum of clay working including the making         (3). Techniques and criticism of motion pictures.
      experiences. A course similar to ART 341 with           of functional pottery, the vessel as metaphor, and    Basic format in Super-8 or videotape for both
      emphasis upon teaching of art on the junior and         clay as a medium for sculpture. Students learn hand   class and individual productions. Cameras are
      senior high school levels. This course is designed      building, wheel throwing, and glazing among other     not supplied.
      for the art major pursuing teacher certification        basic ceramic techniques. Design, craftsmanship,
      in ART P-12. Six hours per week. Field hours            and critical thinking are emphasized. Six hour per    ART 390 Seminar (3). Special projects and activi-
      required. Prerequisite: ART 341 and EDU 103             week. Pre- or Corequisite: ART 101 or 111 or 112      ties course involving problems utilizing special
      or permission of the instructor.                        or permission of instructor.                          talents of Department of Art faculty and guest
                                                                                                                    artists. Six hours per week. May be repeated up
      ART 343 Art Materials and Techniques for the            ART 371 Ceramics II (3). Continued develop-           to three times for credit.
      Classroom Teacher (3). A studio art education           ment of skills and concepts learned in ART 370
      course emphasizing visual learning in all cur-          along with the introduction of advanced techniques    ART 393 Special Topics in 2D (3). Changing
      ricular areas of the elementary classroom. This         including casting and kiln firing. Ideation, criti-   topics in two-dimensional studio art to be
      course provides prospective elementary classroom        cism and discussion are emphasized. Six hours         determined by the instructor and student interest.
      teachers, early childhood educators, and special        per week. Prerequisite: ART 370 or permission         May be repeated up to nine credit hours but only
      education teachers with the necessary art making        of instructor.                                        three credits may be counted toward the art area
      skills in a variety of media and techniques. Class                                                            core. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: permission
      sessions include demonstration, experimentation,        ART 372 Ceramics III (3). Continued develop-          of instructor.
      and manipulation of materials and techniques            ment of skills and concepts learned in ART 371
      leading to reflective decision-making as well as        with an emphasis on individual investigation,         ART 394 Special Topics in 3D (3). Changing
      critical assessment of finished work. Six hours         technical finesse, concept, content, criticism and    topics in three-dimensional studio art to be
      per week. Prerequisite: EDU 103.                        discussion. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART     determined by the instructor and student interest.
                                                              371 or permission of instructor.                      May be repeated up to nine credit hours but only
      ART 350 Introduction to Graphic Design I:                                                                     three credits may be counted toward the art area
      Digital Art (3). Introduction to the computer as        ART 379 Introduction to Printmaking I (3).            core. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: permission
      a tool for fine art and illustration. Students are      Introduction to the techniques and materials of       of instructor.
      taught computer techniques and approaches to            intaglio and relief printing, including collograph,
      creating art. Six hours per week. Prerequisites:        drypoint, etching and linoleum cuts. Composition,     ART 397 Introduction to Papermaking and
      ART 101 and 111.                                        craftsmanship, and technique are emphasized.          Bookbinding (3). Papermaking and bookbind-
                                                              Six hours per week. Prerequisites: ART 101,           ing processes, tools, equipment and materials.
      ART 351 Graphic Design II: Type and Image               111, 201.                                             Individual investigation, technical proficiency
      (3). Introduction to type and image production                                                                and design are emphasized. Six hours per week.
      for graphic design. Students learn traditional and      ART 380 Printmaking II (3). Introduction to the       Prerequisites: ART 101, 201, 111, 112 and 379 or
      computer based problem-solving techniques. Six          techniques and materials of lithography including     permission of instructor.
      hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 350 or permis-        stone, plate and photo lithography. Composition,
      sion of instructor.                                     craftsmanship, technique and individual investi-      ART 399 Professional Practices (1). A survey
                                                              gation are emphasized. Criticism and discussion.      of the resources, methods and skills employed by
      ART 352 Graphic Design III: Layout and In-              Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 379 or          artists in a range of professions.
182   troduction to Design Systems (3). Intermediate
      level study in graphic design focusing on layout
                                                              permission of instructor.
ART 403 Drawing VI (3). Six hours per week. Pre-        Criticism and discussion. Six hours per week. Pre-      ART 484 Photography V (3). Concentrated study
requisite: ART 303 or permission of instructor.         requisite: ART 433 or permission of instructor.         of selected photographic processes as related to
                                                                                                                student’s professional goals. Individual explora-
ART 404 Drawing VII (3). Six hours per                  ART 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-            tions are to culminate in a unified body of work such
week. Prerequisite: ART 403 or permission of            supervised thesis and/or project which allows           as a book or portfolio, to help prepare the student
instructor.                                             Honors Program students with a senior standing          for his/her senior show, and to facilitate entry into
                                                        to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper          graduate school or the workplace. Prerequisite:
ART 411 Metalsmithing IV (3). Advanced prob-            and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-         ART 483 or permission of instructor.
lems in metalsmithing. Six hours per week. Prereq-      mance is required.
uisite: ART 312 or permission of instructor.                                                                    ART 488 Cooperative Education/Internship
                                                        ART 451 Graphic Design IV: System Design                (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
ART 412 Metalsmithing V (3). Use of metals              (3). Advanced level design for multimedia and           experience related to the career and educational
in jewelry-making, holloware, small sculpture,          the Internet. Web page design and exploration of        objectives of the student for which he/she may
and/or object-making. Six hours per week. Prereq-       multimedia. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART       receive academic credit and possible financial
uisite: ART 411 or permission of instructor.            351, 352, or permission of instructor.                  remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum
                                                                                                                of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded
ART 413 Furniture Design IV (3). Advanced               ART 452 Graphic Design V: Senior Portfolio (3).         pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.
problems in functional design. Complex carcass          Terminal level study in graphic design involving
and drawer construction will be emphasized. Six         directed research, portfolio preparation and group      ART 489 Cooperative Education/Internship
hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 314 or permis-        evaluation. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART       (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
sion of instructor.                                     351, 352, or permission of instructor.                  experience related to the career and educational
                                                                                                                objectives of the student for which he/she may
ART 414 Furniture Design V (3). Advanced                ART 461 Sculpture IV (3). Selected problems             receive academic credit and possible financial
problems in functional design. Students will design     involved in the sculpture process. Opportunity          remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of
and build functional pieces of their choosing. Six      for directed study and studio work in a variety of      six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:
hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 413 or permis-        three-dimensional media or processes. Emphasis          permission of chair.
sion of instructor.                                     on developing a creative body of work. Studio and
                                                        lecture. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART          ART 490 Special Problems in Studio Art (3).
ART 415 Greek and Roman Art (3). Topics in the          362 or permission of instructor.                        An independent problems course in studio art for
history of the art and architecture of ancient Greece                                                           advanced undergraduates majoring in art under the
and Rome through the late Antique. Prerequisite:        ART 462 Sculpture V (3). A continuation of ART          direction of a faculty member. The student must
ART 211 or permission of instructor.                    461. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 461 or       submit and receive approval of a detailed study
                                                        permission of instructor. Studio and lecture.           plan prior to registration. May be repeated up to
ART 416 Medieval Art (3). Topics in the history                                                                 three times for credit. Prerequisites: consent of
of art from the Early Christian through the Gothic      ART 471 Ceramics IV (3). Continued develop-             supervising faculty member and permission of
period. Prerequisite: ART 211 or permission of          ment of the skills learned in ART 372, largely          department chair.
instructor. (Same as RGS 417.)                          through individually tailored and self-directed
                                                        assignments. Students will be responsible for           ART 491 Special Problems in Art History (3).
ART 418 Renaissance Art (3). Topics in the his-         all aspects of the production of their work, from       An independent problems course in art history
tory of the Renaissance. Prerequisite: ART 212 or       mixing their clay and glaze to loading and firing       for advanced undergraduates majoring in art
permission of instructor.                               kilns. Technical proficiency, criticism, discussion,    under the direction of the art history faculty. The
                                                        and investigation of historical and contemporary        student must submit and receive approval of a
ART 419 Baroque Art (3). Topics in the his-             ceramics will be emphasized. Six hours per              detailed study plan prior to registration. May be
tory of the art of the Baroque period, mainly in        week. Prerequisite: ART 372 or permission of            repeated once for credit. Prerequisites: consent
Europe. Prerequisite: ART 212 or permission of          instructor.                                             of supervising faculty member and permission
instructor.                                                                                                     of department chair.
                                                        ART 472 Ceramics V (3). Continuation of ART
ART 425 Art of Asia (3). A history of the art of        471. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 471          ART 492 Special Problems in Art Education (3).
India, Central and Southeast Asia, China, Korea,        or permission of instructor.                            An independent problems course in art education
and Japan. Prerequisites: Both ART 211 and 212,                                                                 for advanced undergraduates majoring in art under
or ART 356, or permission of instructor. (Same          ART 480 Printmaking IV (3). Advanced prob-              the direction of the art education faculty member.
as RGS 425.)                                            lems and further exploration of the techniques,         The student must submit and receive approval of
                                                        processes, tool and equipment related to intaglio,      a detailed study plan prior to registration. Does
ART 428 Nineteenth-Century Art (3). History             lithography, relief and silkscreen. Individual direc-   not count as a studio elective. May be repeated
of 19th Century Western art. Prerequisite: ART          tion, technical proficiency and personal expres-        up to three times for credit. Prerequisite: consent
212 or permission of instructor.                        sion are emphasized. Criticism and discussion.          of supervising faculty member and permission of
                                                        Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 381 or            department chair.
ART 429 Art from 1900 to 1960 (3). History of           permission of instructor.
Western art from 1900 to 1960. Prerequisite: ART                                                                ART 498 B.F.A. Practicum Exhibition (3). Final
212 or permission of instructor.                        ART 481 Printmaking V (3). Continuation of              project for the B.F.A. candidate taking an area
                                                        ART 480. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART          in art. Documentation (slides/video) and written
ART 430 Contemporary Art, 1960 to the Pres-             480 or permission of instructor.                        statement (which includes a description of the
ent (3). History of contemporary art from 1960                                                                  direction and influences upon the student’s work)
to the present. Prerequisite: ART 212.                  ART 483 Photography IV (3). Investigation               must accompany the practicum exhibition. Graded
                                                        of nontraditional and/or new technology related         pass/fail. Prerequisites: ART 298 or permission
ART 433 Painting IV (3). Advanced problems.             to light-sensitive image-making. Refinement             of instructor.
Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 334 or            of personal visual direction. Research into new
permission of instructor.                               techniques and/or visual trends in society and          ART 499 B.A./B.S. Practicum Group Exhibi-
                                                        industry. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART         tion (1). Final project for the B.A./B.S. candidate
                                                        384 or permission of instructor.                        taking an area in art. Written statement, including
                                                                                                                                                                        183
ART 434 Painting V (3). Exploration of painting
and ideas with emphasis on personal expression.                                                                 description of the direction and influences upon
                                                                                                                the student’s work, must accompany the work
      exhibited in the practicum exhibition. Graded          ART 528 Nineteenth-Century Art (3). History             ART 581 Printmaking VII (3). Advanced
      pass/fail. Prerequisites: ART 298 and senior year,     of 19th Century Western art. Students enrolled for      problems. Continuation of ART 580. Six hours
      the final semester of the student’s program of         graduate credit will be required to do additional       per week. Prerequisite: ART 580 or permission
      study, or permission of instructor.                    work. Prerequisite: ART 212 or permission of            of instructor.
                                                             instructor.
      Note: In 500-level studio and art history courses,                                                             ART 583 Photography VI (3). Concentrated
      students enrolled for graduate credit will be re-      ART 529 Art from 1900 to 1960 (3). History of           exploration of individual problems, culminating in
      quired to do additional work.                          Western art from 1900 to 1960. Students enrolled        a unified body of work such as a book or portfolio.
                                                             for graduate credit will be required to do additional   Individual expression, discussion and criticism.
      ART 501 Seminar: Special Topics in Art History         work. Prerequisite: ART 212 or permission of            Six hours per week. Prerequisites: two courses in
      (3). Changing seminar topics to be determined by       instructor.                                             photography or permission of instructor.
      the instructor and student interest. May be repeated
      up to nine credit hours. Prerequisite: ART 211 and     ART 530 Contemporary Art, 1960 to the Pres-             ART 584 Photography VII (3). Continuation of
      212, or permission of instructor.                      ent (3). History of contemporary art from 1960 to       ART 583. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART
                                                             the present. Students enrolled for graduate credit      583 or permission of instructor.
      ART 503 Drawing VIII (3). Concentrated ex-             will be required to do additional work. Prerequisite:
      ploration of drawing with emphasis on personal         ART 212 or permission of instructor.
      expression. Criticism and discussion. Six hours                                                                Astronomy
      per week. Prerequisite: two drawing courses or         ART 533 Painting VI (3). Concentrated explo-            (Ast)
      permission of instructor.                              ration of painting with emphasis on personal            AST 115 Introductory Astronomy (3). Descrip-
                                                             expression. Criticism and discussion. Six hours         tive examination of the objects of the solar system
      ART 504 Drawing IX (3). Continuation of ART            per week. Prerequisites: two painting courses or        and the stellar universe. A brief historical presen-
      503. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 503         permission of instructor.                               tation of the fundamental astronomical theories
      or permission of instructor.                                                                                   provides a basis for the examination. Multimedia
                                                             ART 534 Painting VII (3). Continuation of               presentations are used. Co-requisite: AST 116.
      ART 511 Metalsmithing VI (3). A concentrated           ART 533. Six hours per week. Prerequisite:
      exploration of the use of metals in jewelry-making     ART 533.                                                AST 116 Introductory Astronomy Laboratory
      and holloware. Six hours per week. Prerequisites:                                                              (1). Laboratory to accompany AST 199. Two hours
      two courses in metalsmithing or permission of          ART 551 Graphic Design VI (3). Additional               laboratory per week. Corequisite: AST 115.
      instructor.                                            refinement of graphic techniques, discussion and
                                                             criticism. An emphasis on individual investigation      AST 215 General Astronomy (3). A mathemati-
      ART 512 Metalsmithing VII (3). Continuation            concentrating on producing a unified body of work       cal study of the relative positions, motions, and
      of ART 511. Six hours per week. Prerequisite:          suitable for a portfolio or professional show. The      physical characteristics of celestial objects.
      ART 511 or permission of instructor.                   student and the instructor will design a program        Lectures supplemented by occasional visits to
                                                             of study directed toward this goal. Six hours per       the observatory. Not open to students with credit
      ART 513 Furniture Design VI (3). Advanced              week. Prerequisite: ART 452.                            in AST 115. Prerequisite: MAT 130 or approved
      problems in functional design. Students will design                                                            equivalent.
      and build functional pieces of their choosing. Six     ART 552 Graphic Design VII (3). Advanced
      hours per week. Prerequisites: two courses in          specialization; continuation of ART 551.                AST 216 Stars and Galaxies (3). Brief survey
      functional design or permission of instructor.                                                                 of radiation and spectra, geometric and radioac-
                                                             ART 561 Sculpture VI (3). Selected problems             tive properties of stars, multiple stars, variables,
      ART 514 Furniture Design VII (3). Advanced             involved in the sculpture process. Opportunity          star clusters and associations. Prerequisites: AST
      problems in functional design. Students will design    for directed individual study and studio work in a      215, MAT 250.
      and build functional pieces of their choosing. Six     variety of three-dimensional media or processes.
      hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 513 or permis-       Emphasis on developing a cohesive, creative             AST 220 Astrophotography (2). Involves tech-
      sion of instructor.                                    body of work. Studio and lecture. Six hours per         nique of photographing the lunar surface, the
                                                             week. Prerequisite: ART 462 or permission of
                                                                                                                     planets, interstellar media, and constellations as
      ART 515 Greek and Roman Art (3). Topics in             instructor.
                                                                                                                     well as studies of photographic materials.
      the history of the art and architecture of ancient
      Greece and Rome through the late-Antique. Stu-         ART 562 Sculpture VII (3). A continuation
                                                                                                                     AST 306 Astrometry (3). Survey of the basic
      dents enrolled for graduate credit will be required    of ART 561. Studio and lecture. Six hours per
                                                                                                                     measurements related to astronomical observing.
      to do additional work. Prerequisite: ART 211 or        week. Prerequisite: ART 561 or permission of
                                                                                                                     Plane and spherical coordinates celestial sphere,
      permission of instructor.                              instructor.
                                                                                                                     stellar positions, proper motion and time effects.
                                                                                                                     Prerequisites: AST 215, MAT 250.
      ART 516 Medieval Art (3). Topics in the history        ART 571 Ceramics VI (3). Concentrated ex-
      of art from the Early Christian through the Gothic     ploration of selected ceramic processes with
                                                                                                                     AST 316 Introductory Astrophysics and Space
      period. Students enrolled for graduate credit will     emphasis on personal expression. Six hours per
                                                                                                                     Physics (3). Introduction to astrophysics and space
      be required to do additional work. Prerequisite:       week. Prerequisites: two courses in ceramics or
                                                                                                                     physics. Space physics is concerned with under-
      ART 211 or permission of instructor.                   permission of instructor.
                                                                                                                     standing the environment between the sun and the
                                                                                                                     earth’s upper atmosphere. Topics include coronal
      ART 518 Renaissance Art (3). History of the            ART 572 Ceramics VII (3). Continuation of ART
                                                                                                                     mass ejections, the solar wind, magnetospheric
      art of the Renaissance. Students enrolled for          571. Six hours per week. Prerequisite: ART 571
                                                                                                                     storms, and auroral precipitation. Astrophysics
      graduate credit will be required to do additional      or permission of instructor.
      work. Prerequisite: ART 212 or permission of                                                                   is the study of planetary system formation and
      instructor.                                            ART 580 Printmaking VI (3). Advanced prob-              evolution, stellar structure and evolution, galactic
                                                             lems. Concentrated study of selected printmaking        structure, and cosmology. Phenomena of interest
      ART 519 Baroque Art (3). History of the art of         processes with emphasis on personal expression.         include quasars, black holes, supernovas, and
      the Baroque period, mainly in Europe. Students         Individual direction and technical proficiency are      the cosmic microwave background radiation.
      enrolled for graduate credit will be required to       emphasized. Criticism and discussion. Six hours         Prerequisites: PHY 140 and 255. Co-requisite:
      do additional work. Prerequisite: ART 212 or           per week. Prerequisites: two advanced courses in        PHY 370 or PHY 580; or consent of instructor.
184   permission of instructor.                              printmaking or permission of instructor.                (Same as PHY 316.)
AST 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-             developing cancer. Topics will include basic cell,     BIO 229 Human Physiology (3). A study of
supervised thesis and/or project which allows            tumor, and human biology, the different strategies     mammalian physiology with emphasis on humans.
Honors Program students with a senior standing           the health care system employs to detect, attack,      Three hours lecture per week. Concurrent enroll-
to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper           and defeat cancer, and risk factor assessment.         ment in BIO 230 is suggested but not required.
and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-                                                                 Course may not be counted toward the biology
mance is required.                                       BIO 112 Field Biology (4). Consists of study and       major. Prerequisite: BIO 227 and BIO 228.
                                                         identification of plants and animals with emphasis
AST 515 Special Topics (1-3). This course is             on those common to this area. Ecological and           BIO 230 Human Physiology Laboratory (1).
designed to fulfill special needs not met by other       environmental aspects of living organisms are          Experimental approach to the study of human
courses. It may be a lecture or seminar course.          stressed. Four hours laboratory per week plus          systems physiology. Course may not be counted
Prerequisite: consent of instructor.                     required Saturday field trips. (Spring semester)       toward the biology major. Prerequisites: Concur-
                                                                                                                rent enrollment or previous completion of BIO
                                                         BIO 115 The Cellular Basis of Life (3). An intro-      229 with a passing grade.
BusinEss And mArkEting                                   duction to the concepts and foundations of modern
EducAtion (BEd)                                          biology. Intended to familiarize students with the     BIO 290 Biomedical Research I (2). The student
BED 510 Methods and Materials-Teaching                   mechanisms and terminology of biology at the           will be involved in biomedical research with a fac-
Business/Marketing Education Subjects (3). A             cellular level, the topics presented and discussed     ulty member who agrees to direct them. The student
required course for business/marketing students          act as a framework for successful succession into      will support the research of advanced students and
emphasizing the latest methods and materials for         higher level biology courses. Emphasis is placed       their mentor and assist with experiments. In the
teaching business and marketing subjects. Must           on the investigative methods used by biologists        process the student will be introduced to research
be completed before doing student teaching. Field        leading to our current understanding of biological     and learn basic techniques. A minimum of 4 hours
experience required. Field trips may be required.        chemistry, cellular processes, cell interactions,      per week of research is expected. Prerequisites:
Prerequisite: CTE 503 or EDU 303.                        genes and DNA technology.                              admission into the biomedical sciences program
                                                                                                                and permission from a research mentor.
BED 595 Special Problems (3). Prerequisite:              BIO 120 Scientific Etymology (1). A systematic
consent of instructor.                                   study of the Latin and Greek origins of selected       BIO 300 Introductory Microbiology (4). An
                                                         words. One lecture per week. (Fall)                    introductory survey in general microbiology.
                                                                                                                Special emphasis is given to the study of the
Biology                                                  BIO 154 Dendrology (3). Principles and art of          prokaryote microorganisms both in laboratory and
(Bio)                                                    identification of trees and shrubs in both summer      lecture. Three hours of lecture and three hours of
BIO 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed to           and winter conditions. (Fall)                          laboratory per week. Prerequisites: Eight hours of
assist students in their transition to Murray State                                                             chemistry and eight hours of biology.
University. Content includes orientation to the          BIO 216 (116) Biological Inquiry and Analysis
specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within the        (4). An inquiry-based introduction to concepts         BIO 305 Introduction to Evolutionary Prin-
academic program; university procedures, poli-           in biology. Research-oriented activities will          ciples (3). Study of the theory of organic evolution
cies, and resources; strategies for personal and         emphasize the skills and attitudes necessary for       including history, evidence, patterns, mechanisms
academic success, and extracurricular opportuni-         understanding and conducting scientific inquiry.       and implications for humans. Prerequisite: Intro-
ties. Only one transitions course will count toward      Three hours of lecture and two hours of labora-        ductory course in biology. (Fall, even years)
graduation. Required of all entering freshmen.           tory per week.
Graded pass/fail. (Fall only)                                                                                   BIO 308 Ethics in Biology (3). A comprehensive
                                                         BIO 220 Clinical Terminology (1). A study of           study of current ethical issues in biology, including
BIO 100 Introductory Biology Laboratory                  the terms, symbols, and abbreviations common           topics in genetics and biotechnology, reproductive
(1). Laboratory work for a non-majors general            to the clinically-oriented health professions.         technology, species conservation, use of natural
biology course. Open only to transfer students           Prerequisites: BIO 120 and eight hours of biol-        resources, and medicine and human/nonhuman
with three hours of non-majors general biology           ogy. (Spring)                                          interests. Understanding and application of
without a laboratory. Consent of biology chair-                                                                 value-choices and ethics is emphasized. One
person is required.                                      BIO 221 Zoology: Animal Form and Function              three-hour lecture per week. Prerequisites: BIO
                                                         (4). A study of the animal kingdom with emphasis       115 and 216. (Spring)
BIO 101 Biological Concepts (4). Biological              on evolutionary and ecological relationships of
principles are examined in an active learning mode.      animal groups, vertebrate anatomy and physiology,      BIO 320 Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy
This course relates the significance of biology to       and evolutionary concepts. Three hours of lecture      (5). Dissection and study of representative chor-
individuals and society and establishes that this        and three hours of laboratory per week.                date systems with emphasis on the anatomy and
body of knowledge underpins agriculture, medi-                                                                  evolution of fishes, amphibians, reptiles, birds,
cine, and environmental management. Laboratory           BIO 222 Botany: Plant Form and Function (4).           and mammals. May require additional laboratory
required. (Each semester)                                A study of the evolution, anatomy, morphology,         supplies fee. Eight hours of class per week. Pre-
                                                         physiology, classification, and life cycles of major   requisites: BIO 115, 216, and 221 or permission
BIO 103 Saving Planet Earth (3). A study of the          divisions of the plant kingdom. Three hours of         of instructor. (Spring)
problems faced by humans on the Earth, including         lecture and three hours of laboratory per week.
human population growth, over-exploitation of                                                                   BIO 321 Cell Biology: Mechanisms (3). A de-
natural resources, habitat destruction and extinc-       BIO 227 Human Anatomy Lecture (2). Basic               tailed consideration of biological systems, their
tion. The philosophical, ethical, and scientific basis   morphology of the human body. Cannot be applied        properties and interrelationships. Cellular and
of these problems and their solutions will be dis-       toward a biology major. Prerequisites: BIO 101 or      molecular biology are emphasized. Three lectures
cussed. The course will also explore the potential       BIO 115 and 216 (BIO 221 may be substituted).          per week. Prerequisites: BIO 115, 216, 221, and
for humans to live in a sustainable fashion on the       Corequisite: BIO 228.                                  222 and two semesters of chemistry or permission
planet, and emphasize the social responsibility and                                                             of instructor. (Fall)
civic engagement required to do so.                      BIO 228 Human Anatomy Laboratory (2). The
                                                         basic morphology of the human body. Four hours         BIO 322 Animal Physiology (4). Introductory
BIO 109 Biology of Cancer (3). The exploration           laboratory per week. Cannot be applied toward a        study of animal physiology. The organ and systems
into the myths and facts of the biology of cancer        biology major. Prerequisite: BIO 101 or BIO 115        approach is used to compare animals. Emphasis
and how various physical, genetic, environmental,
and lifestyle factor influence one’s chances of
                                                         and 216 or BIO 221. Corequisite: BIO 227.              on vertebrates and certain invertebrates. Three
                                                                                                                lectures and three hours laboratory per week.
                                                                                                                                                                        185
      Prerequisites: Two semesters biology and two           research group. A minimum of 6 hours per week           ports. Each student will review and summarize at
      semesters chemistry; BIO 321 recommended.              of research is expected. Prerequisites: admission       least one research article from approved refereed
      (Fall)                                                 into the biomedical sciences program, permission        journals in the field. Prerequisites: BIO 227 and
                                                             from a research mentor, and completion of BIO           228 or EXS 250, BIO 229 and 230 or consent of
      BIO 323 Cell Biology: Systems (3). Discussion of       290 and BIO 388.                                        the instructor. (Same as EXS 450).
      the modern concepts of cell biology as applied to
      cell interactions in multi-cellular organisms. Pre-    BIO 420 Vertebrate Embryology (4). Compara-             BIO 460 Principles of Biomathematics (3). The
      requisites: BIO 115, 216, 222, and two semesters       tive, developmental anatomy of the vertebrates          study of biological and mathematical models is
      of chemistry or permission of instructor.              with emphasis on the embryological development          united in this research-based course. A variety of
                                                             of humans. Two lectures and four hours labora-          quantitative biological models and their underly-
      BIO 325 Biological Anthropology (3). The bio-          tory per week. Prerequisite: BIO 320. BIO 321           ing mathematics are studied. Students engage in
      logical nature of man. A survey of man’s physical      recommended. (On demand)                                research and communicate their results. Labora-
      origin, his primate background and his evolution.                                                              tory experiences and short-distance field trips are
      Cultural association with fossil evidence and          BIO 421 Vertebrate Histology (4). A course              required. Prerequisites: BIO 216 and MAT 250 or
      concepts of race. (On demand)                          designed for the identification and comparative         consent of instructor. (Same as MAT 460.)
                                                             study of cells, tissues, and organs of representative
      BIO 330 Principles of Ecology (4). An introduc-        mammals. Two lectures and four hours laboratory         BIO 467 General Parasitology (4). A study
      tion to the fundamental concepts of ecology as they    per week. Prerequisite: BIO 320. (Spring)               of the principles of parasitology, including the
      pertain to plants and animals, including humans.                                                               morphology, taxonomy, life history and ecology
      Emphasis will be placed on the basic principles        BIO 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-            of parasites. Laboratory will involve identification
      of evolutionary, population, community, and            supervised thesis and/or project which allows
                                                                                                                     of important parasite groups, methods for host
      ecosystem ecology. Three lectures and two hours        Honors Program students with a senior standing
                                                                                                                     examination, diagnosis, and microtechniques. Two
      laboratory per week. Prerequisites: BIO 115, 216,      to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper
                                                                                                                     hours of lecture and four hours of laboratory per
      221, and 222 or permission of instructor.              and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-
                                                                                                                     week. Prerequisite: BIO 221. (Fall)
                                                             mance is required.
      BIO 333 Genetics (4). An introduction to mo-                                                                   BIO 483 Undergraduate Teaching Methods I
      lecular and classical genetics with laboratory         BIO 438 Biomedical Research IV (4). The stu-
                                                                                                                     (3). Designed for students interested in teaching
      experiments involving various organisms used           dent will be involved in biomedical research with
                                                                                                                     in the life sciences, especially students working
      extensively in genetic studies. Three hours of         faculty members who agree to direct them. The
                                                             student will work on a project under the direction      towards teaching certification. The course provides
      lecture and three hours of laboratory per week.                                                                students with the opportunity to learn and apply
      Prerequisites: BIO 115, 216, and 221.                  of the research mentor. The student will write a
                                                             research proposal including background informa-         teaching techniques in the classroom under the
                                                             tion, specific aims and methods to be turned in         direct supervision of a faculty member. Teach-
      BIO 350 Systematic Botany (4). Discussion of                                                                   ing experiences are arranged individually with a
      the vascular plants with emphasis on classifica-       near the end of the semester. The project will be
                                                             initiated and a progress report will be submitted at    faculty member. (A maximum of 3 credit hours
      tion and phylogeny. Laboratory and field studies                                                               total from BIO 483, 484, 491, 492, 493 and 494
                                                             the conclusion of the semester. A minimum of 8
      of the vascular plants of West Kentucky focusing                                                               may be used toward the minimum requirements for
                                                             hours per week of research is expected. Research
      on their identification, habitats, distribution and                                                            the biology major or minor.) Prerequisite: junior
                                                             with a mentor other than the mentor used in BIO
      ecological role in this region. Prerequisite: BIO                                                              or senior standing as a major within the College
                                                             388 is encouraged. Credit for this course will be
      222. (Fall, odd years)                                                                                         of Science and permission of the instructor and
                                                             offered in the summer to biomedical science stu-
                                                             dents who are conducting off-campus research at         academic advisor.
      BIO 380 Wildlife Techniques (4). A survey and
                                                             an affiliated research site. Prerequisites: admission
      application of methods and techniques used in                                                                  BIO 484 Undergraduate Teaching in Biology
                                                             into the biomedical sciences program, permission
      wildlife management; examples — biotelemetry,                                                                  (4). Designed for students interested in teaching
                                                             from a research mentor, and completion of BIO
      live trapping, etc. Three hours of lecture and three                                                           in the life sciences, especially students working
                                                             290 and BIO 388.
      hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisites: BIO                                                               towards teaching certification. The course provides
      221, 222 and 330. (Fall, odd years)                                                                            students with the opportunity to learn and apply
                                                             BIO 439 Biomedical Research V (4). The student
                                                             will be involved in biomedical research with            teaching techniques in the classroom under the
      BIO 388 Biomedical Research II (3). The stu-
                                                             faculty members who agree to direct them. The           direct supervision of a faculty member. Teach-
      dent will be involved in biomedical research with
                                                             student will work on a project under the direction      ing experiences are arranged individually with a
      faculty members who agree to direct them. The
                                                             of the research mentor. The student will continue       faculty member. (A maximum of 3 credit hours
      student will work on a project under the direction
                                                             the project initiated in BIO 438. The student will      total from BIO 483, 484, 491, 492, 493 and 494
      of the research mentor. The student will write a
                                                             submit a research paper with an introduction,           may be used toward the minimum requirements for
      research proposal including background informa-
                                                             results and discussion, and methods, and make           the biology major or minor.) Prerequisite: junior
      tion, specific aims and methods to be turned in
                                                             an oral presentation to the biomedical research         or senior standing as a major within the College
      near the end of the semester. The project will be
                                                             group. A minimum of 8 hours per week of research        of Science and permission of the instructor and
      initiated and a progress report will be submitted
      at the conclusion of the semester. A minimum of        is expected. Credit for this course will be offered     academic advisor.
      6 hours per week of research is expected. Prereq-      in the summer to biomedical science students
      uisites: admission into the biomedical sciences        who are conducting off-campus research at an            BIO 488 Cooperative Education/Internship
      program, permission from a research mentor, and        affiliated research site. Prerequisites: admission      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
      completion of BIO 290.                                 into the biomedical sciences program, permission        experience related to the career and educational
                                                             from a research mentor, and completion of BIO           objectives of the student for which he/she may
      BIO 389 Biomedical Research III (3). The stu-          290 and BIO 438.                                        receive academic credit and possible financial
      dent will be involved in biomedical research with                                                              remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum
      faculty members who agree to direct them. The          BIO 450 Exercise Physiology (3). Students will          of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded
      student will work on a project under the direction     become acquainted with general concepts in ex-          pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.
      of the research mentor. The student will continue      ercise physiology. Some topics to be included are
      the project initiated in Biomedical Research II.       cardiovascular function, neural control, musculo-       BIO 489 Cooperative Education/Internship
      The student will submit a research paper with an       skeletal responses, and respiratory function. Lab       (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work

186   introduction, results and discussion, and methods,
      and make an oral presentation to the biomedical
                                                             activities will be integrated. Students will collect
                                                             data, compile results and complete laboratory re-
                                                                                                                     experience related to the career and educational
                                                                                                                     objectives of the student for which he/she may
receive academic credit and possible financial          BIO 511 Cell Metabolism (4). Cellular metabo-          Students will search bioinformatic data sources,
remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of          lism including photosynthesis, respiration, and        retrieve and edit data, and perform computer
six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:       the synthesis of lipids and proteins. Emphasis is      analysis on protein, DNA, and morphological
permission of chair.                                    placed on enzymatic mechanisms and metabolic           data. Underlying biological processes will also
                                                        pathways. Two lectures and four hours laboratory       be discussed. Three hours lecture and two hours
BIO 491 Undergraduate Research I (1). Re-               per week. Prerequisites: BIO 321 and CHE 530.          computer lab per week. Prerequisite: BIO 333
search projects arranged individually with faculty      (On demand)                                            (Genetics).
members who agree to direct the research. A writ-
ten plan of research must be filed with the chair       BIO 512 Microscopy and Microtechniques                 BIO 533 Molecular Genetics (3). A lecture course
within two weeks of the beginning of the semester.      (4). Techniques in bright field, phase contrast,       which involves discussions of general concepts
Normally restricted to juniors and seniors. (A          interference contrast, and photo microscopy are        of DNA structure, replication and translation.
maximum of three credit hours total from BIO 483,       emphasized. Standard methods in fixation, embed-       Current concepts in bacterial and bacteriophage
484, and BIO 491, 492, 493 and 494 may be used          ding, microtomy, and staining of specimens are         genetics, such as gene transfer, recombination,
toward the minimum requirements for the biology         covered. Darkroom techniques for the biological        gene regulation, and recombinant DNA technol-
major or minor.) (Available year round)                 sciences are also included. Prerequisites: BIO 221     ogy will be examined. Prerequisites: BIO 300 and
                                                        and 222. (On demand)                                   333, or consent of instructor. (Spring)
BIO 492 Undergraduate Research II (2).
                                                        BIO 514 Scanning Electron Microscopy (4). This         BIO 534 Molecular Genetics Laboratory (3).
BIO 493 Undergraduate Research III (3).                 course is designed to teach students the theory,       The laboratory covers classical bacterial and viral
                                                        principles and applications of scanning electron       genetics such as transduction, conjugation, muta-
BIO 494 Undergraduate Research IV (4).                  microscopy (SEM). After a predetermined number         genesis, and mutant analysis by complementation,
                                                        of instructional hours, the student is expected to     as well as recently developed recombinant DNA
BIO 499 Senior Biology Seminar (1). The course
                                                        successfully complete a test which measures the        techniques. The student will get hands-on experi-
exposes biology students to various career options
                                                        competency of the individual in SEM operation.         ence in DNA and RNA purification, restriction,
through participation in the departmental seminar
                                                        Subsequently, the student is required to complete a    endonuclease mapping, cloning, and expression
series, provides a review of biological concepts
                                                        short research project utilizing SEM. Prerequisites:   of foreign DNA in E. coli and DNA sequencing.
through directed study, and provides an assess-
                                                        BIO 221 and 222. (Summer, on demand)                   These techniques and a clear understanding of the
ment of the department’s academic programs with
                                                                                                               processes involved in gene expression will equip
a nationally standardized test. Weekly seminar
                                                        BIO 521 Cell Biology Laboratory (3). An experi-        the student well for either a position in industry or
and/or discussion. Prerequisite: BIO 333, biology
major, and senior standing.                             mental approach to modern laboratory techniques        graduate study. Prerequisite: Previous or concur-
                                                        in Cell Biology. An emphasis will be placed on         rent BIO 533. (Fall)
BIO 501 Immunology (4). A discussion of im-             the mastery of common cellular and molecular
mune response, formation of antibodies, structure       techniques used in clinical, industrial and research   BIO 535 Watershed Ecology (3). The study of
of antibodies, antigen-antibody reactions, hy-          settings. Six hours of laboratory per week. Pre-       the movement of water through the environment
persensitivity, and allergic response. Laboratory       requisite: BIO 321. (Spring, odd years)                and its relationship to biotic systems. Areas
includes techniques and methods for production                                                                 emphasized include the hydrologic cycle and
and detection of antigen-antibody reactions. Two        BIO 522 Pathophysiology (3). Introduction              its influence on groundwater, lotic, and lentic
lectures and four hours of laboratory per week.         to physiological abnormalities in disease. For         systems; the effect of water on plant and animal
Prerequisite: BIO 300. BIO 321 recommended.             advanced students in, or headed for, careers in        communities; and the influence of human activity
(On demand)                                             health related fields. Four hours of lecture per       on watershed structure and function. Prerequisite:
                                                        week. Prerequisites: BIO 228 and 229, or BIO           BIO 330 or consent of instructor. (Same as GSC
BIO 504 Medical Cell Biology (3). A discussion          322, or equivalent. (On demand)                        535.) (Spring, even years)
of cell biology as related to the field of medicine
and clinical knowledge. Emphasis is placed on the       BIO 528 Neurobiology (3). Examines vertebrate          BIO 536 Evolution (3). A study of evolutionary
most recent applications of cellular and molecular      and invertebrate nervous systems at the cellular       concepts. Prerequisite: BIO 333. (On demand)
techniques used in the research, diagnosis and          and systems levels. Topics include: (1) cellular
treatment of clinical conditions. Considerations        processes of neurons and glial cells, (2) synapses     BIO 538 Animal Behavior (3). An introduction
will be given to a wide range of topics, includ-        and synapse formation, (3) sensory systems, (4)        to the principles of animal behavior. Ecological
ing cancer, neural regeneration, wound healing,         motor systems, and (5) learning and memory. Three      and evolutionary implications of animal behavior
aging, gene therapy, congenital deformation,            hours of lecture per week. Prerequisites: BIO 321      are emphasized. Prerequisite: BIO 330 or consent
AIDS and other prevalent disease states. Three          or 322 recommended. (On demand)                        of instructor. (On demand)
hours of lecture per week. Prerequisite: BIO 321.
(On demand)                                             BIO 529 Teaching Science Through Inquiry (4).          BIO 539 Animal Behavior Laboratory (1). An
                                                        Students will learn and apply current inquiry based    introduction to testing hypotheses in animal be-
BIO 506 Advanced Field Biology (4). For stu-            instructional methods and assessment strategies        havior. Ecological and evolutionary implications
dents who wish to learn the identification principles   to teach science. Students will also gain the basic    of animal behavior are emphasized. Three hours
and actual identification of living organisms.          data management and analytical skills necessary        of laboratory per week. Prerequisite: BIO 330 or
Course work will include a study of the ecological      to conduct action research. The course will follow     consent of the instructor; BIO 538 or concurrent
aspects of the various organisms and their distribu-    a workshop style format modeling inquiry based         enrollment.
tion. Techniques of teaching about nature will be       methods. A significant amount of independent and
emphasized. Prerequisite: junior or senior standing     group work is expected outside of class meetings.      BIO 540 Field Biometry (4). Students will learn
for science educations majors or graduate standing      Graduate students will develop, implement and          and practice descriptive statistics, experimental
for science teachers. (Summer)                          assess an inquiry based module outside of class.       design, regression, ANOVA, ANCOVA, and
                                                        Prerequisite: graduate student or admission to         data management. In contrast to other statistics
BIO 510 Cell Physiology (4). The study of the           teacher education.                                     courses, students will spend more of their time
life processes of the individual cell as related to                                                            in the field than in the classroom. Prerequisites:
structure. Particular emphasis is placed on current     BIO 530 Systematics and Bioinformatics (4).            Any field biology course, BIO 330, or consent
molecular aspects of biological mechanisms,             This course will focus particularly on systematics     of instructor.
including growth, cell division and macromo-            and phylogenetic analyses, although other bio-
lecular synthesis. Two lectures and four hours of
laboratory per week. Prerequisites: BIO 321 and
                                                        informatics-related topics such as genomics and
                                                        geographic information systems will be included.
                                                                                                                                                                       187
four hours of physics. (On demand)
      BIO 546 Stream Ecology (4). The interactions             and one afternoon of lab per week. Prerequisite:      BIO 587 Freshwater Biology (4). Study of the
      of stream organisms with each other and their            BIO 221. (Fall, odd years)                            aquatic organisms, their biology, distributions,
      abiotic environments will be examined. An area                                                                 and ecology in natural aquatic communities and
      stream will be used as an example for physical           BIO 572 Herpetology (4). A study of the tax-          habitats in Kentucky Lake, streams, springs,
      and chemical characteristics of a stream and             onomy, morphology and natural history of reptiles     and wetlands near the Hancock Biological Sta-
      adaptations of organisms to their environments.          and amphibians. Emphasis is placed on those spe-      tion. Aquatic organisms to be surveyed include
      One weekend field trip required. Prerequisite:           cies occurring in the central United States. Two      bacteria, algae, aquatic plants, invertebrates, and
      BIO 330. (Summer)                                        lectures and four hours of laboratory per week.       vertebrate animals. Includes two lectures and four
                                                               Prerequisite: BIO 330 or consent of instructor.       hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisite: BIO
      BIO 547 Aquatic Vascular Plants (4). A general           (Spring, odd years)                                   330. (On demand)
      survey of local aquatic flora, including freshwater
      algae, aquatic mosses, ferns and angiosperms.            BIO 573 Ornithology (4). Study of avian biol-         BIO 589 Reservoir Ecology (4). An examina-
      Particular emphasis is placed on the morphology,         ogy with emphasis on anatomy, physiology and          tion of the variation in chemical and biological
      taxonomy, ecology and economic importance of             classification of birds. Three lectures and two       phenomena that characterize river impoundments.
      organisms. Field work comprises an integral part         laboratory hours per week. Requires weekend field     Literature reading and discussion is followed by
      of the course. Two hours lecture and four hours          trip. Prerequisite: BIO 330. (Spring, even years)     1) learning techniques of observation to identify
      laboratory per week. Prerequisite: consent of                                                                  pattern and process in nature, and 2) designing
      instructor. (On demand)                                  BIO 574 Mammalogy (4). A study of the clas-           and conducting field experiments to assess cause
                                                               sification and biology of mammals. Identification     and effect relationships. (On demand)
      BIO 553 Field Botany (4). A survey of the flora          and collection of mammals, particularly those of
                                                               the central United States, will be emphasized in      BIO 595 Wildlife/Fisheries Internship (1-4).
      of West Kentucky and surrounding states. This
                                                               laboratory. Two lectures and four hours of labo-
      course should be of interest to anyone interested                                                              A practical experience/study situation where the
                                                               ratory per week. Some weekend and Saturday
      in the plants of the region. Emphasis will be placed                                                           student works a 40-hour week in the field under
                                                               field trips required. Prerequisite: BIO 330. (Fall,
      on field identification of common species, identi-                                                             the supervision of a wildlife biologist. Bimonthly
                                                               odd years)
      fication using keys, collection, and preparation of                                                            progress reports are required to be submitted to
      herbarium specimens, and general plant ecology of                                                              both the university staff and the wildlife biolo-
                                                               BIO 577 Population and Conservation Genetics
      the region. Prerequisite: BIO 222. (Summer)                                                                    gist. Students must have junior standing to be
                                                               (3). An advanced study of the theories of genetic
                                                                                                                     considered. (Summer)
                                                               change in populations. Emphasis will be placed
      BIO 561 Freshwater Invertebrates (4).                    on theoretical aspects of change in gene frequen-
      Functional anatomy, ecology and taxonomy of                                                                    BIO 596 Field Studies in Ecology (4). Two weeks
                                                               cies as well as practical applications in the field
      the freshwater invertebrates. Emphasis will be                                                                 or more will be spent living at a field site(s) study-
                                                               of conservation biology. Prerequisites: BIO 330
      placed on collection, preserving and identifying                                                               ing the ecology of a selected ecosystem(s) (e.g.,
                                                               and 333. (Spring, even years)
      invertebrates of this region. Two lectures and four                                                            tropical rainforest, coral reef, mangrove swamp,
      hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisite: BIO                                                                pine forest). Students will gain an understand-
                                                               BIO 578 Conservation Biology (4). An advanced
      221. (On demand)                                                                                               ing of the selected ecosystem’s structure and
                                                               study of the conservation of life at numerous
                                                               levels of organization. Emphasis will be placed       function, including the roles of human cultural
      BIO 562 Field Entomology (4). The study of               on modern empirical and theoretical studies of the    and economic influences. Studies are expected
      insect diversity in the field. Students become           maintenance, loss, and restoration of biological      to occur in geographic areas other than western
      acquainted with about 200 Families of insects            diversity, endangered species, and habitats. Three    Kentucky. (On demand)
      living in the terrestrial and aquatic habitats of        one-hour lectures and three hours of laboratory per
      the Midwest along with biotic and abiotic factors        week. Prerequisite: BIO 330. Fall, even years)        BIO 597 Topics in Advanced Molecular Biology
      underlying their distribution, abundance, and                                                                  (3). Taught from the current literature, this course
      dynamics. Each student conducts a small field            BIO 580 Principles of Wildlife Management             focuses on new topics in cell and molecular biol-
      project on some aspect of insect ecology, behavior,      (4). Application of ecological principles of man-     ogy. A combination of lecture and student semi-
      or natural history. Prerequisite: BIO 330.               agement of wild animals, wildlife agencies and        nars. Students taking the course graduate credit
                                                               their function in wildlife management; economic,      will be required to complete a library research
      BIO 563 Aquatic Entomology (4). The study of             social, biological and other values of wildlife.      paper. Prerequisites: BIO 533 and CHE 310, or
      the ecology, natural history, life cycles, taxonomy      Three lectures and two hours of laboratory per        consent of instructor. (On demand)
      and systematics of lotic and lentic insects. The class   week. Requires Saturday field trips. Prerequisite:
      will include several field trips to aquatic habitats     BIO 380. (Fall, even years)
      and the preparation of a working collection. Two                                                               BAchElor of intEgrAtEd studiEs
      hours lecture and four hours laboratory per week.        BIO 582 Fisheries Management (4). Ecology             (Bis)
      Prerequisite: BIO 330 or consent of instructor.          and management of freshwater fishes. Methods          Note: Credit with a BIS prefix counts only
      (Spring, odd years)                                      of fishery investigation will be emphasized. Three    toward the Bachelor of Independent Studies
                                                               lectures and four hours of laboratory per week.       (B.I.S.) degree.
      BIO 565 Biogeochemistry (3). Survey and                  Prerequisites: BIO 330. (Fall, even years)
      discussion of the scientific literature on global                                                              BIS 301 Portfolio Development (3). A study of
      cycles of carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus and man-          BIO 584 Wildlife Policy and Administration            the process of portfolio development for securing
      made chemicals with special emphasis on the              (4). Emphasis is placed on the management of          academic credit for college-level prior learning.
      biogeochemical and ecological processes that             natural resources with particular focus on fish       The process includes examining, identifying,
      affect terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems. The           and wildlife. Topics will include an overview of      describing and evaluating prior learning for col-
      course will focus on interdisciplinary themes that       natural resources agency structures and functions,    lege-level competencies and skills. Also included
      incorporate new research results form the fields of      the planning and management cycles, and ethical       is a study of the research techniques and skills
      biology, chemistry, and geosciences. Prerequisite:       public relations techniques for multiple-use man-     necessary to develop an acceptable proposal for
      junior or higher standing in biology, chemistry or       agement in the public domain. Prerequisite: BIO       the field of study project.
      geosciences. (Same as CHE/GSC 565.)                      330 or consent of instructor. (Spring, odd years)
                                                                                                                     BIS 302 Proposal Writing (3). The course
      BIO 570 Ichthyology (4). Natural history of              BIO 586 Limnology (4). A study of the interrela-      guides the student through the steps leading to
                                                               tionships of the physical, chemical and biological
188
      fishes, their systematics and some anatomical and                                                              a formal proposal for the B.I.S. field of study
      physiological relationships with the environment.        features of lakes and streams. Prerequisite: BIO      project, including annotated bibliography, research
      One weekend fieldtrip required. Three lectures           330. (Summer)                                         techniques, review of literature, and the formal
written project proposal. Prerequisites: admission       BPA 235 Records Management (3). A study of              BPA 499 Senior Seminar in Business (1). Seminar
to B.I.S. program, senior standing, and permission       the principles and concepts of records manage-          for students of business administration programs
of B.I.S. director.                                      ment including creation, use, maintenance, and          with a primary focus on preparation of seniors
                                                         destruction. The course includes consideration          for a variety of employment environments and
BIS 399 Seminar in Bachelor of Independent               of storage facilities, records classification, forms    professional development. Recommended for
Studies (3). Seminar for students in the Bachelor        and report control, protection of vital records,        students enrolled in their next to last undergradu-
of Independent Studies (BIS) program. Investi-           and micro-graphic and optical disk systems.             ate semester, but with approval could be taken in
gation and discussion of current issues in adult         Prerequisite: CSC 199 or working knowledge of           last undergraduate semester. Prerequisite: Senior
and distance learning. Topics include curriculum         database applications software.                         standing.
information in BIS program, job search process,
problems experienced by and subjects of interest         BPA 355 Information Systems and Decision                BPA 515 Communicating in an International
to adult students. Prerequisites: junior standing,       Making (3). This course is a brief overview             Business Environment (3). This course is de-
acceptance into BIS program, and consent of BIS          of information systems and the roles they play          signed to acquaint students with the challenges
advisor or instructor.                                   in support of decision making. Specific topics          of international business communication, provide
                                                         include information technology hardware and             guidelines for successful cross-cultural business
BIS 437 Senior Project (3-6). The course, usu-           software, business intelligence, database manage-       communication, and give practice in solving
ally taken along with a departmental directed            ment and data warehouses, e-commerce, decision          international business problems through the use
independent studies course, guides the student to        support systems, IT infrastructures and controls,       of the guidelines.
completion of the field of study project, which is a     and computer crime and forensics. A significant
baccalaureate senior thesis required for completion      component of this course also includes skill de-        BPA 521 CPS Review I (3). This course, which
of the Bachelor of Independent Studies degree.           velopment in spreadsheet and database software.         is team-taught, is designed to aid the professional
Prerequisites: admission to B.I.S. program, senior       A student may receive credit for only one of the        secretary in a comprehensive review. This review
standing, completion of two courses (six semester        following courses: ACC 308, BPA 355, or CIS             should be valuable to any professional secretary
hours) in research methodology or creative arts          307. Prerequisites: junior standing; ACC 200 and        and especially helpful to those secretaries pre-
appropriate to the project undertaken.                   201; CSC 199 or equivalent.                             paring for the Certified Professional Secretaries
                                                                                                                 Examination. Specifically covered in this section
                                                         BPA 360 Principles of Office Administration (3).        is a review of business and public policy, eco-
BusinEss And puBlic AffAirs                              A basic introduction to the field of administrative     nomics of management, and office procedures.
(BpA)                                                    management — the management of organizational           Graded pass/fail.
BPA 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed to           information. The principles of general manage-
assist students in their transition to Murray State      ment as applied to this field, basic concepts, and      BPA 522 CPS Review II (3). This course, which
University. Content includes orientation to the          terminology are major considerations. Prerequi-         is team-taught, is designed to aid the professional
specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within the        site: junior standing.                                  secretary in a comprehensive review. This review
academic program; university procedures, poli-                                                                   should be valuable to any professional secretary
cies, and resources; strategies for personal and         BPA 396 International Business Seminar (3).             and especially helpful to those secretaries pre-
academic success, and extracurricular opportuni-         Designed to give participants firsthand exposure to     paring for the Certified Professional Secretaries
ties. Only one transitions course will count toward      cultures and business practices outside the United      Examination. Specifically covered in this section
graduation. A College of Business and Public             States. The seminar includes travel, study, visits      is a review of environmental relations in business,
Affairs student (transfer or regular) who has not        to corporate and governmental offices, and other        financial analysis in mathematics of business, and
enrolled in and earned a total of 12 hours prior to      experiential assignments in various countries. At       communication and decision-making. Graded
his/her first semester at Murray State University        the instructor’s discretion, the seminar may focus      pass/fail.
must take Transitions. Graded pass/fail.                 on a specific topic or theme. May be repeated
                                                         once with advisor’s approval. Prerequisite: junior
                                                                                                                 BPA 595 Special Problems (3). Prerequisite:
BPA 140 Foundations of Business (3). An intro-           standing.
                                                                                                                 consent of instructor.
duction to the various functions of business such
as finance, management, marketing, personnel, etc.       BPA 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-
                                                                                                                 BPA 596 International Business Seminar (3).
Open only to students who have not completed a           supervised thesis and/or project which allows
                                                                                                                 Designed to give participants firsthand exposure to
business course above the 200 level.                     Honors Program students with a senior standing
                                                                                                                 cultures and business practices outside the United
                                                         to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper
                                                                                                                 States. The seminar includes travel, study, visits
BPA 200 Collegiate Leadership and Service                and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-
                                                                                                                 to corporate and governmental offices, and other
(1-2). Course introduces students to basic leader-       mance is required.
                                                                                                                 experiential assignments in various countries.
ship concepts and practices in business and public                                                               At the instructor’s discretion, the seminar may
affairs. Student skills in the area of leadership will   BPA 442 Business Ethics and Environments
                                                                                                                 focus on a specific topic or theme. This course
be enhanced through the use of class presentations,      (3). This course involves a study of modern and
                                                                                                                 includes an individual research project approved
discussion, freshman orientation responsibilities,       classical approaches to both business and personal
                                                                                                                 by the instructor.
and participation in Collegiate and University           ethics as well as the other major components of the
activities. This course may be repeated for a total      business environment: the political, international,
                                                                                                                 BPA 597 Commonwealth Business Seminar (3).
of three hours. A maximum of six hours credit may        legal, ecological, social and cultural environments.
                                                                                                                 A travel-study program that will allow university
be earned or scheduled from any combination of           This course also studies the principles and practices
                                                                                                                 students enrolled in Kentucky universities to be
GUI 251, 252, and 450 and BPA 200. Prerequisite:         of corporate governance. Prerequisites: LST 240,
                                                         MGT 350, FIN 330, MKT 360, and senior stand-            exposed firsthand to the business environment
consent of instructor.                                                                                           and practices in Kentucky.
                                                         ing. (Same as PHI 442.)
BPA 215 Business Communication (3). This
course is designed to acquaint the student with          BPA 488 Cooperative Education/Internship
                                                         (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work        communicAtion disordErs
the principles of business communication and
                                                         experience related to the career and educational        (cdi)
give him/her practice in solving business prob-
                                                         objectives of the student for which he/she may          CDI 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed to
lems through the use of written communications,
                                                         receive academic credit and possible financial          assist students in their transition to Murray State
research and report writing, and oral communica-
                                                         remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum             University. Content includes orientation to the
                                                                                                                                                                       189
tions. Prerequisite: ENG 105 or the equivalent.
                                                         of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded           specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within
                                                         pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.           the academic program; university procedures,
      policies, and resources; strategies for personal        encountered neurologic cognitive-communicative            CDI 548 Linguistics (3). Study of normal lin-
      and academic success, and extracurricular op-           disorders of adults. The major disorders included         guistic development and linguistic development
      portunities. Only one transitions course will count     are aphasia, apraxia of speech, dysarthria, demen-        of children with language disorders. Prerequisites:
      toward graduation. Graded pass/fail. (Same as           tia, right hemisphere syndrome and traumatic              CDI 205, 340, 345, and 472.
      EXS/HEA/NTN/REC 099.)                                   brain injury syndrome. The basic principles and
                                                              practices of assessment and intervention are intro-       CDI 550 Neuromuscular Disorders (3). The
      CDI 205 Introduction to Communication Dis-              duced. Prerequisites: CDI 325, 340, 345.                  study of pathology, etiology, diagnosis and
      orders (3). An introduction to the areas of speech-                                                               speech rehabilitation of cerebral palsy and other
      language pathology and audiology. An integral           CDI 451 Aural Rehabilitation (3). Study of                neuromuscular disorders.
      part of the course is observation of therapy with       psychosocial, educational, vocational and commu-
      speech, language, and hearing disorders.                nication implications of hearing impairment with          CDI 555 Audiometry (3). A lecture and labora-
                                                              emphasis upon intervention strategies. Includes           tory course designed to develop skill in admin-
      CDI 215 Clinical Phonetics (3). Application of the      clinical observation and/or practice. Prerequisites:      istering audiometric tests. Prerequisite: CDI 310
      informational and perceptual domains of phonetics       CDI 325 or 345 and CDI 405.                               or consent of instructor.
      in the clinical setting. Includes transcription using
      the International Phonetic Alphabet.                    CDI 452 Signing Exact English I (3). This course          CDI 572 Diagnostic Methods (3). In-depth study
                                                              serves as an introduction to Signing Exact English,       and practical use of contemporary tests used by
      CDI 292 Communication Disorders for Special             a form of manual communication used primarily             the speech-language pathologist. Includes formal
      Educators (4). A survey course of speech and            by children. The course includes study of manual          and informal evaluation procedures. Prerequisites:
      language acquisition, disorders and remediation.        communication and development of basic skills             CDI 325, 345, and 470.
      The course is specifically designed for the special     in finger spelling and signing.
      educator and classroom teacher and will center on                                                                 CDI 584 Communication Disorders of Aging
      information and remedial procedures particularly        CDI 465 Neuroanatomy and Physiology for                   (3). Course will include information relative to
      applicable to a classroom situation.                    the Speech-Language Pathologist (3). A study              the effect of communication disorders on the ag-
                                                              of the organization of tissues and gross structural       ing population and to acquaint the student with
      CDI 310 Anatomy and Physiology (3). Lecture             elements of the human nervous system and current          intervention techniques appropriate for the com-
      course dealing with the structure and functions         knowledge of the physiology of neural transmis-           municatively handicapped older person.
      involved in speech and the peripheral hearing           sion. The course emphasizes the significance of
      mechanism. Prerequisite: CDI 205 (may be taken          neural imaging technology for understanding               CDI 598 Directed Study: Communication
      concurrently).                                          the normal structure and function of the neural           Disorders (3). Available for students who want to
                                                              substrates for speech and language. Prerequi-             investigate special problems. Can be repeated up
      CDI 315 Speech Science (3). Study of speech             sites: senior status in communication disorders           to six credit hours. Prerequisites: senior standing
      sound production and perception. Prerequisite:          or permission of the instructor.                          and consent of instructor directing the study.
      CDI 310.
                                                              CDI 470 Pediatric Speech Disorders II (3). A
      CDI 325 Pediatric Speech Disorders I (3). De-           course dealing with assessment and treatment              civil/construction
      signed to provide fundamental knowledge of the          techniques appropriate to speech sound disorders.
      nature of speech disorders in children, including                                                                 EnginEEring tEchnology
                                                              This is an applied course and consists of reading,        (cEt)
      etiologies and characteristics as well as anatomi-      discussion, and guided practice as well as limited
      cal/physiological, linguistic and developmental                                                                   CET 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed to
                                                              lecture. Some activities will take place in the clinic.
      correlates. Prerequisites: CDI 215, 310, 340 and                                                                  assist students in their transition to Murray State
                                                              Prerequisite: CDI 325.
      admission to CDI program.                                                                                         University. Content includes orientation to the
                                                                                                                        specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within the
                                                              CDI 472 Pediatric Language Disorders II (3).
      CDI 340 Speech and Language Development                                                                           academic program; university procedures, poli-
                                                              A course dealing with assessment and treatment
      (3). A survey of speech and language acquisition in                                                               cies, and resources; strategies for personal and
                                                              techniques appropriate to child language disorders.
      children. Primarily a lecture course with required                                                                academic success, and extracurricular opportuni-
                                                              This is an applied course and consists of reading,
      clinical observation.                                                                                             ties. Only one transitions course will count toward
                                                              discussion, and guided practice as well as limited
                                                                                                                        graduation. Meetings with advisors, department
                                                              lecture. Some activities will take place in the clinic.
      CDI 345 Pediatric Language Disorders I (3).                                                                       personnel, service areas, and campus field trips
                                                              Prerequisite: CDI 345.
      Designed to provide fundamental knowledge                                                                         comprise the main involvement. Availability of
      of the nature of language disorders in children,                                                                  university resources is stressed with emphasis on
                                                              CDI 474 Elementary Clinical Skills (1-3).
      including etiologies and characteristics as well                                                                  personal needs. Graded pass/fail. (Fall)
                                                              Observation, shadowing of graduate clinicians,
      as psychological, linguistic, developmental and
                                                              or individual clinical assignment in communica-
      cultural correlates. Prerequisites: CDI 340 and                                                                   CET 199 Environment Science and Technology
                                                              tion disorders. May be repeated up to four hours.
      admission to CDI program.                                                                                         Concepts (4). Pollution assessment and control
                                                              Co-requisite: CDI 470 or 472. Prerequisite: CDI
                                                              325 or 345 or consent of instructor.                      introduction intended for general public aware-
      CDI 405 Audiology (3). An introduction to the                                                                     ness. Topics include basic environmental science
      field of audiology. Specific emphasis on basic                                                                    and ecological principles; population dynamics
      testing procedures and causes and types of hearing      CDI 480 School Services for Communication
                                                              Disorders (3). This course is an in-depth study of        and resource management; sampling and analytical
      loss. Clinical observation and practice are required.
                                                              roles and responsibilities of the speech-language         techniques; regulatory considerations; and water
      Prerequisite: CDI 310 or consent of instructor.
                                                              pathologist and speech-language pathology as-             treatment, air pollution control, solid waste han-
                                                              sistant practicing in the schools. Prerequisites:         dling, and hazardous waste management systems.
      CDI 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-
                                                              CDI 325 and SED 300.                                      Laboratory required.
      supervised thesis and/or project which allows
      Honors Program students with a senior standing
      to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper          CDI 482 Augmentative-Alternative Com-                     CET 280 Plane Surveying (3). Field and office
      and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-         munication (3). Introduction to assessment and            procedures necessary for measuring distances,
      mance is required.                                      intervention across the life-span with person with        elevations, horizontal and vertical angles. Bound-
                                                              severe communication disorders. The course will           ary and area calculations and basic construction
      CDI 440 Adult Disorders of Speech and Lan-              also focus on augmentative and alternative com-           applications of survey procedures. Care and use
                                                              munication techniques, including verbal and non-          of survey instruments. Two hours lecture and three
190   guage (3). Course is designed to provide the
      student with a solid foundation of the neurologic       verbal communication modalities. Prerequisites:
                                                              CDI 340 and 345.
                                                                                                                        hours lab. Prerequisite: MAT 130 and ITD 107.
      basis, causes, and characteristics of frequently                                                                  (Fall and Spring)
CET 282 Construction Methods and Equip-                 CET 353 Solid and Hazardous Waste Manage-             CET 482 Reinforced Concrete Design (3).
ment (3). A study of the production rates and own-      ment (3). Generation and remediation of solid and     Analysis and design of reinforced concrete beams,
ing and operating costs of construction equipment       hazardous wastes are examined. Transportation         columns, footings and one-way slabs using the
along with methods used in heavy and building           and recycling within legislative guidelines are       strength design method. Emphasis is placed on
construction. Prerequisite: MAT 130. (Fall)             studied. Waste management planning, recycling         the ACI Building Code. Prerequisites: CET 298.
                                                        technologies and risk assessment are also included.   (Spring)
CET 284 Sustainable Design and Construction             The course scope includes municipal, industrial
(3). Introduction to principles of sustainable design   and forest/agricultural solid waste generation.       CET 483 Construction Materials (4). Basic
and construction of residential and commercial          Prerequisite: ENT 286. (Spring)                       properties of materials used in construction
facilities. Topics include “green” building                                                                   concrete, asphalt, aggregates and timber. Design
fundamentals and certifications, landscaping,           CET 370 Route Surveying (3). Field and office         procedures, field control and adjustments. Three
energy, materials, indoor environmental quality,        practice in surveys needed for road construction      hours lecture and two hours laboratory. Prereq-
and economics.                                          and improvement. Computer mapping, prepara-           uisites: ENT 287. (Fall)
                                                        tion of digital terrain models, earth volume and
CET 298 Strength of Materials (4). A study of           mass diagram computation. Radial staking using        CET 484 Soil Mechanics and Foundations
internal stresses and physical deformations caused      electronic distance measurement and total station     (4). Mechanical and physical properties of soils
by externally applied loads to structural members.      surveying instruments. Methods of free position-      and their relations to engineering considerations,
Topics include normal and shearing stresses,            ing on the construction site. Prerequisites: CET      such as soil classification, permeability, shearing
stress and strain relationships, simple tension         280, MAT 230.                                         strength, consolidation, stress distribution, and
and compression of axial members, composi-                                                                    bearing capacity of soils. Introduction to the analy-
tion beams, inelastic bending, transverse shear         CET 380 Photogrammetry (3). A study of the            sis and design of shallow footings. Lecture and
stresses in beams, deflections, and elementary          fundamental methods of photogrammetry includ-         laboratory. Prerequisites: ENT 287. (Spring)
design of beams and shafts. Includes a laboratory       ing geometry of single photographs and terrestrial
investigation of mechanical properties of materials     photographs, planning the photographic mission,       CET 485 Land Use and Watershed Protection
and structural elements. Prerequisites: ENT 287         ground control for mapping, an introduction to        (3). Focuses on impacts of land use on receiving
and MAT 230.                                            analytic photogrammetry, stereo-photogrammet-         waters, storm water management, erosion control,
                                                        ric plotting instruments and photo interpretation.    stream bank restoration, and reclamation of dis-
CET 302 Structural Drawing (3). A study of              Prerequisites: CET 280, MAT 230. (Same as GSC         turbed lands. Two hours lecture and three hours lab.
methods and procedures used in architectural            380.) (Every other Spring)                            Some weekend field trips required. Prerequisites:
drawing and in graphical presentations of steel                                                               CET 280, ENT 286, and 382.
and concrete structures. Emphasis is placed on          CET 381 Boundary Surveying I (3). Field
structural drawing and detailing with special           surveys and computational procedures necessary        CET 486 Boundary Surveying II (3). Addresses
emphasis on detailing of structural steel and           for boundary retracement and land subdivision in      field surveys and computational procedures neces-
reinforced concrete members of buildings. Six           both metes and bounds and public lands states.        sary for land subdivision. Boundary retracement
contact hours. Prerequisite: ITD 107 or equiva-         Boundary law, subdivision ordinances, statutory       of state and municipal boundaries along with the
lent. (Spring)                                          requirement for boundary surveys. Two hours           colonial land system and Virginia/Kentucky land
                                                        lecture and three hours lab. Prerequisite: CET 280    grant systems will also be components of the
CET 310 Anatomy of Buildings (3). Study of              and MAT 230 or 250. (On demand)                       course. Two hours lecture and three hours lab.
the function, physical makeup, and working prin-                                                              Additional field exercises are required. Prereq-
ciples of various building systems, components          CET 385 Heavy Construction Cost Estimat-              uisite: CET 381.
and materials. Emphasis on the basic design             ing (3). Basic estimating procedures relating to
principles and interdependence of the structural,       quantity surveying, earthwork computations, and       CET 555 Environmental Regulatory Affairs (3).
utility and climate control systems. This course is     cost of labor and materials. CPM determinations       Laws and regulations pertinent to the management
designed to enhance the student’s knowledge of          of project durations and resources required for       of water and wastewater, hazardous and toxic
the total building process. Prerequisites: consent      construction. (Fall)                                  wastes, air contaminants, underground storage
of advisor. (Spring)                                                                                          tanks and other timely environmental issues are
                                                        CET 386 Building Construction Cost Estimat-           studied. General legal concepts, the relationships
CET 330 (341) Water Quality Technology I                ing (3). Estimating and bidding large construction    among industries and local, state, and federal
(3). Course of study includes fundamental design        projects with an emphasis on reinforced concrete      agencies, environmental audits and community
and operation of water treatment and reclamation        and structural steel work. Corequisite: CET 310.      right-to-know requirements are among the topics
systems. Topics include analyses of water and           (Spring)                                              included. Prerequisite: CET 341, 342 and 353.
wastewater characteristics, system design con-
forming to regulatory requirements, and related         CET 460 Geodesy (3). Basic elements of geo-           CET 585 Remediation Technology (3). Study
chemical, biological, and hydraulics concepts.                                                                includes process design and operations for biologi-
                                                        metric and physical geodesy. Geodetic direct and
Prerequisite: ENT 286.                                                                                        cal and physical/chemical systems used to remove
                                                        inverse. Data adjustment. Observations using
                                                                                                              organic and inorganic contaminants from soil and
                                                        the global positioning system. Two hours lecture
CET 331 Water Quality Technology II (3). A                                                                    groundwater. Prerequisite: CET 341.
                                                        plus three hours lab. Prerequisites: CET 381 and
continuation of CET 330 and includes fundamen-          MAT 308 or 330.
                                                                                                              CET 587 Sustainable Environmental Technol-
tal design and operation of water treatment and
                                                                                                              ogy (3). Course focuses on analysis and design of
reclamation systems. Topics include analyses of         CET 480 Construction Planning and Manage-             environmental systems that enhance sustainable
water characteristics, system design, and related       ment (3). Project management including planning,      development and conserve natural resources.
chemical, biological, and hydraulics concepts.          scheduling, supervision and emphasis on contracts     Topics include bioresiduals land application,
Prerequisite: CET 330.                                  and specifications. (Fall)                            natural treatment systems, life cycle analysis, and
                                                                                                              environmental economics. (Spring)
CET 342 Air Quality Technology (3). Ecosystem           CET 481 Structural Steel Design (3). Elementary
air chemistry and dynamics are stressed. The            structural analysis and design of tension members,    CET 589 Environmental Modeling (3). Com-
impacts of natural and human-derived pollution,         beams, columns and connections. Emphasis is           puter modeling of environmental/ecosystem
both indoor and outdoor, are studied. The impact        placed on the AISC specifications. Prerequisites:     phenomena including predictive impact of pol-
of regulations upon industrial production is also
addressed. Prerequisite: ENT 286.
                                                        CET 298. (Fall)                                       lution discharges and engineering hydrology will
                                                                                                              be stressed. Prerequisite: ENT 382.
                                                                                                                                                                      191
      chEmistry                                               CHE 202 General Chemistry and Qualitative             CHE 330 Basic Biochemistry (3). A basic course
      (chE)                                                   Analysis (5). A continuation of CHE 201 em-           surveying the chemistry and metabolism of car-
      CHE 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed             phasizing thermochemistry, solution chemistry,        bohydrates, proteins, lipids and nucleic acids, and
      to assist students in their transition to Murray        oxidation-reduction reactions, chemical kinetics,     the action of vitamins, hormones and enzymes.
      State University. Content includes orientation to       chemical equilibrium, acid-base chemistry, ther-      Three lectures per week. Credit for either CHE
      the specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within       modynamics, electrochemistry, and other selected      330 or CHE 530, but not both, can count toward
                                                              topics. Three lectures, two hours of laboratory,      a major or minor in chemistry. Prerequisite: CHE
      the academic program; university procedures,
                                                              and two hours of recitation per week. Prerequi-       210 or equivalent. (Spring only.)
      policies, and resources; strategies for personal
                                                              site: CHE 201.
      and academic success, and extracurricular op-
      portunities. Only one transitions course will count                                                           CHE 352 Basic Chemical Instrumentation
                                                              CHE 210 Brief Organic Chemistry (3). An               (4). An introduction to chemical instrumentation
      toward graduation. Graded pass/fail.
                                                              elementary course in organic chemistry for non-       and instrumental methods of analysis, including
                                                              majors emphasizing the nomenclature, properties       chromatographic, optical, and electrometric
      CHE 101 Consumer Chemistry (4). A brief                 and reactions of important classes of organic
      course in chemistry for those who plan to take                                                                techniques. Three lectures and one three-hour
                                                              compounds. Three lectures per week. Prerequisite:
      no more chemistry. Designed specifically to                                                                   laboratory period per week. Prerequisite: CHE
                                                              CHE 105 or 202. Credit for either CHE 106 or CHE
      satisfy the University Studies physical science                                                               305. (Fall only.)
                                                              210, not both, can count toward graduation.
      requirement. Explores social and cultural issues
      associated with science and technology to provide                                                             CHE 388 International Experience in Chem-
                                                              CHE 215 Organic Chemistry Laboratory (1).
      knowledge of resource conversion in a world             Two hours of laboratory per week to accompany         istry (3). A short-term (10-14 days of travel)
      dominated by an information explosion. Considers        CHE 210 which is a co-requisite.                      study abroad experience highlighting selected
      the impact of chemistry and technology on history,                                                            historical and modern contributions to chemistry
      art, and business. Three lectures and two hours of      CHE 303 Strategies of Teaching Chemistry (3).         from another country and culture. The course
      laboratory per week.                                    An investigation of the skills of teaching which      includes pre- and post-travel meetings, lectures,
                                                              are applicable at any grade level. Emphasis is        readings, and discussions. Graded pass/fail. This
      CHE 105 Introductory Chemistry I (4). A                 placed on the application of teaching strategies in   course may be repeated for up to nine hours of
      beginning course in general chemistry designed          classroom and laboratory settings. The course will    credit. These hours will not count toward either
      for students who plan to take additional chemistry      also include coverage of classroom management         the major or minor. Prerequisite: CHE 105 and
      courses. Three lectures and two hours of labora-        strategies, discipline techniques, and curriculum     201 or consent of the instructor.
      tory per week. Not applicable to major or minor.        development as a function of instruction. Labora-
      Math ACT score of at least 20 or MAT 105 (or            tory experiences required. Prerequisite: successful   CHE 400 Chemical Literature (1). An introduc-
      the equivalent) strongly advised.                       completion of EDU 103, chemistry major, and           tion to methods of locating and accessing chemical
                                                              admission to Teacher Education.                       information, both in the library and through on-line
      CHE 106 Introductory Chemistry II (4). A                                                                      searching of computerized chemical databases;
      continuation of CHE 105 emphasizing elemen-             CHE 305 Analytical Chemistry (5). Funda-              instruction in the writing of technical papers
      tary organic chemistry and biochemistry. Three          mental principles and techniques of volumetric        and reports. Half-semester course; one two-hour
      lectures and two hours of laboratory per week. Not      and gravimetric analysis. Two lectures and two        lecture per week. Prerequisite: CHE 320.
      applicable to major or minor. Prerequisite: CHE         three-hour laboratory periods per week. Prereq-
      105. Credit for either CHE 106 or CHE 210, not          uisite: CHE 202.                                      CHE 401 Ethics for the Chemist (1). An ethics
      both, can count toward graduation.                                                                            course designed primarily for chemistry majors
                                                              CHE 312 Organic Chemistry I (5). Introduc-            that explores, discusses and debates ethical
                                                              tion to organic chemistry, including structure,       issues faced by scientists. Half-semester course;
      CHE 111 Essentials of Chemistry and
                                                              properties, methods of preparation, and selected      one 2 hour lecture/discussion per week.
      Biochemistry (5). A course that covers the
                                                              reactions of aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons
      essentials of general chemistry, organic chemistry
                                                              and halides. Stereochemistry and basic reaction       CHE 403 Basic Physical Chemistry (4). Broad
      and biochemistry. Three hours of lecture, 2 hours       mechanisms are also included. An introduction
      of recitation, and 2 hours of laboratory work per                                                             coverage of physical chemistry with inclusion
                                                              to the theory of modern instrumental techniques       of biological applications. Topics included are
      week. Not applicable to major or minor. Math            (GC, IR, NMR, GC/MS) used in the identification
      ACT score of at least 20 or MAT 105 (or the                                                                   gas laws, kinetic theory, states of matter, laws of
                                                              of organic species is also taught. An introduction    thermodynamics, solutions, chemical kinetics, and
      equivalent) is strongly advised. Credit for only        to the theory and practice of organic chemical
      one of the following can count toward graduation:                                                             quantum theory. Designed for students in biologi-
                                                              laboratory procedures and manipulations which
      CHE 106, CHE 111, or CHE 210.                                                                                 cal, medical, veterinary, and allied health fields,
                                                              include hands-on experience with the prepara-
                                                                                                                    and those who require one semester of physical
                                                              tion, separation, purification, and identification
      CHE 120 Chemical Laboratory Safety (1). A                                                                     chemistry. Four lectures per week. Prerequisites:
                                                              of typical compounds. Three hours of lecture,
      general course in laboratory safety. It is recom-                                                             CHE 305, MAT 250, PHY 132 and 133 or 255
                                                              one hour of recitation and four hours of lab per
      mended for all students seeking chemistry degrees                                                             and 256. (Spring only.)
                                                              week. Prerequisites: CHE 202.
      and students in other fields involving extensive
      laboratory work. Two hours of lecture per week          CHE 320 Organic Chemistry II (3). A continua-         CHE 410 Physical Chemistry I (4). Theoretical
      for half a semester. Corequisite: CHE 201 or            tion of CHE 312 including similar studies of other    chemistry with mathematical involvement. Topics
      consent of instructor. This course does not count       fundamental classes of organic compounds. Three       included are gas laws, kinetic theory, laws of ther-
      for university studies credit.                          lectures per week. Prerequisite: CHE 312.             modynamics, and states of matter. Three lectures
                                                                                                                    and three hours of laboratory per week. Should be
      CHE 201 General College Chemistry (5). A thor-          CHE 325 Organic Chemistry II Laboratory               taken in junior year. Prerequisites: CHE 305, PHY
      ough course in inorganic chemistry emphasizing          (3). A continuation of CHE 312 involving more         255 and 256, or PHY 132 and 133 with consent
      atomic structure, stoichiometry, thermochemistry,       complicated syntheses and compound identifica-        of instructor, and MAT 309. (Fall only.)
      the gaseous state of matter, periodic classification,   tion. Four and one-half hours of laboratory per
      nuclear chemistry, and chemical bonding. Three          week. Prerequisite: CHE 320.                          CHE 420 Physical Chemistry II (4). A continu-
      lectures, two hours of laboratory, and two hours                                                              ation of CHE 410 including solution chemistry,
      of recitation per week. Prerequisites: High school      CHE 329 Molecular Visualization in Chemistry          electrochemistry, chemical kinetics, basic quantum
      chemistry or CHE 105 and a math ACT score of            (1). Survey of the techniques and methods used to     chemistry, and basic statistical thermodynamics.

192   greater than or equal to 23 or MAT 140 and MAT
      145 or the equivalent.
                                                              visualize biological and organic molecules. One
                                                              hour of lecture per week. Corequisite: CHE 330,
                                                                                                                    Three lectures and three hours of laboratory per
                                                                                                                    week. Prerequisite: CHE 410. (Spring only.)
                                                              530 or 540 or consent of instructor.
CHE 435 Undergraduate Seminar (1). An                   coordination compounds. Limited descriptive            CHE 537 Experimental Biochemistry (3). This
undergraduate seminar program in which the              chemistry; the course focuses on organo-metallic,      course will emphasize a mastery of modern bio-
student must attend 15 departmental (or other           multi-metal, and icosahedral borane and carbabo-       chemical laboratory techniques and the analysis
approved) chemistry seminars. Attendance may            rane derivatives. PES, NMR, IR, and UV/VIS             of experimental data. One hour of lecture and
be during two consecutive semesters, but must           spectroscopy applications in modern inorganic          four hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisite:
be completed during the semester of enrollment.         chemistry. Two 75-minute lectures per week.            CHE 530 or consent of instructor. (Same as
In addition, the student will present two short         Prerequisite: CHE 420 or its equivalent with a         BIO 537.)
seminars in the departmental seminar program            grade of C or better. (Fall only.)
or at an approved professional meeting. Graded                                                                 CHE 540 Fundamentals of Biochemistry II (3).
pass/fail. Prerequisite: CHE 305 or 312 or permis-      CHE 512 Inorganic Chemistry Laboratory (2).            Continued study of the elements of metabolism,
sion of chair.                                          Syntheses, characterization and introduction of        including their chemical reactions, energetics and
                                                        techniques of inorganic chemistry. Four hours of       regulation. Additional topics include hormones,
CHE 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-            laboratory per week. Prerequisite: CHE 511.            biochemical function of various organs and rep-
supervised thesis and/or project which allows                                                                  lication, transcription and translation of genetic
Honors Program students with a senior standing          CHE 513 Environmental Chemistry (3). Stud-             information. Three lectures per week. Prerequisite:
to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper          ies related to chemicals in the environment as to      CHE 530. (Spring only.)
and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-         origin, identification, distribution, modification
mance is required.                                      and effect on biological systems. Three lectures       CHE 545 Glassblowing (1). Laboratory demon-
                                                        per week. Prerequisite: CHE 320 or consent of          strations and exercises. Mastery of the different
CHE 446 Physical Chemistry for the Techni-              the instructor.                                        types of seals used in construction of scientific
                                                                                                               glass apparatus. Three hours of laboratory per
cal and Engineering Sciences (3). A course in
                                                                                                               week. Course restricted to chemistry majors.
physical chemistry for students in technical and        CHE 519 Instrumental Analysis (5). Theory, cal-
                                                                                                               Prerequisite: Senior standing. Cannot be used as
engineering fields. Topics include kinetic theory,      culations, and use of modern analytical techniques,
                                                                                                               an elective for ACS-accredited area.
thermodynamics, phase diagrams, solution chem-          such as visible, ultraviolet, infrared and Raman
istry, electrochemistry, kinetics, quantum theory,      spectrometry, flame methods, gas chromatography,
                                                                                                               CHE 565 Biogeochemistry (3). Survey and
and spectroscopy. Prerequisites: CHE 305, MAT           electrometric methods of analysis and magnetic
                                                                                                               discussion of the scientific literature on global
309, PHY 255.                                           resonance. Two lectures and six hours of labora-
                                                                                                               cycles of carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus and man-
                                                        tory per week. Prerequisite: CHE 420 or consent
                                                                                                               made chemicals with special emphasis on the
CHE 488 Cooperative Education/Internship                of instructor. (Spring only.)                          biogeochemical and ecological processes that
(1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work                                                               affect terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems. The
experience related to the career and educational        CHE 523 Radiochemistry (3). Theory of nuclear          course will focus on interdisciplinary themes that
objectives of the student for which he/she may          radiations, their interactions, detection and chemi-   incorporate new research results from the fields of
receive academic credit and possible financial          cal applications. Laboratory experiments utilizing     biology, chemistry, and geosciences. Prerequisite:
remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum             ionization chambers, Geiger counters, propor-          junior or higher standing in biology, chemistry or
of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded           tional gas-flow counters, solid crystal and liquid     geosciences. (Same as BIO/GSC 565.)
pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.           scintillation detectors, gamma ray spectrometers
                                                        and experimental simulations. Two lectures and         CHE 569 Spectrometric Identification of Or-
CHE 489 Cooperative Education/Internship                three hours laboratory per week. Corequisite:          ganic Compounds (2). Course dealing with the
(1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work        CHE 420.                                               theory and applications of the following methods
experience related to the career and educational                                                               to the structural analysis of organic compounds:
objectives of the student for which he/she may          CHE 525 Biochemical Toxicology (3). A study            IR, NMR, UV-Vis, and MS. Two lectures per
receive academic credit and possible financial          of the basic biochemical aspects of toxicology         week. Prerequisites: CHE 320 and 519.
remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of          including adverse chemico-biological interac-
six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:       tions and chemical and biologic factors modu-          CHE 576 Polymeric Materials (3). An Intro-
permission of chair.                                    lating these interactions, descriptions of effects     duction to polymers and their applications. Top-
                                                        of specific chemical classes, and biochemical          ics will include synthetic approaches to polymer
CHE 495 Senior Research (3). Problems and               mechanisms of toxic effects. Three lectures per        preparation, post-preparation processing, and
hours arranged individually with staff members          week. Prerequisites: CHE 502 and 330, 530, or          analyses of major polymer properties. Three
directing the research; minimum of nine hours per       consent of instructor.                                 hours lecture pre week. Prerequisites: CHE 320,
week. A valuable course for students entering the                                                              and either CHE 403 or CHE 410.
chemistry profession at the bachelor’s degree level     CHE 527 Advanced Organic Chemistry (3).
and for those who plan graduate study. A written                                                               CHE 581 Advanced Physical Chemistry (3).
                                                        An intensive survey of modern organic chemistry
report is required. Prerequisites: Approval of                                                                 Continuation of some topics included in the
                                                        with emphasis on theoretical concepts, reaction
research director and department chair.                                                                        one-year physical chemistry course and inclusion
                                                        mechanisms and syntheses. Three lectures per
                                                        week. Prerequisites: CHE 320 and 420 or consent        of new topics. Among these topics are quantum
CHE 502 Fundamentals of Toxicology (3). This                                                                   chemistry, bonding, statistical thermodynamics,
                                                        of instructor. (Spring only.)
course surveys the scope and fields of toxicology,
                                                                                                               spectroscopy, macromolecules and the solid state.
including the methods and design of toxicity stud-
                                                        CHE 530 Fundamentals of Biochemistry I                 Three lectures per week. Prerequisite: CHE 420.
ies with attention to toxic chemicals, their effects
                                                        (3). Survey of the chemical properties and bio-        (Fall only.)
and regulatory considerations. Prerequisite: CHE
320 or consent of instructor.                           logical functions of proteins, carbohydrates, and
                                                        nucleic acids. Topics include: protein structure       CHE 591 Special Problems in Chemistry (1).
                                                        and function, enzyme kinetics and mechanisms,          Laboratory and/or library investigations on special
CHE 503 Industrial Chemistry (3). Discussion of
                                                        and elements of organismal metabolism, includ-         topics. Minimum of three hours per week. May
the application of chemistry principles to industrial
                                                        ing a description of glycolysis and the citric acid    be repeated once for credit. Prerequisites: Senior
processes. Three lectures per week.
                                                        cycle. Three lectures per week. Credit for either      standing and consent of instructor.
CHE 511 Advanced Inorganic Chemistry I (3).             CHE 530 or 330, but not both, can count toward
                                                        a major or minor in chemistry. Prerequisite: CHE       CHE 592 Special Problems in Chemistry (2).
Practical aspects of wave mechanics and bonding
                                                        320. (Fall only.)                                      Laboratory and/or library investigations on special
theories for covalent and ionic compounds; con-
                                                                                                               topics. Minimum of six hours per week. May be
siderations of symmetry; properties and theories
associated with the solid state, acids, bases, and
                                                                                                               repeated once for credit. Prerequisites: Senior
                                                                                                               standing and consent of instructor.
                                                                                                                                                                     193
      CHE 593 Special Problems in Chemistry (3).             core. Prerequisites vary with topics covered. May        CIS 399 (499) Topics in Information Systems
      Laboratory and/or library investigations on special    be repeated for a maximum of six hours. (Same            (1). Seminar for students of Computer Science
      topics. Minimum of nine hours per week. May            as CSC 299.)                                             and Information Systems programs to expose
      be repeated once for credit. Prerequisites: Senior                                                              them to a variety of topics and their relevance to
      standing and consent of instructor.                    CIS 307 Decision Support Technologies                    the broad discipline of information technology.
                                                             (3). An in-depth study of techniques used in             Students will discover career paths and areas
                                                             business application modeling and decision-              of focus in their upper-division courses. Graded
      computEr informAtion systEms                           making to solve managerial problems. Students            pass/fail. Prerequisite: junior standing.
      (cis)                                                  will use contemporary spreadsheet, database,
                                                             web application software packages and query              CIS 407 Advanced Database Management
      CIS 200 Business Application Modeling Us-                                                                       Systems (3). This course is designed to cover both
      ing Spreadsheet & Database Software (3). An            languages (SQL) to implement various business
                                                                                                                      the theoretical and practical aspects of database
      in-depth study of the use of spreadsheets and          decision-making scenarios. A student may receive
                                                                                                                      design and implementation. The theory and prac-
      databases to solve business application problems.      credit for only one of the following courses: ACC
                                                                                                                      tice of design approaches and languages for the
      The course will include both the techniques of         308, BPA 355, or CIS 307. Prerequisite: CSC
                                                                                                                      relational model are stressed. Specific topics will
      modeling applied to solving business related           101 and 199.                                             include data modeling: database design using nor-
      problems and the tools in the spreadsheet and                                                                   malization theory and relational query languages;
      database software to implement the model.              CIS 317 Principles of Information Systems                issues of concurrency control, recovery, optimiza-
      This course will not satisfy requirements for the      Analysis and Design (3). Topics to be covered            tion, database security, privacy and integrity; new
      computer information systems area. Prerequisite:       are systems development processes, structured            database technology, developments, and trends.
      CSC 199 or equivalent spreadsheet and database         analysis design methods, prototyping, systems            Students in the course will be expected to design
      skills or course.                                      development life cycle, and communication skills.        and implement a practical database application
                                                             A systems design model will be developed during          using a contemporary database management
      CIS 201 Report Program Generator (3). Topics           the course. Prerequisite: CSC 101. Corequisite:          software package. Prerequisite: A high level
      include elements of RPG II programming and             CIS 307.                                                 programming language and either CIS 307 or
      program execution, calculations, files, file orga-                                                              ACC 308; or consent of instructor.
      nization and file processing, programming disk         CIS 325 E-Business Programming (3). An
      file applications, tables, arrays and subroutines,     introduction to programming languages and                CIS 409 Data Warehousing and Business Intelli-
      and communication skills. Prerequisite: CSC 145        Web server technologies used in E-business               gence (3). An overview of the concepts behind data
      or consent of instructor.                              applications. This course focuses more on                warehousing and business intelligence. Emphasis
                                                             client-side E-business development issues such           will be on techniques for gathering and cleaning
                                                             as good web page design techniques, prevalent            data, designing and using data warehouses for
      CIS 243 Business Statistics I (2). Statistical
                                                             technologies, interactive and dynamic Web                business intelligence purposes. Data mining tools
      techniques used in analyzing and solving problems
                                                             applications, and programming using common               currently in use will be reviewed. Prerequisites:
      encountered in a business environment. Tech-                                                                    junior standing; CIS 407.
      niques include organizing and presenting statistical   scripting languages. Some server-side issues are
      data, descriptive statistical analysis, probability    also covered. Prerequisite: CSC 125 and 232 or
                                                                                                                      CIS 417 Software Development Technologies
      distributions for discrete and binomial random         consent of instructor. Corequisite: CSC 332 or
                                                                                                                      (3). This course will examine specialized software
      variables, normal probability distribution, and        consent of instructor.
                                                                                                                      development problems and their solutions.
      simple random sampling. Techniques are applied                                                                  Topics such as advanced Internet programming,
      to practical business problems using appropriate       CIS 343 Business Statistics II (2). Statistical          interfaces between applications and data sources,
      computer resources. Prerequisites: CSC 199 and         techniques used in analyzing and solving prob-           software development using open source and
      MAT 140 or equivalent. Corequisite: MAT 220.           lems encountered in a business environment.              proprietary software environments, development
                                                             Techniques include point estimates, confidence           of distributed applications and Web services will
      CIS 290 Internship (3-6). Open to sophomore            intervals for a population mean, hypothesis testing      be studied. Prerequisites: CIS 317 and CSC 332.
      associate degree candidates in computer data           for mean of one and two populations, statistical
      processing. These students, upon approval of the       inference of proportions and simple linear regres-       CIS 420 Senior Capstone Project (3). The cap-
      computer data processing faculty, are placed with      sion. Techniques are applied to practical business       stone course for students graduating with an Area
      cooperating firms to receive on-the-job training       problems using appropriate computer resources.           in Computer Information Systems (CIS). Students
      or advanced design and programming training of         Prerequisites: CIS 243 or MAT 135 with a mini-           will work in teams to design and implement a
      equivalent value. Work experience is supervised by     mum grade of C and MAT 220.                              complete information system using contemporary
      faculty. Written progress reports are required.                                                                 software development tools. The workplace will
                                                             CIS 360 Advanced Application Program                     be simulated to the extent possible by stressing
      CIS 296 International Experience on CSIS               Development for Business (3). Topics include             in-depth analysis of the client’s requirements,
      (3). A study of topics relevant to courses taught      structured program design and development                formal modes of communication and established
      in the computer science and information systems        techniques, logical and physical file structures         project management techniques. Evaluation is
      disciplines. It is taught as part of a Study Abroad    and corresponding processing techniques, table           based on the completed project using feedback
      program and therefore includes material specific       and array manipulation, string manipulation,             from clients. Prerequisite: CIS 317, 325, and 407
      to the country/region of study. Topics may             internet interface for legacy systems and Job            or consent of instructor.
      include: date organization and analysis, art           Control Language concepts. Prerequisites: junior
      and craft of web site development, quantitative                                                                 CIS 425 Building E-Business with Web Design
                                                             standing; CSC 260.
      techniques for solving business problems, etc.                                                                  (3). Course covers how to build the front-end,
                                                                                                                      middleware, and back-end components that drive
                                                             CIS 361 On-Line Applications (3). Study of
      CIS 299 Special Topics in Computer Applica-                                                                     E-business. Emphasis is on building a functional
                                                             development of on-line computer usage with               E-business site that is capable of processing
      tions (1-3). A special topics course designed to       specific applications in the functional areas of         transactions and interacting with a database.
      permit the teaching of appropriate topics as needed    business. Topical coverage includes the design           Topics include common E-business technologies,
      in a changing high-tech discipline. The course will    and development of a complete application, use           Web database technology, content management,
      include those topics which are relevant but not        of utilities to create and support user libraries, and   on-line payments, Web usability, client-side and
      necessarily appropriate for permanent, specific        the implementation of the system through the use         server-side programming using common scripting
      course status. Topics will be selected and offered     of commercial on-line software and the COBOL             languages and middleware technologies, and
194
      on university/community need and/or interest.          programming language. Prerequisites: junior              website registration, promotion, and maintenance.
      Does not apply to the CSC or CIS majors. May           standing; CSC 260 or consent of instructor.              Prerequisite: CIS 325 and 407.
      not be substituted for any course in the business
CIS 433 Data Analysis and Modeling (3).                 CIS 489 Cooperative Education/Internship               civilizAtions
Course topics include accessing, managing and           (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work       (civ)
analyzing data. Data analysis topics include basic      experience related to the career and educational       CIV 101 World Civilizations and Cultures I
descriptive statistics, linear models, time series      objectives of the student for which he/she may         (3). An interdisciplinary survey of the origins of
forecasting, classification and clustering analysis.    receive academic credit and possible financial         man, the emergence of civilized life, the evolu-
Other mathematical topics include decision tree         remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of         tion of and interaction among the environmental,
analysis, association analysis, filtering algorithms,   six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:      social, economic and political influences in the
mathematical optimization, and queuing simula-          permission of chair.                                   major civilizations of the world prior to 1500
tions. Data analysis will be done predominantly                                                                C.E. A student cannot have credit for both CIV
with SAS and in some cases with Microsoft Excel.        CIS 490 Survey of Calculus and Statistics (3). A       101 and HON 151.
Prerequisite: CIS 343.                                  survey course in topics from Calculus and Statistics
                                                        that will prepare those lacking proper foundation      CIV 102 World Civilizations and Cultures II
CIS 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-            in quantitative subjects for the MBA program.          (3). An interdisciplinary survey of the evolution
supervised thesis and/or project which allows           Covers most of the material in CIS 343 and MAT         of and interaction among the environmental,
Honors Program students with a senior standing          220. Prerequisite: MAT 140 or equivalent..             social, economic and political influences in the
to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper                                                                 major civilizations of the world since 1500, and
and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-         CIS 500 Internship (3). Graded pass/fail.              a consideration of the causes and consequences
mance is required.                                                                                             of the emergence of a global civilization in the
                                                        CIS 507 Fundamentals of Distributed Data-              modern world. A student cannot have credit for
CIS 440 End User Technology Support and                 base Applications (3). This course covers the          both CIV 102 and HON 152.
Management (3). This course presents the stu-           fundamental concepts of distributed database
dent with software, hardware and administrative         management systems. The emphasis is on the             CIV 201 World Civilizations I (3). An
issues commonly encountered in supporting end           concepts, algorithms and the protocols. It includes    interdisciplinary survey of the history of world
users. Topics covered: installation, configuration,     an overview of the architecture, database design,      civilizations from the origins of humankind to
upgrading, security, training, evaluation/acqui-        query processing algorithms, concurrency control,      the 15th century. This will be a lecture/discussion
sition/maintenance of software and hardware.            recovery and replication strategies. Prerequisite:     course following a chronological outline and,
Prerequisites: senior standing with at least 9 hours    CIS 307 or equivalent.                                 within this framework, will focus on traditions,
of CIS/CSC courses (excluding CIS 243, 343,                                                                    change, and diversity in the development of social
443 or CSC 199).                                        CIS 508 Computer Simulation (3). A study of            hierarchies (e.g., gender or class), power systems,
                                                        computer simulation models of systems and pro-         religion, technology, and warfare. Prerequisites:
CIS 443 Business Statistics III (3). Statistical        cesses. Simulation methodology, simulation model       sophomore standing; ENG 101 and 102; or ENG
techniques used in analyzing and solving problems       development, simulation computer languages, and        104 or 105.
encountered in business organizations. Techniques       the analysis of simulation results are considered.
include multiple regression analysis, time series       The course makes use of simulation computer            CIV 202 World Civilizations II (3). An
analysis and forecasting, analysis of variance          software. Prerequisites: CIS 343 and CSC 199           interdisciplinary survey of the history of world
and nonparametric statistics. Additional topics         or equivalent, or consent of instructor.               civilizations from the 15th century to the present.
will include conditional probability, the Poisson,                                                             This will be a lecture/discussion course following a
exponential and uniform probability distributions,      CIS 525 Overview of E-Business Technolo-               chronological outline and, within this framework,
and the chi-square goodness-of-fit test. Techniques     gies (3). This course provides an overview of          will focus on traditions, change, and diversity in
are applied to practical business problems using        important technologies that underlie and enable        the development of social hierarchies (e.g., gender
computer statistical software. This course pro-         E-Business. A solid understanding of the common        or class), power systems, religion, technology, and
vides preparation for those students considering        E-Business models and their underlying enabling        warfare. Prerequisites: sophomore standing; ENG
graduate school and for those students pursuing         technologies will be examined using a practical        101 and 102; or ENG 104 or 105.
programs requiring statistical preparation beyond       case-based approach. Prerequisite: consent of
CIS 343. Prerequisite: CIS 343 with a minimum           instructor.                                            CIV 290 Special Topics in World Civilizations
grade of C.                                                                                                    (3). An in-depth look at world history through
                                                        CIS 545 Enterprise Resource Planning (3).              the lens of a specific theme. The thematic
CIS 445 Information Systems and Technology              This course provides the knowledge required to         focus of the course will vary depending on
for Managers (3). This is an overview of infor-         appreciate the functions and benefits of Enterprise    instructor and student interest. The course
mation systems (IS) and information technology          Resource Planning (ERP) systems. Students will         will explore differences and similarities in the
concepts with applications in business. Topics          learn the impact of an ERP system, how ERP             human experience from ancient times to the
covered include the relevance of information            software integrates business functions, and how to     contemporary world., and encompass several
from the perspective of individuals, managers,          make current business functions compatible with        different global regions. May be repeated up to six
organizations and the global environment; the           and ERP system. The students will also develop         hours. Prerequisite: CIV 201 or CIV 202.
value of information and its use as a strategic         an appreciation of live, interactive information
resource; usage of IS and related systems in the        from an ERP system and the value of its avail-
functional units of an organization. Emphasis is        ability throughout the organization. Prerequisite:     orgAnizAtionAl
placed on using current and relevant software to        consent of instructor.                                 communicAtion (com)
address typical business needs. Prerequisites: CSC                                                             COM 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed
199 and FIN 330.                                        CIS 553 Quantitative Business Analysis (3). A
                                                                                                               to assist students in their transition to Murray
                                                        study of quantitative methods used in business and
                                                                                                               State University. Content includes orientation to
CIS 488 Cooperative Education/Internship                industrial organizations. Topics covered include
                                                                                                               the specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within
(1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work        linear programming, inventory models, PERT
                                                                                                               the academic program; university procedures,
experience related to the career and educational        and CPM, simulation and waiting-line models.
                                                                                                               policies, and resources; strategies for personal
objectives of the student for which he/she may          Prerequisite: MGT 443.
                                                                                                               and academic success, and extracurricular op-
receive academic credit and possible financial                                                                 portunities. Only one transitions course will count
                                                        CIS 595 Special Problems (3). This course
remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum                                                                    toward graduation. Graded pass/fail.
                                                        consists of independent in-depth study of some
of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded
                                                        problem in computer methods and/or quantitative
pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.                                                                  COM 161 Introduction to Public Speaking (3).
                                                                                                                                                                       195
                                                        methods. Periodic conferences will be arranged
                                                        with the supervising faculty member on an indi-        Organization and presentation of ideas through
                                                        vidual basis. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.     participation in frequent speech activities. Students
      present speeches to inform, solve problems and          COM 381 Interpersonal Communication (3).                objectives of the student for which he/she may
      persuade. Communication needs of the individual         In-depth study of communication and interper-           receive academic credit and possible financial
      students are considered and guidance is given by        sonal relations.                                        remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum
      the instructor. Prerequisites: Reading ACT score                                                                of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded
      of at least 18 or successful completion of REA          COM 384 Communication Skills for                        pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.
      100 and 120.                                            Professionals (3). Study of applied communication
                                                              skills for professionals in for-profit and non-profit   COM 489 Cooperative Education/Internship
      COM 181 Introduction to Interpersonal                   organizations. Emphasis is given to oral and            (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
      Communication (3). Communication in an in-              written communication techniques for providing          experience related to the career and educational
      terpersonal environment. Topics studied include         performance feedback, conducting interviews,            objectives of the student for which he/she may
      interpersonal perception, verbal and nonverbal          managing meetings, delivering training,                 receive academic credit and possible financial
      communication, conflict reduction, and language         promoting strategy and change, maintaining              remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of
      and its use. Will not satisfy requirements for orga-    organizational identity and image, and responding       six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:
      nizational communication major or minor.                to organizational crises.                               permission of chair.

      COM 201 Communication Foundations and                   COM 385 Organizational Communication (3).               COM 499 Contemporary Issues in Commu-
      Theory (3). Theoretical constructs of the speech        A study of concepts, theories, and processes of         nication (1-3). Studies of interest to faculty and
      communication discipline. A survey from classi-         human communication in organized workplaces.            students (e.g., effective mentoring skills, com-
      cal through contemporary perspectives of human          Emphasis is given to the nature and function of         munication and the family, health communication,
      discourse. Focus is on the development of the           human communication in different organizational         gender issues). A different subject is examined
                                                              structures and designs.                                 each time the course is offered, with the topic
      major content areas of the field. Corequisite:
                                                                                                                      being announced one semester in advance. Vari-
      COM 161.
                                                              COM 387 Intercultural Communication (3).                able credit is assigned on the basis of instruction
                                                              Designed to explore communication principles            hours (15-20 hours per unit of credit). Enrollment
      COM 251 Debate and Advocacy (3). Review and
                                                              from the viewpoint of different western and non-        is open to juniors and seniors and may be repeated
      application of debate and advocacy skills including
                                                              western cultures.                                       once for a total of six hours.
      the ability to develop, organize, present, refute,
      and analyze well-reasoned arguments. Appropri-
                                                              COM 390 Communication Research (3). An                  COM 551 Supervision of Forensic Activities
      ate for individuals seeking preparation for those
                                                              introduction to the quantitative and qualitative        (3). A survey of current problems in administering
      professions (e.g., law, business, teaching, ministry)                                                           a speech and theatre activity program. Includes
      where advocacy of ideas is essential.                   research methods used to study communication.
                                                              Emphasis is placed on familiarity with scholarly        tournament management and judging. Practicum
                                                              publications, understanding various research            in supervision of festival and tournament activities
      COM 353 Team Communication and                                                                                  facing the instructor, such as preparing the contes-
      Leadership (3). Study of communication                  methodologies, and critique of basic and applied
                                                              research findings. The connection between theory,       tant for duet acting, the contest play, interpretive
      principles and leadership strategies for effective                                                              and forensic events.
      teamwork. Focus is on communication and                 research, and decision-making is highlighted.
      leadership skills that produce team cohesion,                                                                   COM 553 Advanced Team Communication
      synergy, and productivity. Communication                COM 409 Seminar in Communication (3).
                                                              Capstone course for majors and minors in                and Leadership (3). Survey of theory, research,
      theory is applied to analyze leadership roles in                                                                and current practices relevant to the study of team
      team projects, decision-making, and conflict            organizational communication surveys theoretical
                                                              and applied content areas within the discipline.        communication and leadership. Students will
      management.                                                                                                     examine communicative behavior of productive
                                                              Requirements include a major paper, presentation,
                                                                                                                      teams and effective leaders, and participate in
                                                              and a one-hour oral exam. Graded pass/fail.
      COM 357 Communication and Critical                                                                              team building exercises.
                                                              Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
      Thought (3). The course explores the relation-
      ship between communication and critical thought.                                                                COM 557 Organizational Learning and Dia-
                                                              COM 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-
      Based on the rhetorical traditions of oral discourse,                                                           logue (3) Explores organizations as systems of
                                                              supervised thesis and/or project which allows
      students will explore argumentation, negotiation,                                                               learning based on productive alternative forms
                                                              Honors Program students with a senior standing
      reason, fallacy, language, and evaluation of infor-                                                             of human communication. Theories and tools of
                                                              to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper
      mation as each relates to critical thinking.                                                                    dialogue and organizational learning are applied
                                                              and/or written review of the exhibit or performance
                                                                                                                      to contemporary workplace practices. Prerequi-
                                                              is required. Graded pass/fail.
      COM 361 Career Presentations (3). Study                                                                         site: COM 385 or graduate standing.
      of presentation techniques within business
                                                              COM 461 Persuasive Communication (3).
      and professional contexts. Presentations made                                                                   COM 581 Seminar in Interpersonal Communi-
                                                              Course explores theories and concepts of
      to staff, clients, and constituents, as well as                                                                 cation (3). A study of the contemporary approaches
                                                              persuasive communication strategies. Emphasis
      conference and keynote addresses, will be studied                                                               to interpersonal communication with opportunities
                                                              is placed on examining persuasive strategies
      and practiced. Students will create and deliver                                                                 for practical application of those approaches in
                                                              used in attitude change. Ethical problems related
      presentations tailored to their individual career                                                               diverse interpersonal situations.
                                                              to persuasion, audience analysis and dialogue,
      objectives. Prerequisite: COM 161.
                                                              rationality, and the free marketplace of ideas are      COM 585 Advanced Organizational Com-
                                                              also explored. Students develop and present a           munication (3). Survey of theory and research
      COM 372 Communication in Educational
                                                              persuasive campaign. Prerequisite: COM 161.             relevant to the study of organizational communica-
      Environments (3). Special communication
      needs of teachers of any discipline. Students                                                                   tion. Students will examine how communication
                                                              COM 481 Conflict and Communication (3).                 processes shape and reshape the activities of
      develop an understanding of communication
                                                              Examines conflict processes as communication            organizing within and between organizations.
      concepts applicable to the classroom as well as
                                                              phenomena. Explores theories of conflict com-           Prerequisites: 75 hours earned and COM 385 or
      communication skills useful in other aspects of
                                                              munication and develops competencies for a              graduate status.
      educational environments. Course content is de-
                                                              range of professional and interpersonal contexts
      veloped through readings, lectures, discussions,
                                                              by applying theory to practice.                         COM 589 Directed Individual Study in Com-
      structured activities, and classroom visitations;
      provides the teacher an experiential and a cogni-                                                               munication Theory (3). A course designed to meet
                                                              COM 488 Cooperative Education/Internship                the needs of individuals and groups who wish to
196
      tive understanding of the role of communication
                                                              (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work        explore topics not covered in other organizational
      in the educational environment.
                                                              experience related to the career and educational        communication courses or to do in-depth study of
an issue introduced in another course. A proposal      CRJ 305 Internship (3). Supervised internship           CRJ 365 Interviewing and Interrogation (3).
for study must be approved by the instructor           placement in a criminal justice agency. For juniors     An examination of the theory, nature, methods,
during the first week of classes. General areas of     and seniors majoring or minoring in criminal            and principles of interviewing and interrogation
study from which specific topics can be drawn          justice. May be repeated for a maximum of six           in criminal justice with discussion and practical
include interpersonal communication, small             credit hours. Graded pass/fail. Prerequisites:          exercises focusing on eliciting information from
group communication, and communication within          CRJ 140 with a grade of C or better, six hours          witnesses and criminal suspects and case docu-
organizations. May be repeated for a maximum           of additional CRJ coursework, and permission            mentation. Prerequisite: CRJ 140 with a grade
of six hours. Graded pass/fail.                        of instructor.                                          of C or better.

COM 599 Internship (3-6). A course designed            CRJ 315 Addiction: Treatment and Society                CRJ 385 Violent Crime (3). A comprehensive ex-
for students to get experience in the application      (3). An overview of current theories, models and        amination of the nature and extent of violent crime
of theory to practical situations. Businesses and      definitions of addictive disorders, with focus on       in society, with specific consideration given to the
organizations selected to participate draw from        both the addictive and recovery processes. The          workplace, family and other intimate relationships,
qualified students with skills in organizational       role of the social worker/helping professional in       and schools. Particular attention is given to the
communication, forensics, technical theatre or         identification, intervention and treatment will be      criminal justice system’s response to the offender
acting. May be repeated for a total of six hours.      stressed. The needs of special populations, diverse     and victim in these situations. Prerequisite: CRJ
Graded pass/fail. Prerequisite: senior standing or     populations and family and adolescent issues will       140 with a grade of C or better.
consent of instructor.                                 be addressed. Prerequisite: junior standing and
                                                       CRJ 140 with a grade of C or better. (Same as           CRJ 425 Terrorism (3). The history, philosophy,
                                                       SOC 315 and SWK 315.)                                   various forms and definitions of terrorism are
criminAl JusticE                                                                                               examined. The nature and causes of domestic
                                                       CRJ 320 Juvenile Justice (3). An overview of            and international terrorism, the possible means
(crJ)
                                                       juvenile justice systems and juvenile delinquency       for prevention, and criminal justice system of
CRJ 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed
                                                       in the United States. This course traces the evolu-     governmental response to terrorist acts, and current
to assist students in their transition to Murray
                                                       tion of a separate justice system for children and      issues in terrorism are explored. Prerequisites: CRJ
State University. Content includes orientation to
                                                       considers the causes, prevention and treatment of       140 and 220 with a grade of C or better.
the specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within
                                                       delinquency, with particular attention devoted to
the academic program; university procedures,                                                                   CRJ 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-
                                                       sources of juvenile crime and to characteristics of
policies, and resources; strategies for personal                                                               supervised thesis and/or project which allows
                                                       juvenile offenders. Prerequisite: CRJ 140 with a
and academic success, and extracurricular op-          grade of C or better or consent of instructor.          Honors Program students with a senior standing
portunities. Only one transitions course will                                                                  to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper
count toward graduation. Introductory seminar          CRJ 325 Criminal Justice Ethics (3). An exami-          and/or written review of the exhibit or performance
for all first semester criminal justice majors.        nation of the application of ethical decision-mak-      is required. Prerequisite: CRJ 140 with a grade
Graded pass/fail.                                      ing within the field of criminal justice with special   of C or better.
                                                       attention to police deviance, judicial misconduct,
CRJ 140 Introduction to Criminal Justice (3).          control of inmates in correctional facilities, and      CRJ 442 Probation and Parole: Community
An overview and integration of major concepts,         other ethical dilemmas within the field. Prerequi-      Corrections (3). Study of community alternatives
assumptions, developments and approaches of            site: CRJ 140 with a grade of C or better.              to prison confinement. Examination of halfway
criminal justice as a system, including police,                                                                houses, work release and other community-based
courts, corrections and legislative control at adult   CRJ 333 Criminalistics (3). A study of the ap-          approaches to corrections. Prerequisite: CRJ 240
and juvenile levels.                                   plication of scientific knowledge, instruments and      with a grade of C or better.
                                                       techniques to the investigation of crime. Includes
CRJ 220 Law Enforcement (3). Philosophy,               discussion of the recognition, identification, ex-      CRJ 445 Race, Ethnicity and Gender in Crimi-
theory, and processes of policing at the federal,      amination and evaluation of physical evidence           nal Justice (3). Examines the nature and causes
state and local levels. Prerequisite: CRJ 140 with     through scientific means. Prerequisites: CRJ 140        of injustice in the criminal justice system. Key
a grade of C or better.                                with a grade of C or better.                            policy issues are explored. Particular attention is
                                                                                                               given to race, ethnicity and gender as they apply
CRJ 240 Corrections (3). Philosophy, theory and        CRJ 336 Family Violence (3). A comprehensive            to crime incidents, victims, offenders, and criminal
processes of adult and juvenile corrections at the     examination of the effects of violence on the           justice professionals. Prerequisite: CRJ 140 with
federal, state and local levels. Prerequisite: CRJ     American family, and the ways in which social           a grade of C or better.
140 with a grade of C or better.                       service agencies and practitioners respond to
                                                       the unique needs created by this social problem.        CRJ 447 Business and Political Crime (3).
CRJ 300 Crime and Criminals (3). Examines              Prerequisite: junior standing and CRJ 140 with a        Concepts, policies and issues relating to crimes
various forms of juvenile and adult criminal           grade of C or better. (Same as SWK 336.)                in business, industry and government. Includes
behavior with particular attention to the psy-                                                                 discussions of the impact of white-collar and
chological, social and educational needs and           CRJ 346 Criminal Investigation (3). Techniques          organized crime, terrorism, fraud, corruption, and
characteristics of offenders and the role of law       of evidence collection and preservation, modus          other forms of official and unofficial deviance.
enforcement and correctional officers in dealing       operandi, interviews and interrogations, report         An approved business elective. Prerequisite:
with offenders. Prerequisite: CRJ 140 with a grade     writing, and preliminary and follow-up investi-         CRJ 140 with a grade of C or better or consent
of C or better.                                        gations. Prerequisites: CRJ 140 and 220 with a          of instructor.
                                                       grade of C or better.
CRJ 303 Principles and Methods of Research                                                                     CRJ 448 Topical Seminar (3). Inquiry into se-
(3). An introduction to quantitative and qualita-      CRJ 355 Security in Business and Industry (3).          lected topics and problems in the field of criminal
tive methods of research designed to enable            A study of planning, development, organization          justice. May be repeated for a maximum of six
students to understand the critical and scientific     and management of modern security systems.              hours provided topics vary. Prerequisite: CRJ 140
methodologies their discipline uses to discover        Discusses the processes of personnel, property          with a grade of C or better.
knowledge and ascertain its validity. Ethical issues   and information security. Includes major concepts,
and program evaluation will also be discussed.         legal aspects, principles and practices of risk         CRJ 455 Police and Community Relations (3).
Enrollment will be limited to criminal justice and     assessment, loss control, prevention and related        Individual and collective study of relationships
social work majors and minors or by permission         functions of protective services. An approved busi-     between police officers, agencies and the public.
of instructor. Prerequisite: CRJ 140 with a grade
of C or better and MAT or approved statistics
                                                       ness and occupational safety and health elective.
                                                       Prerequisite: CRJ 140 with a grade of C or better
                                                                                                               Exploration of areas of conflict and cooperation.
                                                                                                               Prerequisites: CRJ 140 and 220 with a grade of         197
course. (Same as SWK 303.)                             or consent of instructor.                               C or better.
      CRJ 470 Institutional Corrections (3). Examina-         CRJ 522 Issues in Policing (3). Examines police        languages, web programming, networking
      tion of the history, roles, structures, and function-   function, history, operational strategies, ethics,     concepts, security issues and other pertinent
      ing of institutional corrections within the United      deviance, use of force, policy, accreditation,         topics regarding the use of a computer to solve
      States. Emphasis is placed on understanding the         accountability, and other contemporary issues.         real-world problems. The student will be provided
      philosophies, elements, structures, and programs        Prerequisites: CRJ 140 and 220 with a grade of         with an overall picture of the many areas of
      that shape current institutional operations and their   C or better.                                           expertise in the computing field as they apply
      impact on offenders, staff, and the community.                                                                 to other disciplines as well as an introduction to
      Prerequisite: CRJ 140 and 240.                          CRJ 533 Juvenile Delinquency (3). Nature and           fundamental programming concepts. This course
                                                              extent of delinquency; competing explanatory           is intended as the first course for CSIS majors
      CRJ 475 Organized Crime (3). Historical                 theories; evaluation of programs for prevention        and a course for non-majors who want to learn
      dimensions of organized crime and its control.          and control; role of police, detention, juvenile       how to instruct computers to solve problems.
      Examination of emerging groups of ethnic and            courts and corrections. Prerequisite: CRJ 320 with     Prerequisite: Math ACT score of at least 20 or
      international organized crime and the statutes          a grade of C or better, or consent of instructor.      MAT 117 or higher.
      and techniques used to combat criminal orga-            (Same as SOC 533.)
      nizations. Prerequisite: CRJ 140 with a grade                                                                  CSC 125 Internet and Web Page Design (3).
      of C or better.                                         CRJ 537 Juvenile Justice Procedures (3). The           Introductory course covering the Internet and
                                                              organization, function and jurisdiction of juvenile    web page design. The student will be introduced
      CRJ 488 Cooperative Education/Internship                agencies; police referrals, preventive techniques      to Internet tools including mailers, browsers,
      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work        and youth divisions; juvenile court procedures         search engines, metasearch engines, FTP clients,
      experience related to the career and educational        and juvenile statutes. Prerequisites: CRJ 140          and the physical components of computer
                                                              and 320 with a grade of C or better, or consent        networks. The major part of this course will
      objectives of the student for which he/she may
                                                              of instructor.                                         cover the fundamentals of web page design using
      receive academic credit and possible financial
                                                                                                                     HTML. Web page development will include
      remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum
                                                              CRJ 544 Constitutional and Legal Issues in             the use of lists, client-side image maps, tables,
      of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded
                                                              Criminal Justice (3). A comprehensive ex-              frames, forms, cascading style sheets, and a web
      pass/fail. Prerequisite: CRJ 140 with a grade of C
                                                              amination of the constitutional law that affects       editor. An introduction to XHTML, JavaScript,
      or better, six hours of CRJ courses, and permis-
                                                              criminal justice professionals, citizens, suspects,    and freely available HTML editors will also be
      sion of chair.
                                                              and incarcerated individuals, with considerable        included.
                                                              attention given to both civil and criminal legal
      CRJ 489 Cooperative Education/Internship                issues surfacing in the criminal justice field. Top-   CSC 145 Introduction to Programming I (4).
      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work        ics will include due process, search and seizure,      An introduction to problem-solving methods
      experience related to the career and educational        self-incrimination, bail, and right to counsel and     and algorithm development using a high-level
      objectives of the student for which he/she may          a fair trial. Prerequisite: CRJ 140 with a grade       programming language. The course will include
      receive academic credit and possible financial          of C or better.                                        methods of program design, coding techniques,
      remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of                                                                 debugging and internal documentation. The
      six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:       CRJ 555 Crime Prevention (3). This interactive         course emphasizes structured programming and
      CRJ 140 with a grade of C or better, six hours of       seminar will deal with crime prevention strategies     top-down design and also covers object-oriented
      CRJ courses, and permission of chair.                   for law enforcement, business/industrial security      programing. Topics include variable I/O, repeti-
                                                              and other criminal justice personnel. Issues of        tion, selection, subprograms, file handling, and
      CRJ 495 Special Problems (3). Individual study          situational crime prevention, environmental            object-oriented programming. Course includes
      and projects designed to meet the needs of each         design, physical security measures, defensible         three hours lecture and a two-hour laboratory expe-
      student. Restricted to seniors majoring or minoring     space, opportunity theories, crime displacement,       rience each week. This is the recommended second
      in criminal justice. Must have a 3.0 overall GPA        rational choice theory and selected crime              course for majors in the discipline. Prerequisites:
      and a 3.0 in CRJ courses taken for the major or         prevention studies will be explored. International     CSC 101 and MAT 150 or equivalent.
      minor. Prerequisite: Completion of all CRJ core         issues and extensive case studies will be included.
      courses with a grade of C or better for the major       Prerequisite: CRJ 140 with a grade of “C” or           CSC 199 Introduction to Information Technol-
      except 480 or 15 hours of CRJ courses with a            better or consent of professor.                        ogy (3). Course is designed for students pursuing
      grade of C or better in the minor.                                                                             any program of study. A student taking this course
                                                              CRJ 573 Victimology (3). Analysis of major             will gain competency with file management, word
      CRJ 499 (480) Senior Seminar in Criminal                perspectives on victimization. Emphasis on pat-        processing, spreadsheet, database management,
      Justice (1). Capstone course for all criminal justice   terns of victimization, the role of victims in the     and presentation graphics software. In addition,
      majors. The course includes an examination of           generation of crime, and the experience of the         the student will become familiar with general
      career opportunities, including public and private      victim in the criminal justice system. Prerequisite:   computer technology such as computer hardware,
      sector employment, and graduate and professional        CRJ 140 with a grade of C or better.                   computer operations, networks, the Internet and
      education. Students will discuss the job search                                                                the World Wide Web. Corequisites: MAT 117 or
      process, consider interviewing techniques, and          CRJ 575 Comparative Criminal Justice                   140, or math ACT score of at least 20.
      prepare a professional portfolio. Mastery of            Systems (3). An examination of non-Ameri-
      criminal justice curriculum will be assessed.           can criminal justice systems. Specific areas of        CSC 232 Visual Basic Programming I (4). In-
      Prerequisite: senior standing and completion of         comparison will include but not be limited to,         troductory programming course for students with
      CRJ 099 and CRJ 140 and at least 18 additional          the police, judiciary, and criminal corrections of     little or no programming experience who want a
      hours of criminal justice courses with a grade of       selected foreign systems. Prerequisite: CRJ 140        course that covers basic algorithm development,
      C or better in each class. An overall GPA of 2.5        with a grade of C or better.                           structured programming, and event-driven pro-
      or better is required.                                                                                         gramming. Visual Basic Language will be used.
                                                                                                                     Three hours lecture and two hours laboratory per
      CRJ 505 Criminal Justice Administration (3).            computEr sciEncE                                       week. Prerequisite: CSC 101.
      Principles of administration, organization, leader-     (csc)
      ship and management are examined as they apply          CSC 101 Introduction to Problem Solving Using          CSC 235 Programming in C++ (3). A course in
      to the various components of criminal justice.          Computers (3). This course is an introduction to       programming in C++ using both procedural and
      Prerequisites: CRJ 140 with a grade of C or better,     problem solving using computers which spans            object-oriented methods. Topics include variables;
                                                                                                                     expressions; stream and file input/output; control
198   220, and 240 or permission of instructor.               the breadth of issues such as logical reasoning
                                                              in algorithm development, procedural, object-          structures; arrays; functions; pointers; records;
                                                                                                                     dynamic memory management; object-oriented
                                                              oriented and event-driven/visual programming
programming with classes; single and multiple          CSC 302 Foundations of Computer Science II                 viewed. Course covers the functional components
inheritance. The course will also include an           (3). A continuation of CSC 301. Topics include:            of the ALU, control unit, memory unit, and I/O
introduction to the Linux operating system. Two        graph theory, finite state machines, queueing              communications. Course includes an overview of
hours lecture and two hours laboratory per week.       theory, sequences, series, recurrence relations,           microcontrollers and single-board computers as
Prerequisite: CSC 101 or consent of instructor.        context free grammars. Corequisite: MAT 250.               applied to embedded systems. A study of parallel
                                                       Prerequisite: CSC 301.                                     and distributed architectures, as well as alternative
CSC 245 Introduction to Programming II (4).                                                                       processor architectures are reviewed. Three hours
A course to continue the development of disci-         CSC 310 Database Administration (3). A course              lecture, two hours of digital logic lab per week.
pline in program design, in style and expression.      in administering database management systems.              Prerequisite: CSC 301.
Includes methods of dynamic memory manage-             Topics include data definition language, data
ment and recursion. Introduces data structures         control language, backup and recovery, security,           CSC 410 Operating Systems (3). An overview
and abstract data types (ADTs) for arrays, strings,    performance tuning, network administration.                of principles of computer operating systems. This
lists, stacks, queues, trees and graphs. These         Prerequisites: CIS 307 and TSM 133.                        course covers the concepts of the process control
ADTs are presented in both static and dynamic                                                                     block, asynchronous concurrent processes, multi-
memory implementations. The course also cov-           CSC 332 Visual Basic Programming II (3). An                threaded execution, mutual exclusion, deadlock,
ers the design and implementation of algorithms        in-depth study of the latest version of the Visual         storage management, processor scheduling,
such as sorting and searching, hashing functions,      Basic programming language for the Internet and            parallel and distributed computing, and system
priority queues, heaps, and graph algorithms. Other    the World Wide Web. The course will consider               and network security. Two hours lecture and two
topics (recursion, lists, events, inheritance) in      both the event driven programming and object               hours lab per week. This course must be taken
object-oriented programming will be covered as         oriented programming paradigms. Additional                 with one of the following: CSC 411, 412, 413, or
time permits. Three hours lecture and two hours        topics include structured programming, ActiveX             414. Prerequisite: CSC 340 or 342.
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: CSC 145.            technologies, browser programming and multime-
                                                       dia programming. Prerequisite: CSC 232 with a              CSC 411 Operating Systems Project in Graph-
CSC 260 Application Program Development                grade of C or better or consent of instructor.             ics and Visual Computing (0). Project course
in COBOL I (3). Introduction to algorithms                                                                        to accompany CSC 410. The chosen project will
and programs, variable assignment, and input,          CSC 340 (240) Programming in Java (3). A first             be related to operating systems and graphics and
decision, looping, tables, subroutines, algorithm      course in programming in Java with emphasis on             visual computing. This course must be taken with
design and testing, records, file organization,        object oriented programming techniques. Topics             CSC 410. Graded pass/fail.
and processing. The focus of this course is on         include applications, applets, control structures,
control structures and their syntax, elementary        methods, arrays, object-based and object-oriented          CSC 412 Operating Systems Project in Net-
data structures, and sequential files. Two hours       programming, strings, graphical user interfaces,           Centric Computing (0). A project course to
lecture and two hours lab. Prerequisite: CSC           exception handling, multithreading, and multime-           accompany CSC 410. The chosen project will
145 or 232.                                            dia. Two hours lecture and two hours laboratory            be related to operating systems and net-centric
                                                       per week. Prerequisite: CSC 145 or consent of              computing. This course must be taken with CSC
CSC 275 Graphical Rendering (3). Course                instructor.                                                410. Graded pass/fail.
covers the basic methods of computer-based
three-dimensional layout and design, composi-          CSC 342 (255) Programming in C# (3). A first               CSC 413 Operating Systems Project in Embed-
tion, and perspective. The effects of applying         course in programming in C#, with emphasis                 ded Systems Programming (0). Project course
predefined surface textures to object models as        on object-oriented programming techniques.                 to accompany CSC 410. The chosen project will
well as the techniques for creating user-defined       Topics include applications, control structures,           be related to operating systems and embedded
textures are reviewed. Course projects employ          methods, arrays, object-based and object-                  systems programming. This course must be taken
methods of abstraction provided by the software        oriented programming, strings, graphical user              with CSC 410. Graded pass/fail.
tools to permit the creation and manipulation of       interfaces, exception handling, multithreading,
hierarchically defined objects. Course reviews the     and multimedia. Two hours lecture and two hours            CSC 414 Operating Systems Project in Ap-
effects of camera modeling and importance of point     laboratory per week. Prerequisite: CSC 145 or              plications Programming (0). Project course to
of view on the appearance of computer-generated        consent of instructor.                                     accompany CSC 410. The chosen project will
scenes. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.                                                                      be related to operating systems and applications
                                                       CSC 345 Data Structures (4). Data structures               programming. This course must be taken with
CSC 299 Special Topics in Computer Applica-            and abstract data types including arrays, strings,         CSC 410. Graded pass/fail.
tions (1-3). A special topics course designed to       lists, stacks, queues, trees and tree balancing al-
permit the teaching of appropriate topics as needed    gorithms; hashing techniques with applications to          CSC 415 Programming Languages (3). Formal
in a changing high-tech discipline. The course will    file processing; priority queues and heaps; sorting        definition of programming language syntax and
include those topics which are relevant but not        algorithms; graph algorithms; generalized algo-            semantics. Global properties of imperative lan-
necessarily appropriate for permanent, specific        rithm design techniques. Emphasis will be placed           guages including scope of declarations, binding
course status. Topics will be selected and offered     upon object-oriented software design techniques            times, simple data types, data structures and ab-
on university/community need and/or interest.          to facilitate software reuse. Prerequisite: CSC 145        stract data types, control structures, subprograms,
Does not apply to the CSC or CIS majors. May           with a grade of C or higher.                               concurrency, and exception handling. Introduction
not be substituted for any course in the business                                                                 to functional, logic and object-oriented program-
core. Prerequisites vary with topics covered. May      CSC 360 Scripting Languages (3). Course is                 ming paradigms. Prerequisites: CSC 235, 301, 345
be repeated for a maximum of six hours. (Same          a survey of several popular scripting languages.           and either CSC 340 or 342.
as CIS 299.)                                           Operating system shell languages and Perl will be
                                                       discussed. The emphasis will be on applications of         CSC 420 Numerical Analysis I (3). An introduc-
CSC 301 Foundations of Computer Science I              scripting languages to network and server admin-           tion to the numerical algorithms fundamental to
(3). Course introduces the discrete mathematical       istration tasks. Two hours lecture and two hours           scientific computer work. Includes elementary
foundations of computer science, providing the         laboratory per week. Prerequisites: Knowledge of           discussion of error, polynomial interpolation,
appropriate theoretical background for advanced        a high-level programming language and a server             quadrature, linear systems of equations, solution
courses. Topics include: functions, relations, sets,   operating system or consent of instructor.                 of non-linear equations, and numerical solution of
logic, proof techniques, combinatorics, digital                                                                   ordinary differential equations. The algorithmic
logic, elementary number theory and introduction       CSC 405 Computer Architecture (4). Applica-                approach and the efficient use of the computer are
to matrix theory with application to computer          tions of digital logic circuits, register transfer logic   emphasized. Prerequisites: MAT 250, knowledge
graphics. Prerequisites: CSC 145 and MAT 150
or equivalent.
                                                       and assembly language to the design and operation
                                                       of the modern general-purpose computer are re-
                                                                                                                  of high-level programming language and CSC 302
                                                                                                                  or consent of instructor.
                                                                                                                                                                          199
      CSC 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-         will be placed on network design, operations,           CSC 565 Embedded Systems Design (3).
      supervised thesis and/or project which allows        management, and costing. May not receive credit         Architecture of various microcontrollers and their
      Honors Program students with a senior standing       for both TSM 133 and CSC 510. Prerequisite:             uses in embedded systems applications are studied.
      to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper       consent of instructor.                                  One or more of the popular microcontrollers will
      and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-                                                              be selected for practice in hardware design and
      mance is required.                                   CSC 515 Computer Graphics Programming                   programming, including methods for interfacing
                                                           (3). Techniques in two-dimensional and three-           with computers, sensors and control systems.
      CSC 445 Computer Algorithms (3). Study               dimensional computer graphics image generation          Prerequisite: CSC 405 or consent of instructor.
      of the design and analysis of algorithms.            and animation. Course includes a study of image
      This course covers methods of tree and graph         rendering with both radiosity and raytracing            CSC 575 Computer Animation and Game
      traversal for optimal and approximate solutions      techniques using high-level graphics tools.             Development (3). This course builds on the
      to semi-numerical problems. It includes a study      Covers the mathematical foundations for                 computer animation techniques of CSC 515. Top-
      of the basic problem-solving techniques of           computer graphics including vector and matrix           ics covered include lighting techniques, texture
      greedy method, divide-and-conquer, dynamic           theory for affine and projective transformations.       mapping, atmospheric effects, collision detec-
      programming, backtracking and branch-and-            Prerequisites: knowledge of a high-level language       tion, joystick and game pad inputs, and sound
      bound. Introduction to complexity and the NP         and consent of instructor.                              effects. Physics modeling, real-time animation,
      hierarchy. This course must be taken with one                                                                AI behavior modeling and other fundamentals of
      of the following: CSC 446, 447, 448, or 449.         CSC 530 Graphical User Interface Develop-               fame design are introduced. Prerequisites: CSC
      Prerequisites: CSC 302 and 345 or consent of         ment (3). Presents an introduction to human-            515 or consent of instructor.
      instructor.                                          computer interaction, graphical user interface
                                                           design and implementation. The course requires          CSC 595 Special Problems (1-3). Supervised in-
                                                           the development of significant software applica-        dependent study of specialized topics in computer
      CSC 446 Algorithms Project in Graphics and
                                                           tion using a selected user interface development        science. May be repeated one time. Prerequisite:
      Visual Computing (0). A project course to ac-
                                                           tool. Must be taken with one of the following:          senior standing and/or consent of instructor.
      company CSC 445. The chosen project will be
                                                           CSC 531, 532, 533 or 534. Prerequisites: CIS
      related to algorithms and graphics and visual
                                                           407 and knowledge of a high-level language or
      computing. This course must be taken with CSC
      445. Graded pass/fail.
                                                           consent of instructor.                                  cArEEr And tEchnicAl
                                                                                                                   EducAtion (ctE)
                                                           CSC 531 Graphical User Interface Develop-               CTE 200 Introduction to Career and Technical
      CSC 447 Algorithms Project in Net-Centric
                                                           ment Project in Graphics and Visual Comput-             Education (3). This course is designed to provide
      Computing (0). A project course to accompany         ing (0). Project course to accompany CSC 530.
      CSC 445. The chosen project will be related to                                                               new and pre-service teachers with an introduction
                                                           The chosen project will be related to graphical         to the field of career and technical education.
      algorithms and net-centric computing. This course    user interface development and graphics and
      must be taken with CSC 445. Graded pass/fail.                                                                Included are topics related to motivation, and
                                                           visual computing. Must be taken with CSC 530.           learning theory, curriculum, school organization,
                                                           Graded pass/fail.                                       funding, laboratory management and historical,
      CSC 448 Algorithms Project in Embedded
                                                                                                                   socio-cultural, psychological and philosophical
      Systems Programming (0). A project course to         CSC 532 Graphical User Interface Develop-               foundations of career and technical education.
      accompany CSC 445. The chosen project will           ment Project in Net-Centric Computing (0).
      be related to algorithms and embedded systems        Project course to accompany CSC 530. The chosen         CTE 270 Basic Foundations of Career and
      programming. This course must be taken with          project will be related to graphical user interface     Technical Education (3). Foundations of con-
      CSC 445. Graded pass/fail.                           development and net-centric computing. Must be          temporary curricular developments, selection and
                                                           taken with CSC 530. Graded pass/fail.                   organization of course content and introduction
      CSC 449 Algorithms Project in Applications                                                                   of teaching techniques.
      Programming (0). A project course to accompany       CSC 533 Graphical User Interface Develop-
      CSC 445. The chosen project will be related to       ment Project in Embedded Systems Program-               CTE 272 Organizing and Managing School
      algorithms and applications programming. This        ming (0). Project course to accompany CSC 530.          Learning Facilities (3). Principles and practices
      course must be taken with CSC 445. Graded            The chosen project will be related to graphical         related to equipping and maintaining shop, labora-
      pass/fail.                                           user interface development and embedded systems         tory and classroom. Emphasis is given to safety
                                                           programming. Must be taken with CSC 530.                and current technology.
      CSC 488 Cooperative Education/Internship             Graded pass/fail.
      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work                                                             CTE 274 Basic Instructional Media and Cur-
      experience related to the career and educational     CSC 534 Graphical User Interface Develop-               riculum Development for Career and Technical
      objectives of the student for which he/she may       ment Project in Applications Programming (0).           Education (3). Course will include curriculum
      receive academic credit and possible financial       Project course to accompany CSC 530. The chosen         construction; selecting and arranging teaching
      remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum          project will be related to graphical user interface     content; preparation of instructional materials
      of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded        development and applications programming. Must          and utilization of media.
      pass/fail. Prerequisite: consent of chair.           be taken with CSC 530. Graded pass/fail.
                                                                                                                   CTE 363 Evaluation of Instruction in Career
      CSC 489 Cooperative Education/Internship             CSC 540 Social, Ethical and Professional Is-            and Technical Education (3). A course designed
      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work     sues in the Information Age (3). This course            to provide instruction in the process of instructional
      experience related to the career and educational     emphasizes social, ethical, legal, technical and        evaluation. Emphasis is given to the establishment
      objectives of the student for which he/she may       professional issues encountered in the infor-           of student performance criteria, the assessment of
      receive academic credit and possible financial       mation age including the historical and social          student performance in the cognitive, affective
      remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of       context, professional responsibilities, risks and       and psychomotor domains, and the assigning
      six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:    liabilities, and intellectual property. Prerequisite:   of grades.
      consent of chair.                                    senior standing.
                                                                                                                   CTE 371 Methods of Instruction in Career and
      CSC 510 Network Management and Imple-                CSC 545 Advanced Computer Architecture (3).             Technical Education (3). The presentation and
      mentation (3). An introduction to networking and     In-depth discussion of some topics from CSC 405,        application of instructional materials, methods,
                                                           high-speed functional units, distributed architec-
200
      data communication including topical coverage of                                                             techniques and devices relevant to teaching vo-
      transmission protocols, interconnectivity, network   ture, multiprocessors, pipelining, parallel comput-     cational-industrial and technical education; their
      implementation and server installations. Emphasis    ers and other topics. Prerequisite: CSC 405.            relationships and technical subjects.
CTE 380 Career and Technical Subjects (3-24).            CTE 568 Independent Study in Career and                 on individual markets and income distribution.
An assessment will be made of previous educa-            Technical Education (3-6). Supervised read-             Prerequisites: MAT 117, 120, 140 or 150; or an
tional experiences from universities, community          ings or independent investigative projects in the       ACT math standard score of at least 23; or consent
colleges, private and public schools, and all institu-   various aspects of administration, supervision          of instructor.
tions recognized by the National Commission on           and coordination of vocational programs. May be
Accrediting. Graded pass/fail.                           repeated for up to six hours of credit. Prerequisite:   ECO 305 Money and Banking (3). A survey of
                                                         consent of instructor.                                  money and its role in the operation of the economy
CTE 381 Career and Technical Experiences                                                                         and the banking system. Prerequisites: junior
(3-24). Credit may be earned by thoroughly docu-         CTE 572 Managing Career Trade and Technical             standing; ECO 230 and 231.
mented experiences in an occupation where the            Learning Facilities (3). Principles and practices
individual meets the standards for the entry level       for planning, organizing, and maintaining school        ECO 310 Issues in the Global Economy (3).
of teaching as defined by the Kentucky Department        shop, laboratory and classroom facilities used in       A review of fundamental issues in international
of Education, and where one would be eligible for        teaching vocational subjects. Emphasis is given         trade, payments, investment, and economic and
the one-year vocational teaching certificate. On         to classroom management and control, supply             social systems relevant for informed international
the basis of this review by the department chair, a      inventory, equipment maintenance and safety.            business and public policy decision making. This
specific amount of credit will be determined and         An independent study project or research report         class may not be taken for credit in the economics
given. Graded pass/fail.                                 is required.                                            major. Prerequisites: ECO 230.

CTE 463 Seminar in Student Teaching, Career                                                                      ECO 311 European Economic History (3). A
and Technical Subjects (4). The identification of        Economics                                               descriptive study of the economic development
selected teaching concepts and a study of their          (Eco)                                                   of Europe. This course focuses on historical
use as a foundation for instructional methods,           ECO 140 Contemporary Economics (3). Fun-                economic thought that developed in Europe and
student activities, and evaluation of student            damental economic principles applied to a wide          provides a perspective of how Europe is structured
learning. Graded pass/fail. Prerequisite: consent        range of real world problems, with the objective        today. Prerequisite: ECO 230 or 231 or consent
of instructor.                                           of developing an understanding of the market form       of instructor.
                                                         of economic organization. Designed specifically
CTE 501 Teaching through Application (3).                for two purposes: (1) to meet the needs of the          ECO 312 American Economic History (3). A
This course is designed to provide new and pre-          students who are able to take only one economics        descriptive study of the historical development of
service teachers with an introduction to the field       course in their curriculum, and (2) to satisfy the      major economic institutions in the United States.
of career and technical education. Included are          University Studies social science requirement.          Prerequisite: ECO 231.
topics related to motivation, and learning theory,       Does not apply toward business or economics
curriculum, school organization, funding, labora-        major, minor, or area requirement.                      ECO 315 Comparative Economic Systems (3).
tory management and historical, socio-cultural,                                                                  An analysis and appraisal of the various economic
psychological and philosophical foundations of           ECO 190 Consumer Economics (3). A study                 structures utilized by societies to solve the eco-
career and technical education.                          of consumer buying practices, family finances,          nomic problem of how to allocate scarce resources
                                                         protection of the consumer, and other problems of       among unlimited wants. Prerequisites: junior
CTE 502 Instructional Media, Curricula and               the household. Does not apply toward business or        standing; ECO 230 or consent of instructor.
Assessment in CTE (3). Course will provide an            economics major, minor, or area requirements.
overview of current trends and issues in instruc-                                                                ECO 330 Intermediate Macroeconomics (3).
tional technology and curricula in the technology        ECO 200 Economics and Politics (3). This                An analysis of the application of the principles
rich instructional environment. The focus is on          course provides an introduction to the economic         of supply and demand to the macroeconomic
instructional approaches and assessment unique           analysis of governments and politics. Topics            problems that face society, such as inflation,
to and appropriate for the career and technical          covered include the role of special interest groups     unemployment, growth, deficits and recessions.
educational classroom.                                   in American government, the growth of the               This course is a continuation of ECO 230 with a
                                                         government sector in the American economy,              greater emphasis on the development of formal
CTE 503 Planning and Implementing Instruc-               and the fundamental differences between private         models of macroeconomic activity. Prerequisites:
tion in CTE (3). This course will provide an             and public sector decision-making. The course           ECO 230 and MAT 220.
overview of current trends and issues in planning        is designed to introduce students to the role that
and implementing instruction in the media rich           incentives play in understanding government             ECO 331 Intermediate Microeconomics (3).
career and technical education classroom and             decision-making. Does not apply toward business         An analysis of the application of the principles
laboratory. Includes exploration of such varied          or economics major, minor, or area requirement,         of supply and demand to the resource allocation
methods as lecture, discussion, group instruction,       but may be used as an elective.                         decisions faced by consumers, firms and resource
projects and instructional modules.                                                                              owners. This course is a continuation of ECO 231
                                                         ECO 230 Principles of Macroeconomics (3). An            with a greater emphasis on the development of
CTE 563 Evaluation of Instruction in Industrial          introduction to the application of the basic prin-      formal models of individual product and resource
Technical Education (3). A course designed to            ciples of supply and demand to issues in aggregate      markets. Prerequisites: ECO 231 and MAT 220.
provide instruction in the process of instructional      economics such as national income accounting,
evaluation. Emphasis is given to the establishment       unemployment, growth, inflation, business cycles,       ECO 335 Economics and Public Policy of
of student performance criteria, the assessment of       and the role played by government through its fiscal    Telecommunications Industry (3). The study
student performance in the cognitive, affective          and monetary policies. Prerequisites: MAT 117,          of market performance and business practices of
and psychomotor domains, and the assigning of            120, 140 or 150; or an ACT math standard score          the telecommunications industry. Includes topics
grades. An independent study project or research         of at least 23; or consent of instructor.               such as market power, merger analysis, vertical
report is required.                                                                                              relationships, entry and regulation of price and
                                                         ECO 231 Principles of Microeconomics (3).               lines of business. Prerequisites: ECO 231.
CTE 566 Special Problems in Career and                   An introduction to the application of the basic
Technical Education (1-6). Provides an oppor-            principles of supply and demand to the behavior         ECO 345 Environmental Economics (3). De-
tunity for individual study, laboratory practice         of individual economic agents such as consum-           velopment of a framework for investigating the
and research in vocational education. The student        ers, households, business and nonprofit firms,          meaning and causes of environmental deteriora-
must show a real need for such study and have            industries, and resource owners. Real world ex-         tion. Special emphasis on developing and using
the proposed problem approved before register-                                                                   economic analysis to evaluate the appropriateness
ing for the course. May be repeated for up to six
hours of credit.
                                                         amples are used to demonstrate the application of
                                                         microeconomics to everyday situations, including        of proposed solutions. Prerequisite: ECO 231.        201
                                                         an analysis of the effects of government policies
      ECO 410 Economic Development (3). An                     ECO 499 Senior Seminar in Economics (1-               EducAtion
      introduction to the economic characteristics and         3). This is a capstone course in economics and        (Edu)
      problems of the less developed countries and to          is required of all economics majors. This class       EDU 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed
      theories and policies applicable to the develop-         will serve to draw together the knowledge and         to assist students in their transition to Murray
      ing economy.                                             analytical tools developed during the economics       State University. Content includes orientation to
                                                               major course of study by requiring the develop-       the specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within
      ECO 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-             ment and completion of an independent research        the academic program; university procedures,
      supervised thesis and/or project which allows            project. Prerequisites: senior standing and consent   policies, and resources; strategies for personal
      Honors Program students with a senior standing           of instructor.                                        and academic success, and extracurricular op-
      to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper                                                                 portunities. Only one transitions course will count
      and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-          ECO 505 Internship in Economics (1-3). Open           toward graduation. Graded pass/fail.
      mance is required.                                       to junior and senior economics majors. Students
                                                               are placed with cooperating firms or government       EDU 103 Issues and Practices of American
      ECO 440 Urban Economics (3). A study of the              agencies to receive on-the-job training in economic   Education (3). Course designed to provide all
      economic theory relevant to the urban environment        analysis. Work experience is supervised by faculty
                                                                                                                     students with an overview of the field of educa-
      with applications of this theory to current urban        and written reports are required. Graded pass/fail.
                                                                                                                     tion. Included are topics related to motivation and
      problems. Prerequisite: ECO 231.                         Prerequisite: permission of departmental chair.
                                                                                                                     learning theory, curriculum, school organization,
                                                                                                                     and historical, socio-cultural, psychological and
      ECO 441 Regional Economics (3). An analysis              ECO 538 Monetary and Fiscal Policy (3). An
                                                                                                                     philosophical foundations of education. Although
      of factors contributing to the economic develop-         appraisal of the federal government’s efforts to
                                                                                                                     this is also an initial education course for students
                                                               promote full employment and price stability. Pre-
      ment of geographical regions of the American                                                                   seeking teacher certification, all students will be
                                                               requisite: ECO 330 or consent of instructor.
      economy. Prerequisite: ECO 231.                                                                                able to apply what they have learned as parents
                                                               ECO 539 Microeconomic Policy (3). An analysis         and concerned citizens in their adult lives. Field
      ECO 450 Economic Applications to Law (3).                                                                      observations required.
                                                               of government policy affecting business firms
      An introduction to the analysis of legal issues and
                                                               and consumer choice. Prerequisite: ECO 331 or
      legal reasoning. Case studies include property,                                                                EDU 104 Exploration of Teaching (3). An elec-
                                                               consent of instructor.
      contracts, torts, product liability, criminal behavior                                                         tive course for high school students interested
      and the value of life. Prerequisites: ECO 230, and       ECO 540 Market Structure and Firm Behavior            in pursuing a career in teacher education which
      231 or consent of instructor.                            (3). This course examines non-competitive mar-        will serve as a bridge class between EDU 103
                                                               ket structures such as monopoly, oligopoly and        and collegiate level teacher education courses.
      ECO 460 International Trade and Finance                  monopolistic competition. The course will focus       The course will include an exploration of the
      (3). A study of the principles, practices, and           on output and pricing decisions of such firms,        professional qualities and expectations of the
      institutions of international trade and finance.         the economic impact of these market structures,       teacher/educator. Roles, responsibilities, and chal-
      Prerequisite: ECO 231.                                   and the regulation of non-competitive markets.        lenges in the field of education will be examined.
                                                               Prerequisite: ECO 231.                                The course will include a minimum of 22 hours
      ECO 488 Cooperative Education/Internship                                                                       of field experiences.
      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work         ECO 550 Public Finance (3). A survey of the
      experience related to the career and educational         principles and practices of raising and spending      EDU 300 Fundamentals of Secondary Educa-
      objectives of the student for which he/she may           public revenues. Prerequisite: ECO 231 or consent     tion (3). This is the initial course in education
      receive academic credit and possible financial           of instructor.                                        for students who are considering an alternate
      remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum                                                                    route to certification in secondary education. It is
      of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded            ECO 570 Labor Economics (3). A survey of the          designed to provide students with an introduction
      pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.            economics of labor, the conditions of employment,     to the field of education with special attention to
                                                               wages and the development of labor organizations      secondary education. Included are topics related to
      ECO 489 Cooperative Education/Internship                 in the United States. Prerequisite: ECO 231.          motivation and learning theory, curriculum, school
      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work                                                               organization, as well as historical, sociocultural,
      experience related to the career and educational         ECO 595 Special Problems (1-3). Prerequisite:         psychological and philosophical foundations of
      objectives of the student for which he/she may           consent of instructor.                                education. Graded pass/fail.
      receive academic credit and possible financial
      remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of           ECO 597 Teaching and Application of Eco-              EDU 303 Strategies of Teaching (3). This course
      six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:        nomic Principles: K-12 (3). A survey of content,      is an investigation of the skills of teaching which
      permission of chair.                                     materials, teaching methodology and practicum         are applicable at any grade level. Emphasis
                                                               in program design for incorporating economic          placed on the application of teaching strategies
      ECO 490 (500) Survey of Economics (3). A rigor-          principles into grades K-12. The course is de-        in microteaching and classroom settings. The
      ous introduction to economics including the ap-          signed for those with little or no formal economic    course will also include coverage of classroom
      plication of the basic principles of microeconomics      background. (Same as EDU 597.)                        management strategies, discipline techniques,
      and macroeconomics, designed for students who                                                                  and curriculum development as a function of
      have an inadequate background in economics.                                                                    instruction. Laboratory experiences required.
      Covers the same material as in ECO 231 and ECO           EducAtionAl psychology
                                                                                                                     Prerequisite: Students must have earned a C or
      230 or the equivalent. Prerequisites: MAT 117,           (Edp)
                                                                                                                     better in EDU 103.
                                                               EDP 260 Psychology of Human Development
      120, 140 or 150; or an ACT math standard score
                                                               (3). A study of the systematic changes in the
      of at least 23; or consent of instructor.                                                                      EDU 400 Practicum in Teaching Mathematics
                                                               cognitive, behavioral, social, and biological func-
                                                               tioning of the individual across the developmental    (3). A practicum that involves field and classroom
      ECO 498 Research Methods in Economics (1-                                                                      learning experiences in implementing methods and
                                                               stages of life. Note: Cannot be counted toward
      3). Course is the first of a two course sequence                                                               materials of teaching and assessing mathemat-
                                                               both teacher certification and the psychology
      (with ECO 499) which together make up the                                                                      ics in a public school classroom. Prerequisite:
                                                               major or minor.
      senior seminar portion of the economics major.                                                                 admission to Teacher Education, MAT 115 and
      This course will cover research methods includ-          EDP 380 Educational Psychology (3). Psy-              215, ELE 304 or MID 371.
      ing: project design, research methods, writing           chological theories, concepts, data, and methods
      skills and presentation skills. Those not meeting
202                                                            pertaining to the teaching-learning context and       EDU 403 Structures and Foundations of
      these requirements must seek the permission of           to the general educational setting are presented.     Education (2). A course designed to provide the
      the instructor. Prerequisite: senior standing.           Prerequisite: PSY 180.                                undergraduate teacher education student with an
in-depth study of the foundations of education. The    in program design for incorporating economic           EGR 310 Fundamentals of Biomedical En-
course includes a major emphasis in the social,        principles into grades K-12. The course is de-         gineering (3). Survey course of the application
historical, legal, and philosophical foundations       signed for those with little or no formal economic     of engineering concepts and techniques to the
of education. Prerequisite: admission to Teacher       background. (Same as ECO 597.)                         investigation and exploration of biomedical
Education.                                                                                                    processes. Emphasis is placed on an understand-
                                                                                                              ing of the physical/mathematical models that
EDU 404 Teaching Environmental Education               EnginEEring                                            form the design basis for biomedical sensors,
(K-12) (1). A residential experience at Land           (Egr)                                                  instrumentation, imaging, and diagnostic tools.
Between the Lakes that entails the study of en-        EGR 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed            Some on-site experiences may be included at
vironmental education and its interdisciplinary        to assist students in their transition to Murray       local medical facilities. Prerequisite: EGR 264
nature including the materials and methods. Field      State University. Content includes orientation to      or consent of instructor.
experiences required including participation in a      the specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within
24-hour Friday overnight environmental education       the academic program; university procedures,           EGR 330 Dynamics (3). Study of motion and
retreat at LBL. Graded pass/fail. Corequisites:        policies, and resources; strategies for personal       forces with application to engineering systems.
ELE 401 and 402.                                       and academic success, and extracurricular op-          Planar and three-dimensional kinematics and
                                                       portunities. Only one transitions course will          kinetics of a particle and of rigid bodies; equa-
EDU 405 Evaluation and Measurement in                  count toward graduation. Introduction to the           tions of motion; work and energy; impulse and
Education (2). The selection, administration,          EGR major, the engineering profession, the             momentum; vibrations. Three lectures per week.
and uses of educational evaluation and measure-        department, and the university. Graded pass/fail.      Prerequisites: PHY 235.
ment approaches with emphasis on application           (Same as PHY 099).
                                                                                                              EGR 340 Wave Analysis of Dynamic Systems
in school classrooms. Prerequisite: admission to
                                                                                                              (3). The analysis of vibrating and oscillating
Teacher Education.                                     EGR 140 Introduction to Computing Applica-
                                                                                                              systems are introduced and developed in appli-
                                                       tions in Science and Engineering (3). A course
                                                                                                              cations to mechanical systems, electric circuits,
EDU 422 Student Teaching Seminar (3). A pro-           to introduce students to computational techniques
                                                                                                              optics, acoustics, and quantum theory. Necessary
fessional experience to be provided concurrently       employed in scientific, engineering, mathematical
                                                                                                              mathematical and computational tools required
with student teaching to provide theory, research      and statistical applications. C++ language will        for this study are also introduced as needed.
base and a forum to support the performance in the     be used in several related programming projects,       The course is designed to serve as a transition
school assignment. Topics arising from problems        including graphics. The course is designed to          between the introductory survey courses and the
encountered in the classroom as well as other          meet the needs of students in physics, engineering     more rigorous advanced courses in physics and
current topics will be studied. Graded pass/fail.      physics and related sciences in the use of the mi-     engineering. Prerequisite: PHY 255.
Prerequisite: Admission to Teacher Education and       crocomputer as a tool for the solution of problems
student teaching.                                      and in particular where graphics are required.         EGR 342 Thermodynamics II (3). Gas mixtures,
                                                                                                              air-water vapor mixtures. Air conditioning system
EDU 423 International Teaching Experience (1-          EGR 195 Methods of Engineering Physics                 design. Principles and design of energy conver-
3). A course designed to provide an international      (2). An introduction to the application of basic       sion devices, power and refrigeration cycles.
teaching experience for prospective teachers           tools and methods used in the engineering phys-        Principles of combustion, chemical equilibrium,
through which they will come to understand the         ics curriculum. Primary emphasis on the use            one-dimensional gas dynamics. Applications to
culture and educational system of another country.     of symbolic computational software packages            typical engineering problems. Prerequisites: EGR
Students will be placed in an international            (such as Mathcad) for organizing, performing,          (PHY) 240. Corequisite: MAT 309.
educational setting and will collaborate with          and visualizing complex or tedious calculations.
teachers and administrators to assist in providing     Introduction of fundamental statistical definitions    EGR 344 Fluid Mechanics (3). Fundamental
instruction to students. Prerequisites: consent of     and methods of data analysis.                          principles and applications of hydrostatics and
instructor.                                                                                                   fluid flow for engineers. Three lectures per week,
                                                       EGR 240 Thermodynamics I (3). Fundamental              incorporating laboratory activities for students and
EDU 450 Special Problems (1-12). Individual            engineering concepts of power systems, cooling         demonstrations as appropriate. Cannot be taken for
study and projects in education. Repeatable for        systems and system efficiency. First and second        graduate credit by physics majors. Prerequisite:
up to 12 hours of credit. Prerequisite: Consent        law analysis. Entropy; exergy; reversible and          EGR (PHY) 240. Corequisite: MAT 411.
of instructor.                                         irreversible processes. Ideal gases. Application
                                                       to simple physical, chemical and engineering           EGR 346 Heat Transfer (3). Basic principles
EDU 515 Introduction to Environmental                  problems. Three lectures per week, incorporating       and applications of heat transfer for engineers.
Education (3). An introduction to environmen-          laboratory activities for students and demonstra-      Problems in convection-, conduction-, and
tal education which will include philosophy,           tions as appropriate. Prerequisite: PHY 235.           radiation-transfer. Three lectures per week, in-
historical development, resource identification,       Corequisite: MAT 308.                                  corporating laboratory activities for students and
curriculum development, field trip and other                                                                  demonstrations as appropriate. Corequisites: EGR
activities designed to use the various subject         EGR 259 Statics (3). Force systems: moments,           (PHY) 240 and MAT 411.
areas in all grade levels as a vehicle to create an    couples, equivalent force systems, distributed
environmental ethic.                                   force systems. Equilibrium equations, free body        EGR 359 Mechanics of Materials (3). A study
                                                                                                              of stress and strain in deformable solids; tension
                                                       diagrams, special cases of equilibrium, static inde-
EDU 585 Environmental Interpretation (3). A                                                                   and compression of axial members; stress and
                                                       terminacy, trusses, friction. For engineers. Three
course designed for persons in the fields of natural                                                          strain transformations; stress-strain relations;
                                                       lectures per week. Prerequisite: PHY 235.
and cultural history, recreation, education, and                                                              torsion of shafts; bending of beams; buckling of
media. A focus will be placed upon the philosophy,                                                            columns. Three lectures per week, incorporating
                                                       EGR 264 Linear Circuits I (4). DC and AC
process and values of environmental interpretation                                                            laboratory activities for students and demonstra-
                                                       steady state circuit analysis. Resistive circuits,
while looking closely into the methods and tech-                                                              tions as appropriate. Prerequisites: EGR (PHY)
                                                       Kirchhoff’s laws, nodal and mesh analysis, loop
niques of interpreting programming. Successful                                                                259. Corequisite: MAT 308.
                                                       analysis, Thevenin’s and Norton’s theorems,
completion of the course will lead to a national       superposition, capacitors, inductors, diodes, and
certification through the National Association for                                                            EGR 365 Linear Circuits II (3). DC and AC
                                                       operational amplifiers. Also includes AC steady        transient circuit analysis. First and second order
Interpretation.                                        state circuit analysis using complex number            circuit solutions using differential equations,
                                                       algebra, introduction to three phase circuits, and     Fourier Series, Laplace and Fourier transforms.
EDU 597 Teaching and Application of Eco-               computer simulation of steady state circuits. Three
nomic Principles: K-12 (3). A survey of content,
materials, teaching methodology and practicum
                                                       lectures per week plus laboratory. Prerequisites:
                                                       PHY 255.
                                                                                                              Also includes magnetically coupled circuits, vari-
                                                                                                              able frequency circuits, and transistor switching.     203
                                                                                                              Prerequisites: EGR (PHY) 264.
      EGR 366 Analog Electronics I (3). Transistor            EGR 465 (ETE 420) Signals and Linear                    EGR 569 Microprocessor Techniques (3). Ar-
      amplifiers, feedback circuits, filters, frequency       Systems (3). Analysis of continuous-time and            chitecture of various microprocessors, assembly
      response of circuits, power supplies and switch-        discrete-time, discrete-parameter, time-invari-         of useful microcomputers using one or more of the
      ing circuits. Computer simulations of circuits          ant, linear systems based upon the convolution          popular microprocessors, technique of interfacing
      will be emphasized. Prerequisite: EGR (PHY)             integral, Fourier series and transform, Laplace         to microcomputers, programming microcomput-
      365 and MAT 309.                                        transform, Z-transform, and state-space meth-           ers, importance of microcomputers in logic design.
                                                              ods. Topics include impulse response, transfer          Prerequisite: EGR (PHY) 378.
      EGR 375 Materials Science (3). An introduc-             function, energy spectra, filtering, sampling, and
      tory study of the science of materials utilization,     applications to networks, communications, and
      structure of solid phases, the atomic and electrical    controls. Prerequisite: EGR 365.                        ElEmEntAry EducAtion
      processes in solids. Prerequisite: PHY 255.                                                                     (ElE)
                                                              EGR 468 Digital Signal Processing (3). Discrete-        ELE 201 Infant and Toddler Curriculum (3).
      EGR 378 Logic Design I (4). Introduction to                                                                     This course provides an in-depth look at care
                                                              time signals and systems; Sampling and aliasing;
      digital logic design techniques: binary arithmetic,                                                             and education for infants and toddler including
                                                              Discrete Fourier Transform; Z-Transforms; FIR
      Boolean algebra, combinational and sequential                                                                   children with disabilities and children from
      circuits, registers, counters, memory units and         and IIR filter design techniques; Current applica-
                                                              tions of digital signal processing. Three hours         diverse backgrounds. Major emphasis is placed on
      programmable devices. Three lectures and two                                                                    methods to provide quality care to meet physical,
      hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisites: EGR        lecture per week. Prerequisite: EGR 264.
                                                                                                                      emotional, cognitive and social needs of infants
      (PHY) 140 or knowledge of a high-level comput-
                                                              EGR 469 Digital Signal Processing Labora-               and toddlers while working collaboratively
      ing language and PHY 255.
                                                              tory (1). Laboratory to accompany EGR 468.              with families and other community agencies
                                                              Prerequisite: EGR 264 (PHY 264). Corequisite:           and service providers. Current best practices in
      EGR 379 Logic Design II (3). Design of digital
                                                              EGR 468.                                                education of infants and toddlers will be reviewed.
      systems. Topics include CPU control and timing,
                                                                                                                      Clinical field experiences will be required.
      machine organization, instruction set architec-
                                                              EGR 498 Senior Engineering Design I (3). Stu-           Prerequisites: FCS 210 and FCS 211.
      ture, addressing modes, I/O interfaces, cache
      memory and virtual memory. Prerequisite: EGR            dents will work together in small teams to design,
      (PHY) 378.                                                                                                      ELE 301 Language and Early Literacy for
                                                              build, and test a project assigned by the instructor.
                                                                                                                      Early Childhood (3). This course focuses on
                                                              Completion of the project will demonstrate an
      EGR 388 International Experience in Engineer-                                                                   the child’s emerging literacy and exposure to
                                                              understanding of multiple engineering disciplines,
      ing (3). A short-term (10-14 day) study abroad                                                                  language stimulation. Combining research, re-
                                                              teamwork, and application of the design process.
      experience highlighting selected historical and                                                                 flection and early childhood practices, the course
                                                              Students will also become familiar with basic
      modern contributions to engineering and physics                                                                 fosters an understanding of how techniques and
                                                              elements of engineering economics. Students
      from another country and culture. Prerequisite:                                                                 activities affect language and early literacy skills
                                                              will demonstrate communication skills through
      consent of instructor.                                                                                          development in young children infancy through
                                                              design reports and memoranda, project drawings,         five years of age with and without disabilities.
                                                              a written test report and a written proposal for        Prerequisites: EDU 103.
      EGR 390 Engineering Measurements (3).
                                                              individual work in EGR 499. Prerequisite: senior
      General considerations of signals and utilization
                                                              standing in engineering.                                ELE 302 Music and Movement for Young
      of instruments to measure physical properties
      of systems. Review and introduction of useful                                                                   Children (3). An in-depth exploration of devel-
                                                              EGR 499 Senior Engineering Design II (3).               opmentally appropriate music and movement
      mathematical concepts such as statistical data
      analysis. Introduction to digital data acquisition      Students will develop an individual design project,     experiences for young children infancy through
      and signal processing. Application to the design of     working with a faculty advisor to determine the         five years of age. Students will develop skills to
      instruments which measure displacement, motion,         scope of their design. The final product is a major     assist young children with and without disabilities
      count, strain, force, pressure, level, fluid flow and   report and complete specification, from which the       in producing, recognizing and creating simple
      temperature. Prerequisites: Junior standing or          product could be assembled. Students may, but are       songs, playing with melody, and expressing feel-
      consent of instructor; Corequisite: MAT 411.            not required to, produce a prototype, scale model,      ings through music and movement. Prerequisites:
                                                              or simulation to support their design decisions.        MUS 200.
      EGR 398 Principles of Design (3). The task of           The senior exit exam is also administered as
      engineering design, which includes the formula-         a part of this course and in preparation for the        ELE 304 Teaching Mathematics in Elementary
      tion of the problem, creative approaches to design      fundamentals of engineering exam. Prerequisite:         P-5 (3). A study of the structure of mathematics,
      problem solution, analysis, material selection and      senior standing in engineering.                         materials, and methods which build insight and
      economics, is considered in design decisions from                                                               skill in the curriculum area. Field experiences
      conception to final product. Prerequisites: working     EGR 565 AC and DC Circuit Analysis (4).                 required.
      knowledge of a high level computer language and         Kirchoff’s laws, Thevenin and Norton’s theorems,
      junior standing or consent of the instructor.           super-position and reciprocity theorems, proper-        ELE 305 Children’s Literature (3). A critical
                                                              ties of L, C, R circuits, filters and resonance.        study of the literature for children in grades
      EGR 459 Mechanical Design (3). Fundamentals             Graduate credit for M.A.T. candidates only.             P-5. Field experiences required. Prerequisite:
      of mechanical design, with methods of                                                                           EDU 303.
      approximation. Introduction to optimum design           EGR 567 Communications Systems (4).
      considerations and statistical variations within        Filtering and signal bandwidth. Introduction            ELE 307 Teaching Language Arts in Elemen-
      the engineering design process. Synthesis and                                                                   tary P-5 (3). A course designed to introduce
                                                              to information theory, encoding and decoding,
      problems on the design of various mechanical                                                                    students to content and teaching methodology in
                                                              linear and digital electronic implementation.
      elements. Prerequisites: EGR 359                                                                                the language arts. Emphasis is on the language arts
                                                              Two hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisite:
                                                              EGR (PHY) 366.                                          in the total elementary school program. Laboratory
      EGR 460 Electricity and Magnetism I (3).                                                                        experiences required. Prerequisite: EDU 303.
      Electric fields, potential, dielectrics, steady
      currents, magnetic fields and electromagnetic           EGR 568 Digital Memory Systems (4). Memory
                                                              hierarchy. Automatic error detection and cor-           ELE 308 Teaching Mathematics and Science
      induction. Prerequisites: PHY 255, MAT 411.
                                                              rection. Shared and multiport memory systems.           in Early Childhood (3). This course is a study of
      (Same as PHY 460)
                                                              Interprocessor communications. Introduction to          mathematics and science curriculum and research-
                                                              computer networking. Prerequisite: CSC 405 or           based teaching practices for early childhood.
      EGR 461 Electricity and Magnetism II (3).
204                                                           EGR (PHY) 378.                                          Field experience required. Prerequisites: FCS
      Magnetic materials, alternating currents, transient
                                                                                                                      210 and 211.
      phenomena, electromagnetic radiation. Prerequi-
      site: EGR (PHY) 460. (Same as PHY 461)
ELE 311 Health, Wellness and Movement (3).             children with disabilities and children from di-          EMT 361 Introduction to Industrial Motion
This course explores how a mixture of content          verse backgrounds. Major emphasis is placed on            Controls (4). A study of motion control as applied
and pedagogy in physical education relate to the       methods to provide quality care to meet physical,         to current production manufacturing and process
elementary classroom teacher. Emphasis is placed       emotional, cognitive and social needs of infants          systems. This course includes an introduction to
on teaching future teachers how to teach health,       and toddlers while working collaboratively with           the mathematics, electronics, and control theory
wellness, and movement concepts to children in         families and other community agencies and service         required to understand these system. Non-servo
the classroom. Prerequisite: EDP 260.                  providers. Current best practices in education of         hydraulic and pneumatic systems will be pre-
                                                       infants and toddlers will be reviewed. Clinical           sented; however, the emphasis of the course is
ELE 390 Introduction to Kindergarten (3). A            field experiences will be required. Prerequisite:         on closed-loop servo-mechanisms. The course is
study of the historical background, organization of    EDP 260, EDU 103, and SED 300.                            laboratory oriented with theoretical and design
physical facilities for kindergarten, developmental                                                              content presented at the appropriate time. Pre-
tasks of the young child and his relationship to       ELE 474 IECE Practicum (3). This course                   requisites: EMT 261, 262, 310, 312, ENT 365,
learning, and parent-teacher relationships.            makes provisions for students to participate in all       MAT 230. (Spring)
                                                       activities generally expected of an interdisciplinary
ELE 401 Teaching Social Studies in Elementary          early childhood education professional. Supervi-          EMT 455 Manufacturing Control Systems (4).
P-5 (3). An exploration of the content, methods,       sion by the faculty member teaching course will           This course is a capstone integration course design
and materials for the teaching of social studies at    be provided. Regularly scheduled seminars to              to apply manufacturing planning systems and
the elementary level. Topics include the integration   promote reflective decision-making, discuss stu-          manufacturing equipment control systems. This
of subject areas, technology, thinking skills, and     dent progress and provide additional training in          course will focus on the development and integra-
citizenship education. Field experiences required      methods, procedures, and evaluation will coincide         tion of local area networks and industrial control
including participation in a 24-hour Friday over-      with the practicum experience. Prerequisites: EDP         processes. The topics included in this course are:
night environmental education retreat at LBL.          260 and EDU 103.                                          local area networks, industrial networks, program-
                                                                                                                 mable logic controllers, man machine interfaces,
ELE 402 Teaching Science in Elementary P-5                                                                       motor control device networks and supervisory
(3). An exploration of content, materials, and         ElEctromEchAnicAl                                         control and data acquisition (SCADA) systems.
methods of teaching science at the elementary          EnginEEring tEchnology (Emt)                              Three hours lecture and two hours lab. Prerequi-
level. Activities include discussions, experiments,    EMT 212 Industrial Electronics (4). A study               sites: EMT 310 and 312. (Fall)
field trips, and observation of children. Field        of semiconductor diodes, transistors, FETs,
experiences required including participation in a      four-layer devices, operational amplifiers, power         EMT 462 Machine Design (3). Design of
24-hour Friday overnight environmental educa-          devices, and digital devices as they are used in          machines using bearings, belts, clutches, gears,
tion retreat at LBL. Prerequisite: admission to        industrial control and signal amplification and           springs and screws. Develops the application of
Teacher Education.                                     processing. Three hours lecture and two hours             the theory of working stresses, power transmis-
                                                       lab. Corequisite: ENT 111.                                sion and lubrication to the analysis and design of
ELE 410 Collaboration and Communication in                                                                       machine elements. Prerequisites: CET 298, ENT
IECE Environments (3). Examines collaboration          EMT 261 Introduction to Fluid Power Systems               365, and ITD 102. (Spring)
processes involving early childhood professionals,     (3). The study of the basic physical concepts
families of children with and without disabilities,    behind fluid power generation, transmission and
and other community resource personnel. Com-           conversion. Common industrial hydraulic and
                                                                                                                 English
munication skills needed to function effectively       pneumatic circuits are designed and analyzed us-
in interdisciplinary early childhood education         ing computer programming. Programmable logic
                                                                                                                 (Eng)
environments are a primary focus. The course                                                                     ENG 095 Writing Workshop (3). A basic writing
                                                       controllers are introduced as a means of system
also addresses topics that are critical to the         control. Three hours lecture per week. Must be            skills course which emphasizes clear sentence
practitioner’s professional development including      taken concurrently with EMT 262. Prerequisites:           structure and development of ideas in paragraphs
reflective thinking, ethics, and advocacy. Prereq-     MAT 130. (Fall)                                           and essays. This course is required for entering
uisites: EDU 103, FCS 210, and 211.                                                                              restricted status freshmen. It must be completed
                                                       EMT 262 Introduction to Fluid Power Systems               before enrollment in ENG 100, 101, or 105. The
ELE 421 Student Teaching Elementary P-5,               Laboratory (1). Laboratory course must be taken           instructor will recommend which English course
IECE (7-14). Student teaching in the elementary        concurrently with EMT 261. Two hours laboratory           must be taken upon completion of ENG 095.
and IECE should allow the individual to participate    per week. Prerequisite: MAT 130. (Fall)                   Credit earned in this course may not be counted
in the work and duties of the school that are gener-                                                             toward graduation requirements. No audit allowed.
ally expected of the classroom teacher. These will     EMT 310 Programmable Logic Controllers (4).               Graded pass/fail.
be a 2, 7-week placements. Student teachers will       This course will cover the techniques of utilizing
be supervised by a public school teacher as well       the programmable logic controllers (PLCs) in the          ENG 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed
as a university coordinator. May be repeated for       industrial environment. Hardware aspects, pro-            to assist students in their transition to Murray
up to 14 credit hours. Graded pass/fail. Prerequi-     gramming techniques, and interfacing situations           State University. Content includes orientation to
site: admission to Teacher Education and Student       will be covered. Three hours lecture and two hours        the specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within
Teaching. Corequisite: EDU 422.                        lab. Prerequisite: CSC 232. (Spring)                      the academic program; university procedures,
                                                                                                                 policies, and resources; strategies for personal
ELE 439 Early Childhood Assessment and                 EMT 312 Industrial Instrumentation (4). A                 and academic success, and extracurricular op-
Program Development (3). Students will develop         study of electrical measurement and electrome-            portunities. Only one transitions course will count
skills in observing children birth through five        chanical control and includes signal conditioning,        toward graduation. Graded pass/fail.
years of age and in conducting developmental           sensors, interfacing to final outputs, controller prin-
screenings, evaluations and assessment. Student        ciples and control loop characteristics. Three hours      ENG 100 Basic Writing (3). A writing skills
will develop skills in creating and implementing       lecture and two hours lab. Prerequisites: EMT 310,        course which emphasizes paragraph and essay
individual education programs and individualized       TSM 210 and MAT 230 or equivalent. (Fall)                 development. The course is required for entering
family service plans and in monitoring child prog-                                                               freshmen with ACT English scores below 18 and
ress. Student will be introduced to the concepts of    EMT 355 Electric Machinery and Controls                   must be completed before enrollment in ENG
home-based and center-based instruction. Prereq-       (4). A study of electric motors and their controls        101 or 105. Credit earned in this course may
uisites: EDP 260, EDU 103, and SED 300.                including the operating characteristics and ap-           not be counted toward graduation requirements.
                                                       plications of various dc and ac motors, electro-          Advanced placement into ENG 105 is possible
ELE 455 Curriculum and Methods for Infants
and Toddlers (3). An in-depth look at care and
                                                       mechanical controls and electronic drives. Three
                                                       hours lecture and two hours lab. Prerequisite:
                                                                                                                 through Murray State University Community
                                                                                                                 College English assessment exams.                     205
education for infants and toddlers including           ENT 351. (Spring)
      ENG 101 Composition (3). Instruction and                 ENG 204 Advanced Expository Writing (3).               ENG 245 African-American Literature (3).
      practice in writing expository prose.                    Course is designed to help students achieve            Beginning with a consideration of the African
                                                               proficiency in writing for specific academic           American experience during slavery, students
      ENG 102 Composition and Research (3).                    contexts, particularly those of the student’s own      enrolled in this survey course will examine
      A study of advanced composition skills, with             major discipline. Prerequisites: completion of         the fiction and nonfiction written by African
      emphasis on techniques of research. Students             ENG 104 or 105 with at least a C average or the        Americans. Thematic emphasis will be given
      may not receive credit for ENG 102 and 105.              equivalent.                                            to historical, cultural, and contemporary issues
      Prerequisite: ENG 101.                                                                                          as viewed in seminal African American works
                                                               ENG 205 Writing for the Social Sciences (3).           written by such authors as Frederick Douglass,
      ENG 104 Honors Composition and Research                  Preparation for research in the social sciences,       Linda Brent, W.E.B. DuBois, Toni Morrison, Zora
      (4). Intensive study and practice of advanced            with practices in analyzing and writing effec-         Neale Hurston, Booker T. Washington, Langston
      composition and research skills. Open to students        tively about professional scholarship. Students        Hughes, and Harriet Wilson. Prerequisites: ENG
      enrolled in the Honors Program For all degrees,          will examine the issues, audiences, styles, and        104 or 105 or the equivalent.
      this course may be used in lieu of ENG 105.              rhetorical situations important to the social sci-
                                                               ences, developing writing and research skills for      ENG 250 Contemporary World Literature (3).
      ENG 105 Critical Reading, Writing, and                   their own work in the discipline. Prerequisites:       A study of selected novels, short stories, plays, and
      Inquiry (4). Instruction and practice in close           ENG 104 or 105 or the equivalent and at least          poetry from world literature of the last thirty years.
      reading, research, and critical thinking as applied      one course in the social sciences.                     Works studied will be by important new authors
      to academic writing, with emphasis on analysis,                                                                 not native to the United States and will illustrate
      synthesis, and argument. A student may not receive       ENG 213 Film and Literature (3). A study of the        contemporary literary trends. Works will include
      credit for ENG 105 and 101 or 102 or 104.                correlations between the film form and traditional     representative texts from North America, South
                                                               literary forms. Prerequisites: ENG 104 or 105 or       America, Asia, Europe, and Africa. Prerequisites:
      ENG 107 Teacher Bridge Writing Project (3).              the equivalent.                                        ENG 104 or 105 or the equivalent.
      For Teacher Bridge Program participants only, this
      course helps prepare them to make the transition         ENG 214 Introduction to Creative Writing (3).          ENG 303 British Literature to 1760 (3). A study
      to a four-year university setting. Students improve      An introduction to the forms of poetry and fiction,    of the development of British literature from the
      their writing skills while exploring teacher edu-        combining the careful reading of the works of          Old English through the Early Modern English
      cation. May not be used for credit for ENG 101,          established writers and original student writing.      periods, with emphasis on key texts, figures,
      102, 104, or 105 but may count as an elective            Designed for majors and non-majors. Prerequi-          genres, and trends, including critical approaches.
      toward graduation.                                       sites: ENG 104 or 105 or the equivalent.               Prerequisites: ENG 104 or 105 or the equivalent,
                                                                                                                      and ENG 221 or permission of instructor.
      ENG 109 Oral Skills Workshop for Interna-                ENG 221 Introduction to English Studies (3).
      tional Students (3). Course for international            An introductory course for English majors and          ENG 304 British Literature, 1760 to the Pres-
      students entering MSU or enrolled at MSU based           minors designed to familiarize students with a         ent (3). A study of British literature form the late
      on required TOEFL (Test of English as a Foreign          range of literary and writing genres, as well as       18th century to the present, with emphasis on
      Language) scores who are weak in listening and           the discourses, practices, and major theories of
                                                                                                                      key texts, figures, genres, and trends, including
      particularly in speaking skills in English. It is also   English studies. Prerequisites: ENG 104 or 105
                                                                                                                      critical approaches. Prerequisites: ENG 104 or
      open to any other MSU student who may feel the           or the equivalent.
                                                                                                                      105 or the equivalent, and ENG 221 or permis-
      need to improve English speaking skills.                                                                        sion of instructor.
                                                               ENG 224 Writing in the Professions (3). This
      ENG 110 Text Skills Workshop for Interna-                course prepares students to write documents such
                                                               as proposals, reports, memos, letters, and e-mail      ENG 305 Survey of World Literature, 1700-
      tional Students (3). The enhancement of English                                                                 1945 (3). A survey of world literature in English
      language skills in academic settings for nonnative       in professional scenarios. Students will learn to
                                                               assess practical writing situations and to write       or English translation from 1700 to 1945. Works
      speakers of English. This support course, intended
                                                               successful documents for specific purposes and         studied will include novels, short stories, plays,
      primarily for upper division undergraduate and
                                                               audiences. The course will emphasize computer          and poems by authors from Europe, Asia, Africa,
      newly enrolled graduate students, provides class-
                                                               skills. Course activities may include peer review,     Australia, and the Americas. Prerequisites: ENG
      room and individual instruction and practice in
                                                               collaborative writing, and intensive planning and      104 or 105 or the equivalent.
      written academic presentations. Credit earned in
      this course may not be counted toward graduation         revision workshops. Prerequisites: ENG 104 or
      requirements. Course may be repeated up to three         105 or the equivalent.                                 ENG 306 Contemporary Literature (3). A
      times as needed.                                                                                                survey of literature written in English from 1945
                                                               ENG 226 Argument and Discourse (3). A                  to the present. Prerequisites: ENG 104 or 105 or
      ENG 111 Fundamental Writing Skills I (1). This           study of advanced principles of argumentation          the equivalent.
      course is designed for individualized instruction in     and conventions of rhetoric as applied to spoken
      basics of grammar, punctuation, and composition.         and written public discourse. Application of           ENG 307 World Literature to 1830 (3). A
      Does not count toward an English major, minor,           the foundational components may be based on            survey of world literature in English or English
      or University Studies requirements. Corequisite:         an instructor-chosen theme, such as discourse          translation, from the ancient world to 1830, in-
      ENG 101 or consent of program director.                  in political, environmental, religious, or other       cluding critical approaches. Prerequisites: ENG
                                                               domains. Prerequisite: ENG 104 or 105 or the           104 or 105 or the equivalent.
      ENG 112 Fundamental Writing Skills II (1).               equivalent.
      This course is a continuation of ENG 111. Does                                                                  ENG 308 World Literature, 1830 to the Pres-
      not count toward an English major, minor, or             ENG 228 (328) Standard English Usage (3).              ent (3). Survey of world literature In English
      University Studies requirements. Corequisite:            The traditional or prescriptive approach to a          or English translation from 1830 to the present,
      ENG 102 or consent of program director.                  comprehensive study of standard English gram-          including critical approaches. Prerequisites: ENG
                                                               mar and the conventions of punctuation and             104 or 105 or the equivalent.
      ENG 201 Appreciation of Literature (3). A                capitalization.
      course designed to develop a broad literary ap-                                                                 ENG 309 History of the English Language (3).
      preciation and understanding. This course provides       ENG 243 Literary Masterpieces: Fantasy, Myth           A survey of the English language from Old to
      for the study of various genres, including fiction,      and Legend (3). A study of the literary manifesta-     Middle to Modern English.
      poetry, and drama. ENG 201 is a University Stud-         tions of fantasy, myth, and legend as they appear in
206   ies humanities elective. Prerequisites: ENG 104
      or 105 or equivalent.
                                                               the works of such writers as Homer, Shakespeare,
                                                               Milton, Coleridge, Yeats, and Tolkien.
                                                                                                                      ENG 310 Introduction to English Linguistics
                                                                                                                      (3). A survey of modern studies in the English
language, with emphasis placed upon its impact         ENG 330 Special Topics (3). A study of literary         sophical writings articulate a relationship between
on the theory and practice of several grammati-        genres or sub-genres, or of other special topics.       philosophy and literature. Topics may include the
cal systems.                                           Content will vary from semester to semester ac-         role of imagination and emotion in reasoning,
                                                       cording to student and faculty interests. May be        interpretation, rhetoric, and the role of literature
ENG 311 American Literature to 1890 (3). A             repeated for credit.                                    in moral reasoning. Prerequisite: ENG 104 or 105
study of the development of U.S. literature from                                                               or the equivalent. (Same as PHI 360)
the nation’s beginnings to 1890, with emphasis         ENG 331 (440) Traditional Rhetoric and the
on major works and writers, including critical         Written Argument (3). A study of rhetoric from          ENG 365 Collaborative Research (1-4). A col-
approaches. Prerequisites: ENG 104 or 105              ancient Greece to the 19th century. Emphasizes          laborative research project with a faculty member
or the equivalent, and ENG 221 or consent of           the application of traditional rhetoric to written      aimed at producing a peer-reviewed publication
instructor.                                            argument while giving students an opportunity           or presentation. May be repeated for up to eight
                                                       to analyze and create persuasive messages per-          hours of credit. Graded pass/fail. Prerequisites:
ENG 312 American Literature 1890 to the                taining to politics and the law, business, science,     ENG 221 and 321.
Present (3). A study of U.S. literature and its        and the arts.
developing ethnic and cultural traditions from                                                                 ENG 370 Law and Literature (3). A course that
1890 to the present, including critical approaches.    ENG 332 (441) Contemporary Rhetoric and the             explores the intersections between law and litera-
Prerequisites: ENG 104 or 105 or the equivalent,       Written Argument (3). A study of rhetoric from          ture within larger cultural contexts. Prerequisites:
and ENG 221 or consent of instructor.                  the 19th century to the present. Emphasizes the         HUM 211. (Same as LST 370.)
                                                       application of contemporary rhetoric to written
ENG 313 History of the Cinema (3). This course         argument while giving students an opportunity           ENG 371 Literature and the Environment (3). A
will cover the international, historical, cultural,    to analyze and create persuasive messages per-          study of literary and other works from a variety of
artistic, and technical development of the cinema      taining to politics and the law, business, science,     cultures and periods with a focus on the environ-
from the beginnings to the present, with some          and the arts.                                           ment, its inhabitants, and their survival. Depending
emphasis on American contributions.                                                                            on individual research needs and the interest of
                                                       ENG 334 Shakespeare (3). A study of selected            the group, field experiences may be scheduled,
ENG 315 Global Cinema (3). A study of na-              Shakespearean histories, comedies, and tragedies.       some of which might include excursions into
tional cinemas and industries outside the United       Prerequisites: ENG 104 or 105 or the equivalent,        developed, threatened, and wilderness areas and
States, examining significant directors and film       and ENG 221 or consent of instructor.                   visits to other relevant sites. Prerequisites: ENG
movements. This class meets for two hours for                                                                  104 or 105 or the equivalent.
lecture and discussion and two hours for film          ENG 341 Introduction to Writing Fiction (3).
viewing. Prerequisites: ENG 104 or 105 or the          An introduction to fiction writing, combining the       ENG 380 Introduction to Poetry and Poetics (3).
equivalent.                                            careful reading of works by established writers         An introduction to the traditions and techniques
                                                       with analysis of original student stories.              of poetry, including the study of meter, literary
ENG 316 The Bible as Literature (3). A study                                                                   devices, and form. Prerequisites: ENG 104 or 105
of the Bible as a literary source. Prerequisites:      ENG 342 Introduction to Writing Poetry (3).             or the equivalent.
ENG 104 or 105 or the equivalent. (Same as             An introduction to poetry writing, combining the
RGS 316.)                                              careful reading of poems by established writers         ENG 400 Major Film Directors (3). One or more
                                                       with analysis of original student poems.                major film directors will be studied in depth. This
ENG 317 Literature and Religion (3). Course                                                                    course, with different content by featuring different
that explores the intersections between literature     ENG 343 Special Topics in Creative Writing              directors, may be repeated once for credit. Prereq-
and religion within larger cultural contexts.          (3). The study of a special area of creative writing.   uisites: ENG 104 or 105 or the equivalent.
Depending on individual research needs and the         Content will vary from semester to semester ac-
interest of the group, mandatory field experiences     cording to student and faculty interest. The course     ENG 401 (314) Film Theory and Criticism
may be scheduled. Prerequisites: HUM 211. (Same        will combine the careful reading of works by            (3). Study of major aesthetic and critical theo-
as RGS 317.)                                           established writers with analysis of original student   ries about film and of the theory and practice of
                                                       work. Students will be required to attend readings      film criticism, with focus on American cinema.
ENG 318 Women’s Literature (3). A study of             sponsored by the Creative Writing Program and           This class meets for two hours for lecture and
literature written by women. Prerequisites: ENG        encouraged to attend other readings on campus           discussion and two hours for film viewing.
104 or 105 or the equivalent.                          and in the area. Course may be repeated for credit      Prerequisites: ENG 104 or 105 or the equivalent
                                                       three times with the consent of the instructor and      and a film course.
ENG 319 Gay and Lesbian Literature (3). Liter-         student’s advisor. Prerequisites: ENG 104 or 105
ary works by gay and lesbian authors as well as        or the equivalent.                                      ENG 402 (502) Early English Literature (3). A
works about the gay and lesbian experience will                                                                critical and historical survey of English literature
be read, spanning the long and varied history of       ENG 344 Introduction to Creative Non-Fiction            before 1500, studied partly in translation. Prereq-
this genre. Prerequisites: ENG 104 or 105 or the       (3). Study and practice in the literary art of cre-     uisite: ENG 321 or consent of instructor.
equivalent and either ENG 201 or 221.                  ative nonfiction with particular emphasis on the
                                                       personal essay. Course requirements will include        ENG 403 (503) Medieval Drama (3). European
ENG 320 Survey in African-American Lit-                attendance at readings sponsored by the Creative        secular and religious drama in the Middle Ages,
erature (3). A thematic survey and analysis of         Writing Program. Prerequisites: ENG 104 or 105          studied partly in translation. Prerequisite: ENG
African-American literature and appropriate            or the equivalent.                                      303 and 321 or consent of instructor.
theoretical concepts. Prerequisite: ENG 104 or
105 or the equivalent.                                 ENG 351 Special Topics in Film Studies (3).             ENG 404 Advanced Composition (3). Intensive
                                                       The study of an advanced area in film studies,          workshop in writing for the English major. Topics
ENG 324 Technical Writing (3). Theory of and           including, but not limited to studies in major          include expository writing, rhetorical and literary
practice in the writing of technical letters and       filmmakers, national traditions, genres, schools        analysis, and research writing. Required of all
reports for industry and technology. Prerequisite:     of theory, or influential actors. The course may        English majors. Prerequisite: ENG 104 or 105
ENG 104 or 105 or the equivalent.                      be repeated twice for credit with consent from the      or the equivalent.
                                                       Chair. Prerequisite: ENG 313.
ENG 329 Teaching English in Middle/Second-                                                                     ENG 405 British Novel to 1830 (3). A study of
                                                                                                               the background and development of the British
                                                                                                                                                                       207
ary Schools (3). A practical course in the materials   ENG 360 Literature and Philosophy (3). In-
                                                       terdisciplinary look at ways in which literature        novel to 1830. Prerequisite: ENG 321 or consent
and methods used in teaching English in middle
                                                       raises philosophical questions and also how philo-      of instructor.
and secondary schools.
      ENG 406 British Novel Since 1830 (3). A study           tives. The common discussion section on one day            ENG 432 (532) Approaches to Modern English
      of the background and development of the Brit-          will be conducted in English to be accessible to           Grammar (3). A systematic study of the structure
      ish novel after 1830. Prerequisite: ENG 321 or          students of all languages; the second discussion           of modern English, with attention to recent descrip-
      consent of instructor.                                  section will be conducted in English. Students             tions of its phonemic, morphemic, and syntactical
                                                              are required to attend film viewings in a separate         features. Prerequisite: ENG 310 or 531.
      ENG 407 Short Fiction (3). A study of the origin        lab section. Prerequisite: ENG 104 or 105 or the
      and development of the short story, the short-          equivalent.                                                ENG 435 Teaching Literature in Secondary
      short story, and/or the novella as unique literary                                                                 Schools (3). Background and readings in literature
      genres. Special emphasis will be on the analysis        ENG 420 (505) British Romantic Literature (3).             commonly taught in secondary schools; emphasis
      of the form. Prerequisite: ENG 321 or consent           A critical and historical survey of British literature     on contemporary young adult literature. May
      of instructor.                                          of the Romantic Age. Prerequisite: ENG 321 or              include study of the novel, short story, poetry,
                                                              consent of instructor.                                     drama and nonfiction. Prerequisites: ENG 329
      ENG 409 The American Novel (3). A study of                                                                         and senior status or permission.
      the American novel from James Fenimore Cooper           ENG 421 Usability Design and Testing (3). This
      to William Faulkner. Prerequisite: ENG 321 or           course teaches students how to create elements             ENG 436 (536) Seventeenth-Century British
      consent of instructor.                                  of successful technical documents and manage               Literature (3). A survey of non-dramatic Brit-
                                                              systems of technical documentation. Students will          ish literature from 1600-1667, with attention to
      ENG 410 Contemporary American Literature                explore practical and theoretical issues in user-cen-      historical and critical contexts. Prerequisite: ENG
      (3). An in-depth study of some of the Americas’         tered technical document creation. Prerequisites:          321 or consent of instructor.
      influential contemporary literature. Prerequisite:      ENG 104 or 105 or the equivalent, ENG 324.
      ENG 321 or consent of instructor.                                                                                  ENG 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-
                                                              ENG 422 Electronic Document Design (3).                    supervised thesis or project which allows Honors
      ENG 411 (511) Non-Shakespearean Elizabe-                Students in this course examine the effect of              Program students with senior standing to undertake
      than-Jacobean Drama (3). A study of selected            discourse conventions in electronic documents              advanced research. (A thesis paper, written review
                                                                                                                         of an art exhibit or a performance is required.
      plays of the period and their historical and critical   on the distribution and consumption of techni-
      contexts. Prerequisites: ENG 321 or consent of          cal information. Students will practice writing
                                                                                                                         ENG 438 (538) British Fiction, 1832 to 1900
      instructor.                                             electronic technical documents such as web sites,
                                                                                                                         (3). A survey of selected works of the period and
                                                              e-mail, portable documents, and help files, as well
                                                                                                                         their historical and critical contexts. Prerequisite:
      ENG 412 Directed Studies in Film Studies (3).           as electronic document management techniques
                                                                                                                         ENG 321 or consent of instructor.
      Supervised independent work in film studies. May        such as single-sourcing. Prerequisites: ENG 104
      be repeated for credit. Prerequisites: ENG 104 or       or 105 or the equivalent, ENG 324.
                                                                                                                         ENG 439 (539) Modern British Literature (3).
      105 or the equivalent.
                                                                                                                         A critical and historical survey of selected works
                                                              ENG 423 Paper Document Design (3). Students                from 1900 to the present. Prerequisite: ENG 321
      ENG 413 American Poetry (3). A study of the             in this course will learn the skills to write and create   or consent of instructor.
      development of American poetic traditions and           a variety of traditional paper technical documents,
      achievement from 1620 to the present. Prerequi-         such as technical manuals. The course will teach           ENG 442 (542) American Literature, 1820 to
      site: ENG 321 or consent of instructor.                 students the desktop publishing skills technical           1870 (3). A survey of selected works of the period
                                                              writing requires. Prerequisites: ENG 104 or 105            and their historical and critical contexts. Prerequi-
      ENG 415 Writer’s Workshop: Short Story (3).             or the equivalent, ENG 324.                                site: ENG 321 or consent of instructor.
      An intensive study of the techniques of writing
      the short story, with special concentration on the      ENG 425 Teaching Literature, Writing and                   ENG 443 (543) American Literature, 1870 to
      student’s own work. Prerequisites: ENG 341 or           Grammar in Middle Schools (3). A practical                 1920 (3). A survey of selected works of the period
      consent of the instructor.                              course in the materials and methods used in                and their historical and critical contexts. Prerequi-
                                                              teaching English/language arts in middle schools.          site: ENG 321 or consent of instructor.
      ENG 416 Writer’s Workshop: Poetry (3). An               Prerequisite: ENG 329 or EDU 303.
      intensive study of the techniques of writing po-                                                                   ENG 444 (544) American Literature, 1920 to
      etry, with special concentration on the student’s       ENG 426 Classical Literature (3). The literature           the Present (3). A survey of selected works of the
      own work. Prerequisites: ENG 342 or consent             of Greece and Rome, read in translation. Prereq-           period and their historical and critical contexts.
      of instructor.                                          uisite: ENG 321 or consent of instructor.                  Prerequisite: ENG 321 or consent of instructor.

      ENG 417 Film in the Classroom (3). Film                 ENG 427 Medieval Literature (3). European                  ENG 445 Teaching Writing in Secondary
      studies course introducing educators and future         literature from the fall of Rome to the Renais-            Schools (3). A consideration of process writing
      educators to methods of effectively incorporating       sance, read in translation. Prerequisite: ENG 321          and its implications for teaching writing to sec-
      film into classroom curricula. This class meets         or consent of instructor.                                  ondary school students. Prerequisites: ENG 329
      for two hours for lecture and discussion and two                                                                   and senior status.
      hours for film viewing. Prerequisite: ENG 104 or        ENG 428 Renaissance Literature (3). European
      105 or the equivalent.                                  literature of the Renaissance, read in translation,        ENG 446 (580) Approaches to the Writing
                                                              with emphasis placed upon its impact on English            Process (3). A consideration of the writing pro-
      ENG 418 (504) Restoration and Eighteenth-               thought and literature. Prerequisite: ENG 321 or           cess and its implications for teaching writing to
      Century British Literature (3). A critical and          consent of instructor.                                     students at all levels.
      historical survey of British literature from 1660
      to the end of the eighteenth century. Prerequisite:     ENG 430 (537) British Poetry and Non-Fic-                  ENG 460 Comedy and Satire (3). This course
      ENG 321 or consent of instructor.                       tional Prose, 1832 to 1900 (3). A survey of                will examine the historical development of comedy
                                                              selected works of the period and their historical          and/or satire as a literary genre and as a cultural
      ENG 419 European Cinema (3). Survey of                  and critical contexts. Prerequisite: ENG 321 or            manifestation (e.g., plays, novels, essays, movies,
      European (including British) film by French,            consent of instructor.                                     comedians, etc.). It may also focus on theories
      English, German, and Spanish directors in the                                                                      of comedy and satire. Prerequisite: ENG 321 or
      original languages with English subtitles except        ENG 431 (541) American Literature, 1607 to                 consent of instructor.
      for the English language films. Selected films will     1820 (3). A survey of selected works of the period
208   be organized around social themes, which will
      then be viewed from different national perspec-
                                                              and their historical and critical contexts. Prerequi-
                                                              site: ENG 321 or consent of instructor.
                                                                                                                         ENG 470 (509) Literary Criticism (3). An his-
                                                                                                                         torical survey of literary criticism, including some
collateral reading of literature. Prerequisite: ENG      and reviewers, implement successful consulting         ENT 286 Introduction to Environmental En-
321 or consent of instructor. (Spring)                   practices, plan and schedule projects, design style    gineering Technology (3). An introduction to air
                                                         sheets, and create version control systems. The        and water pollution control, water and wastewater
ENG 488 Cooperative Education/Internship                 course also covers the dynamics of managing docu-      treatment, steam and groundwater hydrology,
(1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work         mentation for the implementation of international      energy and resource demands. Included are discus-
experience related to the career and educational         standards such as ISO 9001. Prerequisites: ENG         sion of ecological bases of water and air treatment
objectives of the student for which he/she may           324 or 325 or permission of the instructor.            systems, data and analyses, and statistical and
receive academic credit and possible financial                                                                  computational techniques.
remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum              ENG 572 Writing Training Materials (3). An
of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded            overview of the pedagogy and procedures used           ENT 287 Statics for Technology (3). A course
pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.            to create training materials for business, industry,   covering the branch of mechanics which deals
                                                         and government. Prerequisites: ENG 324 or 325,         with the effects of forces acting on a body at rest.
ENG 510 Applied Linguistics for Second                   or permission of instructor.                           The course deals with the graphical and analytical
Language Teaching (3). An overview of the                                                                       study of force systems in equilibrium. This entails
basic concepts, scope, and methodology of the            ENG 573 Writing Proposals and Grants (3).              an understanding of applied and frictional forces,
science of language in its historical and descrip-       Techniques and practices for writing proposals         centers of gravity, and vectors. Prerequisite: MAT
tive aspects, including topics and issues in current     and grant proposals. The course will help students     130, PHY 120. (Fall and Spring)
linguistic studies. Prerequisite: ENG 310. (Same         learn and practice the rhetorical and persuasive
as MLA/TSL 510.)                                         skills necessary to plan and create successful         ENT 293 Manufacturing Processes and Ma-
                                                         proposals. Prerequisites: ENG 324 or 325, or           terials (3). A technical and economic analysis
ENG 512 Directed Study (1-4). Directed indepen-          permission of instructor.                              of the various methods of fabrication, processes
dent study program, mutually developed by student                                                               utilized and materials used in today’s manufactur-
and instructor, leading to one or more papers or         ENG 574 Writing Manuals, Instructions, and             ing industry. (Fall)
projects. May be repeated for credit.                    Procedures (3). An overview of the principles,
                                                         conventions, and technologies used to write in-        ENT 351 Industrial and Commercial Power
ENG 520 Forms of Poetry (3). Explores the                structions, manuals, and procedures for business,      Distribution (3). A in-depth study of industrial
question of poetic form from the point of view of        industry, and government. The course will examine      and commercial power distribution including
practitioners. A course in prosody and the historical    and practice methods for creating instructions and     three-phase systems, transformers, cable and
development of forms in English and American             procedures (geared toward processes) and manuals       conduit, grounding, system protection and safety.
poetry, including rhymed verse forms, the meters,        (geared toward products). Prerequisites: ENG 324       Prerequisite: TSM 110.
syllabics, free verse, and prose poetry. Material for    or 325, or permission of the instructor.
discussion will include student poetry and outside                                                              ENT 364 Introduction to Thermodynamics
texts. This is a capstone course for English majors      ENG 575 Advanced Technical Writing (3).                (3). Basic concepts of thermodynamics with an
with an option in creative writing. Prerequisite:        Advanced topics and projects in technical writing,     emphasis on the methods of solving a wide range
ENG 416 or consent of instructor.                        focusing on direct application to business and         of technical problems. Topics included are the first
                                                         industry. This course serves as the capstone for       and second law, entropy, reversible and irreversible
ENG 521 Forms of Fiction (3). A study of literary        the Professional Writing major, Technical Writing      processes and ideal gases. Corequisite: MAT 308
fiction from the writer’s point of view. Prerequisite:   minor, and Technical Writing Certificate programs.     or 330. (Spring)
ENG 415 or consent of instructor.                        Prerequisites: at least two 400-level courses from
                                                         the following: ENG 421, 422, 423.                      ENT 365 Dynamics for Technology (3). A study
ENG 531 Introduction to Linguistic Science                                                                      of motion of particles and rigid bodies and the
(3). A study of the basic concepts, scope and            ENG 590 Practicum in Instructional Tech-               effects of forces on bodies with acceleration. Top-
methodology of the science of language in its            niques for Developmental English (3). Practical        ics included are kinematics of particles and rigid
historical and descriptive aspects. Not open to the      experience in tutoring individuals and small groups    bodies, work and energy, impulse and momentum.
student who has credit for ENG 310.                      in a writing laboratory. Prerequisites: senior or      Corequisite: MAT 308 or 330. (Fall)
                                                         graduate standing and consent of instructor.
ENG 533 Language and Culture (3). A study                                                                       ENT 382 Hydraulics (4). The principles of fluid
of the relationship among language, society, and                                                                statics, dynamics and kinematics are addressed.
the individual’s conception of reality. Prerequisite:    EnginEEring tEchnology                                 Included are studies relating to fundamental laws
three hours of linguistics. (Same as TSL 533.)           (Ent)                                                  for fluid motion in the form of Euler’s Bernoulli’s,
                                                         ENT 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed to         impulse-momentum, and work-energy relation-
ENG 560 Advanced Creative Writing: Fiction               assist students in their transition to Murray State    ships. Also studied are resistance to flow, flow
(3). Critical discussion of original student writing.    University. Content includes orientation to the        measurement, pumping equipment, and an
Individual conferences and reading assignments           specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within the      introduction to compressible flow. Prerequisite:
in contemporary literature are included. Prereq-         academic program; university procedures, poli-         ENT 287. (Spring)
uisite: ENG 415 or consent of instructor. May be         cies, and resources; strategies for personal and
re-taken for credit.                                     academic success, and extracurricular opportuni-       ENT 393 Engineering Economy (3). Economic
                                                         ties. Only one transitions course will count toward    evaluation and financial analysis of engineering
ENG 561 Advanced Creative Writing: Poetry                graduation. Meetings with advisors, department         systems alternatives to optimize the engineering
(3). Critical discussion of student work, from           personnel, service areas, and campus field trips       decision process. Prerequisites: MAT 230. (Fall
impulse to final draft. Other topics include the         comprise the main involvement. Availability of         and Spring)
relationships between vision and craft; language         university resources is stressed with emphasis on
and experience; image and idea. Reading as-              personal needs. Graded pass/fail. (Fall)               ENT 400 Thermodynamics and Energy Devel-
signments in contemporary poetry will help to                                                                   opment (3). Thermodynamic relationships are
establish criteria for good work. Prerequisites:         ENT 111 Electric Systems (4). A study of dc and        applied to ideal and industrial systems. Energy
ENG 416 or consent of instructor. May be re-             ac circuits including an introduction to three-phase   transference between materials and through heat
taken for credit.                                        systems and electric power. Lecture and labora-        exchanger design is a primary focus. Development,
                                                         tory provide learning experiences with basic test      application and conservation of energy resources
ENG 571 Documentation Project Management                 instruments, circuits, components and computer         are considered. Prerequisite: MAT 230 or 250.
and Standards (3). Techniques and practices for          analysis. Three hours lecture and two hours lab.
handling documentation projects. Students will
learn to manage the work of multiple authors
                                                         Prerequisite: MAT 130 or 150.                          ENT 419 Senior Project I (3). A project-oriented
                                                                                                                study of actual manufacturing problems from
                                                                                                                                                                       209
      area industry. The student will be given valuable     of athletic training and allow time for practicing       Prerequisites: EXS 301 and admittance to the
      industrial experience before leaving school. This     the basic clinical competencies required for             Athletic Training Program. A cumulative 2.50
      course requires that students be able to apply all    athletic training certification. The student will        GPA and advisor approval is required prior to
      previously acquired knowledge in obtaining a          be required to attend clinical experience in the         enrollment in this course.
      viable solution to their projects.                    MSU athletic training rooms or other locations
                                                            as assigned by the clinical coordinator. This            EXS 333 Theories and Techniques in Strength
      ENT 420 Senior Project II (3). A project-ori-         course is a prerequisite to further courses within       and Conditioning (3). Designed to acquaint
      ented study of actual manufacturing problems          the curriculum and required for those pursuing           the exercise science major with comprehensive
      from area industry. The student will be given         certification in athletic training. Prerequisite:        information on scientific principles, concepts, and
      valuable industrial experience before leaving         Admittance to the Athletic Training Program.             theories of strength training and conditioning as
      school. This course requires the students be able                                                              well as the practical applications to sports medi-
      to apply all previously acquired knowledge in         EXS 295 Acute Care of the Physically Active              cine, health promotion, and wellness. The course
      obtaining a viable solution to their projects. This   (3). A course designed for exercise and allied           also prepares the student for the Certified Strength
      is the capstone course for the Electromechanical      health science students working with physically          and Conditioning Specialist examination. Prereq-
      program and is the second part of the ENT 419                                                                  uisite: BIO 227 and 228 or EXS 250.
                                                            active persons to respond to emergency situations.
      and ENT 420 series. Prerequisite: ENT 419 and         Students will learn to provide first aid and perform
      senior standing.                                                                                               EXS 371 Clinical Experience: Application (3).
                                                            cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) at the
                                                                                                                     Course designed to allow the athletic training
                                                            professional rescuer level. American Red Cross
      ENT 458 Applying the National Electric Code                                                                    student to apply the information learned in
                                                            CPR for the Professional Rescuer, Responding
      (3). A study and application of major parts of the                                                             the didactic setting and practice the clinical
                                                            to Emergencies First Aid, and other various              competencies required for athletic training
      National Electric Code including overcurrent          certifications may be earned.                            certification. The student will be required to
      protection, branch and feeder circuit calculations,
                                                                                                                     attend clinical experience in the MSU athletic
      grounding, motor control circuits, transformers       EXS 301 Care and Prevention of Injuries                  training rooms or other locations as assigned by
      and services. Studies will focus on applications      (3). Course designed to discuss the most recent          the clinical coordinator. Course is required for
      to individual and multifamily dwelling units as       and relevant information on the prevention and           those pursuing certification in athletic training.
      well as industrial and commercial buildings.          treatment of injuries and conditions found in the        May be repeated for a maximum of nine hours,
      Prerequisite: TSM 110. (Spring)                       physically active population. Prerequisites: BIO         but no more than 12 hours from EXS 371 and 372
                                                            227 and 228 or EXS 250. Co-requisite: EXS                combined. Prerequisite: EXS 271 and admittance
      ENT 491 Industrial Operations (3). Quantitative       271 (for those admitted to the Athletic Training         to the Athletic Training Program.
      analysis for planning, organizing and controlling     Program).
      a production/operations system. Prerequisite: CIS                                                              EXS 372 Clinical Experience: Integration (3).
      243 and ENT 393. (Fall)                               EXS 310 Exercise Concepts in Special Popula-             Course designed to allow the athletic training
                                                            tions (3). Course designed to provide students           student to integrate the information learned in
      ENT 499 FE Exam Review (1). A review course           with information relevant to the needs of special        the didactic setting and practice the clinical
      for the Fundamentals of Engineering registration      populations in the field of exercise science.            competencies required for athletic training
      examination. The course is intended for seniors       Topics of discovery will include exercise and            certification. The student will be required to
      majoring in engineering technology.                   cancer recovery, health and exercise for at-risk         attend clinical experience in the MSU athletic
                                                            populations, and modifying exercise programs             training rooms or other locations as assigned by
                                                            for individuals with special needs. Prerequisites:       the clinical coordinator. This course is required
      EXErcisE sciEncE                                      BIO 227 and 228 or EXS 250.                              for those pursuing athletic training certification.
      (EXs)                                                                                                          May be repeated for a maximum of nine hours,
      EXS 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed           EXS 311 Exercise and Cancer Recovery (3).                but no more than 12 hours from EXS 371 and 372
      to assist students in their transition to Murray      Designed to acquaint exercise science students           combined. Prerequisite: EXS 271 and admittance
      State University. Content includes orientation to     with an understanding of wellness concepts               to the Athletic Training Program.
      the specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within     specifically relevant to working with a cancer
      the academic program; university procedures,          population. Course provides the students with            EXS 375 Biomechanics in Sport and Exercise
      policies, and resources; strategies for personal                                                               (3). A study of basic biomechanics with respect
                                                            information concerning cancer pathology and
      and academic success, and extracurricular op-                                                                  to human performance in physical activities.
                                                            epidemiology, and treatment issues related to
      portunities. Only one transitions course will count                                                            Prerequisite: MAT 140 or higher.
                                                            physical activity. Students will also be acquainted
      toward graduation. Graded pass/fail. (Same as         with exercise guidelines and recovery issues
      CDI/HEA/NTN/REC 099.)                                                                                          EXS 380 Sport Medicine Pharmacology
                                                            designed to enhance cancer survivors’ physical
                                                                                                                     (3). Course designed to familiarize students
                                                            and psycho-social quality of life. Certification         in exercise and health science with major
      EXS 250 Anatomical Concepts in Wellness (3).          as an Exercise and Cancer Recovery Specialist
      A course designed to familiarize the student with                                                              therapeutic pharmacological substances and their
                                                            is possible through the completion of the course         effects on physically active individuals. This
      basic anatomical and physiological principles of      work and qualifying exam. Field trips may be
      the human body. This course serves as a foun-                                                                  course will assist students who are preparing for
                                                            required. Prerequisites: EXS 310, 333.                   certification in athletic training or certification
      dation for additional exercise science courses.
                                                                                                                     through the American College of Sport Medicine.
      Prerequisite: BIO 101 or equivalent.                  EXS 320 Evaluation of Non-Orthopedic                     In addition, it will provide a basic foundation
                                                            Conditions (3). Course designed to prepare               for pre-physical therapy or other allied health
      EXS 270 Clinical Experience: Observation (1).         the student to use the proper terminology when           students required to complete a pharmacology
      Course designed to allow students interested in       communicating to other healthcare professionals,         course in their respective graduate programs.
      pursuing a career in athletic training to observe     locate anatomical landmarks, and perform gen-            Prerequisites: 2.5 cumulative GPA. CHE 105 or
      in the MSU athletic training rooms. Students are      eral evaluation techniques employed by athletic          higher; BIO 227 and 228 or EXS 250; and BIO
      required to observe 30 hours during the semester      trainers and other allied health care workers. This      229 and 230.
      and complete the assigned modules. This course        course specifically covers evaluation and proper
      is recommended but not required for admission         management of non-orthopedic conditions, in-             EXS 390 Therapeutic Modalities (3).
      into the Athletic Training Program. This course       cluding: thoracic and abdominal injuries, general        Course designed to provide a comprehensive
      is graded pass/fail.                                  medical conditions, psychosocial conditions, and         understanding of therapeutic modalities in the

210   EXS 271 Clinical Experience: Introduction (2).
      Course designed to introduce the basic concepts
                                                            dermatological conditions. This course is required
                                                            for those pursuing certification in athletic training.
                                                                                                                     treatment of various illnesses, musculoskeletal
                                                                                                                     conditions and injuries. The course content will
                                                                                                                     teach the student to plan, implement, document,
and evaluate therapeutic modalities within the          EXS 455 Exercise Prescription (3). Designed            EXS 475 Kinesiology (3). A study of basic ki-
rehabilitation process. This class is required for      for senior students majoring in exercise science.      nesiology with respect to human performance in
those pursuing certification in athletic training and   This course will present methods for graded            physical activity and rehabilitation. Prerequisite:
students with a pre-physical therapy emphasis.          exercise testing, basic EKG recognition, flex-         BIO 227 and 228 or EXS 250.
Prerequisites: EXS 301. A 2.50 cumulative               ibility and strength assessment, body composi-
GPA and advisor approval is required prior to           tion, fitness evaluation, exercise prescription        EXS 480 Special Problems in Exercise Science
enrollment in this course. Additional criteria apply    and the development of competencies needed to          (1-3). Prerequisite: prior consent of instructor.
for Pre-Physical Therapy and Pre-Occupational           certify in the American College of Sport Medicine
Therapy emphases.                                       Health/Fitness Instructor or Exercise Specialist.      EXS 485 Sport and Exercise Psychology (3).
                                                        Prerequisites: BIO 227 and 228 or EXS 250; EXS         This course is an introduction to the fields of sport
EXS 400 Research Design and Statistics for Al-          450, 475 and a cumulative GPA of 2.5.                  and exercise psychology and sport sociology. The
lied Health (3). This course is designed to integrate                                                          students will learn correct principles and applica-
and utilize statistical analysis techniques, includ-    EXS 460 Practicum (3). Individual and small            tions of sport and exercise psychology, as well as
ing descriptive and inferential statistics. Students    group practical experience in testing and prescrip-    the influential social-psychological factors of sport
will understand and be able to develop research         tion, health screenings, health promotion activities   and their impact on performance.
designs applicable to allied health professions.        and service learning. The majority of work is to
                                                        be completed on campus with faculty supervision.       EXS 510 Sociology of Sport and Exercise (3). A
EXS 402 Evaluation of the Lower Extremity               Students contract for a grade with required and        critical study of the sociological factors affecting
(3). Course designed to prepare the student to          optional activities. This course is designed for       sport, performance, and exercise. Students will
perform general orthopedic evaluation techniques.       senior exercise science majors to acquire hands-       learn about the social, cultural, environmental, and
The course specifically covers evaluation               on experience prior to graduation. Prerequisites:      racial dynamics involved in sport and exercise.
techniques on the foot, ankle, lower leg, knee,         Senior status, EXS 455, a cumulative GPA of 2.5        This course will also study the effects sport and
upper leg, hip, pelvic girdle, low back, gait, and      and consent of instructor.                             exercise have on the social structure of society.
postural assessment. This course is required for                                                               (Same as HEA/REC 510.)
those pursuing certification in athletic training and   EXS 465 Advanced Exercise Physiology (3).
students with a pre-physical therapy emphasis.          A continuation of advanced concepts presented          EXS 520 Leisure and Aging (3). Introduction to
Prerequisites: EXS 301, cumulative 2.50 GPA,            in EXS 450. Some exercise physiology topics to         the physiological, sexual and recreational aspects
and advisor approval. Additional criteria apply         be included are metabolic demands, nutritional         of aging in American society; exploration of
for Pre-Physical Therapy and Pre-Occupational           needs, performance enhancement issues, gender          the role of recreation with the aging; emphasis
Therapy emphases.                                       differences, endocrine, aging, and immune system       on planning leisure programs with the elderly.
                                                        changes. Laboratory activities will be integrated      Students taking this course for graduate credit
EXS 403 Evaluation of the Upper Extremity               where appropriate. Outside activities related to       will be required to do additional work. (Same as
(3). Course designed to prepare the student             specific topics will be included. A research paper     GTY/HEA/REC 520.)
to perform general orthopedic evaluation                will be required. Prerequisites: BIO 229, BIO 230,
techniques. The course specifically covers              EXS 450 and a cumulative GPA of 2.5.                   EXS 540 Applied Sport and Exercise Psychol-
evaluation techniques on the head, neck, shoulder                                                              ogy (3). This course is designed to introduce the
girdle, upper arm, elbow, forearm, wrist, hand,         EXS 470 Professional Experience (6). Place-            student to applied principles of sport and exercise
and thorax. This course is required for those           ment in wellness centers, industry, hospitals and      psychology. The class consists of approximately
pursuing certification in athletic training and         rehabilitation facilities for practical experience     half the semester hours spent in a supervised
students with a pre-physical therapy emphasis.          prior to graduation. This course is to be taken the    sport/exercise camp or wellness/rehabilitation
Prerequisite: EXS 402, cumulative 2.50 GPA,             last semester prior to graduation. Prerequisites:      setting. Prerequisites: EXS 485 or 660, or have
                                                        2.5 cumulative GPA, current CPR certification          the permission of the instructor.
and advisor approval. Additional criteria apply
                                                        and consent of instructor.
for Pre-Physical Therapy and Pre-Occupational
Therapy emphases.
                                                        EXS 471 Administration in Exercise Science
                                                        (3). Course designed to familiarize the exercise       fAmily And consumEr studiEs
EXS 420 Rehabilitation Techniques (3).                                                                         (fcs)
                                                        science student with administrative goals and
Course designed to provide a comprehensive                                                                     FCS 110 Introduction to Early Childhood
                                                        skills associated with the daily operation of vari-
understanding of rehabilitation techniques in the                                                              Education (3). Course will serve as a practical
                                                        ous employment settings. This course discusses
treatment of various illnesses, musculoskeletal                                                                and basic introduction to the early childhood
                                                        legal issues, information technology, record
conditions, and injuries. Course content will                                                                  profession. It satisfies the requirements for the
                                                        keeping, programming, and personnel manage-
teach the student to plan, implement, document,                                                                Kentucky Commonwealth Child Care Credential
                                                        ment. This course is required for those pursuing
and evaluate therapeutic exercise programs. This                                                               and serves as a foundation for initial skills and
                                                        certification in athletic training or certifications
course is required for those pursuing certification                                                            knowledge for early childhood professionals. Field
                                                        through the American College of Sports Medi-
in athletic training and students with a pre-
                                                        cine. Prerequisite: A cumulative 2.5 GPA and           experiences are required.
physical therapy emphasis. Prerequisite: EXS
                                                        completion of at least three EXS core courses
390, cumulative 2.50 GPA, and advisor approval.         are required prior to enrollment in this course        FCS 111 The Family and Its Environment
Additional criteria apply for Pre-Physical Therapy      and advisor approval.                                  (3). An introduction to the changing structure
and Pre-Occupational Therapy emphases.
                                                                                                               and dynamics of families in our diverse society.
                                                        EXS 473 Clinical Experience: Autonomy (3).             Identification of changes and choices available to
EXS 450 Exercise Physiology (3). Students               A course designed to give autonomy to a senior
will become acquainted with general concepts in                                                                family members and critical issues facing families.
                                                        student athletic training student. This course         Some topics that may be included are: changing
exercise physiology. Some topics to be included         allows time for practicing the clinical competencies
are cardiovascular function, neural control, mus-                                                              gender role expectations, family policy, com-
                                                        required for athletic training certification. The      munication in families, family violence, divorce
culo-skeletal responses and respiratory function.       skills performed prepare the student as an entry-
Laboratory activities will be integrated with each                                                             and effects on family, aging families, parent-child
                                                        level certified athletic trainer. The student will     relationships, cultural and racial diversity, remar-
unit. Students will collect data, compile results       be required to attend clinical experience in the
and complete laboratory reports. Each student                                                                  riage and blended families, and myths and facts
                                                        MSU athletic training rooms or other locations         about families.
will review and summarize at least one research         as assigned by the clinical coordinator. Graded:
article from approved refereed journals in the          pass/fail. Prerequisites: At least 12 semester hours
field. Prerequisites: BIO 227 and 228 or EXS                                                                   FCS 121 Basic Clothing Construction (3).
                                                        of EXS 371 and/or EXS 372, admittance to the           Principles of design applied to selection of
250; BIO 229 and 230 or consent of instructor.
(Same as BIO 450)
                                                        Athletic Training Program, and consent of both the
                                                        program director and the head athletic trainer.
                                                                                                               clothing; fundamentals of clothing construction
                                                                                                               and fitting; pressing techniques; use and care of
                                                                                                                                                                       211
      the sewing machine and equipment. Lecture, one           FCS 413 Marriage and Family Relationships              institutions, financial markets, investments,
      hour; laboratory, four hours.                            (3). Exploration of personal values and personal       financial theory and techniques relating to financial
                                                               development as they relate to traditional and          decisions in business. Prerequisites: ACC 200 and
      FCS 125 Apparel Quality Analysis (3). An                 nontraditional marriage, and a study of fam-           junior standing or conditional or full admission
      analysis of apparel components as they relate to         ily life styles in contemporary society. Lecture,      to upper-level business courses.
      quality. A comparative analysis of low-, moderate-,      three hours.
      and high-priced apparel.                                                                                        FIN 331 Principles of Insurance (3). Designed
                                                               FCS 441 Family Resource Management (3). A              to give the student a basic understanding of the
      FCS 210 Child Development I (3). In-depth study          study of the theory underlying family resource         principles and practices of insurance. Topics
      of infancy to include concepts, principles and de-       management practices. Provides an opportunity          included are insurance in general, life insurance,
      velopment theories. Students will observe, record        for students to apply their skills in managing time,   disability insurance, fire insurance, transportation
      and analyze the social, emotional, physical and          energy, money and human capital in individual          insurance, legal liability and property damage
      cognitive development of the typical and atypical        and family settings. Lecture, three hours.             insurance, insurance against dishonesty and failure
      infant and toddler in the social and cultural context.                                                          of others. Prerequisite: junior standing.
      Lecture, two hours; laboratory, two hours.               FCS 462 Methods of Teaching Family and
                                                               Consumer Sciences (3). Development of planning         FIN 332 Financial Management (3). A study of
      FCS 211 Child Development II (3). Study of               and organizational teaching skills, use of resource    the financial management of business firms, with
      the characteristics of growth and development            materials and simulated teaching experiences.          emphasis on the development of analytical and
      of young children ages three to eight. Guided            Principles of learning, curriculum planning, styles    decision-making techniques. Major subject areas
      observation in the child development center as           of management. Field experiences required. A           include financial planning; capital budgeting;
      a basis for understanding children and oneself.          student may not receive credit for FCS 462 and         evaluation of alternative sources of short-term, in-
      Lecture, two hours; laboratory, two hours. Pre-          FCS 461 or 561.                                        termediate and long-term funds; and acquisitions.
      requisite: FCS 210.                                                                                             Prerequisites: junior standing; FIN 330.
                                                               FCS 501 Problems in Family and Consumer
      FCS 234 Practicum (3). Supervised work expe-             Studies (1-3). This course is designed to permit       FIN 333 Principles of Investment (3). A study
      rience, dependent on program requirement, by             special study in selected areas of family and con-     of marketable securities that can be purchased
      which students expand their career opportunities         sumer studies. May be repeated for a maximum           and sold by investors on a daily basis. Such
      and enhance their employment potential. Food             of six credits.                                        investments as bonds, common stocks, options
      service administration students may repeat for                                                                  and futures are included. Prerequisites: junior
      six credit hours.                                        FCS 511 Readings in Family and Consumer                standing; FIN 330.
                                                               Studies Topics (1-3). Directed readings of in-
      FCS 241 Family Economics (3). The class is               dividualized professional family and consumer          FIN 334 Financial Institutions (3). The operation
      designed to introduce the student to the principles      studies topics. Critique of readings and oral pre-     of financial institutions and an analysis of their
      of money management. Class members will learn            sentation.                                             role in the economy. Various financial institutions
      the basic buying skills needed when shopping for                                                                are studied from the point of view of changes in
      transportation, clothing, food, housing, recreation      FCS 520 Human Relations in Child Studies               asset composition, liabilities, forms of organiza-
      and insurance. In addition, the fundamental con-         Programs (3). Study of ways to improve human           tions, laws and deregulations in response to new
      cepts of credit, borrowing, taxes, investments           relationships in early childhood programs. Ap-         economic developments. Prerequisites: junior
      and estate planning will be studied. Lecture,            praising materials and procedures for promoting        standing; FIN 330.
      three hours.                                             better home-school relations. Three lecture hours
                                                               per week.                                              FIN 336 Employee Benefits and Retirement
      FCS 310 Program Planning for Preschool Chil-                                                                    (3). Course introduces and explores the concepts
      dren (3). Study of programs for preschool children       FCS 525 Advanced Child Development Pro-                involved in developing retirement and employee
      with a practicum in the laboratory. Lecture, two         grams (3). In-depth study of theories of child de-     benefit plans from both the employer and employee
      hours; laboratory, two hours. Prerequisite: FCS          velopment and an examination of current problems       perspectives. The legislation that impacts plan
      210 and 211.                                             and critical issues. Lecture, three hours.             design and the tax advantages and disadvantages of
                                                                                                                      various qualified and non-qualified plans including
      FCS 311 Child Guidance (3). A study of guid-             FCS 527 Parenting (3). Principles and theoretical      IRAs and pension and profit sharing plans will
      ance techniques applicable to young children, with       perspectives on the act of parenting. Emphasis on      be discussed. Also addressed are federal Social
      practicum for operation group experiences for            parent-child relationships, establishing and main-     Security, Medicare, and business applications.
      preschool children. Lecture, two hours; laboratory,      taining a nurturing relationship between parents       Prerequisites: FIN 330 and junior standing.
      two hours. Prerequisite: FCS 210 and 211.                and children, and parent-child communication.
                                                               Current issues affecting parenting are also studied.   FIN 338 Estate Planning (3). This course
      FCS 342 Consumer Decision Making (3). A                  Lecture, three hours.                                  introduces and explores the concepts involved in
      decision making model is used to study consumer                                                                 estate planning. It examines estate planning from
      decision making throughout the life cycle. Goal                                                                 a professional financial planning viewpoint. The
      setting, consumer redress, money management,             finAncE                                                legislation that impacts plan design and the tax
      financial planning and buymanship are explored.          (fin)                                                  advantages and disadvantages of various estate
      Emphasis is placed on consumer responsibility in         FIN 230 Personal Financial Planning (3). The           planning options will be discussed. Prerequisite:
      relation to environmental and energy concerns.           course prepares the student to manage his or her       FIN 330 and junior standing.
      Global interdependence issues are also included.         own personal financial affairs in a competent
      Lecture, three hours.                                    manner as well as providing a foundation for           FIN 421 Financial Models (3). Applications of
                                                               later study and work in the financial planning         financial models on the microcomputer, leading
      FCS 361 Programs in Vocational Family                    field. Designed to meet the needs of both business     to the solution of financial problems. Emphasis is
      and Consumer Sciences (3). Study of scope of             and non-business majors. This course does not          placed on building and using models developed
      vocational home economics education includ-              count toward a finance major or area but can be        (1) in electronic worksheets, and (2) with database
      ing philosophy, legislation, occupational and            counted as a business elective with the approval       software. Prerequisite: FIN 330.
      consumer competency-based programs, adult                of the advisor.
      programs and youth organizations. Survey of                                                                     FIN 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-
212   existing area and state home economics programs.
      Lecture, three hours.
                                                               FIN 330 Principles of Finance (3). A compre-
                                                               hensive study of the field of finance, covering
                                                                                                                      supervised thesis and/or project which allows
                                                                                                                      Honors Program students with a senior standing
to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper         tention to policy forms and provisions, reserve and    FRE 201 Intercultural Communications in
and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-        investment problems, company organization, legal       French (3). Students strengthen their basic lan-
mance is required.                                     aspects, taxation and the application of life insur-   guage skills while continuing to broaden cultural
                                                       ance to personal and business needs. Prerequisite:     awareness of French-speaking societies. Students
FIN 461 International Financial Management             FIN 331 with a minimum grade of C.                     relate experiences, produce brief reports on course
(3). A study of the contemporary corporation in                                                               topics, and express opinions concerning a variety
a multinational setting. An in-depth analysis of       FIN 535 Property and Casualty Insurance (3). A         of themes. Students learn to communicate on a
risks and opportunities available for the global       study of the nature and functions of property and      more complex level in French. Taught in French.
corporation. Prerequisite: FIN 330.                    casualty insurance. Special attention is given to      Prerequisite: FRE 102 or equivalent.
                                                       the services performed, contracts and benefits of
FIN 480 Senior Seminar in Finance (3). This is         fire and automobile insurance. Prerequisite: FIN       FRE 202 Practical Applications in French (3).
the finance capstone course that also serves as a      331 with a minimum grade of C.                         Students advance their speaking, writing, reading,
designated communications course. Finance 480                                                                 and listening language skills in this interactive
uses case studies to give students an opportunity      FIN 537 Commercial Banking (3). Problems               course focused on the practical application of
to incorporate various financial concepts and tech-    of commercial banking from the point of view           the language in contemporary French-speaking
niques in financial decision making. Students are      of bank management are studied. Topics covered         countries. Activities include role-play, projects,
required to work in teams to prepare and present       are asset reserves, credit analysis, investment        reports, and discussions of texts. Taught in French.
case reports to the class. Prerequisites: FIN 332      policies, equity reserves and capital account.         Prerequisite: FRE 201 or equivalent.
and senior standing.                                   Prerequisite: FIN 330.
                                                                                                              FRE 203 French for the Working World (3).
FIN 488 Cooperative Education/Internship                                                                      A continuation from French 201, this course is a
                                                       FIN 595 Special Problems (1-3). Research by
(1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work                                                              practical application of French for the working
                                                       students in fields of special interest. Includes
experience related to the career and educational                                                              world together with grammar review and with
                                                       project research studies and intensive reading
objectives of the student for which he/she may                                                                emphasis on communication skills on the for-
                                                       programs, accompanied by conferences with
receive academic credit and possible financial                                                                mal level. Includes further practice in listening,
                                                       professors in fields involved. Prerequisite: consent
remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum                                                                   conversation, reading and writing. Students may
                                                       of instructor.
of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded                                                                 be required to attend and write a report on two
pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.                                                                 approved cultural events or complete alternative
                                                                                                              cultural assignments. Taught in French. Students
FIN 489 Cooperative Education/Internship               frEnch                                                 may receive credit for French 202 or 203, but not
(1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work       (frE)                                                  both. French 203 counts toward the minor and the
experience related to the career and educational       FRE 101 Fundamental Communication in                   major. Prerequisite: French 201 or equivalent.
objectives of the student for which he/she may         French (3). Basic French in which students
receive academic credit and possible financial         learn to describe themselves to someone from           FRE 210 Intermediate French Conversation
remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of         another culture; to express preferences, abilities,    (3). A course designed to develop the vocabulary
six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:      needs, and obligations; to ask for information;        and oral communication skills of the student with
permission of chair.                                   to describe people, places, and things in their        a background of one year of college French or
                                                       world; and to report their typical activities to a     equivalent. Emphasis will be placed on bring-
FIN 505 Internship in Finance (1-3). Open to           French speaker.                                        ing the student into contact with French native
junior and senior finance majors. These students,                                                             speakers and various aspects of their culture.
upon approval of the finance faculty, are placed       FRE 102 Social Interactions in French (3).             May count as an elective for French major or
with cooperating firms to receive on-the-job           Expanding upon skills built in FRE 101, students       minor. Only taught abroad. Prerequisites: FRE
training in finance. Work experience supervised        move toward increasing linguistic and social           102 or equivalent.
by faculty; written reports are required. Graded       awareness of French-speaking cultures. Students
pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of department      learn to use past tenses to talk about typical         FRE 301 Social Issues in French Texts (3). An
chair.                                                 activities or to tell a story; to expand their basic   exploration of social issues through the reading,
                                                       vocabulary and ability to communicate in simple        discussion, and written analysis of authentic texts
FIN 520 Risk Management (3). A study of                French; and to demonstrate basic understanding         in French-speaking cultures in Europe, Canada,
appropriate risk management techniques for the         of aspects of French or Francophone culture that       Africa, and the Caribbean. While examining these
contemporary financial and nonfinancial corpora-       may differ from their own. Prerequisite: FRE 101       issues, the student will also learn and practice the
tion. Although a wide variety of techniques are        or equivalent.                                         rudiments of literary interpretation. Prerequisite:
covered, the focus is upon use of hedging strategies                                                          FRE 202 or consent of instructor.
to reduce risk. Prerequisite: FIN 330.                 FRE 105 Introduction to French Culture (3).
                                                       A survey of contemporary French character and          FRE 302 Conversation and Composition (3).
FIN 522 Portfolio Management and Theory                society. Using a historical perspective, attitudes,    Additional practice in speaking and writing based
(3). An introduction to portfolio management.          achievements, institutions and life styles of the      on a variety of topics and materials. Prerequisite:
Emphasis on modern techniques of security              French people are explored. Designed to satisfy        FRE 301 or consent of the instructor.
selection which are directed toward risk diversi-      the university studies humanities requirement.
fication and portfolio balance. Students manage        Taught in English.                                     FRE 306 Introduction to French Literature
a real portfolio by basing buy/sell decisions on                                                              (3). An introduction to literary analysis, designed
current market data. Computer programs are used                                                               to develop skills in reading, oral expression and
                                                       FRE 110 Basic Conversational French (3). A
in the portfolio selection and evaluation process.                                                            expository writing. A variety of genres will be
                                                       conversation-oriented introduction to pronun-
Prerequisite: FIN 330.                                                                                        presented: short story, poetry, the novel, and
                                                       ciation, essential structures, and vocabulary.
                                                                                                              theater. Prerequisite: FRE 301 or 331 or consent
                                                       Designed to enable students to communicate in
FIN 533 Security Analysis (3). A study of the                                                                 of instructor.
                                                       simple French in everyday situations in French-
stock and bond markets using a pragmatic ap-
                                                       speaking countries. Pronunciation, listening
proach. Evaluation methods, economic relation-                                                                FRE 310 Conversation and Composition
                                                       comprehension, speaking and simple reading
ships and market strategies are emphasized. A                                                                 Abroad (3). Intensive practice in speaking and
                                                       and writing of material related to conversational
“hands-on” type of class. Prerequisite: FIN 333                                                               writing based on the student’s interaction with
with a minimum grade of C.                             situations are included. No continuation offered.      native speakers and the international setting. Only
                                                       Not applicable toward French major or minor.
FIN 534 Life Insurance (3). A study of the nature      Only taught abroad.
                                                                                                              taught abroad. Counts toward the major and minor
                                                                                                              approved electives. Prerequisite: Two years of         213
and functions of life insurance, with particular at-                                                          college French or equivalent.
      FRE 315 Global Cinema in French (3). A study          original languages with English subtitles except        FRE 503 Seventeenth- and Eighteenth-Century
      of French cinema and cinema in French beyond          for the English language films. Selected films will     Literature (3). A study of representative literary
      French borders, examining significant directors       be organized around social themes, which will           works from the period 1600 to 1795. Prerequisite:
      and film movements. This class includes a two         then be viewed from different national perspec-         junior standing or above, FRE 301 or 331 or
      hour per week film screening in addition to class     tives. The common discussion section on one day         consent of instructor.
      meetings. This course is conducted in French.         will be conducted in English to be accessible to
      Prerequisite FRE 301 or 331.                          students of all languages; the second discussion        FRE 505 Nineteenth-Century Literature (3). A
                                                            section will be conducted in French. Students are       study of representative literary works published
      FRE 323 French Culture and Civilization (3).          required to attend film viewings in a separate lab      between 1800 and 1899. Prerequisite: junior
      A survey of the contributions of France to world      section. Prerequisite: FRE 301 or 331, or consent       standing or above, FRE 301 or 331 or consent
      culture including the historical development of       of instructor.                                          of instructor.
      France from prehistoric times through the French
      Revolution. Classes conducted in French with          FRE 421 Topics in French Literature (3). Course         FRE 507 Twentieth-Century Literature (3). A
      extensive use of visual aids. Prerequisite: FRE       content will vary according to the needs of the         study of representative literary works published
      301 or 331 or consent of instructor.                  French program. May be repeated to a maximum            since 1900. Prerequisite: junior standing or above,
                                                            of nine credit hours. Prerequisite: FRE 301 or 331      FRE 301 or 331 or consent of instructor.
      FRE 324 Contemporary French Culture and               or consent of instructor.
      Civilization (3). A survey of attitudes, achieve-                                                             FRE 521 Topics in French Literature (3).
      ments, and behavioral characteristics of the          FRE 430 Advanced Conversation and Com-                  Course content at the discretion of the instructor.
      French people from 1800 to the present. Classes       position (3). For the advanced student who has          Prerequisite: junior standing or above, FRE 301
      conducted in French with extensive use of audio       completed a 300-level conversation and composi-         or 331 or consent of instructor.
      and visual aids. Prerequisite: FRE 301 or consent     tion course or who has had extensive experience
      of the instructor.                                    with French language. Prerequisite: FRE 301 or          FRE 531 Advanced Grammar (3). A comparative
                                                            331 or consent of instructor.                           study of the grammatical structures of French and
      FRE 330 French Literary Texts in Context                                                                      English. Prerequisite: junior standing or above,
      (3). Will be taught on summer abroad programs         FRE 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-            FRE 301 or 331 or consent of instructor.
      in French-speaking countries only. It is an intro-    supervised thesis and/or project which allows
      ductory course in French and/or Francophone           Honors Program students with a senior standing          FRE 532 Phonetics (3). Introduction to linguistic
      literature taught in French. Authentic texts might    to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper          terminology and principles of phonology with
      include poetry, short story, drama or excerpts        and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-         intensive individual diagnosis and practice of the
      from long works and might be from any literary        mance is required.                                      French phonological system. Includes study and
      period. An effort will be made to take advantage                                                              practice of the International Phonetic Alphabet.
      of residence in French-speaking countries through     FRE 441 Topics in French Cultural Studies (3).          Prerequisite: junior standing or above, FRE 301
      visits to sites that are related to the literature.   Course content will include a variety of factors        or 331 or consent of instructor.
      Prerequisites: FRE 202 or 203, or consent of          that contribute to and reflect the cultural life, so-
      instructor.                                           cial themes, and national perspectives of French        FRE 551 Directed Study I (1-3). Independent
                                                            society. The course content will include literature     work in areas of language, culture or literature,
      FRE 331 Advanced Language Practice (3).               and may include media and/or film. Students will        designed to meet needs and interests of individual
      Course will offer students the opportunity to         write a research paper. May be repeated for a           students. Prerequisite: junior standing or above,
      expand their cultural and linguistic knowledge        maximum of six credit hours. Prerequisite: FRE          FRE 301 or 331 or consent of instructor.
      of French-speaking cultures through a central         301 or 331 or consent of instructor.
      conceptual framework, such as an international                                                                FRE 552 Directed Study II (1-3). Prerequisite:
      conference, an apartment building, a hotel, or a      FRE 450 Literary Masterpieces in French (3).            junior standing or above, FRE 301 or 331 or
      business. Students will engage in extensive role-     A general survey of the literary periods, major         consent of instructor.
      play and creative exercises to establish contexts,    authors, and initial acquaintance with their work.
      choose fictive identities, and improvise a series     May be repeated for a maximum of six credit             FRE 555 Study Abroad (3-9). Approved pro-
      of encounters. Prerequisite: FRE 202 or consent       hours. Prerequisite: FRE 301 or 331 or consent          grams of travel and study in French-speaking
      of instructor.                                        of instructor.                                          countries. Repeatable up to nine hours. Prereq-
                                                                                                                    uisite: junior standing or above, FRE 301 or 331
      FRE 332 Phonetics (3). Introduction to linguistic     FRE 451 Directed Study (1-3). Independent               or consent of instructor.
      terminology and principles of phonology with          work in the area of language, culture or literature,
      intensive individual diagnosis and practice of the    designed to meet the needs and interests of indi-
      French phonological system. Includes study and        vidual students. Prerequisite: FRE 301 or 331 or        frEshmAn yEAr EXpEriEncE
      practice of the International Phonetic Alphabet.      consent of instructor.                                  (fyE)
      Prerequisite: FRE 202 consent of the instructor.                                                              FYE 098 New Student Orientation (1). Course
                                                            FRE 460 Studies in a Genre (3). The course              designed to assist students admitted with condi-
      FRE 401 Survey of French Literature I (3).            will explore a particular genre, e.g., the novel,       tions in the academic and social transitions as-
      Representative masterpieces of the novel, poetry      novella, drama, poetry, short story, and the theory     sociated with college life. The development of
      and theatre from the Middle Ages to the eigh-         behind the respective genre and an examination          specific success skills such as time management,
      teenth century. Prerequisite: FRE 301 or consent      of a variety of works within that genre. May be         note-taking, study strategies, and academic and
      of instructor.                                        repeated as a second course for up to six credit        career guidance activities will be included in
                                                            hours provided that the second course covers a          the class.
      FRE 402 Survey of French Literature II (3).           different genre. Prerequisite: FRE 301 or 331 or
      Representative masterpieces of the novel, poetry,     consent of instructor.                                  FYE 100 Freshman Orientation II (1). Course
      and theatre for the nineteenth and twentieth cen-                                                             designed to assist students in the academic and
      turies. Prerequisite: FRE 301 or 331 or consent       FRE 501 Middle Ages Literature (3). A study             social transitions associated with college life. The
      of instructor.                                        of representative works of French literature            development of specific success skills such as time
                                                            dating from 1095 to 1600. Prerequisite: junior          management, note-taking and study strategies,
      FRE 419 European Cinema (3). Survey of                standing or above, FRE 301 or 331 or consent            and career and academic guidance activities will
214   European (including British) film by French,
      English, German, and Spanish directors in the
                                                            of instructor.                                          be included in this class. Credit earned in this
                                                                                                                    course may not be counted toward graduation
requirements. Prerequisite: freshmen students on      GCM 340 Introduction to Gravure (3). This               GCM 358 Commercial Photography (3). A study
probation or by approval of instructor.               course covers the magazine and packaging                of the making of photographs in the studio and
                                                      industry as they relate to high volume printing.        on location; investigation of the photographic me-
                                                      Included in the course are: pre-flighting, customer     dium as a means of communicating ideas. Lecture
grAphic communicAtions                                service, press production, problem-solving tech-        and laboratory. Prerequisite: GCM 250.
mAnAgEmEnt (gcm)                                      niques, and distribution systems. Prerequisite:
GCM 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed to        GCM 151.                                                GCM 359 Publication Photography (3). A
assist students in their transition to Murray State                                                           study of the make-up of yearbooks and various
University. Content includes orientation to the       GCM 341 Screen Process Printing (3). This               other publications requiring photography, and
specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within the     course addresses the problems of commercial             the problems of the photographer in preparing
academic program; university procedures, poli-        screen printing on various substrates. Covers:          materials for printing. Lecture and laboratory.
cies, and resources; strategies for personal and      inks, environment, State and Federal regulations,       Prerequisite: GCM 250.
academic success, and extracurricular opportuni-      safety, and training practices used in the industry.
ties. Only one transitions course will count toward   Prerequisite: GCM 151.                                  GCM 360 Portraiture Photography (3). Formal
graduation. Meetings with advisors, department                                                                and contemporary portraiture. Includes studio
personnel, service areas, and campus field trips      GCM 342 Finishing and Distribution (3). Intro-          and informal techniques, printing and finishing
comprise the main involvement. Availability of        duction to post-press and finishing operations and      instruction. Prerequisite: GCM 250.
                                                      distribution practices common to the packaging
the university resources is stressed with emphasis
                                                      and printing industries. Course covers historical       GCM 365 Customer Service in Print Media
on personal needs such as time management.
                                                      as well as modern aspects of finishing, embossing,      (3). This course explores all aspects of customer
Graded pass/fail.
                                                      foil stamping, die-cutting, and material fulfill-       service including, scheduling, human resources,
                                                      ment. Prerequisite: GCM 151.                            manufacturing, finance, computer systems, and
GCM 150 Graphic Communications (3). Sur-
                                                                                                              quality control. Prerequisite: GCM 151.
veys the development of graphic communications
                                                      GCM 350 Basic Color Photography (3). A study
technology and management, past and present.
                                                      of color photographic materials and processes           GCM 371 Workshop in Graphic Communica-
Includes a study of history, design, processes,
                                                      including color transparencies, negative analy-         tions Sales and Marketing (3). Methods and
terminology, materials and the importance of
                                                      sis, internegatives, transparency duplicates, and       techniques essential to sales and marketing. In-
graphic communications in contemporary society.
                                                      color prints. Lecture and laboratory. Prerequisite:     cludes sales and marketing processes, qualities of
Structured to deal with the digital and traditional
                                                      GCM 250.                                                sales personnel, submitting proposals, assessing
technologies of printing reproduction.
                                                                                                              the competition, customer relations, developing
                                                      GCM 351 Graphic Communication Processes                 new clients, and servicing accounts. Credit is
GCM 151 Introduction to Print Media Man-
                                                      (3). This course is designed for non-majors who         given for professional sales seminars. Prerequi-
agement (3). Reviews the graphic reproduction
                                                      wish to understand the printing and manufactur-         site: nine hours of GCM.
systems of mass-communication including print         ing reproduction processes at a higher level.
manufacturing, digital imaging, computer anima-       Lecture and laboratory. Prerequisite: GCM 151.          GCM 399 Professional Development Seminar I
tion, video capturing, customer service, business     (Same as ART 351)                                       (1). Seminar for students of industry and technol-
operations, and global media marketing. Lecture                                                               ogy programs, focusing on the job search process,
and laboratory.                                       GCM 352 Press Image Transfer I (3). A study of          employment opportunities, and related problems.
                                                      image transfer processes including flexography,         Recommended for students in the sophomore or
GCM 152 Introduction to Digital Imaging (3).          letterpress and pressure related printing opera-        junior year. Graded pass/fail.
An introduction to production skills and critical     tions, e.g. die stamping, gold leaf and emboss-
awareness of digital media practices which include    ing, etc. Lecture and laboratory. Prerequisite:         GCM 427 Professional Photographic Practices
Internet production, video, gaming, still imaging,    GCM 151.                                                (3). The course introduces students to the business
and 3D modeling. There is a strong emphasis on                                                                and marketing practices common to photography.
cross platform, digital communication, teamwork,      GCM 353 Press Image Transfer II (3). A study            Emphasis is placed on developing professional
and leadership skills. The course is designed         of image transfer processes including lithography,      objectives based upon careful consideration of
to give direction to students who are computer        silk screen and nontraditional methods of image         the financial, legal, organizational, promotional,
literate, abut need information on the various        transfer. Lecture and laboratory. Prerequisite:         interpersonal and ethical practices particular to
opportunities available in the imaging world.         GCM 151 and 352.                                        photography. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
Current computer programs are utilized. Lecture
and laboratory.                                       GCM 354 Principles of Estimating (3). Analysis          GCM 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-
                                                      of printing cost procedures using regional cost-        supervised thesis and/or project which allows
GCM 153 Electronic Imaging (3). This course           ing data and norms. Also, determining cost of           Honors Program students with a senior standing to
deals with the technology of electronic imaging       materials, equipment and human activity will be         undertake advanced research. A thesis paper and/or
relating to the field of graphic communica-           determined. Prerequisite: nine hours in graphic         written review of the exhibit or performance is
tions. The course covers image generation and         communications, including GCM 153.                      required. Prerequisite: GCM 151 and 153.
electronic printing and publishing. Lecture and
Laboratory.                                           GCM 355 Estimating II (3). Further study in             GCM 440 Electronic Digital Photography (3).
                                                      estimating printing costs emphasizing standard          This course deals with desktop electronic imaging
GCM 250 Fundamentals of Photography (3).              materials available to assist the estimator. Lecture.   and digital photography. Explored is the use of
Camera techniques and film selection. Experience      Prerequisite: GCM 354 or consent of instructor.         photography and production photographs with a
with various cameras, photographic techniques,                                                                variety of computer hardware and software programs.
developing and printing procedures. Lecture and       GCM 356 Printing Plates, Substrates, Inks and           Lecture and laboratory. Prerequisites: GCM 153.
laboratory. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.      Toners (3). A study of current plate and CTP tech-
(Same as JMC 283.)                                    nology, paper, fabric, plastic, and ink technologies    GCM 441 Desktop Multimedia (3). Desktop
                                                      will be discussed in relation to the standard print-    digital imaging and multimedia presentations are
GCM 252 Digital Image Conversion (3). Intro-          ing systems. Prerequisite: GCM 151.                     developed with a variety of hard and software.
duction to converting continuous tone and line                                                                The course is designed to allow the student to
illustration to digital and film formats. Covers      GCM 357 Industrial Photography (3). A study             cross-platform images from diverse electronic
materials, equipment, camera/scanner operation,       of photography as it is utilized by industry in         technologies. Graduate students will be required
problem-solving, pre-flighting and imposition
techniques. Lecture and laboratory. Prerequisite:
                                                      problem-solving, security, and scientific and
                                                      technical applications. Lecture and laboratory.
                                                                                                              to research a problem in addition to photography
                                                                                                              assignments. Lecture and laboratory. Prerequisite:    215
GCM 151.                                              Prerequisite: GCM 250.                                  GCM 153.
      GCM 442 Digital Interactive Technology                 GCM 552 Survey of Graphic Communication                to describe people, places, and things in their
      (3). This course introduces and explores digital       Management (3). Exploratory experiences in             world; and to report their typical activities to a
      interactive technology as an aspect of electronic      graphic communications management for those            German speaker.
      imaging. It examines the use of digital technology     with no prior experience in the field. Lecture and
      in the production of interactive presentations; it     laboratory. Prerequisite: senior standing.             GER 102 Social Interactions in German (3).
      includes a variety of currently used computer                                                                 Expanding upon skills built in GER 101, students
      hardware and software. Lecture and laboratory.         GCM 554 Printing Production and Manufac-               move toward increasing linguistic and social
      Prerequisite: GCM 153.                                 turing Management (3). Reviews the current             awareness of German-speaking cultures. Students
                                                             practice and theoretical approaches of printing        learn to use past tenses to talk about typical
      GCM 452 Production Printing (3). This course           manufacturing; forecasting, quality control, pur-      activities or to tell a story; to expand their basic
      includes experiences from planning to final            chasing and finance, equipment selection, plant        vocabulary and ability to communicate in simple
      reproduction of a printed work. All the printing       layout, environmental, and human relations con-        German; and to demonstrate basic understanding
      processes are utilized including sheet and web         siderations. Prerequisite: nine hours of GCM.          of aspects of German culture that may differ from
      fed printing equipment. Use of field trips and                                                                their own. Prerequisite: GER 101 or equivalent.
      cooperation with the industrial sector are required.   GCM 556 Communications Sales Management
      Lecture and laboratory. Prerequisite: GCM 151          (3). Methods and techniques essential to sales         GER 105 Introduction to German Culture
      and 153 or junior standing.                            and marketing. Includes sales and marketing            (3). A survey of the contemporary culture of
                                                             processes, qualities of sales personnel, submitting    Germany, Austria and Switzerland with emphasis
      GCM 453 In-Plant and Small Printing Facility           proposals, assessing the competition, customer         on the values, behavioral characteristics, social
      Management (3). This course explores the im-           relations, developing new clients, and servicing       and political systems and achievements of the
      pact of the family owned printing facility and how     accounts. Prerequisite: Nine hours of GCM.             German-speaking people. Conducted in English.
      they are: managed, purchased, sales and human                                                                 No prerequisite.
      resources. Regulations of federal and state taxes      GCM 558 Trends in Graphic Communications
      are explored. Lecture and laboratory. Prerequisite:    (3). A study of management trends, technical ad-       GER 110 Basic Conversational German (3).
      GCM 151 and GCM 153.                                   vances, and problems as they pertain to the future     A conversation-oriented introduction to pro-
                                                             of the communications industry. The course will        nunciation, essential structures, and vocabulary.
      GCM 454 Color Management and Quality                   include report writing, verbal presentations and a     Designed to enable students to communicate in
      Control (3). Materials and procedures of color         field experience. Prerequisite: senior standing.       simple German in everyday situations in Ger-
      management and quality control procedures.                                                                    man-speaking countries. Pronunciation, listening
      Included are ICC profiles, spectrophotometry,          GCM 560 Plant Equipment Layout and Pur-                comprehension, speaking and simple reading
      densitometry, masking, color proofing, quality         chasing (3). Procedures for planning, equipment        and writing of material related to conversational
      control devices, and color scanning. Lecture and       and printing plant operation are studied, as well      situations are included. No continuation offered.
      laboratory. Prerequisite: GCM 151 and 153.             as purchasing supplies, understanding local, state     Not applicable toward German major or minor.
                                                             and federal codes, and environmental regulations.      Only taught abroad. No prerequisite.
      GCM 455 Newspaper Production Management                Prerequisite: nine hours of GCM.
      (3). A study of special needs of newspapers from                                                              GER 201 Intercultural Communications in
      the standpoint of management and production.           GCM 571 Problems in Technology (3). Indi-              German (3). Students strengthen their basic lan-
      Lecture. Prerequisite: nine hours of GCM.              vidual study and research pertaining to special        guage skills while continuing to broaden cultural
                                                             problems in graphic arts technology.                   awareness of German-speaking societies. Students
                                                                                                                    relate experiences, produce brief reports on course
      GCM 456 Packaging Production Management
                                                             GCM 578 Workshop in Technology (3).                    topics, and express opinions concerning a variety
      (3). This course is concerned with the specific
                                                             Workshops on topics pertinent to graphic arts          of themes. Students learn to communicate on a
      problems relating to the packaging industry. This
                                                                                                                    more complex level in German. Taught in German.
      course reviews the concerns of managing a pack-        or printing management. May be repeated for
                                                                                                                    Prerequisite: GER 102 or equivalent.
      aging facility by reviewing the management, hu-        additional credit.
      man development, environmental issues, material
                                                                                                                    GER 202 Practical Applications in German (3).
      handling, finance, and quality control concerns.       GCM 644 Graduate Cooperative Education
                                                                                                                    Students advance their speaking, writing, reading,
      Prerequisite: nine hours of GCM.                       (3). May be repeated to a maximum of six cred-
                                                                                                                    and listening language skills in this interactive
                                                             its. Graded pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission
                                                                                                                    course focused on the practical application of
      GCM 488 Cooperative Education/Internship               of chair.
                                                                                                                    the language in contemporary German-speaking
      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
                                                                                                                    countries. Activities include role-play, projects,
      experience related to the career and educational       GCM 651 Advanced Printing Press Operation
                                                                                                                    reports, and discussions of texts. Taught in Ger-
      objectives of the student for which he/she may         (3). Includes all aspects of printing production us-
                                                                                                                    man. Prerequisite: GER 201 or equivalent.
      receive academic credit and possible financial         ing any of the conventional press systems. Lecture
      remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum            and laboratory. Prerequisite: GCM 151.
                                                                                                                    GER 203 German for the Working World (3).
      of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded
                                                                                                                    A continuation from German 201, this course is
      pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.          GCM 697 Research in Technology (3). Indepen-
                                                                                                                    a practical application of German for the work-
                                                             dent study under the guidance of a supervising
                                                                                                                    ing world together with grammar review and
      GCM 489 Cooperative Education/Internship               faculty member in a problem related to industry
                                                                                                                    with emphasis on communication skills on the
      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work       and technology as selected by the student.
                                                                                                                    formal level. Includes further practice in listen-
      experience related to the career and educational
                                                                                                                    ing, conversation, reading and writing. Students
      objectives of the student for which he/she may         GCM 698 Thesis (3).
                                                                                                                    may be required to attend and write a report on
      receive academic credit and possible financial
                                                                                                                    two approved cultural events or complete alter-
      remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum            GCM 699 Thesis (3).
                                                                                                                    native cultural assignments. Taught in German.
      of six hours from any 488/489 courses.
                                                                                                                    Students may receive credit for German 202 or
                                                                                                                    203, but not both. German 203 counts toward the
      GCM 499 Professional Development Seminar               gErmAn
                                                                                                                    minor and the major. Prerequisite: German 201
      II (1). Seminar for students of industry and           (gEr)                                                  or equivalent.
      technology programs, focusing on the transi-           GER 101 Fundamental Communication in
      tion to the world of work and related problems.        German (3). Basic German in which students             GER 210 Intermediate Conversational German
      Recommended for students in the senior year.
216
                                                             learn to describe themselves to someone from           (3). A course designed to develop the vocabulary
      Graded pass/fail.                                      another culture; to express preferences, abilities,    and oral communication skills of the student with
                                                             needs, and obligations; to ask for information;
a background of one year of college German or            take advantage of residence in German-speaking           GER 450 Literary Masterpieces in German
equivalent. Emphasis will be placed on bringing          countries through visits to sites that are related to    (3). A general survey of the literary periods, major
the student into contact with German native speak-       the literature. Prerequisite: GER 202 or 203, or         authors, and initial acquaintance with their work.
ers and various aspects of their culture. May count      consent of instructor.                                   May be repeated for a maximum of six credit
as an elective for the major or minor. Only taught                                                                hours. Prerequisite: GER 301 or 331 or consent
abroad. Prerequisites: GER 102 or equivalent.            GER 331 Advanced Language Practice (3).                  of instructor.
                                                         Course will offer students the opportunity to
GER 301 Social Issues in German Texts (3).               expand their cultural and linguistic knowledge           GER 451 Directed Study (1-3). Independent work
Intensive practice in speaking and writing based         of German-speaking cultures through a central            in the area of language, culture or literature, de-
on a variety of topics and materials. Prerequisite:      conceptual framework, such as an international           signed to meet the needs and interests of individual
GER 202 or equivalent.                                   conference, an apartment building, a hotel, or a         students. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
                                                         business. Students will engage in extensive role-
GER 302 Conversation and Composition (3). An             play and creative exercises to establish contexts,       GER 460 Studies in a Genre (3). The course
exploration of social issues through the reading,        choose fictive identities, and improvise a series        will explore a particular genre, e.g., the novel,
discussion, and written analysis of authentic texts      of encounters. Prerequisite: GER 202 or consent          novella, drama, poetry, short story, and the theory
in German-speaking cultures. While examining             of instructor.                                           behind the respective genre and an examination
these issues, the student will also learn and practice                                                            of a variety of works within that genre. May be
the rudiments of literary interpretation. Prerequi-      GER 332 Phonetics (3). Contrastive study of              repeated as a second course for up to six credit
site: GER 301 or consent of instructor.                  German and English phonology with individual             hours provided that the second course covers a
                                                         practice designed to improve pronunciation. Pre-         different genre. Prerequisite: GER 301 or 331 or
GER 306 Introduction to German Literature                requisite: GER 202 or consent of instructor.             consent of instructor.
(3). An introduction to literary analysis, designed
to develop skills in reading, oral expression and        GER 401 Survey of German Literature I                    GER 501 Literature Before 1600 (3). A study of
expository writing. A variety of genres will be          (3). Historical interpretation of representative         major works chosen to present prominent themes
presented. Prerequisite: GER 301 or 331 or con-          literary works from the Medieval periods to the          and important literary developments within the
sent of instructor.                                      Enlightenment. Prerequisite: GER 301 or 331 or           period. Prerequisite: junior standing or above,
                                                         consent of instructor.                                   GER 301 or 331 or consent of instructor.
GER 310 Conversation and Composition
Abroad (3). Intensive practice in speaking and           GER 402 Survey of German Literature II (3).              GER 503 Seventeenth- and Eighteenth-Century
writing based on the student’s interaction with          Historical interpretation of representative literary     Literature (3). A study of major works chosen to
native speakers and the international setting. Only      works from Classicism to the present. Prerequisite:      present prominent themes and important literary
taught abroad. Counts toward the major and minor         GER 301 or 331 or consent of instructor.                 developments within the period. Representa-
approved electives. Prerequisite: Two years of                                                                    tive authors such as Goethe, Schiller, Novalis
college German or equivalent.                            GER 419 European Cinema (3). Survey of                   and Kleist will be treated. Prerequisite: junior
                                                         European (including British) film by French,             standing or above, GER 301 or 331 or consent
GER 314 German Cultural Heritage Abroad                  English, German, and Spanish directors in the            of instructor.
(3). This course taught in German and taught             original languages with English subtitles except
abroad, focuses on culture in German-Speaking            for the English language films. Selected films will      GER 505 Nineteenth-Century German Litera-
countries. The course entails carefully planned          be organized around social themes, which will            ture (3). A study of literary developments during
                                                                                                                  the era of the industrial revolution and political
excursions to a number of specific cultural sites        then be viewed from different national perspec-
                                                                                                                  reform in Germany. Works by Buchner, Heine
in conjunction with readings about the sites and         tives. The common discussion section on one day
                                                                                                                  and representative authors of Poetic Realism and
the intellectual history and milieu behind their         will be conducted in English to be accessible to
                                                                                                                  Naturalism will be treated with secondary empha-
conception. The student will explore the history,        students of all languages; the second discussion
                                                                                                                  sis placed on the emergence of the Biedermeier
art, architecture, literature, politics, and music       section will be conducted in German. Students
                                                                                                                  tradition. Prerequisite: junior standing or above,
of the host country. This will only be taught            are required to attend film viewings in a separate
                                                                                                                  GER 301 or 331 or consent of instructor.
on study-abroad programs in German-speaking              lab section. Prerequisite: GER 301 or GER 331
countries. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.          or consent of instructor.
                                                                                                                  GER 507 Twentieth-Century Literature (3). A
                                                                                                                  study of the literature and the policies affecting
GER 323 German Culture and Civilization (3).             GER 421 Topics in German Literature (3).
                                                                                                                  literature during the Weimar Republic, the Third
A survey of the contribution of German-speaking          Course content will vary according to the needs
                                                                                                                  Reich, Post-War Literature and the Gruppe 47,
people to world culture in art, music, science,          of the German program. May be repeated to a
                                                                                                                  and contemporary developments. Prerequisite:
education, philosophy and religion. Classes              maximum of nine credit hours. Prerequisite: GER
                                                                                                                  junior standing or above, GER 301 or 331 or
conducted in German. Prerequisite: GER 301 or            301 or 331 or consent of instructor.
                                                                                                                  consent of instructor.
331 or consent of instructor.
                                                         GER 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-             GER 521 Topics in German Literature (3).
GER 324 Contemporary German Culture and                  supervised thesis and/or project which allows            An in-depth course treating a topic in German
Civilization (3). A survey of the present-day cul-       Honors Program students with a senior standing           literature. Selected according to the needs and
ture of the German-speaking countries, including         to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper           interests of the students. Prerequisite: junior
Austria, the Federal Republic of Germany, and            and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-          standing or above, GER 301 or 331 or consent
Switzerland. Course includes the study of German         mance is required.                                       of instructor.
dialects, geography, social and political systems
and religious orientation. Classes conducted in          GER 441 Topics in German Cultural Studies                GER 531 Advanced Grammar (3). A special-
German. Prerequisite: GER 301 or 331 or consent          (3). Course content will include a variety of fac-       ized study contrasting German and English
of instructor.                                           tors that contribute to and reflect the cultural life,   grammatical structures and usage. Prerequisite:
                                                         social themes, and national perspectives of German       junior standing or above, GER 301 or 331 or
GER 330 German Literary Texts in Context                 society. The course content will include literature      consent of instructor.
(3). Will be taught in study abroad programs in          and may include media and/or film. Students will
German-speaking countries. It is an introductory         write a research paper. May be repeated for a            GER 532 Phonetics (3). Contrastive study of
course in German literature taught in German.            maximum of six credit hours. Prerequisite: GER           German and English phonology with individual
Authentic texts might include poetry, short story,       301 or 331 or consent of instructor.
drama or excerpts from long works and might be
from any literary period. An effort will be made to
                                                                                                                  practice designed to improve pronunciation.
                                                                                                                  Prerequisite: junior standing or above, GER 301        217
                                                                                                                  or 331 or consent of instructor.
      GER 551 Directed Study I (1-3). Independent             GSC 200 Introduction to Oceanography (3).              ocean. Study of freshwater components of the
      work in areas of language, culture or literature,       An introduction to the study of oceans and marine      earth’s hydrosphere will emphasize connections
      designed to meet needs and interests of individual      processes, with emphasis on the morphology             with the ocean and the special role of each compo-
      students. Prerequisite: junior standing or above,       of the ocean floor, life in the ocean, oceanic         nent in the earth’s hydrologic cycle. Prerequisite:
      GER 301 or 331 or consent of instructor.                circulation, sea floor spreading and shoreline         one college-level physical or biological science
                                                              management. Prerequisite: One college-level            course, or consent of instructor.
      GER 552 Directed Study II (1-3). Prerequisite:          physical or biological science course or consent
      junior standing or above, GER 301 or 331 or             of the instructor.                                     GSC 305 Map Analysis (3). An introduction
      consent of instructor.                                                                                         to the analysis of a variety of maps including
                                                              GSC 202 Introduction to Geographic Informa-            topographic, geologic, hydrologic and thematic
      GER 555 Study Abroad (3-9). Credit given for            tion Science (4). This course is designed to provide   maps. Emphasis will be placed upon understand-
      approved projects of study in a German-speaking         an introduction to the fundamental principles and      ing, analysis and the application of information
      country. Repeatable up to nine hours. Prerequisite:     concepts of the mapping sciences. The course will      presented in map form.
      junior standing or above, GER 301 or 331 or             focus on digital image processing and geographic
      consent of instructor.                                  information systems as techniques utilized in such     GSC 310 Rock and Mineral Resources (3).
                                                              areas as land cover and land capability mapping.       An introduction to common rock and mineral
                                                              The introduction of global positioning systems         resources, including ore deposits, fossil fuels, and
      gEosciEncEs                                             (GPS) as an auxiliary mapping tool is also included    minerals; igneous rocks; metamorphic rocks; and
      (gsc)                                                   in the course. Three hours lecture and two hours       sedimentary rocks. Emphasis is on geologic oc-
      GSC 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed             lab per week.                                          currence and origin, geographic distribution, and
      to assist students in their transition to Murray                                                               importance to humans. Saturday field trips will
      State University. Content includes orientation to       GSC 210 Hydrology (3). Occurrence, movement,
                                                                                                                     be required. Prerequisite: GSC 102 or permission
      the specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within       quality and behavior of water in hydrologic cycle
                                                                                                                     of the instructor.
      the academic program; university procedures,            with reference to recovery of underground water
      policies, and resources; strategies for personal        in areas of detrital and carbonate rocks. Three
                                                                                                                     GSC 312 Introduction to Remote Sensing (4).
      and academic success, and extracurricular op-           lectures per week. Prerequisite: GSC 101 or
                                                                                                                     The purpose of this course is to introduce students
      portunities. Only one transitions course will count     consent of instructor.
                                                                                                                     to the fundamental concepts and techniques in
      toward graduation. Graded pass/fail.                                                                           the processing, interpretation and utilization of
                                                              GSC 220 Economic Geography (3). The course
                                                                                                                     remotely sensed imagery. The focus of the course
      GSC 101 The Earth and the Environment (4).              will consist of an analysis of cultural and physical
                                                                                                                     is on applications in such fields as agriculture,
      An introduction to the materials of the earth and the   variables which lead to an understanding of the
                                                                                                                     environmental studies, minerals exploration and
      processes that modify them to form our landscapes       worldwide distribution of primary, secondary and
                                                                                                                     resources management/planning. Three hours
      and create our physical environment. Includes an        tertiary economic activities.
                                                                                                                     lecture and two hours lab per week.
      introduction to aerial photo and topographic map
      interpretation. Three hours of lecture and two          GSC 250 Geography of the Developing World
                                                                                                                     GSC 314 Sediments, Soils, and Stratigraphy
      hours of laboratory per week.                           (3). A survey, by climatic regions, of the cultural,
                                                                                                                     (4). An in depth study of sediments, soils, and
                                                              economic and natural setting of the developing
                                                                                                                     stratigraphy. Emphasis will be on the geologic
      GSC 102 Earth Through Time (4). An introduc-            world, including the transitional nature of the
                                                                                                                     formation and interpretation of sediments and
      tion to the study of how the earth’s environment        subtropics.
                                                                                                                     soils in a variety of environmental contexts. Three
      has changed through time and the geological                                                                    hours lecture and two hours laboratory per week
      processes that are causing the changes. Topics          GSC 251 Geography of the Industrialized
                                                                                                                     plus required Saturday field trips. Prerequisites:
      include hypotheses regarding the earth’s origin, the    World (3). A survey, by climatic regions, of
                                                                                                                     GSC 102 or permission of the instructor. (Same
      evolution of the earth’s oceans and atmosphere, and     the cultural, economic and natural setting of the
                                                                                                                     as ARC 314.)
      the interaction between environmental factors and       industrial world.
      appearance of life on the earth. The methods that                                                              GSC 320 Geography of North America (3).
      geologists use to measure time will be identified       GSC 300 Economic Geology (3). Distribution,
                                                                                                                     Regional approach to studying the dynamic inter-
      and described. Particular emphasis will be given        mode of occurrence, origin and uses of mineral
                                                                                                                     action between the physical and cultural aspects
      to the North American continent. The laboratory         deposits. Environmental problems associated with
                                                                                                                     of North America.
      will focus on interpretation of earth history through   extraction and utilization of mineral resources.
      the study of minerals, rocks, and fossils. Three        Prerequisite: GSC 102 or consent of instructor.
                                                                                                                     GSC 325 Geography of the Russia and Cen-
      hours of lecture and two hours of laboratory per                                                               tral Asia (3). Regional approach to studying the
      week. Prerequisite: GSC 101 or 199.                     GSC 301 Understanding Scientific Communi-
                                                                                                                     dynamic interaction between the physical and
                                                              cation (2). Course concentrates on the methods
                                                                                                                     cultural aspects of the Russia and the republics
      GSC 110 World Geography (3). A course de-               for preparation and presentation of scientific
                                                                                                                     of Central Asia.
      signed to introduce students to the geographic dis-     papers, posters, and oral communication. Students
      tribution of major regions of the world. Attention      will utilize a data set to produce a publication
                                                                                                                     GSC 327 Geography of the Middle East and
      will be focused on the delicate interrelationships      quality manuscript, a poster suitable for a sci-
                                                                                                                     North Africa (3). Regional approach to studying
      between the natural landscapes of the earth and         entific meeting, and a 15-minute presentation
                                                                                                                     the dynamic interaction between the physical
      corresponding major cultural activities.                such as would be given at a scientific meeting.
                                                                                                                     and cultural aspects of the Middle East and
                                                              Topics covered include abstracts, the nature of
                                                                                                                     North Africa.
      GSC 125 Weather and Climate (4). Introduction           scientific writing, structure and organization of
      to the dynamics of the atmosphere and how humans        scientific publication, use of literature, graphics
                                                                                                                     GSC 335 Landscapes of the National Parks (3).
      interact with and are influenced by atmospheric         and graphic design, and methods of polishing the
                                                                                                                     A study of the genesis and evolution of the North
      processes and climatic variations. Three hours of       oral presentation. (Same as SCI 301)
                                                                                                                     American landscape with special emphasis on the
      lecture and two hours of laboratory per week.                                                                  national parks. Three lectures per week.
                                                              GSC 303 Introduction to Water Science (3).
      GSC 199 Earth Science (4). This course intro-           An introduction to the study of the marine and
                                                                                                                     GSC 336 Principles of Geomorphology (4).
      duces basic earth science concepts with elaboration     freshwater environments of the earth. Study of
                                                                                                                     The origin, characteristics and development of
      on the origin, structure, and the complex interac-      the oceans as the largest component of the earth’s
                                                                                                                     landforms and the processes which determine
218   tions between the major earth components of the         hydrosphere will emphasize geological forces
                                                                                                                     their formation. Three hours lecture and two
      atmosphere, hydrosphere and lithosphere. Three          which are shaping the ocean floor, ocean currents
                                                                                                                     hours lab per week.
      hours lecture and two hours lab per week.               and tides, the origin of ocean salt, and life in the
GSC 339 Field Geology (3). A course designed          of refraction and other optical properties. Three      GSC 513 Photogeology (3). The application of
to acquaint the student with field and laboratory     lectures and two hours of laboratory per week.         remote sensing technology in the field of geology.
techniques used by the geologist and to familiar-     Prerequisite: GSC 102 or equivalent.                   Major area of concentration will be the manual
ize the student with the geology of Kentucky                                                                 interpretation of black and white imagery. Also
and adjacent areas. Lectures, laboratory and          GSC 431 Geology for Teachers (3). An introduc-         included will be other imagery types, sensors and
field study. Prerequisites: GSC 102 and consent       tion of the materials of the earth and the processes   digital image processing. Prerequisite: GSC 336
of instructor.                                        that modify them to form our landscapes and create     or equivalent or consent of instructor.
                                                      our physical environment. Laboratory is integrated
GSC 350 Field Techniques in Geosciences (3).          into the classroom lectures and will include study     GSC 515 Geochemistry (3). The chemistry of the
An introduction to the variety of field techniques    and identification of rocks and minerals and the       geologic environment including the distribution of
utilized by geoscientists in the geologic, environ-   interpretation of geological maps and photos. The      chemical elements in the earth and natural waters,
mental, and archaeological fields. Emphasis is        literature of geology teaching will be reviewed        the nature and causes of chemical processes, and
placed on the techniques of field surveying and       with an emphasis on exercises that can be used         the application of chemical laws, methods and
mapping; locational assessment utilizing Global       in the teacher’s classroom or laboratory.              data to the solution of geologic problems. Em-
Positioning Systems; orienteering with compass                                                               phasis is on the low-temperature geochemistry
and topographic map; basic descriptive field geol-    GSC 432 Stratigraphy and Sedimentary Petrol-           as it pertains to sedimentation, weathering and
ogy; soil sampling and description; remote and        ogy (4). A course to focus on sedimentary petrol-      groundwater quality.
direct hydrologic assessment; and land cover/land     ogy and stratigraphy pertaining to environmental
use mapping. Field trips will be taken to locations   modeling, an essential component in the field of       GSC 520 Geography of Kentucky (3). A survey
of geologic or environmental significance to the      petroleum geology. Three lectures and two hours        of the topography, soils, climate, industries, com-
region. Prerequisite: junior status or permission     of laboratory per week. Prerequisites: GSC 102         merce and population in Kentucky with emphasis
of the instructor.                                    or equivalent.                                         upon the interrelationships between these various
                                                                                                             phenomena.
GSC 380 Photogrammetry (3). A study of the            GSC 433 Structural Geology (3). An introductory
fundamental methods of photogrammetry includ-         course in genetic and descriptive aspects of the       GSC 521 Geographic Information Systems
ing geometry of single photographs and terrestrial    deformational features of the earth. Two lectures      (4). Techniques course that introduces digital
photographs, planning the photographic mission        and two hours laboratory per week. Prerequisites:      georeferenced information systems, including
and ground control for mapping, an introduction       GSC 102 or equivalent.                                 data capture, editing and encoding techniques,
to analytic photogrammetry, stereo-photogram-                                                                data storage structures, database management
metric plotting instruments and photo interpreta-     GSC 488 Cooperative Education/Internship               systems, data analysis and model development,
tion. (Same as CET 380.)                              (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work       and information display methods. Three hours
                                                      experience related to the career and educational       of lecture and two hours of laboratory per week.
GSC 390 Geoarchaeology (3). Survey of geo-            objectives of the student for which he/she may         (Same as PLN 521.)
logical methods and techniques used to answer         receive academic credit and possible financial
archaeological research questions. Topics covered     remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum            GSC 522 Digital Cartography (3). The map
include sedimentary and geomorphic processes,         of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded          as a communication system. Special individual
depositional environments, site formation pro-        pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.          projects dealing with cartographic design and the
cesses, environmental reconstruction, and radio                                                              preparation of maps for publications. Practical
metric dating techniques. One Saturday field trip     GSC 489 Cooperative Education/Internship               experience with computer mapping of spatial
will be required. Prerequisites: ARC 150 and GSC      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work       data. Prerequisite: GSC 305 or equivalent, or
101. (Same as ARC 390)                                experience related to the career and educational       consent of instructor.
                                                      objectives of the student for which he/she may
GSC 420 Geography of Agriculture (3). A real          receive academic credit and possible financial         GSC 523 Problems in Urban Geography
approach to the study and analysis of the regional,   remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of         and Urban Planning (3). Theories, techniques
national and international aspects of agriculture     six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:      and research in urban geography and planning.
as they relate to the production, distribution and    permission of chair.                                   Focus placed on the designs and strategies ad-
consumption of agricultural products.                                                                        dressing present-day urban problems. (Same as
                                                      GSC 500 Recreation Geography and Planning              PLN 523.)
GSC 426 Applied Meteorology (4). A detailed           (3). Practical application of problem-solving tech-
study of synoptic meteorology and weather fore-       niques and processes to recreational management        GSC 524 Conservation and Environmental
casting. Emphasis placed upon weather maps,           and planning. Focus placed on site planning and        Geosciences (3). Course will study human popula-
their construction and interpretation. Attention      development. (Same as PLN 500.)                        tion growth and associated resource requirements
given to the micro and meso aspects of meteorol-                                                             considering the physical makeup and history of
ogy/climatology. Prerequisite: GSC 125.               GSC 507 Land Use Planning (3). Analyze the             the earth. Natural resource inventory, protection
                                                      principles and techniques utilized in the planning     of the environment, geologic hazards and other
GSC 427 Population Geography (3). An in-              process. Emphasis is placed on the practical as-       conservation related topics will be discussed.
depth look at world population distributions and      pects of planning: needs, problems and proposed        Use of Geographic Information Systems (GIS)
dynamics including past, present, and future          solutions. (Same as PLN 507.)                          will be emphasized.
trends and the influence of population growth on
world economic activity.                              GSC 510 Geophysics (3). Practical aspects of           GSC 528 History and Philosophy of Geosci-
                                                      applied and environmental geophysics including         ences (3). The development of knowledge in the
GSC 428 Landform Analysis (3). The qualitative        gravity, magnetics, electricity, electromagnetic       geosciences and the status of the profession as
and quantitative analysis of the various landform     theory and practice. Prerequisite: MAT 150 or          expressed in the writings of the past and present
assemblages and their distribution. Emphasis on       equivalent.                                            by geoscientists and other individuals in related
the processes involved in landscape evolution                                                                fields. Emphasis will be placed upon current trends
and the influence of man upon this portion of his     GSC 512 Remote Sensing (4). Emphasis will              in the geosciences.
environment.                                          be placed upon the fundamentals of image in-
                                                      terpretation using a wide variety of image types       GSC 532 Igneous and Metamorphic Petrology
GSC 430 Crystallography and Optical Min-              both airborne and spaceborne. The application          (4). Detailed study of igneous and metamorphic
eralogy (4). Crystallography, crystal chemistry,      of remotely sensed data and techniques in many         rocks and the processes by which they form. Pre-
optical theory and technique. Identification of
the common rock-forming minerals by indices
                                                      areas. Three hours of lecture and two hours of
                                                      laboratory per week.
                                                                                                             requisites: GSC 310, CHE 105 or CHE 121.              219
      GSC 533 Paleoecology (3). The study of the               GSC 570 Computer Applications in Geosci-               aspects related to the final stage of life. Customs,
      formation of the first ecologies with the origin         ences (3). Introduction to the use of computers in     medical practices, financial concerns, legal matters
      of life on earth, and the continuing changes in          geoscientific problem-solving and data processing.     and scientific issues will be considered. Students
      the earth’s ecologies through time. Classic paleo-       Students will utilize existing programs and will       enrolled for graduate credit will be required to
      ecological communities are examined, including           develop original routines. Prerequisites: GSC 521      fulfill additional requirements. Prerequisite: PSY
      Precambrian, Ordovician, Cretaceous and Pleis-           or GSC 522 and CSC 101.                                180. (Same as PSY 265.)
      tocene ecosystems. Specific attention paid to the
      interaction and co-evolution of the organic and          GSC 575 Field Vertebrate Paleontology (4). The         GTY 303 Community Leisure Organizations
      inorganic environments. Prerequisites: GSC 101,          study of vertebrate fossils in both field and lab,     (3). Study of administrative and leadership pro-
      BIO 101, or equivalent.                                  including collection, processing and identification.   cedures related to leisure organizations in the
                                                               Field work may include trips throughout the con-       community. (Same as REC 303.)
      GSC 534 Invertebrate Paleontology (4). The               tinental United States and occasionally overseas.
      classification, morphology and paleontological           (Usually taught during summer.) Prerequisites:         GTY 305 Services to Older Americans (3). An
      significance of fossil invertebrates. Three lectures     completion of two semesters of undergraduate           examination and study of the social problems
      and two hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisite:      laboratory science and upper-class or graduate         experienced by older Americans and the modes
      GSC 102 or equivalent.                                   standing. (Same as BIO 575.)                           of social intervention employed by society
                                                                                                                      through the aging network to assist the aging
      GSC 535 Watershed Ecology (3). The study of              GSC 580 Advanced Geographic Information                and aged. Prerequisite: junior standing. (Same
      the movement of water through the environment            Systems (3). A project-based course for students       as SWK 305.)
      and its relationship to biotic systems. Areas em-        seeking greater understanding of GIS theory,
                                                               technology, and applications. Students will apply      GTY 340 Sociology of Medicine (3). An exami-
      phasized include the hydrologic cycle and its influ-
                                                               GIS to their research interests and gain hands-on      nation of sociological perspectives on systems of
      ence on groundwater, lotic and lentic systems; the
                                                               experience through using ArcGIS software pack-         medical care. Particular emphasis will be placed
      effect of water on plant and animal communities;
                                                               age. By the end of the class, students will be able    upon the structure and organization of health care
      and the influence of human activity on watershed
                                                               to identify the appropriate methods for solving        institutions and societal responses to problems
      structure and function. Prerequisite: BIO 330 or
                                                               particular research problems, be familiar with         of illness and disease. Prerequisite: six hours
      consent of instructor. (Same as BIO 535.)
                                                               current research directions in spatial analysis, and   of sociology or consent of instructor. (Same as
                                                               demonstrate their ability to complete a research       SOC/NUR 340.)
      GSC 556 Remote Sensing Applications in Ar-
                                                               project. Students seeking graduate credit must
      chaeology (3). Course includes a discussion of           be admitted to graduate status prior to enrolling      GTY 341 Social Gerontology (3). An introduction
      aerial and terrestrial remote sensing techniques         in this course. Prerequisite: GSC 521 or consent       to the sociocultural dimensions of the problems of
      and how those techniques are employed in ar-             of instructor.                                         the process of aging and its impact on individuals
      cheological research. Prerequisites: ARC 300;                                                                   and society. Prerequisite: SOC 133 or consent of
      GSC 202, 512, or permission of instructor. (Same         GSC 591 Special Problems (1). This course is           instructor. (Same as SOC 341.)
      as ARC 556.)                                             designed for students who have an aptitude for
                                                               research in the area of geosciences. Prerequisite:     GTY 342 Sociology of Retirement (3). Examina-
      GSC 560 Hydrogeology (3). Knowledge and                  consent of instructor. (May be repeated one            tion of retirement as a process, an event, and a role.
      experience in the use of hydrologic and erosion          time.)                                                 Aspects of retirement as a social institution are
      models. State-of-the-art surface water, ground                                                                  reviewed with emphasis upon the implications for
      water and erosion models will be studied, along          GSC 592 Special Problems (2). This course is           the social system. Prerequisite: GTY/SOC 341 or
      with hands-on training in the use of digital com-        designed for students who have an aptitude for         consent of instructor. (Same as SOC 342.)
      puters for applying these models to real-world           research in the area of geosciences. Prerequisite:
      geological situations. Prerequisite: MAT 150 or          consent of instructor. (May be repeated one            GTY 400 Independent Studies (3). This course
      equivalent or consent of instructor.                     time.)                                                 will allow different instructors in the gerontol-
                                                                                                                      ogy minor to teach special topics not covered by
      GSC 561 Precision GIS/GPS Applications (1-               GSC 593 Special Problems (3). This course is           classes regularly offered. Independent projects
      3). An introduction to Geographic Information            designed for students who have an aptitude for         will cover a variety of issues, topics and class
      Systems (GIS) and Global Positioning System              research in the area of geosciences. Prerequisite:     assignments.
      (GPS) applications in natural resources, business        consent of instructor. (May be repeated one
      and land management. The course is divided into          time.)                                                 GTY 488 Cooperative Education/Internship
      three distinct parts: 1) Introduction to GIS/GPS                                                                (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
      applications, 2) Business applications, and 3)                                                                  experience related to the career and educational
      Precision land management applications. Students         gErontology                                            objectives of the student for which he/she may
      must take the introduction phase before continuing       (gty)                                                  receive academic credit and possible financial
      with the other two parts. Variable credit hours: 1       GTY 207 Inclusive Recreation (3). A survey of          remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum
      credit for Part 1, 2 credits for Part 1 and 2 or 1 and   the characteristics and recreational needs of the      of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded
      3, or 3 credits for Parts 1, 2, and 3. Course may be     various types of exceptional children and adults.      pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.
      repeated for a maximum of three credit hours.            (Same as REC 207.)
                                                                                                                      GTY 489 Cooperative Education/Internship
      GSC 565 Biogeochemistry (3). Survey and                  GTY 264 Psychology of Aging (3). The study             (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
      discussion of the scientific literature on global        of the biological, cognitive, affective and social     experience related to the career and educational
      cycles of carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus and man-          aspects of the aging process. The normal and           objectives of the student for which he/she may
      made chemicals with special emphasis on the              pathological conditions of aging are emphasized.       receive academic credit and possible financial
      biogeochemical and ecological processes that             The interaction of the aged and society is also        remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of
      affect terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems. The           considered. Prerequisite: PSY 180. (Same as            six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:
      course will focus on interdisciplinary themes that       PSY 264.)                                              permission of chair.
      incorporate new research results form the fields of
      biology, chemistry, and geosciences. Prerequisite:       GTY 265 Psychology of Death (3). A study of the        GTY 520 Leisure and Aging (3). Introduction to
      junior or higher standing in biology, chemistry or       place of death in the process of human develop-        the physiological, sexual and recreational aspects

220   geosciences. (Same as BIO/CHE 565.)                      ment. Two viewpoints will be stressed: death of        of aging in American society; exploration of
                                                               self and death of others. Emphasis will be given       the role of recreation with the aging; emphasis
                                                               to the cultural, social, biological and affective      on planning leisure programs with the elderly.
Students taking this course for graduate credit          GUI 288 Cooperative Education/Internship                HCA 405 Hospital and Health Services Ad-
will be required to do additional work. (Same as         (1-3). A meaningful, planned and evaluated              ministration (3). Prepares administrators and
REC/HEA/PHE 520.)                                        work experience related to career exploration           practitioners to manage health care organizations
                                                         and educational objectives of the student for           by introducing concepts and skills essential to
GTY 521 Issues in Social Gerontology (3). A              which he/she may receive both academic credit           effective health care administration.
study of theory and research on aging, policies          and financial remuneration. GUI co-op courses
and programs related to nutrition, retirement,           may be repeated to a maximum of four credits            HCA 410 Health Care Planning (3). A course
health and housing of elderly. Prerequisite:             and cannot count as an elective toward a major,         designed to provide health care administrators
SOC/GTY 341 or consent of instructor. (Same              minor or area. Graded pass/fail. Prerequisites:         and practitioners an understanding of the critical
as SOC 521.)                                             consent of instructor.                                  issues and techniques used in successful planning
                                                                                                                 efforts, including a comparison of public sector
GTY 596 The Minority Elderly (3). This course            GUI 450 Seminar in Personnel Services (3).              program planning and private sector strategic
focuses on the minority elderly including racial,        This seminar will serve as an observation, dis-         planning.
ethnic and lower income groups. Applicable               cussion, participation and evaluation laboratory
concepts and theories in social gerontology will         for individuals who are working in the areas            HCA 415 Financial Aspects of Health Service
also be covered. Prerequisite: nine hours of an-         of personnel services. May be repeated once             Organizations (3). A course designed to provide
thropology, gerontology or sociology, or consent         for credit. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A      health care administrators and practitioners a basic
of instructor. (Same as ANT 596.)                        maximum of six hours of credit may be earned            understanding of health care financial management
                                                         or scheduled from any combination of GUI 251,           principles and their application to the practical
                                                         252, and 450.                                           aspects of managerial decision-making in health
                                                                                                                 care facilities.
guidAncE
                                                         GUI 500 Interpersonal Relations in the
(gui)                                                                                                            HCA 525 Case Management: Theory and
                                                         Classroom (3). A course designed to assist the
GUI 097 Self-Realization and Career Investiga-                                                                   Practice (3). This course will address the theory
                                                         pre-service individual in developing interpersonal
tion (3). A course developed especially for Student                                                              and practice of effective case management and the
                                                         communication skills appropriate to the teach-
Support Services students as a prerequisite to GUI                                                               skills necessary to assess the client situation and to
                                                         ing/learning process. The course will provide a
100. The course is designed to enhance students’                                                                 optimize client functioning. This course will focus
                                                         series of training experiences, through interactions,
abilities to examine and identify their values.                                                                  on a diverse population of vulnerable clients across
                                                         designed to develop skills in the following areas:
Decision-making skills which are essential to                                                                    various practice settings. The settings emphasized
                                                         (1) attending and responding behaviors (verbal
value clarification, occupation, and course work                                                                 include medical/health, educational, psychiatric
                                                         and non-verbal), (2) communication of empathic
choices are confirmed through role playing and                                                                   and services to the elderly. Policy issues will be
                                                         understanding, respect and warmth, (3) the effect
class discussion. Computer software will be used                                                                 addressed, as they relate to advocacy, service plan-
                                                         of communication on understanding self and oth-
for the purpose of career investigation. Prerequi-                                                               ning, and program design. Prerequisite: consent
                                                         ers, (4) effective communications in discipline,
site: consent of instructor. Credit earned in this                                                               of instructor. (Same as SWK 525)
                                                         (5) establishing comfortable classroom climates
course may not be counted toward graduation
                                                         for instruction.
requirements.
                                                         GUI 584 Problems/Industrial World of Work               hEAlth
GUI 100 Self-Development and Career Explora-
                                                         (3). This course is designed to familiarize counsel-    (hEA)
tion (1-3). A study of decision-making as it relates
                                                         ors, educators, administrators, and other advanced      HEA 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed
to the student’s life experiences. In-class activities
                                                         students (undergraduate and graduate) with              to assist students in their transition to Murray
teach the concepts of decision-making, time man-
                                                         working conditions, personnel practices, career         State University. Content includes orientation to
agement, career planning, assertiveness and com-
                                                         fields and opportunities in business and industry.      the specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within
munication skills. Credit for general elective.
                                                         Emphasis is on real work setting. Travel to and         the academic program; university procedures,
                                                         from field observations and discussions at local        policies, and resources; strategies for personal
GUI 188 Cooperative Education/Internship
                                                         and regional industrial sites required. Prerequisite:   and academic success, and extracurricular op-
(1-3). A meaningful, planned and evaluated work
                                                         consent instructor.                                     portunities. Only one transitions course will count
experience related to career exploration and edu-
                                                                                                                 toward graduation. Graded pass/fail. (Same as
cational objectives of the student for which he/she
                                                         GUI 592 Group Processes (3). A study of the             CDI/EXS/NTN/REC 099.)
may receive both academic credit and financial
                                                         history and characteristics of group processes and
remuneration. GUI co-op courses may be repeated
                                                         structure as well as issues in leadership style and     HEA 190 Personal Health Issues (2). Course
to a maximum of four credits and cannot count as
                                                         development of a model in small group interac-          designed to educate students about wellness
an elective toward a major, minor or area. Graded
                                                         tion. May not be used toward school counseling          through the acquisition of knowledge, attitudes,
pass/fail. Prerequisites: freshman/sophomore
                                                         certification.                                          and behaviors. The major health-related problems
status with permission of instructor and approval
                                                                                                                 in society are addressed, as well as an understand-
of co-op coordinator.
                                                                                                                 ing of individual developmental patterns and
                                                         hEAlth cArE AdministrAtion                              health needs. Broad ranges of factors affecting
GUI 251 Seminar in Leadership Development
                                                         (hcA)                                                   wellness, including identification of risks and
and Experiential Activities I (1-3). This course is
                                                         HCA 401 Overview of the Health Care Delivery            health promotion behaviors, are covered. Topics
designed to introduce the dynamics and concepts
                                                         System (3). This course is designed to provide          include, but are not limited to, substance use and
of leadership and its application. The concepts to
                                                         the student with a basic understanding of the           abuse, nutrition, sexually transmitted diseases,
be applied will be taught in the class and followed
                                                         American health care system by focusing on              health risk factors, mental and emotional health,
through in university activities. Prerequisite:
                                                         the people, places and processes of health care         and exercise.
consent of instructor. May be repeated once for
credit. Note: A maximum of six hours of credit may       delivery. The course surveys important trends in
                                                         health care delivery and utilization and develops       HEA 191 Personal Health (3). This course is
be earned or scheduled from any combination of
                                                         a model of the care seeking process. The major          designed to educate students about wellness
GUI 251, 252, and 450.
                                                         health care resources (personnel, facilities and        through the acquisition of knowledge, attitudes and
                                                         programs, and the government) and processes             behaviors. The major health-related problems in
GUI 252 Seminar in Leadership Development
                                                         (financing, planning and quality assurance) are         society are addressed, as well as an understanding
and Experiential Activities II (1-3). Continuation
                                                         discussed in detail.                                    of individual developmental patterns and health
of GUI 251. May be repeated once for credit. Note:
                                                                                                                 needs. Personal fitness is assessed and activities
A maximum of six hours of credit may be earned
or scheduled from any combination of GUI 251,
                                                                                                                 that promote lifelong fitness are practiced. A broad
                                                                                                                 range of factors affecting wellness, including iden-
                                                                                                                                                                          221
252, and 450.
      tification of risk and health promotion behaviors,     minimum of 90 service hours are required. Pre-         minors with background for work in upper-level
      are covered. Topics include, but are not limited       requisite: HEA 150 or permission of chair.             courses and to acquaint students in other fields of
      to, substance use and abuse, nutrition, sexually                                                              study with the persons, forces and values that have
      transmitted diseases, health risk factors, mental      HEA 510 Sociology of Sport and Exercise (3). A         created modern Western civilization.
      and emotional health, exercise.                        critical study of the sociological factors affecting
                                                             sport, performance, and exercise. Students will        HIS 221 American Experience to 1865 (3). A the-
      HEA 195 First Aid and Safety (2). The purpose          learn about the social, cultural, environmental, and   matic approach to the history of the U.S. to 1865,
      of this course is to give the student knowledge of     racial dynamics involved in sport and exercise.        designed as a University Studies social science
      the practice of first aid including the performance    This course will also study the effects sport and      elective. Three basic themes will be included: the
      of cardiopulmonary resuscitation. American Red         exercise have on the social structure of society.      transplantation of European and African cultures
      Cross CPR and First Aid certifications may be          (Same as EXS/REC 510.)                                 to America and their interaction with the cultures
      earned.                                                                                                       of native American Indians; the emergence of
                                                             HEA 511 Epidemiology (3). This course is               distinctive American values and institutions and
      HEA 200 Community and Consumer Health                  designed to examine the principles and practices       the establishment of the American nation; and the
      (3). This course is designed to address the founda-    in the cause, prevention and control of diseases       stresses that culminated in the Civil War.
      tions of community health. Topics include health       in various community settings. Topics covered
      through the life span, promoting community             include an introduction to epidemiological             HIS 222 American Experience Since 1865 (3).
      health, environmental health protection and health     terminology; the measurement of morbidity,             A thematic approach to the history of the U.S.
      resources and services.                                mortality and fertility; descriptive and analytic      since 1865, designed as a University Studies
                                                             epidemiology; screening; infectious disease; and       social science elective. Students will examine
      HEA 320 Planning Effective Health Education            occupational epidemiology.                             three themes: the forces that transformed America
      Programs (3). This course is designed to address                                                              from a predominantly rural, agricultural society
      planning for health education and health promotion     HEA 520 Leisure and Aging (3). Introduction to         to a predominantly urban, industrial one; the ris-
      programs. Topics include theoretical foundations       the physiological, sexual and recreational aspects     ing political consciousness of various American
      of health, community analysis, establishing pri-       of aging in American society; exploration of           groups and the expanding regulatory role of the
      orities, developing goals and objectives, locating     the role of recreation with the aging; emphasis        federal government; and the emergence of America
      resources and services, methodologies to meet          on planning leisure programs with the elderly.         as a world power.
      identified objectives, program implementation          Students taking this course for graduate credit
      and program evaluation. Prerequisite: permis-          will be required to do additional work. (Same as       HIS 250 20th Century World (3). A history of
      sion of chair.                                         GTY/PHE/REC 520.)                                      the 20th –Century world from the age of High
                                                                                                                    Imperialism to the end of the Cold War, the
      HEA 360 Health Education Services (3). This            HEA 575 Human Sexuality II (3). This course is         subsequent globalization (economic, political
      course is designed to prepare the health education     an advanced study of issues of sexuality including     technological, environmental) and conflicts
      student with the skills necessary to coordinate and    sexual exploitation, sexual victimization, sexual      emerging from resistance to that process.
      provide resources for health education program-        abuse, sexual harassment, altered body image
      ming and presentation. The purpose is to assist        and sexual function, family structures, the law        HIS 300 Introduction to Historical Studies (3).
      the student in assessing the available health-         and sexuality issues, and new research in sexual       Introduction to the methods by which historians
      related services at the local, state and national      health. Students taking this course for graduate       study the past and present their conclusions to
      levels, determining the resources and materials        credit will be required to do additional work.         the public. Students will be expected to write
      available for use in health education programs,        Prerequisites: HEA 460 or equivalent.                  a research paper in which the emphasis will be
      and enhancing coordination and collaboration                                                                  placed on developing research skills, organizing
      among personnel in health services and health                                                                 the results in a coherent form, and developing
      education programs. Prerequisite: HEA 150 or           history                                                an effective writing style. Required for history
      permission of chair.                                   (his)                                                  majors as a prerequisite for 400-level courses and
                                                             HIS 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed to         recommended for anyone interested in develop-
      HEA 460 Human Sexuality (3). This course               assist students in their transition to Murray State    ing research and writing skills. Prerequisites:
      is designed to acquaint students with issues of        University. Content includes orientation to the        ENG 101 and 102 or ENG 104 or 105; two of
      human sexuality. Topics include gender, sexual         specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within          the following or transfer equivalents: CIV 202,
      anatomy and physiology, love, sexual arousal           the academic program; university procedures,           HIS 221, or 222.
      and response, sexual behaviors and relationships,      policies, and resources; strategies for personal
      conception, pregnancy, contraception, sexually         and academic success, and extracurricular op-          HIS 301 Ancient History to the Fall of Rome
      transmitted diseases including HIV/AIDS, and           portunities. Only one transitions course will count    (3). A study of the Near East, Greece and Rome
      sexual victimization. The purpose is to examine        toward graduation. Introductory seminar for all        with particular emphasis on the influences of
      human sexuality from biological, psychological,        first semester history majors. Graded pass/fail.       these civilizations on modern Western civiliza-
      behavioral, clinical and cultural perspectives.                                                               tion. Particular attention will be paid to the
      Students taking this course for graduate credit        HIS 110 Special Topics in History for Study            development of democratic and republican forms
      will be required to do additional work.                Abroad (3). Designed for students enrolled in a        of government.
                                                             study abroad program, History 110 is an academic
      HEA 470 Education for Drug Abuse Prevention            course involving both traditional classroom learn-     HIS 302 Medieval Europe (3). A survey of the
      (3). This course seeks to develop the student’s        ing and experiential learning opportunities in an      major events in Western history from the Fall of
      concept of drug education through in-depth ex-         international setting. This course will cover a        Rome to the Renaissance, with special emphasis
      ploration, research and discussion of problems         particular historical topic, period, personality or    on those political, economic, social and cultural-
      related to alcohol, tobacco and other drugs. Special   problem. Specific subject matter will vary accord-     intellectual forces and institutions that helped form
      emphasis on the effects of abuse for the individual    ing to student and faculty interest and in relation    the modern world outlook. (Same as RGS 302.)
      and on the effects of abuse for the individual and     to study abroad locations and opportunities. Does
      society. Students taking this course for graduate      not count toward History major or minor.               HIS 303 The Making of Britain (3). This course
      credit will be required to do additional work.                                                                surveys primarily the political and constitutional
                                                             HIS 201 Modern Europe (3). A study of major            history of England from the period of Roman
      HEA 499 Practicum in Health Education (3).             political, economic, social and intellectual forces    Conquest to the victory of Henry VII in the War of
      A course designed for the student to serve with a
222   community health organization or agency under
      the direction of faculty and field supervisors. A
                                                             in European history, tracing their development
                                                             through the past five centuries. This course is
                                                                                                                    the Roses. The development of the theme of united
                                                                                                                    government will be its main emphasis.
                                                             designed both to provide history majors and
HIS 304 The History of Ireland (3). A system-            HIS 324 Science in the Modern World (3).                 HIS 355 Islamic Middle East (3). History of
atic investigation of the history of Ireland from        A survey of the development of science in the            the Middle East from the 7th century to the 19th
first human habitation, with an emphasis on the          Western world from Newton to the present.                century. The course will examine the apostleship
period since 1500. The course will look at the                                                                    of Muhammad, the question of succession and the
development of, and interactions among, the              HIS 325 Disease in History (3). This course              Sunni-Shi’ah schism, the government, society,
various cultural/religious traditions of Ireland         investigates the impact of disease on human              and culture of the High Caliphate, the decline of
and the long struggle of the Irish people to attain      society from ancient times to the 20th century. We       Arab power and the rise of the Turks, the Islamic
self-government.                                         explore how societies of the past have responded         perspective of the Crusades, the revival of Islamic
                                                         to both epidemic and endemic diseases, including         power under the Gunpowder Empires, and the de-
HIS 305 The Irish Diaspora (3). A systematic             plague, cholera, leprosy, influenza, syphilis,           cline of Islamic civilization in the face of Western
study of the dispersal of Irish people around the        smallpox, and HIV. We also examine the history           expansion. (Same as RGS 355.)
world, focusing on their interaction with the vari-      of germ theory, the development of biological
ous host cultures they have encountered both as          weapons, and future threats to human health.             HIS 360 Modern South Asia (3). An introduc-
settlers and in other roles. Particular attention will                                                            tory survey of the historical development of the
                                                         HIS 329 The American Indians (3). A history
be given to the Irish on the European continent and                                                               peoples, nations, and cultures of South Asia since
                                                         of the Indians of North America from the earliest
in Britain, the United States, Canada, Australia,                                                                 the seventeenth century. The course emphasizes
                                                         times until the late nineteenth century. This course
South Africa, and South America, especially                                                                       the Mughal period, British colonial rule, indepen-
                                                         focuses on the cultures, customs and traditions
Argentina.                                                                                                        dence movements and Partition, and the problems
                                                         of the various Indian civilizations of the United
                                                         States. (Same as ANT 329.)                               of postcolonial nation-state building. The major
HIS 306 Europe in Renaissance and Reforma-                                                                        themes and topics considered include tradition
tion (3). A survey of the development of Western         HIS 330 Sports in America (3). This course will          and modernity, centralization and regionalism,
Europe, emphasizing the Protestant and Catholic          offer a survey of the institutional development of       resistance, collaboration and accommodation, and
Reformations, the Crisis of the seventeenth cen-         American sports from the colonial period to the          their contributions to explaining continuity and
tury, the Scientific Revolution, the English Revolu-     present. It will focus on the major spectator sports     change in the organization of state, society, and
tions of the seventeenth century, and France under       and emphasize the role of professional sports as         economy of modern South Asia. Prerequisites:
Louis XIII and XIV. (Same as RGS 306.)                   an institution of social mobility, the develop-          CIV 201 or CIV 202.
                                                         ment of race relations, the bureaucratization and
HIS 307 The Foundation of Russian Power (3).             professionalization of sports as an entertainment        HIS 361 Teaching History (3). A course offering
A study of Kiev Rus, the Mongol invasion of the          industry, and the struggle of athletes for collective    practical approaches for teaching history in the
thirteenth century and its impact on later Russian       bargaining rights.                                       public schools using a concepts-and-problems
development, the Rise of Moscow, Westernization                                                                   approach. The course will focus on either the
currents of the seventeenth century, Russia under        HIS 333 Military History of the United States            history of the United States or world history,
Peter the Great and Catherine the Great. Emphasis        (3). A consideration of American military history        and therefore could be taken twice for credit if
will be placed upon social-intellectual develop-         from colonial militias through the role of the           the focus is different the second time. Does not
ments and the problem of serfdom.                        military in Vietnam. Topics covered include the          count toward the major in history. Consult the
                                                         causes of war, methods of recruitment, military          department chair.
HIS 309 Survey of World Religions (3). A study           policies, and the effect of the industrial revolution
of the historical development of Christianity,           and technology on war. (Same as MIL 333.)                HIS 370 History of Africa (3). A survey of the
Islam, Buddhism, and other world religions, with                                                                  main trends in African history from the origins of
special attention to their similarities and differ-      HIS 334 History of American Agriculture and              man through the successes of African nationalism
ences. (Same as RGS 309.)                                Rural Life (3). An exploration of the historical         in the mid-twentieth century. Emphasis will be
                                                         development of rural America from colonial times         placed on the development of African civiliza-
HIS 315 Women in American History (3). This              to the present. Emphasis will be placed on the           tions, their interaction with Islamic and European
course will examine the position and contributions       impact of different crops on regional economic           civilizations, and the adaptations resulting from
of women in American society from the colonial           growth, organizational and technological changes         those contacts.
period to the present from the perspective of the        in farming, urban-rural relationships, the role of
major trends in American history. It will focus on       government in agriculture, and the rural com-            HIS 380 Introduction to Public History (3).
significant women in each period, while emphasiz-        munity in modern America.                                An introduction to the various areas in which
ing several particular themes.                                                                                    historians work outside academe, including mu-
                                                         HIS 340 Modern East Asia (3). This course is             seums, historic preservation programs, archives
HIS 320 African-American History (3). A sur-             designed to provide undergraduates with an introduc-     and special collections libraries, and oral history
                                                         tion to the history of the major countries of the Far    programs, among others.
vey of the history of black Americans from their
                                                         East. The development of modern China and Japan
African heritage to the present. Special attention
                                                         will be examined, with special attention given to
will be devoted to the African background, the                                                                    HIS 390 Special Topics (3). A course designed
                                                         their varying responses to both western intrusion
experiences of slavery, and the various forms of                                                                  as an elective for the general student; it will cover
                                                         and internal social problems, from the seventeenth
black resistance to discrimination.                                                                               a particular topic, period, personality or problem
                                                         century to the present.
                                                                                                                  of the past. Specific subject matter varies from
HIS 322 History of Religion in the United States                                                                  semester to semester, according to student and
                                                         HIS 350 History of Latin America (3). A survey
(3). The historical development of organized             of Latin American history from pre-colonial times
                                                                                                                  faculty interest. Open to history majors and mi-
religion in America, with special attention to the       to the present. Special attention will be given to the   nors with approval of the instructor. Repeatable
relationships between religion and other features        early Indian Civilizations, Spanish colonization, the    with permission.
of American society. (Same as RGS 322.)                  struggles for independence and the problems of Latin
                                                         American nations in the modern world.                    HIS 400 Senior Seminar (3). This course is
HIS 323 The Great American West (3). A survey                                                                     designed to accomplish three objectives: (1)
of the westward movement from the Mississippi            HIS 354 Ancient Middle East (3). A survey of             presentation and evaluation of senior research
River to the Pacific Ocean, beginning with the           Middle Eastern history from prehistoric times to         projects; (2) examination of career opportunities
Lewis and Clark expedition in 1804 and ending            the end of the Classical period; included are the        for history majors and use of the University Place-
with the closing of the frontier in 1890. Emphasis       emergence and development of civilizations in            ment Office; and (3) assessment of the history
is placed on the political and economic develop-         Mesopotamia and Egypt, the origins and influence         major through a comprehensive departmental
ment of the Trans-Mississippi region; attention will                                                              examination. Required for all majors. Prerequisite:
                                                                                                                                                                          223
                                                         of Judaism, Zoroastrianism and Christianity, and the
also be devoted to biography, social, institutions,      decline of Classical civilizations prior to the coming   HIS 300 and senior standing.
and folkways.                                            of Islam. (Same as RGS 354.)
      HIS 401 The French Revolution (3). This course         HIS 417 Women in American History since                 the course has a distinguishing emphasis, it is on
      has three main areas of emphasis: eighteenth-          1877 (3). This course will examine the position         political history, but the course gives due attention
      century French society and culture, the causes of      and contributions of women in American society          to military, economic and social history.
      the French Revolution, and the career of Napoleon      from 1877 to the present from the perspective
      Bonaparte. The course’s main theme is that the         of the major trends in American history. It will        HIS 435 Transformation of America 1877-1929
      Revolution was a watershed in history.                 focus on the history of women in each period,           (3). A study of the transformation of the United
                                                             while emphasizing several particular themes             States from an agricultural to a modern industrial
      HIS 402 Nineteenth-Century Europe (3). A               and trends.                                             nation. Topics included within this broad theme
      social, political and cultural history of Europe’s                                                             are the rise of big business and labor unions,
      great age, the period from the French Revolu-          HIS 421 United States Social and Cultural His-          urbanization, immigration, the closing of the
      tion and Napoleon to the outbreak of the First         tory to 1865 (3). The development of American           frontier, reform movements, the struggles of blacks
      World War.                                             society and thought from the colonial period to the     and women for equal rights, national politics and
                                                             end of the Civil War. Special emphasis is placed        cultural changes.
      HIS 403 Europe Since 1914 (3). A study of con-         upon the forces that have shaped the daily lives
      sequences of World War I, the emergence of bol-        of the American people: immigration, religious          HIS 436 Recent America (3). A study of the Great
      shevism and fascism, the impact of the depression      traditions, the frontier, economic change, ethnic       Depression, the New Deal, World War II, and the
      and World War II, and the transformation of Europe     diversity, slavery and war.                             subsequent forces that have shaped contemporary
      since 1945, together with some consideration of                                                                American life. Emphasis is placed on the role of
      European thought in the twentieth century.             HIS 422 United States Social and Cultural               the United States in international relations, the
                                                             History Since 1865 (3). The development of              civil rights movement, and domestic economic
      HIS 408 The Rise and Fall of the Soviet Union          American society and thought since the end of the       developments.
      (3). This course begins with the aftermath of the      Civil War. Emphasis is placed upon the forces that
      Revolution of 1905. World War I and the abdica-        have shaped the daily lives of the American people:     HIS 441 History of the Old South (3). A survey
      tion of Nicholas II receive close attention, as do     racial and ethnic diversity, industrialization and      of southern history from colonial times through
      the Bolshevik Revolution, the Civil War, the New       urbanization, immigration, mass media, religious        the Civil War. Emphasis is placed on examining
      Economic Policy, and the Stalin Revolution of the      traditions and modern transportation.                   slavery, social life, the emergence of southern na-
      1930s. We study World War II and its impact on                                                                 tionalism, and the South during the Civil War.
      the USSR, as well as Stalin’s last years and the       HIS 424 United States Foreign Relations Since
      unsuccessful attempts to reform his system. The        1898 (3). An analysis of the United States’ relations   HIS 442 History of the New South (3). A survey
      course ends with the collapse of the Soviet Union      with other nations since 1898. Special emphasis         of southern history from the end of the Civil War
      in 1991 and Russia’s struggle to adapt democracy       is placed on the role of “ideals and self-interest”     to the present. Emphasis is placed on the enduring
      and capitalism to her needs.                           in foreign relations.                                   characteristics of the South as well as the process
                                                                                                                     of change since World War II.
      HIS 409 Tudor and Stuart England (3). A study          HIS 425 Science and Religion (3). A survey of
      of the molding of the English monarchy and of the      the relationship between science and religion in        HIS 445 History of Race Relations in the United
      eclipse of its authority by the social and political   Western culture from ancient Greek times to the         States (3). An examination of the social, political
      groups which came to dominate Parliament by            20th century, with particular emphasis on how           and economic influences upon race relations in the
      the seventeenth century.                               science has been influenced by both religious faith     United States from the colonial era to the present.
                                                             and religious institutions. (Same as RGS 415.)          Emphasis will be placed on the sources of change
      HIS 410 Modern Britain (3). A study of Britain                                                                 in race relations, the various forms of racial dis-
      since the Stuarts, including its age of greatness      HIS 430 Colonial America to 1763 (3). An ex-            crimination, and the responses to discrimination
      in the nineteenth century and its decline in the       planation of the transplantation of European and        in American history.
      twentieth century. Political and cultural history      African culture to the United States, the adaptation
      are emphasized.                                        of these cultures to the New World environment,         HIS 446 History of Kentucky (3). The process
                                                             their impact upon eastern Indian cultures and           of political, economic and social evolution in
      HIS 411 Modern France (3). A study of politi-          the rise of distinctly American institutions and        Kentucky is traced from early settlement to the
      cal traditions which have divided French people,       ideas. The course will emphasize the evolution          modern era. Geographical influences upon the
      challenges posed to the Third Republic, and the        of English colonial policies and the comparison         patterns of Kentucky development, Kentucky’s
      transformation of French society since World           of New England, Middle Atlantic and Southern            changing role within an expanding union, and
      War II.                                                colonial experiences.                                   the Commonwealth’s participation in national
                                                                                                                     movements and events are stressed.
      HIS 412 Modern Germany (3). A study of the             HIS 431 America in Revolution (3). Spanning
      political, social and intellectual causes and con-     the revolutionary and early national periods of         HIS 450 Modern Africa (3). A study of Africa
      sequences of German unification that attempts          American history, this course focuses upon the          since about 1880, including the transformation of
      to answer the question, Why Hitler? Includes           United States’ transformation from colonies to a        African societies in contact with other cultures,
      discussion of Germany since 1945.                      nation. It emphasizes the American struggle for         the growth of nationalism and nationalist move-
                                                             independence, economic as well as political, and        ments, and the questions of African unity and
      HIS 414 Europe During World War I and World            the clash of values, interests and ambitions that       neocolonialism. (Same as POL 450.)
      War II (3). An introductory survey of European         produced the American system of government.
      history from 1914 to about 1945. It will describe                                                              HIS 451 Slavery in Africa (3). An examination
      and analyze the events leading to both World Wars      HIS 433 Jacksonian America and Sectional                of the historical development of traditional Afri-
      as well as some of the consequences of those           Conflict (3). Covers the period from 1815 to the        can society in the pre-colonial and post-colonial
      wars, delineating the major military figures and       presidential election of 1860 and the break-up of
                                                                                                                     periods. Particular emphasis will be given to
      the military history of the World Wars.                the union. Emphasis is on the political, social and
                                                                                                                     the effects of slavery on the social and political
                                                             economic conditions as they related to the sectional
                                                                                                                     fabric of Africa.
      HIS 415 Women in History (3). An examination           controversy that raged during this part of the
      of the position and contributions of women in          nineteenth century. Some specific topics include
                                                                                                                     HIS 455 Middle East since 1800 (3). A study of
      history. Topics will vary.                             the rise of the common man, the Jacksonian era,
                                                                                                                     the Middle East from 1800 to the present, with
                                                             slavery and the abolitionist movement.
                                                                                                                     emphasis on the historical and political forces
      HIS 416 Women in American History to 1877
                                                                                                                     that have affected and still influence the region.
224   (3). This course surveys the history of women in
      the United States from the colonial period through
                                                             HIS 434 Civil War and Reconstruction (3).
                                                             Covers the period from the beginning of the             (Same as POL 455.)
      Reconstruction.                                        Civil War to the presidential election of 1877. If
HIS 456 The Arab-Israeli Conflict (3). Study of         HIS 488 Cooperative Education/Internship              care of objects, exhibition design and interpreta-
the historical background to the conflict between       (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work      tion, educational programs, research activities and
the state of Israel and the Arab states. Examines       experience related to the career and educational      public relations. (Same as ARC 598.)
the origins of Zionism and of Arab nationalism in       objectives of the student for which he/she may
the 19th century, the phases of Jewish settlement       receive academic credit and possible financial        HIS 500 Comparative History Topics (3).
in Palestine, the consequences of the First World       remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum           This course is designed to provide upper-class
War for Zionist and Arab nationalist movements,         of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded         and graduate students with specialized studies
the British Mandate in Palestine, the Israeli war       pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.         of topics (such as racism, industrialism, national-
for independence in 1948, Nasserism, the Suez                                                                 ism and revolution) that cross national, class and
War, the Six-Day War, the invasion of Lebanon,          HIS 489 Cooperative Education/Internship              chronological boundaries. Topics offered will
the Intifada, and the possibilities for peace.          (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work      vary with interests of students and instructors.
                                                        experience related to the career and educational      May be repeated for credit with permission of
HIS 472 Modern China (3). A study of the                objectives of the student for which he/she may        chair and instructor.
political, economic, social and intellectual forces     receive academic credit and possible financial
in modern China from 1850 to the present. This          remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of        HIS 590 Directed Studies (3). Individualized
course is designed to provide the student with          six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:     instruction for the exceptional student. May be
an in-depth knowledge of the major civilization         permission of chair.                                  repeated for credit. Prerequisite: permission of
of East Asia.                                                                                                 department chair.
                                                        HIS 490 History Study Abroad (1-3). Course
HIS 474 China in Revolution (3). A study of the         will offer students a direct experience of history    HIS 599 Historic Interpretation Internship
                                                        through a study abroad program linked to a stan-      (3). This course will provide on-the-job training
last decade and collapse of the Qing dynasty and
                                                        dard, semester-long co-requisite upper or lower       in historical interpretation for museums, public or
China’s subsequent search for unity and political
                                                        level history course. Course will give students       private agencies and historic sites. Each student
form, beginning with the Republic, proclaimed
                                                        opportunities to travel abroad in a structured        will be placed in an internship (generally for 12
in 1912, and ending with the Tiananmen mas-
                                                        program to historic sites and museums related         weeks in the summer) in which he or she will
sacre of 1989.
                                                        to the subject matter of the co-requisite course.     work in an interpretative capacity and conduct
                                                        May be repeated for up to six hours. The instruc-     a major research project related to the historic
HIS 475 Modern Japan (3). The cultural and
                                                        tor reserves the right to admit students who have     interpretation programs of the agency. The student
political history of Japan from its unification under   completed the co-requisite course as well as MSU      will present the results of this research in a formal
the Tokugawa Shogunate to the present. Major            faculty/staff. Corequisite: HIS 490 must be taken     paper to a designated advisor in the Department
topics examined include the Japanese success in         with a semester-long history course designated for    of History. This course will count as a part of the
meeting the challenge of Western imperialism in         that purpose. Prerequisites: HIS 300 or consent       major, but no student will be permitted to repeat
the nineteenth century, Japan’s own venture into        of instructor.                                        the course for credit.
imperialism on the Asian mainland in the twentieth
century, and the Japanese economic phoenix in           HIS 491 Domestic Travel History (1-3). Offers
the postwar era.                                        students a direct experience of history through       honors coursEs
                                                        a focused travel program linked to standard           (hon)
HIS 476 The World Since 1945 (3). A survey of           on-campus history course. This is intended to         Note: Courses with an HON prefix are open only
new directions in modern history, particularly the      supplement normal classroom learning activities       to Honors Program students.
rise of the USA and the USSR as world powers            by giving students opportunities to visit historic
and the end of the colonial empires of Asia and         sites and museums related to the topic or time        HON 099 Transitions for Undeclared Incom-
Africa. This course will discuss the Cold War           period of the course. May be repeated for up          ing Honors Students (1). Course is designed to
through international relations, the escalation of      to six hours. Co-requisite: Must be taken with        assist students in their transition to Murray State
wars in Southeast Asia, Africa, Latin America,          a semester-long history course designated for         University. Content includes orientation to the
and the Middle East, as well as rival strategies        that purpose. Prerequisite: HIS 300 or consent        specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within the
for economic and cultural development in the            of instructor.                                        academic program; university procedures, poli-
post-war world.                                                                                               cies, and resources; strategies for personal and
                                                        HIS 492 Historic Preservation (3). This course        academic success, and extracurricular opportuni-
HIS 477 Hollywood History (3). A critical,              will provide a general overview of the different      ties. Only one transitions course will count toward
analytical examination of the portrayal of the past     aspects of historic preservation, including down-     graduation. A one-hour semester course designed
in films and how movies shape popular percep-           town revitalization, neighborhood organization,       for incoming Honors Program students with an
tions of history.                                       historic house management, preservation legisla-      undeclared major. Graded pass/fail. Prerequisite:
                                                        tion, preservation education and historic architec-   Must be admitted to the Honors Program.
HIS 478 Comparative Civilizations after 1500            ture. Much of the class is taught in a laboratory
(3). Comparative analysis of civilizations after        atmosphere, with students making on-site visits       HON 100 Interdisciplinary Humanities and
1500. The course will introduce comparative             to a variety of historic preservation projects. Em-   Fine Arts (3). Introduction to ways of knowing,
methodology and analyze values and institutions         phasis is given to the study of the development       issues, and practices in selected humanities and fine
across cultural boundaries. Particular attention        of American architectural styles, so that students    arts disciplines, including philosophy, literature,
will be given to comparative change within Asian,       can recognize historic houses and place them in       history, art, music, and theater. The course is open
African, and Western civilizations during the era       a wider context.                                      only to students in the Commonwealth Honors
of Western expansion. Prerequisites: CIV 201 and                                                              Academy. The work of the various disciplines (and
202 or equivalent world history survey.                 HIS 493 Archival Principles and Practices (3).        different sections) will be rotated and organized
                                                        An in-depth introduction to the care of historical    around a general theme each time the course is
HIS 481 Revolutionary Mexico 1810 to the                materials, including archives, manuscripts, pho-      offered. Prerequisite: acceptance into the Com-
Present (3). An in-depth examination of Mexico’s        tographs and ephemeral items.                         monwealth Honors Academy.
history since 1810. Emphasis will be given to
economic development and diplomacy during               HIS 498 Museum Studies (3). This course will          HON 101 Topics in Business and Public Affairs
the Diaz regime, the role of culture and North          provide a broad introduction to the field of museum   (3). Introductory course treating topics or issues
                                                        work. Topics included will be the history and         in one or more of the following areas of study:
American influence in Mexico’s development,
                                                        philosophy of museums; the social, economic and       economics, management, marketing, finance,
and the coming of the 1910 revolution and the
one-party state.
                                                        political trends that shape museums; the staffing,
                                                        management and financing of museums; and the
                                                                                                              accounting, or computer science. Prerequisite:
                                                                                                              Admission to the Commonwealth Honors                    225
                                                        multiple functions of museums—collection and          Academy.
      HON 102 Topics in Communication (3).                   personal and professional success. A university         HON 355 Honors, Independent Study Abroad
      Introductory course treating topics or issues in       studies communication and basic skills elective.        (3). This course is designed for those students
      one or more of the following areas of study:           A student cannot have credit for this course and        who elect to engage in an individualized study
      organizational communication, radio-television,        COM 161 or COM 181. Prerequisite: must be               or project which will provide an international
      print journalism, advertising, or public relations.    enrolled in the Honors Program.                         experience. It may take the form of an exchange,
      Can not count as a JMC course (minor or                                                                        internship, and/or extended research study. Per-
      major) or as a liberal arts limited elective for       HON 201 (151) Honors Seminar in Social Sci-             mission for enrollment and course requirements
      JMC students. Prerequisite: Admission to the           ence I (3). An interdisciplinary course involving       must be secured from the academic department
      Commonwealth Honors Academy.                           readings and discussion of environmental, social,       sponsoring the study and approved by the Honors
                                                             economic, and political influences and develop-         Program.
      HON 106 Topics in Science, Engineering                 ments in the major civilizations of the world prior
      and Technology (3). Introductory course                to 1500 A.D. Open only to students in the Honors        HON 364 Advanced Honors Seminar in Arts
      treating topics or issues in any of the following      Program. Fulfills three hours of the world civiliza-    and Culture Abroad (3). An advanced interdisci-
      areas of study: biology, physics, chemistry,           tions University Studies requirement in place of        plinary exploration of the visual arts, architecture,
      engineering technology, geosciences, geology or        CIV 101. A student cannot have credit for both          music, theatre, cinema, and folk and popular
      mathematics. Open only to students enrolled in         this course and CIV 101.                                culture. Offered only in study-abroad programs
      the Commonwealth Honors Academy.                                                                               sponsored by Murray State University. There will
                                                             HON 202 (152) Honors Seminar in Social Sci-             be at least 37 contact hours in a formal classroom
      HON 107 Topics in Agriculture and Animal               ence II (3). An interdisciplinary course involving      setting, and additional “lab” requirements that will
      Science (3). An introductory course treating topics    readings and discussion of environmental, social,       depend upon cultural offerings in the program
      or issues in any of the following area of study:       economic and political influences and develop-          locale and in excursion destinations. This course
      agriculture, animal science, or animal health.         ments in the major civilizations of the world since     will be cross-listed with HON 164, but substan-
      Prerequisite: Admission to the Commonwealth            1500 A.D. Open only to students in the Honors           tial additional independent research and critical
      Honors Academy.                                        Program. Fulfills three hours of the world civiliza-    writing will be required. Open only to students
                                                             tions University Studies requirement in place of        with junior-level standing, with at least 3 hours
      HON 110 Special Honors Topics (3). A special           CIV 102. A student cannot have credit for both          previous credit in the fine arts, and with at least
      topics elective course that will introduce students    this course and CIV 102.                                a 3.0 cumulative GPA at the time of application
      to concepts, issues, and practices in one of the                                                               to study-abroad program.
      academic disciplines. Prerequisite: Admission to       HON 251 Honors Seminar in Literature and
      the Commonwealth Honors Academy.                       Philosophy I (3). An exploration of the roots of        HON 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-
                                                             modern ethics and values through intensive study,       supervised thesis and/or project which allows
      HON 161 Honors Seminar in Visual Arts (3).             in a lecture/precept setting, of the world’s literary   Honors Program students with a senior standing
      An exploration of the importance of the visual arts    and philosophical works from the ancient to the         to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper
      in human culture through visual presentations,         modern eras. Open only to students in the Honors        and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-
      readings, discussion and participation. Open only      Program. Fulfills three hours of the humanities         mance is required.
      to students in the Honors Program. A University        University Studies requirement in place of HUM
      Studies fine arts elective. A student cannot have      211. A student cannot have credit for both this
      credit for both this course and ART 121.               course and HUM 211.                                     hEAlth And physicAl EducAtion
                                                                                                                     (hpE)
      HON 162 Honors Seminar in Music (3). An                HON 252 Honors Seminar in Literature and                HPE 175 Foundations of Health and Physical
      exploration of the importance of music in human        Philosophy II (3). An exploration of modern             Education (3). Designed to provide an overview
      culture through aural presentation, reading, discus-   ethics and values through intensive study, in a         of health and physical education. This will examine
      sion, and participation. Open only to students in      lecture/precept setting, of the world’s literary and    the scope, history, philosophy, aims and objectives
      the Honors Program. A University Studies fine          philosophical works in the modern to post-modern        of health and physical education programs as well
      arts elective. A student cannot have credit for both   eras. Open only to students in the Honors Program.      as career opportunities in the field.
      this course and MUS 105.                               Fulfills three hours of the humanities University
                                                             Studies requirement in place of HUM 212. A              HPE 409 Evaluation and Assessment in
      HON 163 Honors Seminar in Theatre (3).                 student cannot have credit for both this course         Health and Physical Education (3). Basic
      An exploration of the importance of theatre in         and HUM 212.                                            statistical techniques and paper/pencil testing
      human culture through reading, attendances at                                                                  methodologies applicable to health and physical
      dramatic interpretations, discussion, and par-         HON 261 Honors Seminar in Science I (3).                education plus other physical and mental testing
      ticipation. Open only to students in the Honors        An exploration through readings and discussion          techniques commonly employed in these fields.
      Program. A University Studies fine arts elective.      of various topics in the history and philosophy         Various physical and skill tests will be covered.
      A student cannot have credit for both this course      of science. Open only to students in the Honors         Prerequisite: HPE 175.
      and THD 104.                                           Program. Prerequisite: four hours of lab sciences to
                                                             be approved by the Honors Program Director.             HPE 450 Teaching Strategies in Health Edu-
      HON 164 Honors Seminar in Arts and Culture                                                                     cation (3). This course is designed to address
      Abroad (3). An interdisciplinary exploration, in       HON 262 Honors Seminar in Mathematics (3).              comprehensive school health education. Topics
      study-abroad settings, of the visual arts, archi-      An exploration through guided discovery activities      covered include the health status of children, ado-
      tecture, music, theatre, and cinema. Classes will      and discussion of various topics in the history and     lescents and young adults; Healthy People 2000;
      consist of lectures, discussions, and presenta-        methods of mathematics. Open only to students in        school health services; school health education;
      tions based on cultural experiences of the fine        the Honors Program. Prerequisite: Enrollment in         program goals and objectives; and instructional
      arts abroad, with related readings. Research and       the Honors Program and the completion of at least       strategies. Content covered in the school health
      critical writing will be emphasized. Assignments       one university studies mathematics course.              education program: mental/emotional health;
      will include class excursions, museum visits, and                                                              life skills; family and relationship skills; human
      attendance at concerts, plays, and films. Prerequi-    HON 351 Honors Seminar in International Af-             sexuality; growth and development; nutrition;
      site: Open only to students in the Honors Program      fairs (3). An examination of selected international     personal fitness; substance use and abuse; diseases
      as a fine arts elective.                               issues and problems with particular reference to        and disorders; consumer health; safety and injury
                                                             students’ international study experiences. Open         prevention; and community and environmental
      HON 165 Honors Seminar in Communications               only to students in the Honors Program.
226   (3). An exploration of interpersonal communi-
      cation and public address skills necessary for
                                                                                                                     health. Prerequisite: HPE 175.
HPE 460 Teaching Strategies in Sex                       minor(s) within the academic program; university       ogy programs, focusing on the job search process,
Education (3). This course is designed to                procedures, policies, and resources; strategies for    employment opportunities, and related problems.
address comprehensive sex education in schools,          personal and academic success, and extracurricular     Recommended for students in the sophomore or
including human sexuality, sexual anatomy,               opportunities. Only one transitions course will        junior year. Graded pass/fail.
and physiology; sexual arousal and response;             count toward graduation. Graded pass/fail.
sexually transmitted diseases including HIV/                                                                    IET 419 Senior Project (3). A course in which
AIDS; contraception; conception; pregnancy;              IDC 199 Residential College Seminar (1). A             the student assumes the responsibility of design
gender roles; sexual communication; love and             course to provide the student with an opportunity      of a technology project utilizing the knowledge
intimacy; behaviors and relationships; and sexual        to explore a stimulating topic in a small group        gained from previous coursework. Complete docu-
victimization.                                           setting within a residential college. Seminar          mentation of the project is required. Prerequisites:
                                                         topics will vary.                                      senior standing. (Fall and Spring)
HPE 470 Teaching S u b s t a n c e A b u s e
Education (3). This course is designed to address        IDC 300 McNair GRE/Graduate School Prepa-              IET 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-
comprehensive drug education programs in school          ration (1). Preparation for the Graduate Record        supervised thesis and/or project which allows
and community settings which include drugs,              Exam and exploration of graduate school appli-         Honors Program students with a senior standing
violence, and wellness; factual account of drugs;        cation procedures and techniques, and personal         to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper
alcohol, tobacco, and well-being; prevention             career objectives, through readings, discussion,       and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-
and treatment of drug abuse; and instructional           personal reflection, and class presentations. Open     mance is required.
strategies. Topics covered in this course will           only to McNair Scholars.
include promotion of responsible and healthful                                                                  IET 481 Supervised Work/Observation (1-4).
behavior; drug actions and reactions; stimulant,                                                                Assignments individually made, with university
sedative-hypnotic, and narcotic drugs; marijuana,        industriAl And                                         approval, to afford opportunities for supervised
hallucinogens, inhalants, over-the-counter, and          EnginEEring tEchnology                                 employment in industry. Agreement by both
prescription drugs; anabolic steroids; alcohol;                                                                 the university and participating employer as to
                                                         (iEt)
tobacco; prevention and treatment of drug                                                                       extent and nature of the experience prerequisite
                                                         IET 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed to
abuse; drug education curriculum. Prerequisite:                                                                 to actual assignment, with credit to be determined
                                                         assist students in their transition to Murray State
HPE 175.                                                                                                        accordingly.
                                                         University. Content includes orientation to the
                                                         specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within the
HPE 480 Special Problems in Health and Physi-                                                                   IET 488 Cooperative Education/Internship
                                                         academic program; university procedures, poli-
cal Education (1-3). Repeatable with permission                                                                 (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
                                                         cies, and resources; strategies for personal and
of advisor and chair. Prerequisite: HPE 175.                                                                    experience related to the career and educational
                                                         academic success, and extracurricular opportuni-
                                                         ties. Only one transitions course will count toward    objectives of the student for which he/she may
                                                         graduation. Meetings with advisors, departmental       receive academic credit and possible financial
humAnitiEs                                               personnel, service areas, and campus field trips       remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum
(hum)                                                    comprise the main involvement. Availability of         of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded
HUM 205 The Humanistic Tradition Abroad                  the University resources is stressed with emphasis     pass/fail. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
(3). Study of traditional ideas and values as re-        on personal needs. Graded pass/fail.
flected in various international cultures; specific                                                             IET 489 Cooperative Education/Internship
content will vary. Satisfies University Studies          IET 125 Analytic Methods in Engineering                (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
humanities elective requirement. Prerequisite:           Technology (3). Introduction to problem-solving        experience related to the career and educational
concurrent enrollment in study abroad program            methods used in engineering technology. Graph-         objectives of the student for which he/she may
approved by Murray State University.                     ing, mathematical modeling and presentation of         receive academic credit and possible financial
                                                         analysis results. Includes use of spreadsheet, equa-   remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of
HUM 211 The Western Humanities Tradition                 tion solver, and analysis software. Prerequisite:      six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:
(3). An exploration and analysis of the major ideas      MAT 130 or MAT 150.                                    consent of instructor.
and questions in the humanities, as these have
been expressed in works from the ancient past to         IET 380 Professional Internship I (1-3). Work          IET 491 Technology Management and Design
the modern world. A student cannot have credit           experience or training in industry. Evaluation of      (3). The capstone course requires analyses and
for both this course and HON 251. Prerequisite:          experience made by department. Graded pass/            design of manufacturing, civil, environmental,
ENG 104 or 105 or equivalent.                            fail. Prerequisite: junior standing or consent of      electrical and computer systems. It requires
                                                         instructor.                                            analyses of management philosophies from con-
HUM 212 The Humanities in the Modern                                                                            ceptualization to implementation of engineering
World: Diversity (3). An exploration of humanis-         IET 381 Professional Internship II (3). Work           projects. Students are teamed based upon aca-
tic themes as reflected in literary and philosophical    experience or training in industry. Evaluation of      demic concentration and teams are coupled with
works of the modern period. A student cannot             experience made by department. Graded pass/            industrial representatives. Each team produces
have credit for both this course and HON 252.            fail. Prerequisite: junior standing or consent of      a viable industrial design. Prerequisite: senior
Prerequisite: ENG 104 or 105 or equivalent.              instructor.                                            standing.

HUM 215 Humanities in the Contemporary                   IET 397 Undergraduate Research (3). Research           IET 499 Professional Development Seminar II
World: Border Crossings (3). A study of one or           projects arranged individually with faculty mem-       (1). Seminar for students of industry and technol-
several contemporary global issues through poetry,       bers who agree to direct the research. A written       ogy programs, focusing on the transition to the
fiction, drama, film, non-fiction, and other artistic    plan of research must be filed with the instructor     world of work and related problems. Recom-
expressions from a variety of world cultures. Pre-       within two weeks of the beginning of the semes-        mended for students in the senior year. Graded
requisites: ENG 104 or 105 or equivalent.                ter. A written summary of the research performed,      pass/fail. Prerequisite: IET 399.
                                                         data obtained, and conclusions following from
                                                         the work must be submitted not later than the          IET 550 Robotic Systems (4). A quantitative
intErdisciplinAry coursEs                                final week of classes. May be repeated for credit.     analysis of robotic systems that includes kinemat-
(idc)                                                    Prerequisites: Junior standing and permission of       ics, actuators, drives, adaptive control, off line
IDC 099 Transitions—Undeclared Majors (1).               the instructor.                                        programming and computer simulation. Empha-
                                                                                                                sizes applications in manufacturing processes.
                                                                                                                                                                       227
Course is designed to assist students in their transi-
tion to Murray State University. Content includes        IET 399 Professional Development Seminar I             Three hours lecture and three hours laboratory.
orientation to the specific area or major(s) and         (1). Seminar for students of industry and technol-     Prerequisites: EMT 261, 361, ENT 111, 365.
      IET 551 Introduction to Electrohydraulic Mo-           organizations, and the Murray community. Similar      This course includes hands-on experience on in-
      tion Control (3). An introduction to the integration   to Transitions required of all American students.     teractive graphics equipment. Lecture two hours;
      of the basic principles of hydraulics, electronics,    Required of all matriculating international stu-      laboratory four hours. Prerequisite: ITD 101 or
      controls and system dynamics as they pertain to        dents. Graded pass/fail.                              ITD 107. (For ITD students only.)
      electrohydraulic motion control.
                                                             INT 310 International Student Exchange (3-            ITD 107 Introduction to Technical Drawing
      IET 571 Problems in Industrial and Engineer-           15). Individual study abroad through a Murray         and Computer Aided Drafting (4). A survey
      ing Technology (3). Individual study and research      State sponsored program as administered by the        course in conventional and computer aided
      pertaining to special problems in industrial and       Institute for International Studies; pre-approval     drafting theory and practice. The application of
      engineering technology. Prerequisite: approval of      within specific disciplines required; pass/fail.      design principles, multi-view drawing techniques
      problem before registering for course.                 Prerequisite: consent of academic advisor and         and precision use of conventional drafting equip-
                                                             pre-approval by instructors prior to registration;    ment will be complemented by an introduction
      IET 578 Workshop in Industrial and Engi-               undergraduate level.                                  to computer aided drawing software, including
      neering Technology (1-4). Workshops on topics                                                                setting up, drawing, editing, saving and plotting
      pertinent to industrial and engineering technology.    INT 510 International Student Exchange (3-
                                                                                                                   drawings. Does not apply towards a major in
      May be repeated for additional credit.                 15). Individual study abroad through a Murray
                                                                                                                   drafting and design. Lecture and laboratory-six
                                                             State sponsored program as administered by the
                                                                                                                   contact hours.
      IET 584 Engineering Economic Analysis (3).             Institute for International Studies; pre-approval
      Economic evaluation and financial analysis of          within specific disciplines required; pass/fail.
                                                                                                                   ITD 120 Processes and Materials (3). Study of
      engineering alternatives to optimize the engineer-     Prerequisite: consent of academic advisor and
                                                             pre-approval by instructors prior to registration;    manufacturing processes and materials as they
      ing decision process.                                                                                        apply to contemporary industrial products. May
                                                             senior and graduate level.
                                                                                                                   not be taken for credit by ITD majors.
      IET 591 Materials Management (3). The design
      of an organizational and managerial system to                                                                ITD 130 Manufacturing Processes and Mate-
      balance the conflicting interests in the company       industriAl tEchnology And
                                                                                                                   rials (3). Study of manufacturing processes and
      in the considerations of quality, quantity, delivery   dEsign (itd)
                                                                                                                   materials as they apply to contemporary industrial
      and cost of materials with the aim of optimizing       ITD 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed to
                                                                                                                   and consumer products. For ITD majors only or
      the return of the materials investment.                assist students in their transition to Murray State
                                                                                                                   permission of chair. Lecture and laboratory-five
                                                             University. Content includes orientation to the
                                                             specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within the     contact hours.
      IET 592 Production Systems and Computer
      Integrated Manufacturing (4). Includes a survey        academic program; university procedures, poli-
                                                             cies, and resources; strategies for personal and      ITD 202 Applied Technical Drawing (4). Draw-
      of various topics in production, automation and                                                              ing and problem-solving techniques, principles
      related systems such as flow-line production,          academic success, and extracurricular opportuni-
                                                             ties. Only one transitions course will count toward   and conventional practices as applied to selected
      numerical control, industrial robots, computer-                                                              industrial fields: mechanical engineering product
      aided manufacturing, process monitoring, flexible      graduation. Meetings with advisors, department
                                                             personnel, service areas, and campus field trips      design, topographical, piping, weldment and
      manufacturing systems and computer-integrated                                                                sheet metal. This course emphasizes technical/
                                                             comprise the main involvement. Availability of
      manufacturing. Three hours lecture and two hours                                                             engineering sketching and CAD. Lecture and
                                                             university resources is stressed with emphasis on
      lab. Prerequisites: ENT 111, EMT 261, 361.                                                                   laboratory-six contact hours. Prerequisite: ITD
                                                             personal basis. Graded pass/fail.
                                                                                                                   101 and 104.
      IET 596 Industrial Relations (3). Industrial
                                                             ITD 101 Introduction to Design and Graphic
      relations responsibilities, procedures, and ap-
                                                             Communications (4). An introduction to the fun-       ITD 204 Parametric Modeling and Rendering
      plications in job evaluation, wage surveys,
                                                             damental theory and practice of technical design      (3). An intermediate course in the theory and
      union negotiations, hiring employee counseling,        communication, engineering sketching and CAD          practical application of computer aided design.
      and affirmative action awareness. Prerequisite:        drafting conventions. Techniques are presented        Emphasis will be on the planning and operational
      junior standing.                                       with emphasis on both theory and practical ap-        techniques required producing parametric models
                                                             plications. The course includes an introduction to    with corresponding photo-realistic renderings.
      IET 597 Quality Control (3). Examines the              product design, the engineering design process,       This course includes hands-on experience on inter-
      various aspects of quality control from the            orthographic projection of product geometry and       active graphics equipment. Two hours lecture and
      viewpoint that product and service quality re-         dimensioning/specifications. Lecture and labora-      three hours laboratory. Prerequisites: ITD 104.
      quires managerial, technological and statistical       tory-six contact hours.
      concepts throughout all the major functions in an
                                                                                                                   ITD 205 Computer Graphics Application (3).
      organization. Prerequisites: CIS 243 or consent        ITD 102 CAD Applications (3). An introductory         A survey course in the current theory and practice
      of instructor.                                         course with emphasis in multiview projection          of computer-generated graphics. The application
                                                             for mechanical components and the design file         of micro and mainframe computers as a tool for
                                                             creation using 3D parametric modeling. Cannot         figurative and abstract drawing, graphics, graphing
      intErnAtionAl studiEs                                  be taken for credit by ITD/Engineering Graphics       and technical drafting.
      (int)                                                  and Design majors/minors.
      INT 099 International Transitions (1). Course                                                                ITD 221 Design in the Near Environment (3).
      is designed to assist students in their transition     ITD 103 Technical Sketching (2). Techniques of        Application of art elements and principles of
      to Murray State University. Content includes           freehand and sketching. Delineation and rendering     design to everyday living. Lecture, two hours;
      orientation to the specific area or major(s) and       in two and three dimensional drawings. Lecture        laboratory, two hours.
      minor(s) within the academic program; university       and laboratory.
      procedures, policies, and resources; strategies for                                                          ITD 240 Woodworking Design and Practices
      personal and academic success, and extracurricular     ITD 104 Computer Aided Design (4). An                 (3). Fundamental instruction in woodworking
      opportunities. Only one transitions course will        intermediate course in the theory and practical       materials, design, planning procedures, hand
      count toward graduation. Course to provide inter-                                                            tool use, machine tool operations, construction
                                                             applications of computer aided systems for draft-
      national students with information and experiences                                                           techniques and safety principles and practices.
                                                             ing/design fields. A review of two-dimensional
      necessary for successful adjustment to life in the                                                           This is a practical course for the beginner and
                                                             drawing techniques is presented followed by
      U.S. and at Murray State University. The course
                                                             three-dimensional drawing techniques with em-         woodworker with intermediate knowledge and
      will include MSU facilities, American culture and
228   educational systems, health care, culture shock,
      government regulations, international student
                                                             phasis on wireframe, surface and solid modeling.
                                                             An introduction to parametric design is included.
                                                                                                                   skill. Lecture and laboratory. No prerequisite.

                                                                                                                   ITD 241 Woodturning (2). Spindle, face plate,
chucking operations and procedures involved in           ITD 322 Introduction to Plastics (4). Industrial      machines and robots. Prerequisites: ITD 101 and
woodturning. Experiences in designing, turning           plastics and polymer sciences. Experience with        130; junior standing.
and finishing. For beginning woodturners and             plastic materials and manufacturing methods.
those who want to improve their skill. No pre-           Lecture and laboratory. Prerequisites: ITD 101        ITD 401 Architectural Drafting and De-
requisite. Lecture and laboratory.                       and 130.                                              sign- Multi-Family Light Commercial (4).
                                                                                                               Fundamental principles of designing and draw-
ITD 251 Equipment (3). Selection, use, and care          ITD 330 (230) Machine Tool Processes (4).             ing construction documents for multi-family
of materials and equipment used in the home, prin-       A study in the shaping of metallic products us-       residential and other light commercial construc-
ciples of kitchen and laundry planning. Lecture,         ing traditional and computer numerical control        tion. Architectural programming, building code
two hours; laboratory two hours.                         processes and equipment. Includes examination         analysis, site analysis, budgetary considerations,
                                                         of precision measuring methods, cutting tools         design principles, building methods, materials
ITD 252 Housing and The Family (3). Housing              properties and methods required in achieving an       selection, and drawing resulting in a package of
alternatives, constraints, norms, needs, and selec-      efficient, economical, and safe material removal      contract documents for construction. Two hours
tion; comparison of economic factors of various          process. Lecture and laboratory-six contact hours.    lecture and four hours laboratory. Prerequisites:
types of shelter; procedure for purchasing shelter.      Prerequisite: ITD 130.                                ITD 101, 104, 301 and 350. (Fall)
Lecture, three hours.
                                                         ITD 333 ANSI Fundamentals for Mechanical              ITD 403 Product and Tooling Design (4). This
ITD 253 Interior Design Studio I (3). Studio             Product Design (4). Focuses on the intermedi-         course utilizes parametric, feature-based, solid
problems in interior design. Programming, basic          ate technical fundamentals of ANSI standards          modeling software and techniques applied to
drawing skills and application of art elements           applicable to mechanical product design and           problem solving and representation of product and
and principles of design in solving interior de-         engineering graphics. Engineering sketching and       tooling components and assemblies. Emphasis is
sign problems. Emphasis is on developing basic           3D parametric modeling will be emphasized. Two        placed on dimensioning, geometric dimensioning
drawing skills for presenting design solutions.          hours lecture and four hour laboratory. Prerequi-     and tolerancing, 3-D modeling and design of
Laboratory, four hours. Prerequisite: ITD 221;           sites: ITD 202, 204, and 330. (Spring)                mechanical devices, and principles of tooling
co-requisite: ITD 252.                                                                                         design. Lecture and laboratory-six contact hours.
                                                         ITD 350 Construction Systems (4). A study of          Prerequisite: ITD 330 and 333. (Fall)
ITD 254 Furniture Construction and Finishes              the construction industry theory and practice. Em-
(2). A study of construction and finishing tech-         phasis is placed on the structural and mechanical     ITD 420 Equipment Maintenance and Materi-
niques used in the furniture industry. Lecture 2         systems in single-family detached dwellings and       als Processing (4). Maintenance and adjustment
hours.                                                   non-residential light commercial civil construction   of industrial machinery and equipment such as
                                                         projects. Lecture and laboratory-six contact hours.   (but not limited to) metalworking, woodworking
ITD 300 Industrial Product Design (2). Design            Prerequisite: ITD 101 and 120.                        and drafting equipment. Theory and activities in
principles relative to industrial products. Principles                                                         the design, materials, and equipment of durable
of functional, structural and visual design. Lecture     ITD 351 Textiles for Interior Design (3). Con-        goods manufacturing industries. Emphasis on
and laboratory. Prerequisite: ITD 101 and 130.           sumer-oriented study of textiles emphasizing          modern production materials, robotics, CNC,
                                                         fibers, yarns, fabric construction and finishes in    and production design systems. Prerequisites:
ITD 301 Architectural Drawing and Residential            relation to use, serviceability and care of apparel   ITD 130 and 330.
Planning (4). Functional planning, designing and         and household fabrics. Lecture, three hours.
construction detailing of residences and allied                                                                ITD 431 Advanced Numerical Control and
structures; drawing techniques and conventions;          ITD 352 History of Interiors I (2). A survey          CAD/CAM (4). A study of programming ma-
client-related, financial and legal aspects of build-    of architecture and interiors from ancient times      chine tools through the application of computer
ing. Lecture and laboratory-six contact hours.           to 1800. Emphasis is on furnishings, interior         aided manufacturing (CAM) software. Course
Prerequisites: ITD 101 and 104 or equivalent.            architectural details, accessories, materials, sig-   will include experiences in 2D and 3D program-
                                                         nificant designers and architects of the periods,     ming systems — drilling, milling and turning
ITD 304 Advanced Parametric Modeling (4).                and current sources of reproductions of furniture     operations. Economic analysis of computer aided
An advanced course in the theory and applica-            and accessories. Lecture, two hours. Prerequisite:    manufacturing will be reviewed. Six contact hours.
tion of computer aided system for parametric             ITD 221.                                              Prerequisites: ITD 368 and a CAD class.
drafting and design manufacturing. Two hours
lecture and four hours laboratory. Prerequisite:         ITD 353 Interior Design Studio II (3). Study          ITD 450 Problems in Housing (3). Analysis of
ITD 204. (Spring)                                        of and practical experience in space planning of      family housing needs for contemporary living.
                                                         residential interiors. Emphasis is on functional,     Selected topics will be chosen from these major
ITD 305 Sketching and Industrial Blueprint               aesthetic and economic considerations, materials      areas: home energy needs and energy conserva-
Reading (3). Technical sketching fundamentals            and codes; perspectives and color board prepara-      tion, housing and interiors for special needs groups,
as applied to the needs of industrial shop person-       tion techniques. Graphic and oral presentations of    housing for low-income families, and practical
nel and field technicians. Emphasis is placed on         interior design projects. Laboratory, four hours.     problems in interior design. May be repeated for
the readings and interpreting of selected types of       Prerequisites: ITD 221, 251, 253 and ITD 104.         a maximum of six credits. Prerequisite: senior
industrial drawings.                                                                                           standing.
                                                         ITD 356 Practical Problems in Interior Design
ITD 306 Engineering Graphics (4). Ortho-                 (3). Hands-on experience in implementing plans        ITD 452 History of Interiors II (2). A study of
graphic projection with an emphasis on auxiliary         for diverse background treatments for residential     architecture and interiors from 1800 through the
projection and descriptive geometry. Descriptive         and commercial interiors using a variety of mate-     present time. Emphasis is on French, English
geometry theory and techniques are used to solve         rials in a laboratory setting. Design and produce     and American styles, significant designers and
applied engineering problems. Lecture and labo-          accessory and display items; develop estimates;       architects, international movements influencing
ratory-six contact hours. Prerequisite: ITD 101          practice installation techniques. Prerequisites:      designs, product quality and furnishing resources.
and 104. (Spring)                                        ITD 221, 251, 253 and 352.                            Laboratory, four hours. Prerequisite: ITD 352.
ITD 309 Engineering Models Design and Con-               ITD 368 Computer-Aided Manufacturing                  ITD 453 Contract Interiors (3). Application
struction (2). A course in the principles of design      and Robotics (4). A study of basics of com-
                                                                                                               of elements and principles of design in planning
and construction of scale model representation of        puter-aided manufacturing; computer numerical
                                                                                                               public interiors. Business practices and profes-
engineering, architectural, and related structures,      control (CNC), computer aided design and ma-
                                                                                                               sional ethics included. Prerequisite: ITD 253
including materials and processes. Prerequisites:
ITD 101 and 130.
                                                         chining (CAD/CAM) and robotics applications
                                                         in manufacturing. Laboratory work in manual
                                                                                                               and 353..                                               229
                                                         and automatic programming and setup of CNC
      ITD 454 Studio Problems in Interior Design (3).         design communications as applied by product           ITD 541 Industrial Wood Fabrication (4).
      Studio problems in interior design. Practical prob-     designers, tooling designers, setup and produc-       Material, equipment, processes and nomenclature
      lems with historical and contemporary interiors.        tion personnel and quality assurance/verification     of the woods manufacturing industry; emphasis
      Issues include environmental concerns, econom-          specialists. Prerequisites: ITD 120, ITD 303,         on design and planning for production. A study of
      ics, special needs, quality and sources of materials.   senior standing or instructors approval.              both traditional and innovative wood processing
      Experience with renderings, cost estimates and                                                                techniques. Prerequisite: ITD 341.
      specifications. Graphic and oral presentation of        ITD 492 Plant Layout and Material Handling
      designs. Laboratory, four hours. Prerequisite: ITD      (3). A study of the arrangement of physical
      221, 251, 253, 353 and ITD 104.                         facilities and materials handling to optimize the     JournAlism And mAss
                                                              interrelationships among operating personnel,         communicAtions
      ITD 455 Housing for the Handicapped and                 material flow, information flow, and the methods      (Jmc)
      Elderly (3). Analysis of shelter needs for              required in achieving enterprise objectives ef-       JMC 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed
      handicapped and elderly persons. Synthesis of           ficiently, economically, and safely. Prerequisite:    to assist students in their transition to Murray
      needs into design of facilities, both residential       junior standing (Fall)                                State University. Content includes orientation to
      and commercial, to meet these needs emphasis                                                                  the specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within
      on universal design. Specifications for and cost        ITD 495 Industrial Supervision (3) An in-depth        the academic program; university procedures,
      estimates of design features. Prerequisite: ITD         study of the qualities necessary in order for a       policies, and resources; strategies for personal
      253 and 353.                                            frontline supervisor to be a vigorous leader, an      and academic success, and extracurricular op-
                                                              effective leader, a source of technical know-how      portunities. Only one transitions course will count
      ITD 456 Internship (3). Placement in an ap-             and deft mediator between policy-setting manage-      toward graduation. Graded pass/fail.
      propriate position in an approved firm to provide       ment and the rank-and-file worker. Prerequisite:
      professional development through observation            junior standing. (Fall)                               JMC 168 Contemporary Mass Media (3). The
      and supervised performance of assigned tasks.                                                                 mass media, stressing development, nature, con-
      Intention to participate must be made a semester        ITD 498 Industrial Design Processes and               trols under which they operate, economic and po-
      in advance. Placement is based on selection of          Prototypes (4). Study of product design prin-         litical foundations, social implications and future
      study by business via resume and interviews and         ciples, production methods and simultaneous           roles. Open to non-majors as an elective.
      is not guaranteed. Required for certification by the    manufacturing techniques. Laboratory activities
      National Kitchen and Bath Association (NKBA).           are centered around the design and prototyping a      JMC 194 Newswriting (3). Principles of
      Repeatable for six credit hours. Minimum 300            product. Lecture and laboratory-six contact hours.    newswriting for print and electronic media. Pre-
      clock hours of field experience. Prerequisites:         Prerequisites: ITD 130 and 304.                       requisites: JMC 168 with a grade of C or better,
      GPA 2.5 and approval of faculty advisor.                                                                      ENG 101 or ENG 104 or 105 with a grade of B
                                                              ITD 501 Architectural Drafting and Design-            or better.
      ITD 457 Interior Design Studio III (3). Prepara-        Light Commercial (4). Theory and practice
      tion of portfolio plus self-initiated, large-scale,     in instrument and computer aided drafting and         JMC 213 Computer Techniques for Print
      complex interior design project. Emphasis is            design for architectural structures. Topics will      Media (3). Introduction to Macintosh-based
      on synthesizing all learning to date and critiqu-       include the review and evaluation of existing         techniques used by professionals in the print
      ing work. Presentation of complete project and          designs, plans and specifications for nonresiden-     media. Prerequisites: JMC 168 with a grade of
      portfolio. Lecture and tutorial. Prerequisite:          tial light commercial structures. Structures in the   C or better.
      senior standing.                                        building code classifications of: assembly, busi-
                                                              ness, and mercantile will be included. Program        JMC 270 Basic Audio/Video Production (3).
      ITD 458 Interior Design Professional                    and design architecture will be included. Lecture     Introduction to production technology including
      Experience (1). Course provides the student the         and laboratory. Prerequisites: ITD 301, ITD 104       audio control room operations, audio and video
      opportunity to interact with professionals in the       and ITD 401.                                          recording, camera operations and editing. Prereq-
      interior design field by participating in dialogue                                                            uisites: JMC 168 with a grade of C or better, ENG
      with interior designers at seminars, design firms,      ITD 504 Advanced Study in Computer Aided              101 or 105 with a grade of B or better, and a passing
      and professional meetings. Course may be                Drafting/Design (4). An advanced course in the        grade on the department grammar test.
      repeated for a maximum of three credit hours.           theory and application of computer aided systems
                                                              for the drafting and design field. Lecture and        JMC 283 Principles of Photojournalism (3).
      ITD 459 NCIDQ and NKBA Exam Review                      laboratory. Prerequisites: ITD 304 or consent         An introduction to basic principles of news and
      (1). A review course for the National Council for       of instructor.                                        magazine photography. Laboratory work in tak-
      Interior Design Qualification (NCIDQ) exam to                                                                 ing, developing, and printing news and feature
      become a professional member of the American            ITD 522 Industrial Plastics (4). Materials and        photographs. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
      Society of Interior Designers (ASID) and the            processes used in plastics manufacturing indus-       (Same as GCM 250.)
      National Kitchen and Bath (NKBA) exams and for          tries; includes mold design and construction.
      becoming a certified kitchen and/or bath designer.      Lecture and laboratory.                               JMC 294 Advanced Newswriting (3). Advanced
      Timed problem solving drawing exams and objec-                                                                news story construction for print and electronic
      tives exams over specific sections of knowledge         ITD 531 Numerical Control/Computer NC                 media as well as basics of copy preparation for the
      will be administered. This course is intended for       Machining Systems (4). A study of automatic           World Wide Web. Emphasized new style, language
      seniors in the interior design option.                  manufacturing by NC/CNC. Technical, social and        usage, and news story construction. Prerequisite:
                                                              economic aspects of NC/CNC machining systems.         JMC 194 with a grade of C or better.
      ITD 490 Computer Aided Engineering Design               Laboratory work in manual and computer-assisted
      Graphics (4). The utilization of state-of-the-art       numerical control programming. Setup and opera-       JMC 295 Copyediting (3). Basics of handling
      computer applications focusing on industrial            tion of machines. Six contact hours.                  newspaper copy, including headline writing, copy
      product and tooling design. Design modeling                                                                   editing and proofreading. Prerequisite: JMC 194
      techniques will be addressed that reduce product        ITD 532 Metallurgy (2). Structure, properties,        with a grade of C or better..
      cost by taking into account quantified design           behavior and use of metals. Laboratory analysis
      parameters defined as a result of manufacturing         and research. Lecture and laboratory.                 JMC 300 Digital Media Production (3). Intro-
      processes and geometric tolerancing. Theory and                                                               duction to digital production technology and meth-
      applications of geometric dimensioning and tol-         ITD 533 Technology and Production Tooling             odology emphasizing the application to the mass
      erancing for industrial product and tooling design      (2). Machine setups, tooling and inspection pro-      media. Topics to include design, graphics, audio

230   will be applied. Discussions of design criteria and
      print/design file interpretation. A review of product
                                                              cedures. Lecture and laboratory. Prerequisites:
                                                              ITD 531 or 532.
                                                                                                                    video, and writing for the Internet and interactive
                                                                                                                    CD-ROM disks. Prerequisites: JMC 168 and basic
                                                                                                                    knowledge of how to operate a computer.
JMC 322 Mass Media Study Abroad (3). Study             101 or 105 with a grade of B or better, JMC 168        JMC 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-
of current trends and practices in mass media          or consent of instructor, and a passing grade on       supervised thesis and/or project which allows
in foreign nations; specific content will vary.        department grammar test. Business program              Honors Program students with a senior standing
Credit may not be earned for both JMC 322 and          students: MKT 360.                                     to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper
JMC 522. Prerequisites: consent of supervising                                                                and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-
instructor and department chair; acceptance in a       JMC 394 Introduction to Advertising (3). A             mance is required.
study abroad program approved by Murray State          survey course on the role and function of adver-
University.                                            tising in society; emphasis on the basic structure     JMC 439 Advertising Media Planning (3). The
                                                       and techniques of advertising, marketing, media        study and application of media analysis, planning,
JMC 330 Mass Media Effects (3). A systematic           roles, creative strategies and the agency system.      and buying. Students prepare and present an
approach to mass media in terms of structure,          Prerequisites: ENG 101 or 104 or 105 with a            advertising media campaign. Prerequisite: JMC
functions and effects; includes such topics as         grade of B or better, JMC 168 with a grade of C        394 with a grade of C or better.
meaning, perception, selectivity, ethics persua-       or better. Business program students: MKT 360.
sion, subliminal seduction, violence and erotica,                                                             JMC 440 Research Methods for Public Rela-
political socialization, learning, agenda-setting,     JMC 396 Publication Design (3). Advanced               tions (3). Use of social science research methods
and uses and gratifications. Prerequisite: JMC         editing class emphasizing newspaper design,            in public relations. Emphasis will be on survey
168 with a grade of C or better.                       layout and graphics. Prerequisite: JMC 295 with        techniques and focus groups, interpretation, ap-
                                                       a grade of C or better.                                plication, and communication of research findings
JMC 336 Script Writing (3). Theory and prac-                                                                  to the public. Prerequisites: JMC 168 and 330
tice of writing for radio and television. Includes     JMC 397 Reporting for Print Media (3).                 with a grade of C or better.
dramatic scripts; radio and TV copy conventions;       Techniques of news gathering and reporting for
script outlines and documentaries. Prerequisites:      the print media. Provides general assignment,          JMC 445 Newspaper Management (3). Prob-
JMC 168 with a grade of C or better, ENG 101 or        specialized and beat reporting experiences by em-      lems of organization, production and distribution
ENG 104 or 105 with a grade of B or better.            phasizing the acquisition of information through       of the community newspaper. Prerequisites: JMC
                                                       interviews, direct observation and journalistic        394 or permission of instructor. Students are
JMC 344 Press and Politics (3). The role of            research. Prerequisite: JMC 294 with a grade           encouraged to take ACC 200 or MGT 350 before
newspapers, television, and radio in the American      of C or better.                                        enrolling in this course.
national political process. (Same as POL 344.)
                                                       JMC 398 Electronic News Reporting (3). News            JMC 448 Television Production Operations
JMC 358 Television Studio Production (3).              gathering and reporting for television and radio.      (3). Creating a plan and proposal for a television
Television studio production technology includ-        Surveys electronic newsroom operations and             program, including audience analysis, market
ing camera operation, recording, audio and video       emphasizes construction of news copy, elemen-          appraisal, concept, treatment, script, budget,
control, video switching, electronic graphics,         tary news packaging techniques, and journalistic       facilities, crew, cast, location, shooting schedule,
lighting, staging, and production organization,        ethics. Includes 30 hours arrangeable lab work.        and distribution across multiple digital platforms.
with an emphasis on broadcast-quality results.         Prerequisites: JMC 194 and JMC 270 with a              Prerequisites: JMC 336 and 358.
Prerequisites: JMC 168, 270, and 336 with a            grade of C or better.
grade of C or better; ENG 101 or 104 or 105 with                                                              JMC 451 Television Field Production (3).
a grade of B or better.                                JMC 400 International Mass Communications              Single camera and multi-camera electronic field
                                                       (3). Study of world’s communications systems           production, non-linear editing and postproduction
JMC 369 Audio/Video Post Production (3). A             and the roles they play. Analysis of international     to create a variety of television productions from
project-based course that emphasizes the inte-         news flow. The effect of the basic philosophical       spots to full-length programs, with an emphasis
gration of nonlinear video editing with graphic        differences among the media in the developed and       on broadcast-quality results. Prerequisites: ENG
production, 3-D compositing, enhanced audio            developing worlds and the changing communica-          101, JMC 168, 270, and 336; junior standing or
and DVD authoring. Prerequisite: JMC 270 and           tion technologies will be examined. Prerequisites:     permission of instructor.
336 with a grade of C or better.                       junior standing or permission of instructor.
                                                                                                              JMC 455 (525) Television Program Develop-
JMC 383 Advanced Photojournalism (3). Con-             JMC 412 Writing for Public Relations (3).              ment (3). Capstone seminar in creating television
tinuation of JMC 283 with emphasis on problem-         Emphasis placed on writing across the media,           programs. Topics include program concepts, target
solving and developing an aesthetic visual image       for diverse publics, to achieve organizational         audiences, scripting, budgeting, pre-production
for today’s publication. Prerequisite: JMC 283.        objectives. Basic formats include, but are not         planning, producing and marketing pilots. It is
                                                       limited to, news releases, feature articles, fact      anticipated that for a successful outcome, students
JMC 385 Directed Individual Study (1-3).               sheets, newsletters, brochures, and business           will commit a minimum of nine hours per week
Repeatable up to three hours.                          correspondence. Basic copy editing and design          to this course plus an additional 30 hours during
                                                       concepts will be covered. Analysis of publicity        the semester working on special projects and
JMC 390 World Wide Web as Mass Medium                  methods used in professional campaigns will also       productions. Work outside the studios may be
(3). This course is designed 1) to enhance the         be included. Prerequisites: JMC 194 and 391 with       required for some productions. Prerequisites: JMC
student’s effectiveness as a user of Internet          a grade of C or better.                                270, 336, 358, 451. Preference given to television
technologies; 2) to build understanding of the                                                                production majors.
social implications of, and the major issues sur-      JMC 417 Advertising, Copywriting and Layout
rounding, the popularization of the World Wide         (3). A study of the theory, techniques and practical   JMC 456 Advertising Campaigns (3). A seminar
Web; and 3) to focus on the Web’s functions as a       skills needed for both writing advertising copy        course designed to bring together the knowledge
mass medium. Also considered are key technical         and doing basic advertising layout. Prerequisite:      acquired in advertising, marketing and commu-
concepts integral to Web operations that apply to      JMC 394 with a grade of C or better.                   nications courses and apply them to a realistic
the fields of journalism. Prerequisites: JMC 168                                                              problem. Students develop management ability in
or consent of instructor; knowledge of browser         JMC 426 Advertising Media Sales (3). Theory            analysis and preparation of complete advertising
software and access to the Internet.                   and practical application of media advertising         campaign. Students are required to work in teams
                                                       sales. Advertising strategy, policy formulation        to prepare plans books and give formal ad agency
JMC 391 Public Relations Principles (3). A             and implementation. Creative and media decision-       presentations. Prerequisites: JMC 417, 426, and
study of the profession of public relations, skills,   making structure and procedure. Management             439 with a grade of C or better.
jobs, case studies, media relations, and writing.      of media sales personnel. Students prepare and
Students may not be enrolled in JMC 391 and
JMC 412 simultaneously. Prerequisites: ENG
                                                       present advertising sales plan. Prerequisite: JMC
                                                       394 with a grade of C or better.
                                                                                                              JMC 466 Advanced Electronic News Re-
                                                                                                              porting and Production (3). Advanced electronic
                                                                                                                                                                     231
      journalism, including emphasis on compiling,          and preparation of fictional and nonfictional works    JMC 599 American Mass Media (3). Guided
      writing, videotaping, editing and producing           designed for the young reader. Individual critiques    independent study in the structure of the mass
      news for television. Students serve as reporters,     by a noted editor and writer of children’s litera-     media in the United States and the impact of
      photographers and producers and gain practical        ture. For graduate and undergraduate students.         American media content on audiences. Course
      work experience at MSU-TV. Includes 30 hours          Prerequisite: permission.                              cannot be used for credit for any JMC degree.
      arrangeable lab work. Prerequisite: JMC 270 and                                                              Completion may be required of students as a
      398 with a grade of C or better.                      JMC 515 History of U.S. Journalism and Broad-          condition for admission to the JMC graduate
                                                            casting (3). History of journalism and broadcasting    program. Graded pass/fail. Prerequisite: consent
      JMC 486 Media Production Technique (1-3).             with emphasis on the role of newspaper, radio,         of graduate coordinator.
      Advanced and specialized media production             television and other communications media in
      techniques in electronic, print, and related mass     the United States.
      media technology and practical experience in                                                                 JApAnEsE
      production and distribution of media content. Two     JMC 558 New Technologies (3). The develop-             (Jpn)
      (2) contact hours per week are required for each      ment of technology in media industries and related     JPN 101 Elementary Japanese I (3). An introduc-
      hour of credit. Prerequisites: JMC 168, junior or     businesses, such as consumer electronics and office    tion to the basic skills of speaking, understanding,
      senior standing. Individual instructors may require   systems. Topics include the nature of technical        reading and writing Japanese.
      basic competency in certain media production          innovation, economic feasibility, public policy,
      technologies and/or other prerequisite courses.       social impact, and diffusion models.                   JPN 102 Elementary Japanese II (3). A continu-
                                                                                                                   ation of JPN 101. Prerequisite: JPN 101.
      JMC 488 Cooperative Education/Internship              JMC 585 Specialized Mass Communications
      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work      (1-3). Directed individual study. Can be a jour-       JPN 105 Introduction to Japanese Culture (3). A
      experience related to the career and educational      nalistic effort in areas such as science, sports,      survey of contemporary Japanese character and soci-
      objectives of the student for which he/she may        government, religion, graphics, etc., or a project     ety from a historical perspective. Attitudes, achieve-
      receive academic credit and possible financial        in radio or television such as a major production      ments, institutions and life styles of the Japanese
      remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum           or series, an extensive research project on paper      people are explored. Conducted in English.
      of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded         or other approved project. Repeatable up to
      pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.         three hours. Prerequisites: consent of instructor      JPN 110 Basic Conversational Japanese (3).
                                                            and written approved proposal required prior to        A conversation-oriented introduction to pronun-
      JMC 491 Advanced Public Relations (3). A              registration.                                          ciation and essential structures and vocabulary.
      capstone seminar course designed to provide stu-                                                             Pronunciation, listening comprehension, speak-
      dents an opportunity to demonstrate their mastery     JMC 586 Special Topics (3-6). Seminar for se-          ing and simple reading and writing of material
      of the skills, techniques, and knowledge acquired     niors and graduate students concerning a current       related to conversational situations are included.
      in previous major and minor courses. Working in       topic affecting the mass media. May be repeated        No continuation offered. Only taught abroad. No
      teams, students will research, develop, and create                                                           prerequisite.
                                                            one time for a total of six hours of credit. Prereq-
      a public relations campaign, as well as give formal   uisite: consent of instructor, senior or graduate
      presentation of their work that includes production                                                          JPN 201 Intermediate Japanese I (3). An
                                                            level standing.
      of all materials supporting the campaign. This                                                               intensive grammar review with emphasis on
      semester-long project should further enhance the                                                             communication skills. Includes further practice
                                                            JMC 590 Mass Communication Law (3). The
      students public relations skills and knowledge, as                                                           in speaking. Prerequisite: JPN 102 or consent
                                                            law as it affects journalism and broadcasting. His-
      well as develop their management and analytical                                                              of instructor.
                                                            tory and background of the freedom of the press
      skills. Prerequisites: JMC 412 and 440 with a
                                                            and broadcast industries with emphasis on First
      grade of C or better.                                                                                        JPN 202 Intermediate Japanese II (3). A con-
                                                            Amendment and FCC regulations, including such          tinuation of JPN 201. Prerequisite: JPN 201 or
                                                            areas as seditious libel, libel, obscenity, privacy,   consent of instructor.
      JMC 492 Feature Writing (3). Techniques
                                                            copyright, advertising and the Fairness Doctrine.
      of researching, writing, editing and marketing
                                                            Primarily a lecture and reading course. Prerequi-      JPN 210 Intermediate Conversational Japanese
      feature articles. Prerequisites: JMC 194 with a
                                                            site: JMC 330 with a grade of C or better.             (3). Course designed to develop the vocabulary
      grade of C or better.
                                                                                                                   and oral communication skills of the student with
                                                            JMC 593 Editorial and Critical Writing (3). A          a background of one year of college Japanese or
      JMC 499 Senior Seminar (1). A required course
                                                            writing course in editorials and the editorial page;   equivalent. Emphasis will be placed on bringing
      for all graduating seniors in advertising, public
                                                            personal columns; and critical reviews of plays,       the student into contact with the Japanese people
      relations, journalism, and radio-TV. A forum for
                                                            TV shows, books and movies. Prerequisites: JMC         and various aspects of their culture. No continu-
      career preparation on such topics as resume and
                                                            194 and 330 or consent of instructor.                  ation offered. Only taught abroad. Prerequisite:
      portfolio preparation, job searches, interviews and
      graduation requirements. Graded pass/fail.                                                                   JPN 102 or equivalent.
                                                            JMC 596 Internship in Advertising, Journal-
                                                            ism, Public Relations and Radio-TV (3). Course         JPN 301 Japanese Conversation & Composition
      JMC 501 School Publications (3). Journalistic
                                                            for advanced students in journalism and radio-TV       I (3). Intensive practice in speaking and writing
      problems on the high school and college levels;
      methods of teaching and advising of school            who have completed a minimum of eight weeks            based on a variety of topics and materials.
      and college publications. Required for teacher        as an intern with the media or a public relations or   Prerequisite: JPN 202 or consent of instructor.
      certification.                                        advertising agency. Case studies are prepared by
                                                            the students on their work experience. Prerequisite:   JPN 302 Japanese Conversation & Composition
      JMC 504 Writing the Nonfiction Article (3).           consent of instructor.                                 II (3). Additional intensive practice in speaking and
      A Jesse Stuart workshop writing course, taught                                                               writing based on a variety of topics and materials.
      only in the summer. Preparation, writing, editing     JMC 597 Public Affairs Reporting (3). Project-         Prerequisite: JPN 301 or consent of instructor.
      and marketing the nonfiction article. Individual      based advanced techniques of specialized report-
      critique sessions conducted by a highly published     ing, emphasizing community-based journalism            JPN 310 Conversation and Composition
      journalist. For graduate and undergraduate stu-       and civic journalism. Includes overview of issues      Abroad (3). Intensive practice in speaking and
                                                            concerning multiculturalism, journalistic ethics       writing based on the student’s interaction with
      dents. Prerequisite: permission.
                                                            and legal concerns. Prerequisites: JMC 397 or          native speakers and the international setting.
                                                            466 with a grade of C or better.                       Only taught abroad. No continuation offered.
      JMC 505 Writing for Children (3). A Jesse Stuart
232   workshop writing course, taught only in the sum-
      mer. Analysis of the children’s literature market
                                                                                                                   Prerequisite: Two years of college Japanese or
                                                                                                                   equivalent.
JPN 315 Global Cinema in Japanese (3). A                 JPN 551 Directed Studies (1-3). Course work            lEgAl studiEs
study of Japanese cinema and film industry               designed to meet specific needs and interests on       (lst)
through the examination of significant directors         an individual basis. Prerequisite: junior standing     LST 240 The Legal Environment of Business
and film movements. The course includes a two-           or above.                                              (3). This course involves a presentation of the ba-
hour per week film screening in addition to class                                                               sic principles of law as they apply to business.
meetings. The course is conducted in Japanese.
Prerequisite: JPN 301.                                   liBErAl Arts                                           LST 242 Real Estate Law (3). Comprehensive
                                                         (lBA)                                                  survey of the law of realty as it affects the real
JPN 323 Japanese Culture Civilization (3).               LBA 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed to         estate professional. A study which involves
Survey of the contributions of Japan to world            assist students in their transition to Murray State    historical and recent developments in legislation
culture including the historical development             University. Content includes orientation to the        and court precedent affecting real estate, with
of Japan from pre-historic time up to the Meiji          specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within the      emphasis in license law, real estate commission
Restoration (1868). The class is conducted in            academic program; university procedures, poli-         rules and regulations and professional ethics.
Japanese. Prerequisite: JPN 301 or 331.                  cies, and resources; strategies for personal and       (Same as RES 242.)
                                                         academic success, and extracurricular opportuni-
JPN 324 Contemporary Japanese Culture                    ties. Only one transitions course will count toward    LST 250 Mock Trial (1). A legal studies course
and Civilization (3). A survey of attitudes,             graduation. An introduction to university life in      that teaches basic trial advocacy skills through
achievements and behavioral characteristics of           general and the liberal arts major in particular.      preparation for and participation with the MSU
the Japanese people from the Meiji Restoration           Graded pass/fail.                                      Mock Trial Team in American Mock Trial Asso-
(1868) to the present. The class is conducted in                                                                ciation sanctioned competition. May be repeated
Japanese. Prerequisite: JPN 301 or 331.                  LBA 438 Seminar in Liberal Arts (3). Capstone          for up to four hours credit. Prerequisite: Consent
                                                         course limited to students who are taking a major      of instructor.
JPN 331 Advanced Language Practice (3).                  in Liberal Arts. It is designed to help students who
Course will offer students the opportunity to            are completing their coursework refine writing and     LST 300 Introduction to Legal Research (3).
expand their cultural and linguistic knowledge           thinking skills and to give them an opportunity to     An introduction to primary and secondary sources
of Japanese culture through series of conceptual         think in an interdisciplinary and career-oriented      of law including finding tools; federal and state
frameworks, such as an international conference,         way about the courses they have taken. Prerequi-       court reports and citation forms; legal digests
an apartment building, a hotel, or a business.           site: permission of program coordinator.               and encyclopedias; annotated law reports; legal
Students will engage in extensive “role play”                                                                   periodicals, including periodical indexes; treatises
and creative exercises to establish contexts,            LBA 488 Cooperative Education/Internship               and restatements; federal and state administra-
                                                         (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work       tive law; federal, state, and local court rules;
choose fictive identities, and improvise a series
                                                         experience related to the career and educational       research aids.
of encounters. The class is conducted in Japanese.
                                                         objectives of the student for which he/she may
Prerequisite: JPN 202.
                                                         receive academic credit and possible financial         LST 310 Legal Analysis and Writing (3). A
                                                         remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum            course intended to teach students to think, analyze,
JPN 401 Advanced Japanese I (3). This course             of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded
is the first semester of the fourth-year Japanese                                                               research, and write like law-trained professionals.
                                                         pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of program         Since legal research is involved in solving some
curriculum, which is a continuation of JPN 302           coordinator.
and is designed to further develop the student’s                                                                homework problems, LST 300 provides helpful
four language skills (speaking, listening reading,                                                              preparation for this course.
                                                         LBA 489 Cooperative Education/Internship
and writing) and cultural knowledge. The class is        (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
conducted in Japanese. Prerequisite: JPN 302.                                                                   LST 350 Legal Services for the Elderly (3).
                                                         experience related to the career and educational       An in-depth survey of the major public benefit
                                                         objectives of the student for which he/she may         programs affecting the elderly including Social
JPN 402 Advanced Japanese II (3). This course            receive academic credit and possible financial
is the second semester of the fourth-year Japanese                                                              Security, Supplemental Security Income, Medi-
                                                         remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of
                                                                                                                care and Medicaid. The course also studies the
curriculum, which is designed to further develop         six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:
                                                                                                                law relating to pensions, wills, protective ar-
the student’s four language skills (speaking, listen-    permission of program coordinator.
                                                                                                                rangements and nursing homes and is intended
ing, reading, and writing) and cultural knowledge
                                                                                                                to prepare paralegal students to assist the elderly
through various means including the study of             LBA 499 Internship (3). A meaningful, planned,
                                                                                                                having legal problems in these areas.
authentic materials and classroom activities.            and evaluated work experience related to the
The class is conducted in Japanese. Prerequisite:        career and educational goals of each student.
                                                         Graded pass/fail. Repeatable for a maximum of          LST 370 Law and Literature (3). A course
JPN 401
                                                         six hours total. Prerequisite: permission of the       that explores the intersections between law and
                                                         program coordinator.                                   literature within larger cultural contexts. Prereq-
JPN 421 Topics in Japanese literature (3).
                                                                                                                uisites: CIV 101 and 102, HUM 211 and 212, or
Analysis and discussion of characteristics and
                                                                                                                equivalent. (Same as ENG 370).
representative authors from different historical
periods and genres of Japanese literature. Course        liBrAry oriEntAtion
                                                         (lor)                                                  LST 400 Litigation and Trial Practice (3).
content will vary according to the needs of the
                                                         LOR 101 Library Research for Information               Course that explores pre-trial discovery and
Japanese Program. May be repeated to a maximum
                                                         Literacy (2). A course designed to aid the student     preparation methods, attorney client privilege,
of nine credit hours. The course is conducted in
                                                         in locating, evaluating, and using information         rules of evidence, rules of civil and criminal
Japanese. Prerequisite: JPN 301 or 331.
                                                         and information resources effectively. Includes        procedure, and some trial motions. The course
                                                         an introduction to on-line access to information,      will conclude with a moot court trial wherein
JPN 460 Studies in a Genre (3). The course will                                                                 students will participate as litigating attorneys
explore a particular genre of Japanese literature        familiarization with general reference sources and
                                                         other information materials, and development of        and witnesses. Prerequisite: LST 300.
(e.g., the novel, novella, drama, poetry, short story,
etc.), the theory behind the respective genre, and       research skills for effective use of information
                                                         resources.                                             LST 430 Trusts and Estates (3). Course that ex-
an examination of a variety of works within that                                                                plores the legal requirements of a valid will, living
genre. May be repeated as a second course for up                                                                will, power of attorney, a variety of trusts and other
to six credit hours provided that the second course                                                             estate documents, and the state laws that govern
covers a different genre. The course is conducted                                                               inheritance rights when a person dies without a
in Japanese. Prerequisite: JPN 301 or 331.                                                                      will. Probate court documents required of a state
                                                                                                                administrator and probate court evidence methods
                                                                                                                                                                         233
      will also be studied along with state and federal      remuneration. To be eligible, a student must be a      MAT 115 Mathematics for Middle and Elemen-
      tax consequences. Prerequisite: LST 300.               LST minor with a junior or senior status and an        tary Teachers I (3). Development of the real
                                                             overall GPA of 2.5. In addition, the student must      number system with arithmetic and basic ideas
      LST 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-           have completed LST 240, 300, and 310 with a            of algebra. A course specifically designed for the
      supervised thesis and/or project which allows          GPA of 2.8. Six hours of the LST courses must          needs of future elementary and middle school
      Honors Program students with a senior standing         be completed at MSU. May be repeated for a             teachers. Cannot be used for university studies
      to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper         maximum of six hours from any 488/489 courses.         requirements. Prerequisite: Math ACT score of at
      and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-        Prerequisite: permission of chair.                     least 19 or MAT 100 or one course from University
      mance is required.                                                                                            Studies mathematics electives.
                                                             LST 495 (595) Special Problems (1-3). Super-
      LST 440 (540) Commercial Transactions (3).             vised readings or research in selected subjects        MAT 117 Mathematical Concepts (3). Provides
      A study of business organizations and their com-       designed to supplement regular course offerings.       students with problem-solving skills and literacy
      mercial transactions. Topics include business          To be eligible, a student must be a LST minor          related to the mathematics which is commonly
      organizations and relationships, contracts, the        with senior status and an overall GPA of 3.0. In       encountered in our society. Topics can include
      Uniform Commercial Code, sales, credit, agency,        addition, the student must have completed at least     descriptive statistics, personal finance, voting
      and property. Prerequisite: LST 240.                   12 hours in LST courses including LST 240, 300,        methods, elementary probability, and graph theory.
                                                             and 310 with a GPA of 3.0. At least six hours of       This course is especially appropriate for students
      LST 444 Judicial Process (3). A political sci-         the LST courses must be completed at MSU.              whose degree programs do not otherwise require
      ence course that surveys the nature, functions         Prerequisites: permission of chair.                    a course in mathematics. It is not an adequate
      and sources of law and the role of politics and                                                               preparation for any other mathematics course
      the courts in the administration of justice. (Same     mAthEmAtics                                            except MAT 115 and 215. Prerequisite: ACT math
      as POL 444.)                                                                                                  standard score of at least 19 or MAT 100.
                                                             (mAt)
                                                             MAT 095 Fundamental Mathematics Skills
      LST 445 (545) Constitutional Law I: Develop-                                                                  MAT 130 Technical Math I (5). Topics from
                                                             (1). Course designed to supplement MAT 100
      ments & Trends (3). A political science course                                                                algebra and trigonometry for the technology
                                                             lecture classes with one contact hour per week.
      that surveys the development of and historic                                                                  student. Restriction: A student may not receive
                                                             May NOT be repeated for credit. Credit earned
      trends in selected subjects of constitutional law.     in this course cannot be counted toward gradu-         credit for MAT 130 and 140 or 145 or 150. Pre-
      (Same as POL 545.)                                     ation requirements and cannot be used to fulfill       requisite: ACT math standard score of at least
                                                             general education requirements. Graded pass/fail.      20 or MAT 105.
      LST 446 Criminal Law (3). Sources of criminal          Corequisite: MAT 100.
      law. The Model Penal Code, Rules of Criminal                                                                  MAT 135 Introduction to Probability and Sta-
      Procedure. Constitutional mandates relevant to law     MAT 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed to         tistics (4). Elementary probability, the binomial,
      enforcement investigative procedures.                  assist students in their transition to Murray State    normal, student’s and chi-square distributions,
                                                             University. Content includes orientation to the        random sampling, regression and correlation.
      LST 447 (546) Constitutional Law II: Civil             specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within the      Prerequisite: ACT math standard score of at least
      Liberties and Civil Rights (3). A political            academic program; university procedures, poli-         20 or MAT 105.
      science course that studies the leading court          cies, and resources; strategies for personal and
      decisions and their impact on the development          academic success, and extracurricular opportuni-       MAT 140 College Algebra (4). Course develops
      of American Constitutional Law in the subject          ties. Only one transitions course will count toward    and extends the student’s basic algebra concepts
      areas of civil liberties (Amendment I), civil rights   graduation. Required for all entering freshmen.        and problem-solving skills in the context of func-
      (Amendments IV, V, VI, VIII, and IX) and the           Graded pass/fail. (Fall)                               tions, models, and applications. Topics include
      equal protection and due process clauses of the                                                               exponents and radicals, graphing, setting up and
      Amendment XIV. (Same as POL 546.)                      MAT 100 Developmental Mathematics (3).                 solving equations in linear, quadratic, and other
                                                             The basic operations as they pertain to fractions,     forms, systems of equations, and operations on
      LST 476 (576) Law in Public Administration             decimals, percentages, and pre-algebra including       functions. Properties and applications of linear,
      (3). An examination of the role of law in the          signed numbers and solutions of linear equations.      quadratic, polynomial, rational, exponential, and
      administrative process. Topics to be covered           A developmental and refresher course required for      logarithmic functions are studied. Prerequisite:
      include administrative rulemaking and adjudica-        students with math ACT scores of 18 or below.          ACT math standard score of at least 20 or MAT
      tion, enabling statutes, open records and open         Advanced placement into a higher-level math            105. A student may not receive credit for MAT 140
      meetings laws, procedural due process, and civil       course is possible through Murray State University     and 130 or 150. (MAT 140 in combination with
      liability and immunity for public employees and        Community College math assessment exams.               MAT 145 will substitute for MAT 150.)
      governments. (Same as POL 576.)                        Credit earned in this course cannot be counted
                                                             toward graduation requirements and cannot be           MAT 145 Trigonometry (3). Course is a study of
      LST 488 Cooperative Education/Internship               used to fulfill university studies requirements.       plane trigonometry. Topics include angles, right
      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work       Students with credit in a higher-level math course     triangle trigonometry, trigonometric functions
      experience related to the career and educational       may not schedule this course without instructor        and their graphs, identities, solving trigonomet-
      objectives of the student for which he/she may         permission. Letter-graded course.                      ric equations, and applications of trigonometry.
      receive academic credit and possible financial                                                                Prerequisite: ACT math standard score of at least
      remuneration. To be eligible, a student must be a      MAT 105 Introductory Algebra (4). Algebraic            20 or MAT 105. A student may not receive credit
      LST minor with a junior or senior status and an        expressions, exponents, linear and quadratic equa-     for MAT 145 and MAT 130 or 150. (MAT 145
      overall GPA of 2.5. In addition, the student must      tions, graphing, systems of equations, inequalities,   in combination with MAT 140 will substitute for
      have completed LST 240, 300, and 310 with a GPA        and mathematical modeling. Students who have           MAT 150.)
      of 2.8. Six hours of the LST courses must be com-      received a grade of C or better in any mathematics
      pleted at MSU. May be repeated for a maximum           course numbered MAT 130 or above can not enroll        MAT 150 Algebra and Trigonometry (5).
      of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded          in this course without written permission of the       Course is an intensive study of college algebra
      pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.          departmental chair. Credit earned in this course       and trigonometry. A combination of MAT 140 and
                                                             cannot be counted toward graduation requirements       MAT 145, it is a faster-paced course for students
      LST 489 Cooperative Education/Internship               and cannot be used to fulfill university studies       with some familiarity with the subjects. MAT
      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work       requirements. Required for students with a 19 ACT      150 may be used as a “refresher” course to help
      experience related to the career and educational                                                              prepare students for MAT 250. Prerequisite: ACT
234   objectives of the student for which he/she may
      receive academic credit and possible financial
                                                             and degree requirements which include MAT 130,
                                                             135, 140, 145, or 150. Prerequisite: ACT math          math standard score of at least 22. Restriction: A
                                                                                                                    student who receives credit for MAT 150 may not
                                                             standard score of at least 19 or MAT 100.
receive credit for MAT 130, 140 or 145. (Credit           cannot be received for both MAT 312 and 399.           tory experiences and short-distance field trips are
or the combination of MAT 140 and MAT 145                 The department recommends a student take this          required. Prerequisites: BIO 116 and MAT 250 or
will substitute for MAT 150.)                             course in his/her sophomore year in the program.       consent of instructor. (Same as BIO 460.)
                                                          Prerequisite: MAT 308 or consent of instructor.
MAT 215 Mathematics for Middle and El-                                                                           MAT 488 Cooperative Education/Internship
ementary Teachers II (3). Geometry, measure-              MAT 330 Technical Math III (3). Continuation of        (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
ments, probability and statistics for elementary          MAT 230. Includes differentiation and integration      experience related to the career and educational
and middle school teachers. Cannot be used for            of transcendental functions, series expansions of      objectives of the student for which he/she may
university studies requirements. Prerequisite:            functions, and differential equations. Prerequisite:   receive academic credit and possible financial
Math ACT score of at least 19 or MAT 100 or               MAT 230.                                               remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum
one course from University Studies mathemat-                                                                     of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded
ics electives.                                            MAT 335 Matrix Theory and Linear Algebra               pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.
                                                          (3). The algebra of matrices and its application
MAT 220 Business Calculus (3). An introduc-               to problems in Euclidean spaces and elementary         MAT 489 Cooperative Education/Internship
tion to calculus and its applications for students        linear transformations. Prerequisite: MAT 308.         (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
in various fields of business. Primary emphasis is                                                               experience related to the career and educational
on differential calculus. Prerequisite: MAT 140           MAT 399 Sets, Logic and Functions (3). An              objectives of the student for which he/she may
or math ACT score of at least 23.                         investigation of mathematical reasoning includ-        receive academic credit and possible financial
                                                          ing techniques of mathematical exploration,            remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of
MAT 230 Technical Math II (5). Analytic                   problem-solving and proof. Intended for students       six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:
geometry, differential and integral calculus with         seeking Middle School Certification. Does not          permission of chair.
applications from technical fields. Prerequisite:         count toward a major or minor in mathematics
MAT 130.                                                  and credit cannot be received for both MAT 299         MAT 500 Internship (1). Graded pass/fail.
                                                          and MAT 399. Prerequisite: MAT 250 or consent
MAT 250 Calculus and Analytic Geometry I                  of instructor.                                         MAT 501 Mathematical Modeling I (3). A
(5). First course in calculus develops main ideas                                                                study of mathematical models used in the social,
of differentiation and integration of single-vari-        MAT 411 Ordinary Differential Equations (3).           life and management sciences and their role in
able functions. Topics include limits, continuity,        First-order differential equations, linear equations   explaining and predicting real world phenomena.
techniques of differentiation, graphing techniques,       with constant coefficients, linear and nonlinear       The emphasis is on developing skills of model
definite and indefinite integral, basic integration       systems of equations. Prerequisite: MAT 308.           building. Topics include difference equations,
methods, and applications of the derivative and                                                                  perturbation theory and non-dimensional analysis.
integral to natural and social sciences. Prerequi-        MAT 421 Introductions to Algebraic Structures          Prerequisite: MAT 411.
sites: ACT math standard score of at least 26 or          (3). An elementary study of the major structures
MAT 150 or MAT 140/145.                                   in modern algebra including groups, rings, fields      MAT 502 Mathematical Modeling II (3). A
                                                          and integral domains. Prerequisite: MAT 308            continuation of topics discussed in MAT 501.
MAT 305 Intermediate Geometry (3). Selected               and 312.                                               A term project consisting of a model of a non-
elementary topics in Euclidean geometry. Includes                                                                mathematical problem is required. Prerequisite:
studies in parallelism, similarity, congruence,           MAT 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-           MAT 501.
areas, volumes, elementary transformation, and            supervised thesis and/or project which allows
coordinate geometry. Intended for students seeking        Honors Program students with a senior standing         MAT 505 Abstract Algebra I (3). An in-depth
middle school certification. Prerequisite: MAT
                                                          to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper         study of rings and fields. Topics will include the
115 or 215.
                                                          and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-        Isomorphism Theorems, ideals, polynomial rings,
                                                          mance is required.                                     integral domains, fields, field extensions. Prereq-
MAT 308 Calculus and Analytic Geometry II
                                                                                                                 uisite: MAT 421 or consent of instructor.
(5). A continuation of MAT 250, this course further
                                                          MAT 440 Mathematics Transforms with Ap-
develops techniques and applications of integra-
                                                          plications (3). Integral and discrete transforms,      MAT 508 Introduction to Combinatorics and
tion and is an introduction to sequences and series.
                                                          such as Laplace and Fourier transforms, and the        Graph Theory (3). Selected topics and applica-
Topics include integration strategies, computing
                                                          z-transform. Power series solutions and special        tions from combinatorics and discrete mathemat-
areas and volumes, arc length, parametric curves,
                                                          functions. Prerequisite: MAT 411 or consent            ics, which can include: enumeration, generating
polar coordinates, sequences and series, tests for
                                                          of instructor.                                         functions, recurrence relations, partially ordered
convergence of series, power series, and Taylor
                                                                                                                 sets, Boolean algebras, block designs, coding
series. Prerequisite: MAT 250.
                                                          MAT 442 Introduction to Numerical Analysis             theory, and topics in graph theory, including
                                                          (3). Taylor polynomial approximation, numerical        trees, networks, optimization, and scheduling.
MAT 309 Calculus and Analytic Geometry III
                                                          root finding methods and fixed-point iteration,        Prerequisites: MAT 308 and either MAT 312
(4). Course develops main ideas of differentiation
                                                          polynomial and spline interpolation, numerical         or MAT 335.
and integration of functions of several variables
                                                          differentiation and integration, and direct methods
and introduces vector calculus. Topics include
vectors, analytic geometry of 3-dimensional space,        for the solutions of linear systems. Prerequisite:     MAT 510 Foundations of Geometry (3). Study
functions of several variables, partial derivatives,      MAT 308 or consent of instructor.                      of postulate systems for geometry, critical ex-
directional derivatives, integrals of functions of                                                               amination of Euclid’s Elements, introduction to
two and three variables, vector fields, line integrals,   MAT 450 Introduction to Engineering Statistics         non-Euclidean geometry. Prerequisite: MAT 309
Green’s theorem, and the divergence theorem.              (3). Probability, population and sample distribu-      or consent of instructor.
Prerequisite: MAT 308.                                    tion, sampling, hypothesis testing, regression on
                                                          one variable, and quality control. Prerequisite:       MAT 512 Partial Differential Equations (3).
MAT 312 Mathematical Reasoning (3). Course                MAT 309.                                               Partial differential equations of first and second
designed to improve the students understanding                                                                   order and applications. Prerequisites: MAT 309
of the nature and methods of mathematical proof           MAT 460 Principles of Biomathematics (3). The          and 411.
by means of practice and participation. The con-          study of biological and mathematical models is
tent will include mathematical logic, set theory,         united in this research-based course. A variety of     MAT 515 Theory of Numbers (3). Divisibility,
relations and functions, cardinality, axiomatic           quantitative biological models and their underly-      the Euclidean algorithm, mathematical induc-
structures, techniques of proof, and extensive
practice in proof and problem solving. Credit
                                                          ing mathematics are studied. Students engage in
                                                          research and communicate their results. Labora-
                                                                                                                 tion, prime and composite numbers, Diophantine
                                                                                                                 equation, Pythagorean triplets, Fermat’s Theorem,
                                                                                                                                                                       235
      congruencies, quadratic residues, continued              MAT 535 Linear Algebra (3). Linear transforma-          MAT 565 Applied Statistics I (4). A study of
      fractions. Prerequisite: MAT 308 or consent of           tions, matrices, quadratic and hermitian forms,         applied statistical techniques including cor-
      instructor.                                              eigenvalues and elementary spectral theory.             relation, regression, analysis of variance and
                                                               Prerequisite: MAT 335.                                  non-parametric methods with a view toward
      MAT 516 Introduction to Topology (3). Set                                                                        applications. A statistical computer package
      theory, topology of the real line, topological spaces,   MAT 540 Mathematical Statistics I (4). In-              will be used when appropriate, but no computer
      metric spaces. Prerequisite: MAT 309 and 312.            troduction to probability theory and statistical        background is required. Prerequisite: MAT 560
                                                               inference. Combinatorics, conditional probability       or consent of instructor.
      MAT 520 Introduction to Complex Variables                independence. Discrete and continuous random
      (3). Complex numbers, analytic functions, el-            variables and their distributions. Expected value       MAT 566 Applied Statistics II (3). A continuation
      ementary functions, integration, Cauchy theorem,         and moments of distributions. Estimation theory         of MAT 565. Includes further topics in analysis
      Taylor and Laurent expansions, and applications.         and properties point estimators. Confidence in-         and variance, non-parametrics and multivariate
      Prerequisite: MAT 309.                                   tervals. Basic theory of hypothesis testing. Test-      analysis. Prerequisite: MAT 565.
                                                               ing means and proportion. T-tests. Descriptive
      MAT 522 Vector Calculus (3). Operations                  statistics. Prerequisite: MAT 309 or consent of         MAT 569 Topics in Statistics (3). Selected topics
      with vectors; differentiation and integration of         instructor.                                             in probability and statistics. Prerequisite: consent
      functions of several variables; transformation of                                                                of instructor.
      coordinates; line and surface integrals; Green’s,        MAT 541 Mathematical Statistics II (3). Ad-
      Stokes’s, and the divergence theorems. Prereq-           ditional topics in probability theory and statistical   MAT 570 Linear Programming (3). Theory
      uisite: MAT 309.                                         inference. Bayes’ Theorem, functions of random          and application of linear programming and the
                                                               variables, order statistics. Bayesian inference, F-     role it plays in operations research. Prerequisite:
      MAT 524 Boundary Value Problems (3). Ana-                tests, chi-square tests, contingency tables, regres-
                                                                                                                       MAT 335.
      lytic and computational techniques for linear first      sion and correlation. Prerequisites: MAT 540.
      and second order partial differential equations,
      initial, and boundary value problems. Classifi-          MAT 542 Numerical Analysis (3). Numeri-
                                                               cal solutions of differential equations, iterative      multiculturAl, clAss And
      cation, Fourier series, separation of variables,
                                                               techniques for solving linear systems, discrete         gEndEr studiEs (mcg)
      finite difference and/or finite element methods.
                                                               least-squares methods, orthogonal polynomials,          MCG 201 Introduction to Multicultural, Class,
      Prerequisites: MAT 309, 335 or consent of
                                                               and approximating eigenvalues. Prerequisites:           and Gender Studies (3). This course will provide
      instructor, and 411.
                                                               MAT 411 and either MAT 442 or consent of                students with an interdisciplinary examination
                                                               instructor. Requires knowledge of a scientific          of the issues concerned with multiculturalism,
      MAT 525 Advanced Calculus I (3). A rigorous
                                                               programming language.                                   economic and social class, and gender. Students
      development of one variable calculus including
                                                                                                                       will gain a broad historical perspective of how
      limits, continuity, differentiation, integration
                                                               MAT 545 Boolean Algebra with Applications to            these factors have had an impact on the forma-
      and sequences of functions. Prerequisite: MAT
                                                               Digital Computer Design (3). Boolean algebra            tion of America as a country and as a nation in
      309 and 312.
                                                               is developed as a model to study various physi-         the international context.
      MAT 526 Advanced Calculus II (3). A continua-            cal systems, including the algebra of subsets of
      tion of MAT 525 and functions of several variables.      a set, propositional logic, and switching circuits.     MCG 351 Open Topics in Multicultural, Class,
      Prerequisite: MAT 525.                                   Prerequisite: consent of instructor.                    and Gender Studies (3). Changing topics in the
                                                                                                                       study of multicultural, class and gender issues,
                                                               MAT 550 Teaching Mathematics (3). A study               to be determined by the instructor and approved
      MAT 528 Introduction to Game Theory
                                                               of the “whys” of mathematics with the aim of            by the MCG committee. Can be repeated twice.
      (3). In this introductory course, we investigate
                                                               equipping future/current teachers with the ability      Prerequisite: MCG 201.
      mathematical models of certain conflict and
                                                               to explain rather than merely do mathematics.
      cooperation situations (games), paying attention
                                                               Taught in the context of theories of learning and       MCG 356 The Art of Non-Western Cultures
      to applications in biology, philosophy, political        pedagogy. Involves mathematics content taught at        (3). Study of the arts of Asia, Oceania, Africa
      science, economics, and social psychology. We            the secondary and community college level. Credit       and the Pre-Western Americas. (Same as ART,
      study two-person zero-sum games, two-person              granted toward an undergraduate major or minor          RGS 356.)
      non-zero-sum games, and/or other multi-player            in mathematics only for those students following a
      games. We consider pure and mixed strategy               teacher certification program. Prerequisite: MAT        MCG 412 Directed Study in Multicultural,
      solutions, Nash equilibria, and other aspects of         312 or consent of instructor.                           Class and Gender Studies (3). An independent
      such games. Prerequisites: MAT 250 or consent
                                                                                                                       study course in an area of multicultural, class
      of instructor.                                           MAT 551 Mathematics for Teachers (3).                   and/or gender studies. Students must submit a
                                                               Explorations of mathematical topics from the            study plan, along with the name of the faculty
      MAT 530 Special Topics in Mathematics I                  viewpoint of future/current secondary and com-          member with whom they have arranged to work,
      (1-3). Library investigations of various lengths         munity college teachers of mathematics. Gives           to the MCG committee for approval prior to
      concerning special topics in mathematics. Periodic       credit toward an undergraduate major or minor           registration. Can be repeated twice. Prerequisite:
      conferences will be arranged with the supervising        in mathematics only for those students following
      faculty member on an individual basis. May be                                                                    MCG 201
                                                               a teacher certification program. Can be taken
      repeated for credit. Prerequisites: Six hours of         without MAT 550. Prerequisite: MAT 312 or
      mathematics courses numbered 400 and above                                                                       MCG 499 Senior Project (3). This project may
                                                               consent of instructor.
      with a mathematics GPA of at least 3.0; consent                                                                  take the form of a guided independent study, a
      of instructor.                                                                                                   practicum/internship or a study abroad. The stu-
                                                               MAT 560 Statistical Methods (3). A survey
                                                                                                                       dent will put together a three-person committee
                                                               course in statistical methods for advanced un-
      MAT 531 Special Topics in Mathematics II                                                                         consisting of at least two faculty members, one
                                                               dergraduate students and graduate students with
      (1-3). Library investigations of various lengths                                                                 of whom will act as a chair. A project proposal
                                                               no prior training in statistics. The course covers
      concerning special topics in mathematics. Periodic                                                               must be submitted for pre-approval to the MCG
                                                               techniques commonly used for data analysis
      conferences will be arranged with the supervising        in many scientific fields. Topics included are          committee. Prerequisite: MCG 201 and 12 ad-
      faculty member on an individual basis. May be            probability distributions, sampling, variance,          ditional hours in the MCG minor.
      repeated for credit. Prerequisites: Six hours of         estimation, hypothesis testing, contingency table,

236
      mathematics courses numbered 400 and above               regression and analysis of variance. (Does not ap-
      with a mathematics GPA of at least a 3.0; consent        ply toward any degree in mathematics or a minor
      of instructor.                                           in mathematics.)
mAnAgEmEnt                                            receive academic credit and possible financial         MGT 554 Managing a Diverse Workforce
(mgt)                                                 remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum            (3). This course involves a study of the cultural
MGT 250 Introduction to Management: Tak-              of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded          perspective and processes reflecting individual,
ing the Lead (3). Course that covers planning,        pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.          work group, and organizational diversity in the
organizing, staffing, directing, controlling, deci-                                                          work place. Specific issues this course will include
sion-making, motivating, communicating, and           MGT 489 Cooperative Education/Internship               are: prejudice and stereotypes; group and orga-
leadership. Helpful for the managerial candidate      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work       nizational factors affecting diversity; legal issues
who has not had any formal training in business       experience related to the career and educational       related to diversity; and global, cross-cultural and
management. Credit is not allowed for both MGT        objectives of the student for which he/she may         gender issues. Prerequisite: MGT 350.
250 and 350. Students who declare a business          receive academic credit and possible financial
major or area should consult their advisor on         remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of         MGT 555 Training and Development (3). This
receiving credit for MGT 350.                         six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:      course examines the needs and characteristics of
                                                      permission of chair.                                   adult learners and the role of training and develop-
MGT 350 Fundamentals of Management (3).                                                                      ment as part of human resources in the business
The fundamental concepts, relationships and           MGT 490 Entrepreneurial Consulting (3).                setting. The role of the trainer, the learner, needs
principles of managing organized activities are       Students will develop the tools necessary to           assessment, methodologies, learning objectives,
studied. Special emphasis is given to human be-       provide a meaningful consulting experience to          and measurement and evaluation techniques will
havior in organized systems, with attention to the    an entrepreneurial business. Students in teams of      be explored and practiced. Prerequisite: senior or
diverse workforce, interpersonal relations, group     three or four individuals will work with an assigned   graduate standing.
processes, and the philosophy for managing human      consulting client and provide value by creating
resources effectively. Prerequisite: conditional or   a deliverable for the client. Prerequisites: MGT       MGT 557 International Management (3).
full admission to upper-level business courses or     350, MKT 360 and senior standing.                      Course covers the process of applying manage-
junior standing.
                                                                                                             ment concepts and techniques in a multinational
                                                      MGT 499 Senior Seminar (1). Seminar for                environment and adapting management practices
MGT 354 Techniques of Oral Reporting and              students of the Management and Marketing
Management Briefings (3). Stresses basic                                                                     to different economic, political, and cultural en-
                                                      Department’s programs with a primary focus on          vironments. Prerequisite: MGT 350.
principles of oral reporting with emphasis upon       employment preparation and professional devel-
informational speeches and special techniques         opment. Recommended for students enrolled in
of management briefings. Provides practice in                                                                MGT 559 Compensation Management (3).
                                                      their next-to-last undergraduate semester.
preparation and use of visual aids and the con-                                                              A study of basic considerations for successful
duct of briefings. Prerequisites: junior standing;                                                           wage and salary administration. Areas studied
                                                      MGT 550 Human Resource Management (3).
MGT 350.                                                                                                     include job evaluation, employee evaluation and
                                                      Familiarizes the student with fundamental tools
                                                                                                             systems and plans of compensating employees.
                                                      to effectively manage and motivate a diversified
MGT 358 Entrepreneurial Business Plan Devel-                                                                 Prerequisite: MGT 350.
                                                      workforce. Included in this course is a study
opment (3). This course is devoted to the study of
                                                      and analysis of the programs in human resource
the entrepreneurial process including identifying                                                            MGT 570 Organization Theories (3). A study
                                                      management including job analysis, job evalua-
opportunities, creating value, developing concepts                                                           of the major contemporary theories of organiza-
                                                      tion, selection and placement, testing and training,
and plans, attracting resources, building an or-                                                             tion with emphasis on such modern concepts as
                                                      personnel services, and labor relations, as well as
ganization, and managing growth. Prerequisites:                                                              Management by Objectives and organization
                                                      the current issues of globalization and the chang-
junior standing; ACC 200 and MGT 350.                                                                        design. Prerequisite: MGT 350.
                                                      ing composition of the workforce. Prerequisite:
                                                      MGT 350.
MGT 420 Entrepreneurial Strategic Growth                                                                     MGT 572 Organizational Development (3).
(3). An in-depth study of the managing a grow-                                                               Studies approaches to organizational development,
ing business in a professional manner, while          MGT 551 Organizational Behavior (3). A field
                                                      of study that investigates the impact that individu-   growth and renewal, with special emphasis on the
maintaining the entrepreneurial spirit. Subject                                                              organization’s ability to adapt to its environment.
matter includes measuring economic performance,       als, groups, and structure have on behavior within
                                                      organizations, for the purpose of applying such        Particular attention is paid to the process of planned
obtaining management information for decision
                                                      knowledge toward improving an organization’s           change, the techniques used in organizational de-
making, management control systems, short and
                                                      effectiveness. May not be taken by M.B.A. stu-         velopment, and the role of ethics in organizational
long-term planning, capital funding, and condi-
tion that prevail in similar business environments.   dents. Prerequisite: MGT 350.                          change. May not be taken by M.B.A. students.
Prerequisites: MGT 350 and MKT 360.                                                                          Prerequisite: MGT 350.
                                                      MGT 552 Management of Operations and
MGT 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-          Technology II (3). A continued study of the op-        MGT 575 Labor-Management Relations (3). A
supervised thesis and/or project which allows         erations function of organizations. Topics covered     study of labor-management relations in the United
Honors Program students with a senior standing        include technology management, achieving zero          States with emphasis on the structure and role
to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper        defects, continuous improvement, total produc-         of labor organizations, the collective bargaining
and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-       tive maintenance and world class competition.          functions and processes, and the philosophy and
mance is required.                                    Prerequisite: MGT 443.                                 approaches essential to a successful relationship
                                                                                                             between labor and management institutions.
MGT 443 Management of Operations and                  MGT 553 Human Resource Selection (3). A                Prerequisite: MGT 350.
Technology (3). A study of the concepts and           concentrated investigation of the methods ap-
processes of the operations function with emphasis    propriate to the development, implementation and       MGT 577 Labor Law and Public Policy (3).
on the application of these to the management         administration of the staffing process (attracting,    Traces the development of the principles of labor
of various types of systems. Special attention is     selecting and placing candidates in positions) in      law and labor legislation as well as their admin-
given to the management of technology, quality        contemporary organizations will be conducted.          istration at the national, state and local levels in
and globalization. The student is introduced to       This will involve analyzing organizational envi-       the United States. Uses administrative and court
models commonly used in decision-making.              ronments and identifying the appropriate staffing      decisions and policy analysis to examine issues
Prerequisites: CIS 243 and MGT 350.                   strategies and policies, including an examination      of current significance concerning labor relations.
                                                      of the regulatory environment, cost analysis of        Prerequisite: MGT 350 or consent of instructor.
MGT 488 Cooperative Education/Internship              human resources, and the statistics of personnel       (Same as POL 577.)
(1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work      validation of screening devices, i.e. personnel
experience related to the career and educational
objectives of the student for which he/she may
                                                      testing, interviewing and biographical informa-
                                                      tion. Prerequisite: MGT 350.
                                                                                                             MGT 580 Seminar in Leadership (3). Describes             237
                                                                                                             the nature and meaning of leadership in organi-
      zations, including the importance of effective         MID 373 Laboratory in Teaching Social Stud-              MIL 202 Team Building and Military Doctrine
      leadership, knowledge of various leadership            ies: Middle School (2). A concentrated laboratory        (3). Examines the challenges of leading tactical
      theories, and personal attributes associated with      experience for upper division students seeking           teams in the complex contemporary operating
      effective leaders. The course integrates leadership    middle school certification with a teaching field        environment (COE). The course highlights
      research findings with leadership application and      in social studies. Includes directed and supervised      dimensions of terrain analysis, patrolling, and
      skill development. Prerequisite: MGT 350.              teaching experiences with middle school students         operation orders. Further study of the theoretical
                                                             in area schools. Prerequisites: EDU 303, MID 270,        basis of the Army leadership framework explores
      MGT 590 Strategic Management (3). Course               307 and admission to Teacher Education.                  the dynamics of adaptive leadership in the context
      involves a study of the process of strategy for-                                                                of military operations. Requires attendance at a
      mulation and implementation and the integration        MID 421 Middle School Student Teaching (7-               three-day, off-campus field training exercise and
      of the functional areas of the business into a         14). Student teaching in the middle school should        weekly laboratory. Prerequisite: MIL 201 or
      concerted organizational effort. Case problems         allow the individual to participate in the work and      permission of instructor.
      are used. Should be taken in the student’s last        duties of the school that are generally expected
      semester. May not be taken by M.B.A. students.         of the classroom teacher. Student teachers will be       MIL 210 Leader’s Training Course (LTC) (6).
      Prerequisites: FIN 330, MGT 350, MKT 360,              supervised by a public school teacher as well as         This is the army’s two-year ROTC program entry
      and senior standing.                                   a university coordinator. This will be a 2-7 week        point. Through the LTC, students without ROTC
                                                             assignment with students having experiences              Basic course experience can examine the Army
      MGT 595 Special Problems (3). This course              in both teaching specialization fields. Graded           without incurring an obligation. This course is a
      consists of independent study of some manage-          pass/fail. (Professional Semester.) Prerequisite:        substitute for MIL 101, 102, 201, and 202. Course
      rial problem area. Periodic conferences will be        Admission to Teacher Education and student               will qualify students for advanced course entry.
                                                             teaching. Corequisite: EDU 422.
      arranged with the supervising faculty member                                                                    The Army observes these students and determines
      on an individual basis. Prerequisite: consent                                                                   their officer potential in a leadership oriented,
      of instructor.                                                                                                  challenging, and motivating 5-week training
                                                             militAry sciEncE                                         program at Fort Knox, Kentucky. Graded pass/fail.
                                                             (mil)                                                    Prerequisites: the student must meet academic and
                                                             MIL 100 Physical Conditioning Lab (1). This
      middlE school EducAtion                                                                                         physical standards established by the Army and
                                                             course provides the student an opportunity to
      (mid)                                                                                                           permission of instructor.
                                                             participate and lead a military style physical fitness
      MID 270 Teaching and Learning in the Middle
                                                             program. Training is based on the Army Physical
      Grades (3). A course designed to provide students                                                               MIL 301 Military Leadership and Management
                                                             Fitness Test (APFT) and assists the student in
      in the middle school education with knowledge                                                                   (4). Challenges cadets to study, practice, and evalu-
                                                             developing a fit life-style. May be repeated for a
      and experience critical for instruction of middle                                                               ate adaptive leadership skills as they are presented
                                                             maximum of eight credit hours. Graded pass/fail.
      school students and management of middle school        Open to all students.                                    with challenging scenarios related to squad tactical
      classrooms. Laboratory experiences required.                                                                    operations. Cadets receive systematic and specific
      Prerequisites: EDP 260 and EDU 103.                    MIL 101 Marksmanship and Land Navigation                 feedback on their leadership attributes and actions.
                                                             (2). Course is designed in two parts to give the         Based on such feedback, as well as their own
      MID 307 Middle School Language Arts (3).               student an introduction to U.S. Army weapons and         self-evaluations, cadets continue to develop their
      This course focuses on teaching communication          land navigation. In the weapons phase student will       leadership and critical thinking abilities. Requires
      skills — listening, speaking, reading and writ-        learn the fundamentals of marksmanship and how           attendance at a three-day, off-campus field training
      ing within the subject matter fields — to middle       to effectively employ numerous Army weapons.             exercise and weekly laboratory. Prerequisites: MIL
      school children. Laboratory experiences required.      Students will receive hands-on experience during         210 or permission of instructor.
      Prerequisites: EDU 303, MID 270, and admission         live fire exercises. In the land navigation phase,
      to Teacher Education. Corequisite: EDU 404.            students learn how to effectively use a compass,         MIL 302 Military Leadership and Advanced
                                                             establish a pace count, plot coordinates and read        Tactical Skills (4). Uses increasingly intense
      MID 370 Laboratory in Teaching English Com-            contour lines to identify terrain features all in        situational leadership challenges to build cadet
      munications: Middle School (2). A concentrated         an effort to successfully navigate cross county.         awareness and skills in leading tactical operations
      laboratory experience for upper division students      Military skills taught in the class will be put to       up to platoon level. Cadets review aspects of com-
      seeking middle school certification with a teach-      practical use in an off-campus exercise. Open to         bat, stability, and support operations. They also
      ing field in English and communication. Includes       all students.                                            conduct military briefings and develop proficiency
      directed and supervised teaching experience with                                                                in garrison operation orders. Requires attendance
      middle school students in area schools. Prerequi-      MIL 102 Army Fundamentals (2). Students learn            at a three-day, off-campus field training exercise
      sites: EDU 303, MID 270, 307 and admission to          the basic principles of group dynamics at the level      and weekly laboratory. Prerequisites: MIL 210,
      Teacher Education.                                     of the smallest military unit, the team. Special         301, or permission of the instructor.
                                                             emphasis is placed on Army values and the Warrior
      MID 371 Laboratory in Teaching Mathematics:            Ethos. The student is instructed in the concepts         MIL 333 Military History of the United States
      Middle School (2). A concentrated laboratory           of integrity, ethics, and professionalism and how        (3). This course is designed to give the student a
      experience for upper division students seeking         these concepts promote the military environment.         multifaceted approach to the study of American
      middle school certification with a teaching field      Focus will also be placed upon leadership styles,        military history from colonial times to the present
      in mathematics. Includes directed and supervised       communication techniques, and problem solving.           day. Topics covered include the causes of war,
      teaching experience with middle school students in     Students will demonstrate these during practical         methods of recruitment, military policies, and the
      area schools. Prerequisites: EDU 303, MID 270,         exercises. Open to all students.                         effect of the industrial revolution and technology
      307 and admission to Teacher Education.                                                                         of war. Required for all military science students
                                                             MIL 201 Basic Leadership (3). Explores the               working toward a commission as an army officer.
      MID 372 Laboratory in Teaching Science:                dimensions of creative and innovative tactical           (Same as HIS 333.)
      Middle School (2). A concentrated laboratory           leadership strategies and styles by examining team
      experience for upper division students seeking         dynamics. Cadets practice aspects of personal            MIL 401 Professional Leadership Skills (4).
      middle school certification with a teaching field in   motivation and team building in the context of           Develops cadet proficiency in planning, executing,
      science. Includes directed and supervised teaching     planning, executing, and assessing team exercises        and assessing complex operations, functioning as
      experiences with middle school students in area        and participating in leadership labs. Requires at-       a member of a staff, and providing performance
                                                             tendance at a three day off-campus field training
238   schools. Prerequisites: EDU 303, MID 270, 307
      and admission to Teacher Education.                    exercise and weekly laboratory. Prerequisite: MIL
                                                             102 or permission of instructor.
                                                                                                                      feedback to subordinates. Cadets assess risk,
                                                                                                                      make ethical decisions, and lead fellow ROTC
                                                                                                                      cadets. Lessons on military justice and personnel
processes prepare cadets to make the transition to      of distribution, and legislation affecting market-     purchasing, price/cost analysis, negotiation, legal
Army officers. Requires attendance at a three-day,      ing activity encountered in distributing goods         aspects, and managing material flows. A focus on
off-campus field training exercise and a weekly         and services to markets. Emphasis is on the role       the career opportunities in procurement, materi-
laboratory. Prerequisites: MIL 301, 302, or             of the consumer. Prerequisites: conditional or         als management, and logistics management will
permission of instructor.                               full admission to upper-level business courses         be provided.
                                                        or junior standing.
MIL 402 Role of the Army Officer (4). Explores                                                                 MKT 462 Sales Management (3). A study of
the dynamics of leading in the complex situations       MKT 361 Selling and Sales Management (3).              the managerial aspects of marketing, with special
of current military operations in the contemporary      A thorough study of the elements that contrib-         emphasis upon problems involved in determining
operating environment (COE). Cadets examine             ute to success in the field of selling and sales       markets; planning sales campaigns; selection,
differences in customs and courtesies, military         management. In selling, attention will be given        training and management of sales and service
law, principles of war, and rules of engagement         to researching and understanding the needs of          personnel; and control of sales operations. Pre-
in the face of international terrorism. They also       business and retail customers, developing long-        requisite: MKT 361.
explore aspects of interacting with non-govern-         term relationships with customers, learning and
ment organizations, civilians on the battlefield,       applying the basic steps in the sales presentation,    MKT 463 Consumer Behavior (3). An overall
and host nation support. Requires attendance at a       and negotiating with customers. Related to sales       view of some of the basic perspectives of con-
three-day, off-campus field training exercise and       management, attention will be given to structur-       sumer behavior. An interdisciplinary approach
a weekly laboratory. Prerequisites: MIL 301, 302,       ing and determining the appropriate size of the        will be stressed including the fields of economics,
401, or permission of instructor.                       sales force, recruiting, selecting, motivating,        psychology, sociology and anthropology as they
                                                        compensating, training, evaluating salespeople,        relate to marketing. Emphasis will be placed on
MIL 410 Leader Development and Assessment               and supervising day-to-day sales operations.
                                                                                                               the fundamental processes of motivation, percep-
(6). Course is designed to develop leadership           Prerequisites: MKT 360 and junior standing.
                                                                                                               tion and learning, as well as analysis of individual
through an intensive five-week summer field                                                                    predispositions and group influences in marketing.
course of rotating leader/command roles, practical      MKT 369 Retailing Management (3). A study of
                                                                                                               May not be taken by M.B.A. students. Prerequisite:
experience in problem analysis, decision making         the fundamentals of successful retail store man-
                                                                                                               MKT 360 or consent of instructor.
and troop leading while providing in-depth cover-       agement and merchandising. Some of the topics
age of technical subjects at a military installation.   discussed are store organization, location, layout,
                                                                                                               MKT 469 Retail Merchandising (3). A problem-
Successful completion of this course is required        fixtures and equipment. Aspects of merchandise
                                                                                                               solving course of tools used in buying, pricing,
for a U.S. Army commission and military science         planning and control, buying, sales promotion and
                                                                                                               stock control, sales promotion, and expense
minor. Prior to enrollment, the student must meet       customer services are emphasized. Prerequisites:
                                                                                                               control. Prerequisite: MKT 369.
the physical and academic standards established         junior standing; MKT 360.
by the army. Graded pass/fail. Prerequisites: MIL                                                              MKT 470 Logistics Management (3). A survey
301, 302, or permission of instructor.                  MKT 390 Entrepreneurial Marketing (3).
                                                                                                               of the broad field of physical distribution and
                                                        This course examines the tools and activities
                                                                                                               business logistics. Emphasis is placed on supply
MIL 490 Military Leadership Seminar (1-3).              entrepreneurial businesses can utilize to develop
                                                                                                               chain management (SCM) theories, practice, and
Course is designed to enable the student to pursue      an effective marketing strategy, considering se-
                                                                                                               problems. An integrated systems approach to
independent study in selected areas of military         vere time, budget, and marketing information
                                                                                                               procurement, transportation, inventory control,
science. Requires attendance at a three-day off-        constraints. The course emphasizes understand-
                                                                                                               materials handling/packaging, and warehous-
campus field training exercise. Course is repeat-       ing the important role that marketing plays in
                                                                                                               ing will be stressed. Prerequisite: MKT 360 or
able for up to four hours credit. Prerequisites:        the entrepreneurial process. Prerequisites: junior
                                                                                                               consent of instructor.
permission of instructor.                               standing; MKT 360.
                                                                                                               MKT 475 Marketing Strategies for E-Com-
                                                        MKT 396 International Marketing Seminar (3).
                                                                                                               merce (3). Addresses Internet and other tech-
mArkEting                                               Designed to give participants a high exposure to the
                                                                                                               nology applications in marketing. Concepts
(mkt)                                                   international environment and business practices
                                                                                                               and techniques important for understanding
MKT 260 Introduction to Marketing (3). Course           outside the U.S. The seminar includes an intensive
                                                                                                               electronic marketing and virtual marketplaces
that covers marketing as it relates to contemporary     travel-study program in various European coun-
                                                                                                               are emphasized. As part of the course require-
living and society’s changing needs. Students learn     tries. Prerequisite: junior standing.
                                                                                                               ments, students will apply the concepts and skills
how a marketing manager interacts with diverse                                                                 learned by researching, designing, and building
areas of business as well as basic marketing            MKT 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-
                                                                                                               a virtual storefront. Prerequisites: BPA 355 and
principles. Helpful for the managerial candidate        supervised thesis and/or project which allows
                                                                                                               MKT 360.
who has not had any formal training in marketing.       Honors Program students with a senior standing
Credit is not allowed for both MKT 260 and 360.         to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper
                                                                                                               MKT 485 Business GIS in Marketing (3). Busi-
Students who declare a business major or area           and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-
                                                                                                               ness GIS refers to the specialized application of
should consult their advisor on receiving credit        mance is required.
                                                                                                               geographic information systems (GIS) concepts
for MKT 360.
                                                                                                               and tools to the analysis of business problems.
                                                        MKT 460 Principles of Advertising (3). A study
                                                                                                               As these tools become integrated into corporate
MKT 285 Emerging Technologies in Marketing              of advertising and its uses, media and role in sales
                                                                                                               information systems, managers in all fields must
(3). Course focuses on the new technologies that        promotion. Emphasis is placed on the business
                                                                                                               learn to apply them effectively in business deci-
are currently shaping the world’s economy and           and economic aspects of advertising as it relates
                                                                                                               sion making. In this course, students will develop
markets. It includes practical, hands on instruction    to the distribution of products and the manage-
in these technologies, readings on their potential                                                             these skills by learning the basic operations of
                                                        ment of business firms. Prerequisite: MKT 360
impact, discussion of appropriate strategies for                                                               GIS software and using them to make marketing
                                                        or consent of instructor.
exploiting them and a project which integrates                                                                 decisions. Course activities include readings and
multiple technologies in a business setting.                                                                   completion of modular business GIS projects.
                                                        MKT 461 Principles of Purchasing (3). This
                                                                                                               Prerequisite: MKT 360 or GSC 521 or consent
                                                        course provides in-depth exposure to the ideas
MKT 360 Principles of Marketing (3). An                                                                        of instructor.
                                                        and concepts of purchasing or procurement.
integrated study of the interrelationship of mar-       These areas include: procurement objectives,
keting to the other primary functions of business                                                              MKT 488 Cooperative Education/Internship
                                                        ethical standards, strategies and policies, the
through an analytical survey of problems related
to product planning, pricing, promotion, channels
                                                        basic purchasing process, organizing and staff-
                                                        ing, supplier selection and relations, international
                                                                                                               (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
                                                                                                               experience related to the career and educational       239
      objectives of the student for which he/she may        global economy. Major topics include (1) multi-         MLA 201 Intermediate Modern Language I
      receive academic credit and possible financial        national environmental scanning, (2) marketing          (3). A continuation of MLA 102. Prerequisite:
      remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum           planning and strategy in a global context, (3)          MLA 102 or consent of instructor.
      of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded         tactical international marketing decisions, (4)
      pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.         assessment of international market opportunities,       MLA 202 Intermediate Modern Language II
                                                            and (5) ethical considerations in global marketing.     (3). A continuation of MLA 201. Prerequisite:
      MKT 489 Cooperative Education/Internship              Prerequisite: MKT 360.                                  MLA 201 or consent of instructor.
      (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
      experience related to the career and educational      MKT 569 Promotion Management (3). A study               MLA 205 Western European Culture (3).
      objectives of the student for which he/she may        of various promotional tools including social me-       This course, taught in English, focuses on the
      receive academic credit and possible financial        dia, advertising, personal selling, sales promotion,    contemporary cultural character of Europe. It
      remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of        public relations, and direct marketing. Emphasis        will combine traditional class work with care-
      six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:     is placed on the integrated use of these tools in       fully planned excursions to cultural centers.
      permission of chair.                                  the context of emerging technologies. The degree        To be taught only in the Kentucky Institute for
                                                            of emphasis placed on each tool is determined by        International Studies.
      MKT 490 Survey of Management and Mar-                 the technological environment and the needs of
      keting (3). Designed for students who have an         the class. Prerequisite: MKT 360.                       MLA 210 Intermediate Modern Language Con-
      inadequate background in marketing and manage-                                                                versation (3). A course to develop the vocabulary
      ment. Covers the same material covered in MKT         MKT 595 Special Problems (1-3). This course             and oral communication skills of the student with a
      360 and MGT 350 or the equivalent. Not open to        consists of independent study in some area of mar-      background of one year’s study of the same foreign
                                                            keting. Periodic conferences will be arranged with      language in college or its equivalent. Prerequisite:
      students who have credit for MKT 360 and MGT
                                                            the supervising faculty member on an individual         101 and 102 of the same language.
      350 or the equivalent.
                                                            basis. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
                                                                                                                    MLA 314 Cultural Heritage Abroad (3). This
      MKT 499 Senior Seminar (1). Seminar for
                                                                                                                    course taught in English and taught abroad,
      students of the Managing and Marketing
      Department’s programs with a primary focus on         modErn lAnguAgEs                                        focuses on culture in a particular country or
                                                            (mlA)                                                   region. Entails carefully planned excursions to a
      employment preparation and professional devel-
                                                            MLA 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed             number of specific cultural sites in conjunction
      opment. Recommended for students enrolled in
                                                            to assist students in their transition to Murray        with readings about the sites and the intellectual
      their next-to-last undergraduate semester.                                                                    history and milieu behind their conception. The
                                                            State University. Content includes orientation to
                                                            the specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within       student will explore the history, art, architecture,
      MKT 564 Marketing Channels (3). The methods                                                                   literature, politics, and music of the host country.
      and processes used in the distribution of consumer    the academic program; university procedures,
                                                            policies, and resources; strategies for personal        This will only be taught abroad. The course may
      and industrial products and services. Emphasis is                                                             be repeated for up to six hours credit if the courses
                                                            and academic success, and extracurricular op-
      on the way certain basic distribution functions are                                                           are taken in two different cultures. Prerequisite:
                                                            portunities. Only one transitions course will count
      carried out in an integrated channel system. The                                                              consent of instructor.
                                                            toward graduation. Graded pass/fail.
      role of a variety of manufacturers, wholesalers
      and retailers as parts of this system is analyzed.                                                            MLA 400 Senior Seminar (3). In this course,
                                                            MLA 101 Elementary Modern Language I (3). A
      Prerequisite: MKT 360.                                                                                        students complete a comprehensive departmental
                                                            thorough study of the basic structure and sounds of
                                                            a particular language which is not regularly offered    portfolio, present for evaluation the senior re-
      MKT 565 Marketing Research (3). An intro-                                                                     search project, and explore professional matters
                                                            at Murray State University. Equal emphasis will
      duction to research methods and procedures used       be placed on the four skills of speaking, writing,      relating to the language major including career
      in the marketing process. Areas given emphasis        listening and reading. The languages taught under       opportunities. Students will also evaluate their
      include sources of market data, sampling, surveys,    this title will vary.                                   academic and extracurricular experiences in the
      interpretation of data and the relationship of                                                                Department of Modern Languages and at MSU.
      market research to the policies and functions of      MLA 102 Elementary Modern Language II (3).              Prerequisite: senior standing.
      the business enterprise. Prerequisites: MKT 360       A continuation of MLA 101. Prerequisite: MLA
      and senior standing.                                  101 or equivalent.                                      MLA 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-
                                                                                                                    supervised thesis and/or project which allows
      MKT 566 Marketing Management (3). A prob-             MLA 104 A Cultural Introduction to Lan-                 Honors Program students with a senior standing
      lems course dealing with specialized marketing        guages (3). A general introduction to the origin,       to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper
      strategies for consumers as well as industrial        development, nature, and importance of English,         and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-
      markets, new product development, sales promo-        French, German, and Spanish. A broad study of           mance is required.
      tion, sales organization, and prices and pricing.     the culture of the people and the lands where these
      Attention is given to marketing research as a         languages are spoken.                                   MLA 510 Applied Linguistics for Second Lan-
      determinant of policy. Cases are used extensively                                                             guage Teaching (3). An overview of the basic
      to emphasize analysis and decision-making. Pre-       MLA 105 Introduction to Contemporary Cul-               concepts, scope, and methodology of the science of
      requisites: MKT 360 and senior standing.              ture (3). A survey of the contemporary culture of a     language in its historical and descriptive aspects,
                                                            selected country or geographic region with empha-       including topics and issues in current linguistic
      MKT 567 Marketing Planning and Strategy               sis on values, behavioral characteristics, social and   studies. The primary systems of language, psycho-
      (3). This course is designed to develop a compre-     political systems and achievements of that culture.     linguistics and comparative phonology are treated
      hensive integrated knowledge of the broad field       Conducted in English. No prerequisite.                  in depth. Prerequisite: ENG 310. Junior standing
      of marketing. The course will synthesize material                                                             or above. (Same as ENG/TSL 510.)
      presented in basic marketing; however, the major      MLA 110 Basic Conversational Language (3).
      emphasis will be on systematic analytical problem-    A conversation-oriented introduction to the sound       MLA 514 Methods of Teaching Foreign Lan-
      solving, and the dynamics of decision-making as       system and basic structural patterns of a modern        guages (3). Designed to prepare students for the
      faced by marketing management. Prerequisite:          language. Pronunciation, listening comprehen-           teaching of foreign languages in the public school.
      MKT 360.                                              sion, speaking, reading and writing of material         Current teaching philosophies, techniques and ma-
                                                            related to conversational situations are included.      terials, curriculum innovation and extracurricular
      MKT 568 Global Marketing Management (3).                                                                      activities discussed. Limited observation and per-
240   This is the undergraduate capstone marketing
      course. It covers the practice of marketing in a
                                                            Not applicable toward a major or minor in foreign
                                                            language. No prerequisite. Only taught abroad.          formance in a language classroom. Prerequisite:
                                                                                                                    EDU 303. Junior standing or above.
MLA 520 Computer Assisted Language Learn-              MUS 104 Introduction to Jazz History (3). A             MUS 119 Freshman Voice (1-4). One 25-minute
ing (3). An introduction to computer assisted          survey of the many facets of jazz music. Designed       or one 50-minute individual instruction period per
language learning (CALL), an overview of its           to follow stylistic trends as jazz developed from       week. Credit will be given for as many semesters
specialized vocabulary and a review of research        nineteenth-century African and European influ-          as taken.
regarding its effectiveness. (Same as TSL 520.)        ences to the modern forms of today. The study of
Prerequisite: junior standing or above.                significant composers, compositions, performers         MUS 120 Beginning Classical Guitar Class (1).
                                                       and terminology associated with this uniquely           Instruction for those with limited or no musical
MLA 523 Testing and Evaluation in Second               American musical form through listening assign-         background. Note reading, strumming, and theory
Language Teaching (3). A review of a number            ments, reading and discussion activities.               fundamentals are stressed. Credit will be given for
of current methods for classroom/standardized                                                                  as many semesters as taken.
language testing and evaluation. Prerequisite:
                                                       MUS 105 Introduction to Music History (3).
junior standing or above.
                                                       Understanding and appreciation of music for the         MUS 121 Intermediate Classical Guitar Class
                                                       beginner. Designed to acquaint the student with         (1). Student must be able to read music and have
MLA 533 Language and Culture (3). A study of
                                                       the place music holds in heritage through studying      had previous class or private instruction. Credit
the relationship among language, society and the
individual’s concept of reality. The course exam-      and listening to great musical works; to acquaint       will be given for as many semesters as taken.
ines a variety of anthropological and ethnographic     the student with composers and the influence of
concepts and findings as they relate to language       history on their compositions; and to create the        MUS 122 Band: Community (1). Credit will be
and language learning in its broadest context. The     ability to understand and enjoy music in the world      given for as many semesters as taken.
course will also examine socio- and comparative        around us. A student cannot have credit for both
linguistics, the relationship between culture and      this course and HON 162.                                MUS 123 Introduction to Music Education (3).
language, and the implications for second language                                                             This course is the initial course for all students
teaching. (Same as ENG/TSL 533.) Prerequisite:         MUS 106 Music in Film (3). Course will present a        seeking a degree in music education. It is designed
junior standing or above.                              survey of the history of film music from the silent     to provide students with an introduction to the
                                                       era to the present. Students will develop critical      field of music education. Included are topics
MLA 551 Directed Study in Modern Language              listening, viewing, and analytical skill sin relation   related to learning theories, curriculum, historical
I (1-3). Independent work in areas of language,        to music’s function in film. For the viewing of         and philosophical foundations of music educa-
culture or literature designed to meet the needs and   complete films, extra meetings may be held on           tion, resources for teaching, and twentieth century
interests of individual students. May be repeated      campus. Students will be expected to view current       developments in music education.
up to a maximum of six credit hours. Prerequisite:     release films in a local theater.
two years in college of the same foreign language                                                              MUS 130 Class Voice for Non-Majors (1). A
or the equivalent. Junior standing or above.           MUS 107 Introduction to the American Musi-              class designed to help non-music major students
                                                       cal Theatre (3). Student will explore in-depth          develop effective and healthy vocal techniques
                                                       the development of the American musical theatre         through classical and musical theatre repertoire.
music                                                  through stylistic elements found in the standard        Repeatable with permission of instructor.
(mus)                                                  repertoire. Representative works by individual
Note: Variation in all applied music courses           and collaborative composer and librettist will          MUS 131 Percussion Methods (1). This class is
is related to the degree program of the student.       be studied with special emphasis on innovative          designed to acquaint the music education major
Admission of non-music majors is by permission
                                                       trends, perspectives and genres.                        with percussion instruments and pedagogical
of the chair only.
                                                                                                               techniques through participation.
                                                       MUS 109 Introduction to Music Theory (3).
MUS 098 Recital Attendance and Assembly (0).
                                                       Course for the music consumer with an interest          MUS 132 Woodwind Methods (1). This class is
All music majors are required to complete success-
                                                       in the presentation of the fundamentals of music        designed to acquaint the music education major
fully six semesters of enrollment unless excused
by department chair. Successful completion of          as they affect music performance, music listening       with woodwind instruments and pedagogical
the course is achieved by certified attendance at      and music understanding.                                techniques through participation.
13 approved recitals per semester and no more
than one absence from scheduled assemblies.            MUS 114 Freshman Percussion Instruments                 MUS 133 String Methods (1). This class is de-
Graded pass/fail.                                      (1-4). One 25-minute or one 50-minute individual        signed to acquaint the music education major with
                                                       instruction period per week. Credit will be given       string instruments and pedagogical techniques
MUS 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed to         for as many semesters as taken.                         through participation.
assist students in their transition to Murray State
University. Content includes orientation to the        MUS 115 Freshman Wind Instruments (1-4).                MUS 134 Voice Methods (1). Class designed
specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within the      One 25-minute or one 50-minute individual               to help students develop effective and healthy
academic program; university procedures, policies,     instruction period per week. Credit will be given       vocal techniques through classical and musical
and resources; strategies for personal and academic    for as many semesters as taken.                         theatre repertoire.
success, and extracurricular opportunities. Only
one transitions course will count toward graduation.                                                           MUS 135 Brass Methods (1). This class is
                                                       MUS 116 Freshman Organ (1-4). One 25-minute
The course is designed to provide information for                                                              designed to acquaint the music education major
                                                       or one 50-minute individual instruction period per
the freshman music student about the academic                                                                  with brass instruments and pedagogical techniques
and musical life of the music major. Emphasis will     week. Credit will be given for as many semesters        through participation.
be placed upon university resources and services       as taken.
found on campus. Graded pass/fail.                                                                             MUS 136 Fundamentals of Keyboard Ac-
                                                       MUS 117 Freshman Piano (1-4). One 25-minute             companying (1). Study of the basic principles
MUS 100 Developmental Music Theory (1).                or one 50-minute individual instruction period          of keyboard accompanying. Normally offered
A five-week course providing instruction in            per week. Credit will be given for as many se-          during the spring semester. Credit will be given
reading pitches, simple meters, intervals and key      mesters as taken.                                       for as many semesters as taken.
signatures. All music major or minors must take
this course concurrently with MUS 170 unless a         MUS 118 Freshman Violin, Viola, Cello,                  MUS 150 Instrumental Ensemble (1). Small
score of 70 % or better is achieved on the music       String Bass or Guitar (1-4). One 25-minute or           ensembles concentrating on chamber music lit-
theory diagnostic examination. Credit earned in
                                                                                                                                                                      241
                                                       one 50-minute individual instruction period per         erature. Emphasis will be placed upon developing
this course may not be counted toward graduation       week. Credit will be given for as many semesters        chamber ensemble skills. Credit will be given for
requirements.                                          as taken.                                               as many semesters as taken.
      MUS 151 University Orchestra (1). The                 MUS 163 Choral Union (1). Choral Union is an          MUS 216 Sophomore Organ (1-4). One 25-
      ensemble will study and perform symphonic             ensemble comprised of students and community          minute or one 50-minute individual instruction
      literature from a variety of style periods. Credit    members and is dedicated to the study and per-        period per week. Credit will be given for as many
      will be given for as many semesters as taken.         formance of extended choral works, often with         semesters as taken.
      Membership by audition.                               orchestra. Prior vocal experience is encouraged.
                                                            Credit will be given for as many semesters as         MUS 217 Sophomore Piano (1-4). One 25-
      MUS 152 Marching Band (1). The marching               taken. Membership is open.                            minute or one 50-minute individual instruction
      band prepares field performances for all home                                                               period per week. Credit will be given for as many
      football games as well as selected away games         MUS 164 Opera Workshop (1). Practical ex-             semesters as taken.
      and exhibitions. Credit will be given for as many     perience in a workshop situation of scenes from
      semesters as taken. Membership open.                  opera and/or musical theatre. Credit will be given    MUS 218 Sophomore Violin, Viola, Cello,
                                                            for as many semesters as taken. Membership by         String Bass or Guitar (1-4). One 25-minute or
      MUS 153 Brass Choir (1). Designed to give brass       audition.                                             one 50-minute individual instruction period per
      and percussion players experience in the study and                                                          week. Credit will be given for as many semesters
      performance of large brass ensemble literature.       MUS 170 Theory I (3). The fundamentals of             as taken.
      Credit will be given for as many semesters as         music through part-writing and analysis. Course
      taken. Membership by audition.                        content includes key signatures, scales, intervals,   MUS 219 Sophomore Voice (1-4). One 25-
                                                            triads, and an introduction to figured bass. Taken    minute or one 50-minute individual instruction
      MUS 154 Wind Ensemble (1). The wind ensemble          concurrently with MUS 171 and 172.                    period per week. Credit will be given for as many
      develops an understanding of representative wind                                                            semesters as taken.
      band literature through study and performance.        MUS 171 Aural Skills I (1). This course is to be
      Credit will be given for as many semesters as         taken concurrently with MUS 170 and 172. It offers    MUS 225 English and German Diction for
      taken. Membership by audition.                        a practical application of the materials studied in   Singers (1). A course designed to give voice
                                                            MUS 170 and provides the necessary drill in the       majors rules for pronouncing sung English and
      MUS 155 Jazz Ensemble (1). The jazz ensemble          skills of sight-singing and aural perception.         sung German.
      develops an understanding of representative jazz
      styles and skills through study and performance.      MUS 172 Functional Keyboard I (1). Class              MUS 226 French and Italian Diction for Singers
      Credit will be given for as many semesters as         instruction in elementary level piano technique,      (1). A course designed to give voice majors rules
      taken. Membership by audition.                        functional keyboard skills and keyboard literature    for pronouncing sung French and sung Italian.
                                                            for music majors and minors. This course should
      MUS 156 Jazz Combo (1). Concentration on              be taken concurrently with MUS 170 and 171.           MUS 230 Introduction to the Music Industry
      development of improvisatory techniques through                                                             (3). A survey of the various aspects of the music
      performance and listening skills. Credit will be      MUS 173 Theory II (3). A continuation of              industry with emphasis on professional careers
      given for as many semesters as taken.                 MUS 170 emphasizing inversions of triads, the         in the field. Prerequisites: None
                                                            dominant-seventh chord, non-harmonic tones,
      MUS 157 Symphonic Band (1). The symphonic             and elementary modulations through part-writ-         MUS 240 Introduction to Composition (3).
      band develops an understanding of representative      ing, composition and analysis with and without        The student will compose exercises and small-
      concert band literature through study and perfor-     figured bass. This course should be taken con-        scale pieces that each focus on a particular style,
      mance. Credit will be given for as many semesters     currently with MUS 174 and 175. Prerequisite:         instrumentation, or compositional technique. The
      as taken. Membership open.                            MUS 170.                                              course deals primarily with contemporary art
                                                                                                                  music and the wide variety of musical languages
                                                            MUS 174 Aural Skills II (1). This course offers       and techniques exhibited therein. In most cases the
      MUS 158 Concert Band (1). The Concert Band
                                                            a practical application of the materials studied      student’s creative work will be performed by other
      develops an understanding of musical styles and
                                                            in MUS 173 and provides necessary drill in the        members of the class and discussed as a group.
      skills through study and performance. Repeatable.
                                                            skills of sight-singing and aural perception. This    The course is repeatable for as many semesters
      Prerequisite: Concert band skills on a wind or
                                                            course should be taken concurrently with MUS          as taken. Prerequisites: status as a music major
      percussion instrument.
                                                            173 and 175. Prerequisite: MUS 171.                   and successful completion (C or better) of MUS
                                                                                                                  173 and 174.
      MUS 160 University Chorale (1). University
                                                            MUS 175 Functional Keyboard II (1). A
      Chorale is dedicated to the study and performance
                                                            continuation of MUS 172. This course should           MUS 241 Applied Composition (2). One 50-
      of a wide variety of choral literature from all the
                                                            be taken concurrently with MSU 173 and 174.           minute individual session per week providing
      major stylistic periods and genres. The develop-
                                                            Prerequisite: MUS 172.                                intermediate composition instruction. The student
      ment of basic musical skills and proper vocal
                                                                                                                  will compose one or more original compositions
      function is emphasized. Credit will be given for as
                                                            MUS 200 Public School Music I (2). A course           during the semester with the eventual goal of
      many semesters as taken. Membership is open.
                                                            designed to prepare the classroom teacher to          public performance. Credit will be given for as
                                                            meet the needs of the music program in the self-      many semesters as taken. Prerequisites: MUS
      MUS 161 Concert Choir (1). Concert Choir is
                                                            contained classroom. Fundamentals of music            240 and permission of instructor.
      dedicated to the study and performance of the
                                                            are stressed along with learning to play the song
      masterworks of choral literature from all periods,
                                                            bells, autoharp, recorder and keyboard. Minimum       MUS 242 Composition II (2-3). A continuation
      genres and styles. Credit will be given for as many
                                                            proficiencies are required.                           of MUS 241, this course allows the student to use
      semesters as taken. Membership is by audition.
                                                                                                                  advanced compositional techniques and permits
                                                            MUS 214 Sophomore Percussion Instruments              stylistic freedom. One or more original composi-
      MUS 162 Chamber Singers (1). The Chamber
                                                            (1-4). One 25-minute or one 50-minute individual      tions will be performed during the semester. Credit
      Singers study and perform a wide variety of choral
                                                            instruction period per week. Credit will be given     will be given for as many semesters as taken.
      literature from all periods, genres and styles with
                                                            for as many semesters as taken.                       Prerequisites: MUS 241.
      special attention to that body of work composed
      specifically for small vocal ensembles. Credit
                                                            MUS 215 Sophomore Wind Instruments (1-                MUS 270 Theory III (3). A continuation of
      will be given for as many semesters as taken.
                                                            4). One 25-minute or one 50-minute individual         MUS 173, emphasizing diatonic seventh chords,
      Prerequisite: audition and concurrent enrollment
                                                            instruction period per week. Credit will be given     modulation types, secondary functions and chro-
      in MUS 160/360 or 161/361.
                                                            for as many semesters as taken.                       maticism through composition and analysis. This
242                                                                                                               course should be taken concurrently with MUS
                                                                                                                  271 and 272. Prerequisite: MUS 173.
MUS 271 Aural Skills III (1). This course offers     MUS 313 Introduction to Music Synthesis (1).          MUS 327 Arranging Techniques (2). An explora-
a practical application of the materials studied     This course emphasizes a study of the concepts        tion of the principles of instrumental and choral
in MUS 270 and provides necessary drill in the       and selected applications of computer music in        arranging through study of the instruments and
skills of sight-singing and aural perception. This   a digital music studio. Course content includes       voices involved, with practical application to
course should be taken concurrently with MUS         computer techniques, music sequencing, sound          the varied ensembles found in public schools.
270 and 272. Prerequisite: MUS 174.                  design, sound sampling, and the use of MIDI. One      Prerequisites: MUS 270 and 271.
                                                     or more original compositions using the technol-
MUS 272 Functional Keyboard III (1). Class           ogy will be performed during the semester. Credit     MUS 328 Choral Arranging (1). A study of the
instruction in intermediate level piano technique,   will be given for as many semesters as taken.         common arranging practices/principles observed
functional keyboard skills and keyboard literature   Prerequisites: MUS 170 and 171.                       in choral music. Special attention is placed on
for music majors. This course should be taken                                                              arranging for specific voice configurations com-
concurrently with MSU 270 and 271. Prerequi-         MUS 314 Junior Percussion Instruments (1-             monly observed in public schools. An examination
site: MUS 175.                                       4). One 25-minute or one 50-minute individual         of the copyright law is included. Required for all
                                                     instruction period per week. Credit will be given     music education majors on the comprehensive or
MUS 273 Theory IV (3). A continuation of             for as many semesters as taken.                       vocal tracks. Prerequisites: MUS 273 and 274.
MUS 270, emphasizing the Neapolitan and
augmented-sixth chords, complex modulations          MUS 315 Junior Wind Instruments (1-4). One            MUS 330 Music Business I (3). An overview
and key schemes, extreme chromaticism, and           25-minute or one 50-minute individual instruction     of the diverse processes and resources of the
an introduction to 20th century compositional        period per week. Credit will be given for as many     Music Industry. Students will comprehend
practices through composition and analysis. This     semesters as taken.                                   the complexity and synergy of the artistic and
course should be taken concurrently with MUS                                                               business aspects of the industry. Prerequisites:
274 and 275. Prerequisite: MUS 270.                  MUS 316 Junior Organ (1-4). One 25-minute or          MUS 230
                                                     one 50-minute individual instruction period per
MUS 274 Aural Skills IV (1). This course offers      week. Credit will be given for as many semesters      MUS 331 Music Business II (3). A continuation
a practical application of the materials studied     as taken.                                             of MUS 330, exploring the diverse processes
in MUS 273 and provides necessary drill in the                                                             and resources of the Music Industry. Students
skills of sight-singing and aural perception. This   MUS 317 Junior Piano (1-4). One 25-minute or          will comprehend the complexity and synergy of
course should be taken concurrently with MUS         one 50-minute individual instruction period per       the artistic and business aspects of the industry.
273 and 275. Prerequisite: MUS 271.                  week. Credit will be given for as many semesters      Prerequisites: MUS 330.
                                                     as taken.
MUS 275 Functional Keyboard IV (1). A con-                                                                 MUS 336 Piano as an Ensemble Instrument
tinuation MUS 272. This course should be taken       MUS 318 Junior Violin, Viola, Cello, String           (1). Ensemble playing, piano duo literature, ac-
concurrently with MUS 273 and 274. Prerequisite:     Bass, or Guitar (1-4). One 25-minute or one           companying and chamber music performance.
MUS 272.                                             50-minute individual instruction period per           Credit will be given for as many semesters as
                                                     week. Credit will be given for as many semesters      taken. Prerequisites: MUS 136.
MUS 300 Public School Music II (2). Methods          as taken.
and materials for teaching music in the elementary                                                         MUS 341 Advanced Applied Composition (1-
classroom with an emphasis on integrating music      MUS 319 Junior Voice (1-4). One 25-minute or          3). One 50-minute session per week providing
across the curriculum. Prerequisite: MUS 200.        one 50-minute individual instruction period per       advanced composition instruction. The student
                                                     week. Credit will be given for as many semesters      will compose one or more original compositions
MUS 301 General Music Methods (3). Funda-            as taken.                                             during the semester with the eventual goal of
mentals of music teaching are continued along                                                              public performance. Credit will be given for as
with procedures for selecting materials, teaching                                                          many semesters as taken. Prerequisites: status as
                                                     MUS 320 Vocal Pedagogy for the Music Educa-
musical concepts, and assessing progress in the                                                            a music major, successful completion (C or better)
                                                     tor (2). This course is designed to acquaint the
musical growth and development of the student.                                                             of MUS 241, and permission of instructor.
                                                     vocal music education major with the structure,
Prerequisites: Junior standing, all Theory courses
                                                     function, and development of the vocal mecha-
completed; Vocal Proficiency must be success-                                                              MUS 350 Instrumental Ensemble (1). Small
                                                     nism. Students will learn how to protect and de-
fully completed. Prerequisite: MUS 123.                                                                    ensembles concentrating on chamber music lit-
                                                     velop the vocal instrument in group instructional
                                                                                                           erature. Emphasis will be placed upon developing
                                                     settings. Topics include the physiology of the
MUS 302 Choral Methods (2). Methods, materi-                                                               chamber ensemble skills. Credit will be given for
                                                     singing voice, basics of singing, characteristics
als and pedagogy related to the teaching of choral                                                         as many semesters as taken.
                                                     of voices at various ages, teaching singing in
music in the elementary, junior high/middle school
                                                     the music classroom and in the choral rehearsal,
and senior high school choirs. Students must be of                                                         MUS 351 University Orchestra (1). The
                                                     choosing appropriate repertoire, assessing results,
junior standing. Required for all music education                                                          ensemble will study and perform symphonic
                                                     and developing musical artistry.
majors. Prerequisite: MUS 123 and 134.                                                                     literature from a variety of style periods. Credit
                                                                                                           will be given for as many semesters as taken.
                                                     MUS 321 Choral Repertoire (2). Students will
MUS 303 Instrumental Methods: Elementary                                                                   Membership by audition.
                                                     explore the evolution of choral forms through the
and Middle School (2). Methods, materials and
                                                     major stylistic periods. Special emphasis will be
pedagogy related to the teaching of instrumental                                                           MUS 352 Marching Band (1). The marching
                                                     placed on repertory appropriate for elementary,
music in the elementary and middle schools will                                                            band prepares field performances for all home
                                                     middle and high school choirs. Prerequisite:
be studied. Students must be of junior standing                                                            football games as well as selected away games
                                                     MUS 302.
and completion of instrument techniques courses                                                            and exhibitions. Credit will be given for as many
is recommended. Vocal proficiency must be suc-                                                             semesters as taken. Membership open.
                                                     MUS 323 Basic Conducting (2). Fundamentals
cessfully completed. Prerequisite: MUS 123.
                                                     of instrumental and choral conducting. The
                                                                                                           MUS 353 Brass Choir (1). Designed to give brass
                                                     course will emphasize basic skills and techniques
MUS 304 Advanced Instrumental Methods (2).                                                                 and percussion players experience in the study and
                                                     related to conducting instrumental and choral
Methods, materials, organization, administration                                                           performance of large brass ensemble literature.
                                                     ensembles.
and pedagogy related to the teaching of instru-                                                            Credit will be given for as many semesters as
mental music in the secondary schools. Students                                                            taken. Membership by audition.
                                                     MUS 326 Marching Band Administration (2).
must be of junior standing and completion of
                                                     Fundamentals of organization, arranging, chart-
instrument techniques courses is recommended.
Vocal Proficiency must be successfully completed.
                                                     ing of shows and aspects of public relations and
                                                     program development.
                                                                                                           MUS 354 Wind Ensemble (1). The wind ensemble
                                                                                                           develops an understanding of representative wind     243
Prerequisites: MUS 123 and MUS 303.                                                                        band literature through study and performance.
      Credit will be given for as many semesters as         MUS 381 Music History and Literature I (3).           MUS 423 Instrumental Conducting (2). An in-
      taken. Membership by audition.                        The study of musical styles and literature from the   depth study of instrumental conducting techniques,
                                                            fifth century B.C. through 1750. A survey of the      with emphasis on practical conducting experi-
      MUS 355 Jazz Ensemble (1). The jazz ensemble          musical heritage of western music and cultures        ences using instrumental ensembles. Attention
      develops an understanding of representative jazz      including such topics as early Christian church       will be given to the selection, preparation and
      styles and skills through study and performance.      music, Middle Ages secular song, Renaissance          conducting of literature appropriate to various
      Credit will be given for as many semesters as         vocal and instrumental music and Baroque opera,       public school ensemble levels. Prerequisite: MUS
      taken. Membership by audition.                        keyboard and instrumental music. Prerequisites:       273, 274, 323.
                                                            MUS 270 and 27. For non-majors: successful
      MUS 356 Jazz Combo (1). Concentration on              completion of MUS 105.                                MUS 424 Choral Conducting (2). An in-depth
      development of improvisatory techniques through                                                             study of choral conducting techniques, with em-
      performance and listening skills. Credit will be      MUS 382 Music History and Literature II (3).          phasis on practical conducting experiences using
      given for as many semesters as taken.                 The study of musical styles and literature from       choral ensembles. Attention will be given to the
                                                            1730 through 1900. A survey of the musical heri-      selection, preparation and conducting of literature
      MUS 357 Symphonic Band (1). The symphonic             tage of western music and cultures including such     appropriate to various public school ensemble
      band develops an understanding of representative      topics as the Pre-Classic composers, Classic-Era      levels. Prerequisite: MUS 273, 274, 323.
      concert band literature through study and perfor-     symphonies, chamber music, keyboard and wind
      mance. Credit will be given for as many semesters     concerti, and opera and oratorio through Romantic-    MUS 431 Special Topics: Study Abroad I (3).
      as taken. Membership open.                            Era lieder, symphonies, symphonic poems, opera,       A study of selected musical topics: composers,
                                                            oratorio, chamber music and concerti. Prerequisite:   genres, etc. The course will allow students to
      MUS 358 Concert Band (1). The Concert Band            MUS 381 with a minimum grade of C.                    study topics in a concentrated, in-depth manner.
      develops an understanding of musical styles and                                                             Specific topics will vary. Credit will be given for
      skills through study and performance. Repeatable.     MUS 383 Music History and Literature III              as many semesters as taken.
      Prerequisites: Concert band skills on a wind or       (3). The study of musical styles and literature
      percussion instrument.                                since 1900. A survey of the musical heritage of       MUS 432 Special Topics: Study Abroad II (3).
                                                            western music and cultures including modern           A study of selected musical topics: composers,
      MUS 360 University Chorale (1). University            artistic ideas and styles, music between the two      genres, etc. The course will allow students to
      Chorale is dedicated to the study and performance     world wars, and new concepts and directions in        study topics in a concentrated, in-depth manner.
      of a wide variety of choral literature from all the   live and pre-recorded musical media. Special focus    Specific topics will vary. Credit will be given for
      major stylistic periods and genres. The develop-      will be included on world music from a variety        as many semesters as taken.
      ment of basic musical skills and proper vocal         of non-western cultures. Prerequisite: MUS 381
      function is emphasized. Credit will be given for as   with a minimum grade of C.                            MUS 437 Senior Honors Thesis (3). A faculty-
      many semesters as taken. Membership is open.                                                                supervised thesis and/or project which allows
                                                            MUS 396 Repertoire/Pedagogy (2). A study              Honors Program students with a senior standing
      MUS 361 Concert Choir (1). Concert Choir is           of methods and materials available for teaching       to undertake advanced research. A thesis paper
      dedicated to the study and performance of the         purposes as well as appropriate repertoire and        and/or written review of the exhibit or perfor-
      masterworks of choral literature from all periods,    pedagogical techniques available for various          mance is required.
      genres and styles. Credit will be given for as many   levels of learning.
      semesters as taken. Membership is by audition.                                                              MUS 439 Harpsichord (1). One 25-minute
                                                            MUS 398 Junior Recital (0). Bachelor of Mu-           individual instruction period per week. Credit
                                                            sic in Performance degree candidates of junior
      MUS 362 Chamber Singers (1). The Chamber                                                                    will be given for as many semesters as taken. For
                                                            standing enroll in this course the semester of
      Singers study and perform a wide variety of choral                                                          keyboard studies majors only. Prerequisite: MUS
                                                            their junior recital.
      literature from all periods, genres and styles with                                                         116-316 or 117-317.
      special attention to that body of work composed
                                                            MUS 414 Senior Percussion Instruments (1-
      specifically for small vocal ensembles. Credit                                                              MUS 459 Advanced Music History and
                                                            4). One 25-minute or one 50-minute individual
      will be given for as many semesters as taken.                                                               Literature (3). The student will explore in
                                                            instruction period per week. Credit will be given
      Prerequisite: audition and concurrent enrollment                                                            further depth the development of music in history
                                                            for as many semesters as taken.
      in MUS 160/360 or 161/361.                                                                                  through stylistic elements as found in the standard
                                                                                                                  repertoire. Each of these musical elements will
                                                            MUS 415 Senior Wind Instruments (1-4). One
      MUS 363 Choral Union (1). Choral Union is an                                                                be traced from plainchant through music of the
                                                            25-minute or one 50-minute individual instruction
      ensemble comprised of students and community                                                                20th century, with special emphasis on innovative
                                                            period per week. Credit will be given for as many
      members and is dedicated to the study and per-                                                              trends, perspectives, and genres. Prerequisites:
                                                            semesters as taken.
      formance of extended choral works, often with                                                               MUS 381 and 382 with a minimum grade of C,
      orchestra. Prior vocal experience is encouraged.                                                            or consent of instructor.
                                                            MUS 416 Senior Organ (1-4). One 25-minute or
      Credit will be given for as many semesters as         one 50-minute individual instruction period per
      taken. Membership is open.                                                                                  MUS 488 Cooperative Education/Internship
                                                            week. Credit will be given for as many semesters
                                                            as taken.                                             (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
      MUS 364 Opera Workshop (1-2). Practical                                                                     experience related to the career and educational
      experience in a workshop situation of scenes          MUS 417 Senior Piano (1-4). One 25-minute or          objectives of the student for which he/she may
      from opera and/or musical theatre. Only major         one 50-minute individual instruction period per       receive academic credit and possible financial
      operatic leads may take MUS 364 for two credits       week. Credit will be given for as many semesters      remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum
      with permission of the instructor. Credit will be     as taken.                                             of six hours from any 488/489 courses. Graded
      given for as many semesters as taken. Member-                                                               pass/fail. Prerequisite: permission of chair.
      ship by audition.                                     MUS 418 Senior Violin, Viola, Cello, String Bass
                                                            or Guitar (1-4). One 25-minute or one 50-minute       MUS 489 Cooperative Education/Internship
      MUS 365 Opera Production (2). Practical               individual instruction period per week. Credit will   (1-3). A meaningful, planned, and evaluated work
      experience in costuming, stage management,            be given for as many semesters as taken.              experience related to the career and educational
      construction of scenery, and stage lighting for                                                             objectives of the student for which he/she may
      the lyric stage. Credit will be given for as many     MUS 419 Senior Voice (1-4). One 25-minute or          receive academic credit and possible financial
      semesters as taken.                                                                                         remuneration. May be repeated for a maximum of
244                                                         one 50-minute individual instruction period per
                                                            week. Credit will be given for as many semesters      six hours from any 488/489 courses. Prerequisite:
                                                                                                                  permission of chair.
                                                            as taken.
MUS 490 Senior Seminar (1). A course designed          MUS 515 Applied Music Study—Wind Instru-              bassoon, oboe and English horn reeds; study
to provide an opportunity for students in all three    ments (1-3). One 25-minute or one 50-minute           includes reed construction with observation of
degree programs to meet with the music faculty to      individual instruction period per week. Credit will   characteristics and relationship of the reed to
explore topics of mutual concern; a culminating ex-    be given for as many semesters as taken. Open         tone production and quality. Prerequisite: MUS
perience in which students examine uniquenesses        to junior and senior classification and graduate      132 or equivalent.
and differences of their programs in consideration     students. Prerequisites: completion of 400-level
of trends and concepts in music, the arts and places   of applied study or the equivalent, and permission    MUS 540 Piano Pedagogy (2). Piano teaching
of these in human experience; a forum for verbal       of instructor.                                        including the examination and evaluation of begin-
and non-verbal program assessment.                                                                           ning and intermediate teaching methods, analysis
                                                       MUS 516 Applied Music Study—Organ (1-                 of technical approaches, research into the history
MUS 496 Repertoire/Pedagogy (2). A con-                3). One 25-minute or one 50-minute individual         of piano pedagogy. Observations and supervised
tinuation of MUS 396. Required of B.M. degree          instruction period per week. Credit will be given     practice teaching required. Prerequisite: consent
students. Prerequisite: MUS 396.                       for as many semesters as taken. Open to junior        of the instructor. (On demand)
                                                       and senior classification and graduate students.
MUS 497 Final Project (0). The final project           Prerequisites: completion of 400-level of ap-         MUS 541 Vocal Pedagogy (2). Techniques, prac-
may be a research paper, a musical composition or      plied study or the equivalent, and permission         tices and materials used in the teaching of singing.
other work acceptable to both student and advisory     of instructor.                                        Discussion of psychological and physical devel-
committee. Bachelor of Arts in Music candidates                                                              opmental growth principles applied to individual
in the research track enroll in this course during     MUS 517 Applied Music Study—Piano (1-3)               and group performance. (On demand)
the seventh or eighth semester of study.               One 25-minute or one 50-minute individual
                                                       instruction period per week. Credit will be given     MUS 550 Independent Study in Music (1-3).
MUS 498 Senior Recital (0). Undergraduate              for as many semesters as taken. Open to junior        Independent study for selected students. Topics,
degree candidates enroll in this course during the     and senior classification and graduate students.      methodology and evaluation procedures to be ap-
semester of their senior recital.                      Prerequisites: completion of 400-level of ap-         proved in advance by the instructor. Credit will be
                                                       plied study or the equivalent, and permission         given for as many semesters as taken. Prerequisite:
MUS 499 Concerto Performance (0). Under-               of instructor.                                        consent of department chair.
graduate degree candidates in the Bachelor of
Music in Performance program enroll in this course     MUS 518 Applied Music Study—String Instru-            MUS 593 Workshop in Music for Teachers
the semester of their concerto performance.            ments (1-3) One 25-minute or one 50-minute            (1-3). A variable credit workshop with selected
                                                       individual instruction period per week. Credit will   topics appropriate to music educators. Credit will
MUS 510 Pedagogy of Theory (2). An exami-              be given for as many semesters as taken. Open         be given for as many semesters as taken.
nation of current materials and practices in the       to junior and senior classification and graduate
teaching of theory; discussion and research of the     students. Prerequisites: completion of 400-level
problems of theory teaching with particular em-        of applied study or the equivalent, and permission    nAtionAl studEnt EXchAngE
phasis on application to and place in the secondary    of instructor.                                        (nsE)
school and the junior college. (On demand)                                                                   NSE 300 National Student Exchange (6-15).
                                                       MUS 519 Applied Music Study—Voice (1-3)
MUS 511 Analysis of Contemporary Music                 One 25-minute or one 50-minute individual
(3). Study of the techniques and styles employed       instruction period per week. Credit will be given     nutrition
by composers since 1900. This course provides          for as many semesters as taken. Open to junior        (ntn)
theoretical insight into the compositional proce-      and senior classification and graduate students.      NTN 099 Transitions (1). Course is designed
                                                       Prerequisites: completion of 400-level of ap-         to assist students in their transition to Murray
dures and stylistic tendencies exhibited in recent
                                                                                                             State University. Content includes orientation to
music, and, in many cases, how they connect            plied study or the equivalent, and permission
                                                                                                             the specific area or major(s) and minor(s) within
logically with the music of the past. It emphasizes    of instructor.
                                                                                                             the academic program; university procedures,
learning how to listen to, appreciate, and interpret
                                                                                                             policies, and resources; strategies for personal
contemporary music. Prerequisite: A grade of C         MUS 520 Keyboard Literature and Perfor-
                                                                                                             and academic success, and extracurricular op-
or better in MUS 273 and 274.                          mance Practice (2). Keyboard literature from
                                                                                                             portunities. Only one transitions course will count
                                                       the pre-Baroque era through the 20th century.
                                                                                                             toward graduation. Graded pass/fail. (Same as
MUS 512 Counterpoint (3). Contrapuntal prac-           Stylistic considerations, performance practices,
                                                                                                             CDI/EXS/HEA/REC 099.)
tices from the 16th century to the modern era.         ornamentation, etc., for each period researched and
There will be particular emphasis on contrapuntal      discussed. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
                                                                                                             NTN 220 Food Safety and Sanitation (3). This
writing of the 18th century as exemplified in the      (On demand)
                                                                                                             course will focus on foodservice sanitation and
works of J.S. Bach. Study of species counterpoint,
                                                                                                             safety principles in foodservice and lodging opera-
analysis of representative composition, and writing    MUS 530 Special Topics (3). A study of selected
                                                                                                             tions. Topics include issues impacting consumers
of contrapuntal works. Prerequisites: A grade of       musical topics: composers, genres, etc. The
                                                                                                             and operators, application of Hazard Analysis
C or better in MUS 273 and 274.                        course will allow students to study topics in a
                                                                                                             Critical Control Point (HACCP) and preparation
                                                       concentrated, in-depth manner. Specific topics
                                                                                                             for the national foodservice sanitation certification
MUS 513 Form and Analysis (3). A study in              will vary by semester according to student and        examination. Characteristics of food, supplies,
harmonic analysis and the forms of composition         faculty advisor interests. Credit will be given for   and equipment as related to quality, sanitation,
throughout the history of music. Prerequisites:        as many semesters as taken.                           and safety will also be addressed.
MUS 273 and 274 with a grade of C or better.
                                                       MUS 533 String Techniques (2). Techniques of          NTN 230 Nutrition (3). Principles of nutrition
MUS 514 Applied Music Study—Percussion                 teaching stringed instruments through participa-      related to normal health include ethnic, cultural,
Instruments (1-3). One 25-minute or one 50-            tion. Special reports and discussions on the de-      and socioeconomic factors that determine eating
minute individual instruction period per week.         velopment of string programs in schools required.     patterns; nutrient components of foods and their
Credit will be given for as ma